JP2020163085A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

To provide a game machine capable of fully exerting the function of labels disposed on the game machine to a player during games.SOLUTION: A game machine with display means is provided and warning displays are disposed at positions visible to a player. It is so configured that the warning displays are disposed at positions upper and/or lower than the display means and, while symbols are stopped, a display whose content is substantially the same as the warning display is shown on the display means.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 41

Description

The present invention relates to a game machine.

On gaming machines such as pachinko machines, various marks such as model names, function names, and warning displays are displayed at positions that can be visually recognized from the front side. In the past, these marks were often displayed fixedly near the center of the game machine, for example, in the game area of the game board, but in recent years the size of the game machine body has increased, especially the protrusion to the front side or the upper side. As the amount and the protruding range increase, the position of the mark tends to expand from the vicinity of the center of the game machine to the outside. For example, Patent Document 1 discloses a gaming machine in which a model name is displayed above a frame (front frame).

JP-A-2018-175949

By the way, the player plays the game while seated in front of the game machine, and spends a lot of time during the game paying attention to the image display means arranged in the substantially center of the game area. The farther the position of is from the center of the game machine, the more the mark may not be able to fully exert its function to the player who is playing the game. For example, if a mark consisting of a model name, etc. is placed above the frame (front frame), visibility from a position slightly away from the game machine will be improved, so the self-other product identification function will be more effective. On the other hand, the function as a directing means is greatly limited because it hardly enters the field of view of the player during the game. Also, regarding the mark consisting of warning displays, etc., if it is out of the field of view of the player during the game, of course, even if it is in the field of view, if the consciousness is not directed to it, the player during the game Therefore, the alert function cannot be fully exerted.

The present invention has been made in view of the above circumstances, and it is intended to provide a game machine capable of fully exerting the function of the mark arranged on the game machine even to a player who is playing a game. The purpose.

The above object of the present invention is achieved by the following means.
(1) In a gaming machine provided with display means and in which a "warning (warning) display" is arranged at a position visible to the player, the warning display is arranged above and / or below the display means, and is also arranged. A gaming machine characterized in that a display having substantially the same content as the warning display is displayed on the display means while the symbol is stopped.
(2) In a gaming machine provided with display means and in which a "function name display" is arranged at a position visible to the player, the function name display is arranged in the game area and the function name is arranged on the display means. A gaming machine characterized in that a display indicating that the function pointed to by is effective is performed.

According to the present invention, it is possible to fully exert the function of the mark arranged on the game machine even for the player who is playing the game.

It is a front view which shows the appearance of the game machine which concerns on one Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the structure of a game board and an effect button. It is a block diagram which shows the control device. It is a figure which provides the explanation of the hit type and the game state transition. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device. This is a game flow used to explain the game content (usually, time saving, ST mode). It is a game flow used to explain the game contents (precursor, ceiling, heaven mode). It is a flowchart which shows the main process on the main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process of a main control side. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special figure 1 start opening check process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special symbol variation start processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling function management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the ceiling activation management processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the game state transition preparation process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the processing front part during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the processing rear part during the special symbol confirmation time in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the special electric accessory management process in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the big hit end processing in FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the production control side main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the timer interrupt process on the effect control side. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table selection table for big hit. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table. It is a figure which shows the game state transition table for a ceiling. It is a figure which shows the hit fluctuation pattern distribution table (general, precursor, ceiling, heaven time saving). It is a figure which shows the variation pattern distribution table for ST (for ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST late stage). It is a figure which shows the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table (general, precursor, ceiling, heaven time saving). It is a figure which shows the loss variation pattern distribution table for ST (for ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST final stage). It is a figure which shows the relationship of the game mode type, the internal game state type, the variation pattern distribution designation number, and the game state determination number. It is a figure which shows the effect example in ST mode which concerns on this embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example in ST mode which concerns on the 1st modification of the same embodiment. It is a figure which shows the effect example in ST mode which concerns on the 2nd modification of the same embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the look-ahead notice which concerns on this Embodiment. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the modification of the privilege giving form. It is explanatory drawing which provides the explanation of the modification of the privilege giving form. It is a front view which shows the appearance of the game machine used in another embodiment of this invention. It is a front view which shows the appearance of the game machine which concerns on another Embodiment (model name on a board surface) of this invention. It is a front view which shows the appearance of the game machine which concerns on another Embodiment of this invention (model name in a frame). A front view and a side view of the game machine in FIG. 36B are shown. FIG. 36B is a view showing a case where the player's line of sight is in the standing position and (B) is a view showing the case where the player's line of sight is in the seated position. Is. It is a figure which showed the example which displays the "model name" as the type of the identification information which consists of a mark on a game machine. It is a figure which showed the example which displays the "function name" as the type of the identification information which consists of a mark on a game machine. It is a figure which showed the example which displays "performance display" as the type of identification information which consists of a mark on a game machine. It is a figure which showed the example which displays "warning display" as the type of the identification information which consists of a mark on a game machine. It is a figure which showed the example which displays the "intellectual property right license" as the type of the identification information which consists of a mark on a game machine. It is a figure which showed the example which displays "other display" as the type of the identification information which consists of a mark on a game machine. It is a figure which illustrated the case where "other display" is displayed on the display means. It is a figure which showed the production example in which a movable accessory is movable. It is a figure which showed the example (when the symbol is stopped-the symbol is changing-the symbol is stopped) that "the light emitting mode of a model name logo" changes according to the progress of a game. It is a figure which showed the example (during a big hit) that the "light emitting mode of a model name logo" changes according to the progress of a game. It is a figure which showed the example (waiting for a customer) that the "light emitting mode of a model name logo" changes according to the progress of a game. It is a figure which showed the example which various marks are displayed on the display means according to the progress of a game. It is a figure which showed the example which the font of various marks displayed on a display means is different according to the progress of a game. It is a figure which showed the example which displays various marks on the display means according to the jackpot expectation degree. It is a figure which showed the example which displays various marks on the display means according to the degree of advantage of a player. It is a figure which showed the example which the amount of information of various marks displayed on a display means differs depending on the display timing. It is a figure which showed an example of the embodiment (separate embodiment 5) which devises the "arrangement" of the component element of the identification information other than the liquid crystal display screen. It is a figure which showed the other example of the embodiment (separate embodiment 5) which devises the "arrangement" of the component element of the identification information other than the liquid crystal display screen. It is a figure which illustrated the embodiment (separate embodiment 6) which devises the "lighting method" of the identification information arranged other than the liquid crystal display screen. A part (a) to (c) of the examples of the above embodiments 5 and 6 is shown in a list format. The remaining parts (d) to (g) of the examples of the above embodiments 5 and 6 are shown in a list format. It is a figure which showed the other example of the embodiment (separate embodiment 6) which devises the "lighting method" of the component element of the identification information other than the liquid crystal display screen. It is the figure which showed the embodiment (a) enlarged. It is a figure which showed the Example (b) in an enlarged manner. It is a figure which showed the embodiment (c) in an enlarged manner. It is a figure which showed the Example (d) in an enlarged manner. It is a figure which showed the Example (e) in an enlarged manner. It is a figure which showed the Example (f) in an enlarged manner. It is a figure which showed the Example (g) in an enlarged manner. It is a figure which showed an example of the embodiment (separate embodiment 7) which makes specific identification information conspicuous arranged other than the liquid crystal display screen. It is a figure which showed the other example of the embodiment (separate embodiment 7) which makes the specific identification information conspicuous arranged other than the liquid crystal display screen. It is a figure which illustrated the embodiment (separate embodiment 8) in which the non-specific identification information is not conspicuous. As an embodiment of the other embodiments 7 and 8, it is a figure which listed the relationship with the arrangement place of the 2nd identification information in the case where the 1st identification information is arranged in the "front frame" (the 1st embodiment). .. FIG. 6 is an enlarged view showing the case (a) in which the second identification information is arranged in the “front frame” in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 67. FIG. 6 is an enlarged view showing the case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged on the “game board surface” in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 67. FIG. 6 is an enlarged view showing the case (c) in which the second identification information is arranged in the “liquid crystal display device” in the first embodiment shown in FIG. 67. As an embodiment of the other embodiments 7 and 8, it is a figure which listed the relationship with the arrangement place of the 2nd identification information in the case where the 1st identification information is arranged on the "game board surface" (the 2nd embodiment). .. In the second embodiment shown in FIG. 71, it is an enlarged view showing the case (a) in which the second identification information is arranged in the “front frame”. In the second embodiment shown in FIG. 71, it is an enlarged view showing the case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged on the “game board surface”. In the second embodiment shown in FIG. 71, it is an enlarged view showing the case (c) in which the second identification information is arranged in the “liquid crystal display device”. As an embodiment of the other embodiments 7 and 8, in the case where the first identification information is arranged in the "liquid crystal display device" (Example 3), the relationship with the arrangement place of the second identification information is displayed in a list. is there. In the third embodiment shown in FIG. 75, the case (a) in which the second identification information is arranged in the “front frame” is enlarged and shown. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the case (b) in which the second identification information is arranged on the “game board surface” in the third embodiment shown in FIG. 75. FIG. 5 is an enlarged view showing the case (c) in which the second identification information is arranged in the “liquid crystal display device” in the third embodiment shown in FIG. 75. It is a figure which illustrated the font which can be used for identification information. It is a figure exemplifying the embodiment which gave the setting machine information to a game machine. It is a figure which illustrated the setting machine mark. It is a figure which shows the production example (during symbol change-demo screen display) of setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the production example (the production example during reach) of the setting suggestion effect. It is a figure which shows the production example of the setting suggestion effect (during big hit-start of symbol variation). It is a figure which shows the game board which concerns on another embodiment. It is a figure which shows the production example (role) of the setting suggestion effect by LED. It is a figure which shows the production example (surrounding LED) of the setting suggestion effect by LED. It is a figure which shows the production example of the setting suggestion effect by the united type accessory. It is a figure which shows the production example of the setting suggestion effect by the separation type accessory. It is a figure which shows the production example of the setting suggestion effect using the operation means.

Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the gaming machine according to the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. In the embodiment described below, a pachinko gaming machine will be described as an example of the gaming machine according to the present invention.

<1. Outline of configuration: Fig. 1 and Fig. 2>
An outline of the configuration of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 and 2. FIG. 1 is a front perspective view showing the appearance of the pachinko gaming machine according to the embodiment of the present invention, and FIG. 2 is a view showing the front side of the gaming board.

In the pachinko gaming machine 1 shown in FIG. 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as “game machine 1”), a frame-shaped front frame 2 is attached to the front surface of a wooden outer frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and a game attached to the back surface of the front frame 2. The game board 3 (see FIG. 2) is mounted in a board storage frame (not shown), and the game area 3a formed on the surface of the game board 3 faces the opening of the front frame 2. A glass door 6 that supports transparent glass is provided on the front side of the game area 3a. Further, on the back side of the game board 3, various control boards (see FIG. 3) for controlling the game operation are arranged.

A key cylinder (not shown) for unlocking the door is provided on the front side of the glass door 6, and if a key is inserted into this key cylinder and operated on one side, the locked state of the glass door 6 with respect to the front frame 2 can be obtained. By operating the other side, the locked state of the front frame 2 with respect to the outer frame 4 can be released and the front frame 2 can be opened to the front side.

Below the glass door 6, a front operation panel 7 that is pivotally supported by a hinge (not shown) on the front frame 2 is arranged. The front operation panel 7 is provided with an upper saucer unit 8, and the upper saucer unit 8 is formed with an upper saucer 9 for storing the discharged game balls.

Further, the upper saucer unit 8 has a ball removal button 14 for pulling out the game balls stored in the upper saucer 9 below the game machine 1, and a game ball lending device (not shown) on the island facility side. A ball lending button 11 for requesting the payout of the ball and a card return button 12 for requesting the return of the valuable medium inserted in the game ball lending device are provided.

Further, the upper tray unit 8 is composed of a push button type effect button 13 (first operating means), a button 75a pointing upward, a right button 75b, a lower button 75c, and a left button 75d, and is composed of up, down, left, and right. A cross-shaped direction key 75 (second operating means) that can be input and operated in a direction is provided. The effect button 13 and the direction key 75 function as an operation means that can be operated by the player, and a predetermined operation valid reception period (button valid period) in a specific advance notice effect (for example, "player participation type effect" described later). ), The reception of operation input is activated, and if a predetermined operation (for example, one press, long press, repeated hits, etc.) is performed during this valid period, the production may change before and after the operation. It is possible. In addition, these operation means allow the player to set his / her favorite game on the "game setting screen" related to the waiting for customers (during the "demo start waiting effect" or "customer waiting effect (demo display)" described later). It is also used when doing. The game setting screen is, for example, a menu screen on which the player can set a game such as a desired volume and light intensity. A built-in lamp (button LED 13b) is provided inside the effect button 13, and the operation reception valid period (for example, lighting or blinking in a predetermined color) and operation are performed depending on the difference in the light emitting mode of the button LED 13b. It is possible to notify the reception invalid period (for example, when the light is off).

Further, a launch operation handle 15 for operating the launch device 32 (see FIG. 3) is provided on the right end side of the front operation panel 7. As the launching device 32, a device having a launching performance of about 100 shots per minute is adopted.

Further, speakers 46 that exert a sound effect (sound effect) by sound are provided on both sides of the upper part of the front frame 2 and on the upper side of the firing operation handle 15. Further, in a suitable place of the game machine, for example, a decorative lamp 45 (for directing) that exerts a light effect by decorating light inside a decorative member around the front frame of the glass door 6 and a center decorative body 48 (see FIG. 2). A plurality of LEDs) are provided.

(Game board: Fig. 2)
Next, the configuration of the game board 3 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in the figure, a ball guide rail 5 for guiding the launched game ball is annularly mounted on the game board 3 as a board surface partition member, and a substantially circular region surrounded by the ball guide rail 5 is formed on the game board 3. The game area 3a and the four corners are non-game areas.

A liquid crystal display (LCD) 36 is provided in a substantially central portion of the game area 3a. Under the control of the effect control unit 24, which will be described later, the liquid crystal display device 36 independently has a plurality of types of decorative symbols (for example, a left symbol) in a predetermined display area (symbol variation display area), such as numbers, characters, and symbols. Various effects including the variable display operation (variable display and stop display) of the three decorative symbols (see FIG. 5) of the middle symbol and the right symbol are displayed by images.

Further, in the game area 3a, a center decorative body 48 is provided so as to surround the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 in a long-winding manner. The center decorative body 48 is provided along the front side of the game board 3, forms a front mounting plate 48a fixed to the game board 3 and an outer periphery of the center decorative body 48, and surrounds the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 36. The armor frame portion 48b is integrally provided to protect the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 36 from the surrounding game balls, and the flow path of the game balls is distributed to the left and right depending on the launch strength or stroke length of the game balls. It works as a flow path distribution means that enables this. In the present embodiment, a floating region through which the game ball can pass is formed between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5, and the game ball driven into the upper side of the game area 3a by the launching device 32. Is distributed to the left and right on the upper side of the armor frame portion 48b, and flows down either the left flow path 3b on the left side of the center ornament 48 or the right flow path 3c on the right side.

In addition, the non-game area near the upper right edge (upper right corner) of the game board 3 is a various function display unit, and the 7-segment display (with dots) is on the upper start port 34 (for the first special symbol) and on the lower side. Special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) and special symbol display device 38b (first special symbol display device: first special symbol display means) configured side by side corresponding to the starting port 35 (for the second special symbol). A second special symbol display device: a second special symbol display means) is provided. In the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, a "special symbol variation display game" is executed by the variation display operation (variation display and stop display) of the "special symbol" represented by the 7-segment display. Then, in the liquid crystal display device 36 described above, the decorative symbol by the image is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and various notice effects (effect images) are displayed. At the same time, a'decorative pattern variable display game'is being executed. The details of the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game will be described later.

Further, in the various function display units, a composite display device (LED display for holding composite display) 38c composed of a 7-segment display (with dots) is arranged next to the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b. The compound is called the display of the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol 1, the display of the number of operation-holding balls of the special symbol 2, the display of the number of operation-holding balls of the normal symbol, the fluctuation time shortening function in operation (during time reduction) and This is because it is a hold / time saving / high-accuracy composite display device (hereinafter, simply referred to as "composite display device") having five display functions of state notification during a high-probability state (high-probability).

Further, the various function display units are provided with a normal symbol display device 39a (normal symbol display means) in which a plurality of (two in this embodiment) LEDs are arranged next to the composite display device 38c. In the ordinary symbol display device 39a according to the present embodiment, the ordinary symbol variation display game is executed by the variation display operation of the ordinary symbol represented by the two LEDs. For example, as a variable display operation, the normal symbol on the LED repeatedly turns on and off in a seesaw manner, and stops with either side lit, so that the success or failure of the normal symbol fluctuation display game can be determined. There is.

Further, a right-handed display device 39b is provided adjacent to the normal symbol display device 39a. The right-handed display device 39b is advantageous for "right-handed" in which the game ball aims to pass (flow) through the right flow path 3c by the combination of the LED lighting and extinguishing states, or the game ball is on the left. Notifies whether "left-handed" aiming to pass (flow) through the flow path 3b is advantageous. For example, if the light emitting state of the LED is in the lit state, it is advantageous to hit right, and if it is off, it is advantageous to hit left.

Further, a round number display device 39c is provided in which two LEDs (round display LEDs) are arranged adjacent to the right-handed display device 39b. The round number display device 39c notifies the specified number of rounds (maximum number of rounds) related to the jackpot by combining the lighting / extinguishing states of the plurality of LEDs.

Below the center decoration body 48, an upper starting port 34 (first special symbol starting port: first starting means) and a lower starting port 35 (second special symbol starting port: second starting means) are provided. A normal variable winning device 41 is provided above and below, and detection sensors 34a and 35a (upper start port sensor 34a, lower start port sensor 35a: see FIG. 3) are formed inside each of the devices to detect the passage of a game ball. Has been done.

The upper starting port 34, which is the first special symbol starting port, is the first special symbol in the special symbol display device 38a (first special symbol display device) (hereinafter, the first special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 1". It is a winning opening related to the starting conditions of the variable display operation (referred to as "Special Figure 1" in some cases), and is a "fixed winning rate type" that does not have a "starting opening opening / closing means" that allows the starting opening to be opened or expanded. It is configured as a "winning device". In the present embodiment, due to the action of the game ball falling direction changing member (for example, a game nail (not shown), a windmill 44, a center decoration body 48, etc.) in the game area 3a, a left flow path to the upper start port 34 The game ball that has flowed down 3b has a structure that makes it easy to enter (win), whereas the game ball that has flowed down the right flow path 3c has a structure that makes it difficult or impossible to enter.

The ordinary variable winning device 41 is configured as a "winning rate variable winning device" in which the winning rate of the game ball at the starting port can be changed by the starting port opening / closing means. In the present embodiment, a pair of left and right movable wing pieces (movable members) 47 are provided as a starting port opening / closing means, and the movable wing pieces 47 perform an opening / closing operation to open and close the lower starting port 35, which is a second special symbol starting port. Can be opened or expanded.

Further, the lower starting port 35 of the normal variable winning device 41 is referred to as a second special symbol (hereinafter, the second special symbol is referred to as "special symbol 2") in the special symbol display device 38b (second special symbol display device). , In some cases, abbreviated as "Special Figure 2"), which is a winning opening related to the starting condition of the variable display operation, and the winning area of the lower starting opening 35 depends on the operating state (operated or non-operating) of the movable wing piece 47. It is converted into an open state that facilitates winning (easy winning state) and a closed state that makes it more difficult to win or makes it impossible to win than the open state (difficult to win). In the present embodiment, when the movable wing piece 47 is inactive, it holds a closed state (a winning impossible state) in which the lower starting port 35 cannot be won.

Further, on both sides of the normal variable winning device 41, four general winning openings 43 (43a to 43d) are arranged on the left side and one (43e) on the right side, for a total of five, and a game is provided inside each of them. A general winning opening sensor 43h (corresponding to each of the general winning openings 43a to 43e) for detecting the passage of the ball is formed.

Further, an ordinary symbol starting port 37 (third starting means) composed of a passing gate through which a game ball can pass is provided diagonally upward to the right of the ordinary variable winning device 41, that is, above the middle portion of the right flow path 3c. Has been done. The normal symbol start port 37 is a winning opening related to the fluctuation display operation of the normal symbol in the normal symbol display device 39a, and inside the normal symbol start port sensor 37a (see FIG. 3), which detects a passing game ball. Is formed. In the present embodiment, the normal symbol start port 37 is formed only on the right flow path 3c side and not on the left flow path 3b side, but the present invention is not limited to this, and both flow paths may be formed. ..

In the middle of the route from the normal symbol start port 37 in the right flow path 3c to the normal variable winning device 41, the large winning opening 50 can be opened or expanded by the retractable open door 52b. A device 52 (special electric accessory) is provided, and a large winning opening sensor 52a (see FIG. 3) for detecting a game ball that has entered the large winning opening 50 is formed inside the device 52 (special electric accessory).

The circumference of the large winning opening 50 is a bulging portion (decorative member) 55 bulging from the surface of the game board 3, and the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55 forms a downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c. There is. If the large winning opening 50 is closed by the open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the downstream guide portion of the right flow path 3c (by forming a surface continuous with the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55). It is designed to form a part of the upper side 55a). Further, in the downstream area of the right flow path 3c, in the area above the upper side 55a of the bulging portion 55, to be exact, in the game area above the large winning opening 50, the flow path correction plate is substantially parallel to the flow direction of the game ball. The 51d is projected so as to move the flowing game ball toward the large winning opening 50.

The process of entering the game ball into the grand prize opening 50 is as follows. The game ball that has passed through the floating area between the upper surface of the center decorative body 48 and the ball guide rail 5 is on the top surface (upper side) 55a of the bulging portion 55 that protrudes from the game board 3 and functions as a guide for the game ball. It flows down along. Then, the game ball comes into contact with the right end of the flow path correction plate 51d protruding from the three surfaces of the game board, whereby the flow direction of the game ball is corrected to the direction (downward direction) of the large winning opening 50. At this time, if the large winning opening 50 is covered by the retractable open door 52b (the large winning opening is closed), the game ball rolls on this, and a gauge configuration (not shown) is further formed. (Arrangement of game nails) guides the player in the direction of the tulip-type normal variable winning device 41 (lower starting port 35). At this time, if the lower start opening 35 is in a winning state (starting opening open state), the game ball can win in the lower starting opening 35, but the open door 52b is retracted into the game board surface and the large winning opening 50 If is open (the big winning opening is open), the game ball is guided into the big winning opening 50. In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the player aims at the launch position on the special variable winning device 52 side (when the game ball is aimed so as to pass through the right flow path 3c), the upper start is performed. The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided to the mouth 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win a prize in each of the starting ports 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates.

When the above-mentioned winning means belongs to either the left or right flow path, that is, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b or the right flow path 3c can win a prize, the winning means belonging to the left flow path 3b There are an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and general winning ports 43a to 43d on the left side, and the winning means belonging to the right flow flow path 3c include an upper starting port 34, a lower starting port 35, and a normal symbol starting port. There are 37, a large winning opening 50, and a general winning opening 43e on the right side. If the movable wing piece 47 is open (starting port is open), the lower starting port 35 belongs to both the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c, and a prize is awarded from either the left or right flow path. It is possible. However, since the operating condition of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35 is the passage (winning) of the game ball through the normal symbol starting port 37 located on the right side of the game area 3a, the movable wing piece 47 is substantially right-flowing. It can be said that it belongs only to the route 3c. Further, the large winning opening 50 belongs only to the right flow path 3c, and only the game ball from the right flow path 3c can win a prize.

(Right-handed advantageous configuration under specific conditions)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball is "right-handed" aiming to pass through the right flow path 3c, the game ball is likely to win a prize in the normal symbol start port 37, but the upper start port. The game ball is difficult to be guided or is not guided to the 34 side. Therefore, in the "large winning opening closed state", it is difficult or impossible to win each of the starting openings 34 and 35 unless the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates. However, when the "electric support state (electric support state)" described later occurs, the movable wing piece 47 operates in an opening / closing pattern that is at least more advantageous than the normal state (normal game state). Therefore, the game ball passes through the left flow path 3b instead of the "right-handed" aiming at the game ball passing through the right flow path 3c under non-electric support (without electric support described later). On the other hand, under the electric support state, "right-handed" is more advantageous than "left-handed". That is, depending on the game state, the game progress acts favorably or disadvantageously for the player depending on which of the left flow path 3b and the right flow path 3c the game ball flows down, and is either "left-handed" or "right". Which of the "hit" methods is advantageous for the player (the progress of the game is advantageous for the player) changes according to the game state, and is accompanied by a non-electric support state (for example). , "Left-handed" is advantageous in the normal state or latent state), and "Right-handed" is advantageous in the gaming state (for example, time saving state or probable change state) accompanied by the electric support state.

Each of the above-mentioned upper start opening 34, lower start opening 35, normal symbol start opening 37, large winning opening 50, or general winning opening 43a to 43e functions as a winning means arranged in the game area 3a. Further, detection of an upper start opening sensor 34a, a lower start opening sensor 35a, a normal symbol start opening sensor 37a, a large winning opening sensor 52a, or a general winning opening sensor 43h (corresponding to each of the general winning opening 43a to 43e). The switch (winning detection switch) functions as a winning detection means for detecting a game ball that has entered the winning means. The number, shape, formation position, and the like of each of the above-mentioned winning means can be appropriately changed according to the playability. Further, for each winning means, whether the game ball flowing down the left flow path 3b and / or the right flow path 3c is difficult to win, cannot be won, or can be won is appropriately changed according to the playability. be able to.

When a game ball is won in each winning opening, the number of prize balls per winning ball promised for each winning opening is paid out from the game ball payout device 19 (see FIG. 5). For example, the upper start opening 34 is 3, the lower start opening 35 is 1, the normal symbol start opening 37 is 0 (without a prize ball), the large winning opening 50 is 15, and the general winning openings 43a to e are 3 pieces. Will be paid out. The game balls that do not win in each of the above winning openings are discharged from the game area 3a through the out opening 49. Here, the "winning" is not a structure in which the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, or the winning opening takes in the game ball inside, but a winning opening consisting of a passing gate (for example, a normal symbol start opening 37). ), It means that the game ball passes through the gate, and when the game ball is actually detected by each winning detection switch formed for each winning opening, "winning" is made in the winning opening. Is treated as if it occurred. The game ball related to this winning is also referred to as a "winning ball".

<Movable body accessory>
Further, in the game area 3a, a plurality of movable body accessories are arranged at positions that do not interfere with the flow of the game ball. In the present embodiment, the first movable body accessory 80 is arranged on the upper right side of the center decorative body 48, and the second movable body accessory 90 is arranged on the diagonally lower right side thereof. The first movable body accessory 80 includes a clock board portion 81 composed of a number display unit in which the numbers from the Roman numerals "I" to "XII" are assigned and divided into 12 number sectors, and the clock face unit 81. It has a clock hand 82 composed of a minute hand and a minute hand formed so as to be rotatable, and forms a "wall clock portion" as a whole. In this sense, the first movable body accessory 80 is also referred to as a "clock-type accessory". The clock face portion 81 has a full-color LED on the back side or inside for each sector division location indicated by the short hand, or the number sector itself is composed of the full-color LED, and each number sector is independently and independently of a different color. It has a structure that can emit light.

Further, in the second movable body accessory 90, a corolla composed of a plurality of petals is arranged around the flower center, and a calyx is further arranged around the outer side of the corolla to double the flower cover, thereby forming a flower shape. The flower-shaped portion 91 (first movable body 91) is attached to the tip of the arm 92 (second movable body 92) capable of swinging, and is configured as a flower-shaped accessory 90 as a whole. The flower-shaped portion 91 has a plurality of petals that can rotate around the center of the flower. The flower-shaped accessory 90 is normally stationary at an original position (shown by a solid line in FIG. 2) defined on the edge inside the liquid crystal screen or on the side outside the liquid crystal screen, and when a predetermined operating condition is satisfied, the arm 92 Tilts and moves together with the arm 92 to a position where the flower-shaped portion 91 covers the liquid crystal screen (shown by a broken line in FIG. 2). Then, when moving to the effect position shown by the broken line in FIG. 2, the flower-shaped portion 91 rotates at the tip of the arm, and the translucent flower center and petal portion can be illuminated beautifully by a lamp or a full-color LED from behind. .. When the flower-shaped accessory 90 finishes its operation, it returns from the effect position of the broken line to the origin position of the solid line. The flower-shaped portion 91 can have a plurality of types of motion patterns such as high-speed rotation, low-speed rotation, and reverse rotation as the petal rotation motion, and the arm 92 has a predetermined tilting motion in addition to the fully open tilting motion of tilting to the broken line portion. Multiple types of motion patterns are possible, such as a quasi-tilt motion that tilts to a tilt angle, a vibration motion in which the arm rattles, and a sizing motion. The clock-shaped accessory 80 (clock hand 82) and the flower-shaped accessory 90 (first movable body 91, second movable body 92) are used for advance notice production depending on the operation mode, and setting suggestions described later. It is also used when executing (appearing) the production.

<2. Control device: Fig. 3>
Next, with reference to FIG. 3, a control device that controls the game operation of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 3 is a control block diagram showing an outline of the control device.

The control device of the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment is a main control board (main control means) 20 (hereinafter, referred to as “main control unit 20”) that collectively controls control (game operation control) related to the overall game operation. The effect control board (effect control means) 24 (hereinafter referred to as "effect control unit 24") that receives the effect control command from the main control unit 20 and controls the execution (appearance) of the effect by the effect means. ), A payout control board (payout control means) 29 that controls the payout of prize balls by the game ball payout device 19, and a power source (including a backup power source) required for each board of the game machine from an external power source. It is mainly composed of a power supply board (power supply control means (not shown)) to be supplied. A liquid crystal display device 36 as an image display device is connected to the effect control unit 24. The power supply route is omitted in FIG.

(2-1. Main control unit 20)
The main control unit 20 is equipped with a microprocessor incorporating a CPU 201 (main control CPU), and is ROM 202 (main control) that stores various data necessary for game operation control in addition to a control program that describes a game operation control procedure. It is equipped with a ROM) and a RAM 203 (main control RAM) that functions as a work area and a buffer memory, and constitutes a microcomputer (Z80 system equivalent) as a whole.

Although not shown, the main control unit 20 applies interrupt signals to the CTC and CPU, which provide the Z80 system with a periodic interrupt, a pulse output creation function (bit rate generator) with a constant cycle, and a time measurement function. Interrupt controller circuit that exerts interrupt enable / interrupt prohibition function such as timer interrupt, reset circuit that can detect power on / off or power failure, output system reset signal, and reset CPU, control program Watchdog timer (WDT) circuit that monitors the operation abnormality of, out-of-designated area prohibition (IAT) circuit that monitors whether the program is executed correctly within the preset address range, and a certain range of hardware It also has a counter circuit for generating random numbers (hard random numbers). At least the main control unit (main control board) 20 and the payout control board 29 receive a voltage drop signal (power supply abnormality signal) from a power supply board (not shown) to start a backup process prior to power interruption. The game operation before the power is cut off can be resumed after the power is restored (backup function). In this game machine 1, it is possible to hold each storage content of the RAM for at least several days.

The counter circuit includes a random number generation circuit that generates a random number and a sampling circuit that samples a random number value at a predetermined timing from the random number generation circuit, and acts as a 16-bit counter as a whole. By sending an instruction to the sampling circuit according to the processing state, the CPU 201 acquires the numerical value indicated by the random number generation circuit as an internal lottery random number value (big hit determination random number (random number size: 65536)). , The random number value is used for the big hit lottery. It should be noted that the random number for the internal lottery is obtained by adding the soft random number value generated by appropriate software processing and the hard random number value in order to prevent the hitting and the like.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes an upper start port sensor 34a for detecting a prize in the upper start port 34, a lower start port sensor 35a for detecting a prize in the lower start port 35, and a game ball for the normal symbol start port 37. The normal symbol start opening sensor 37a for detecting the passage of the above, the large winning opening sensor 52a for detecting the winning of the large winning opening 50, and the general winning opening sensor 43a for detecting the winning of the general winning opening 43 are connected. The main control unit 20 can receive the detection signals from these. Based on the detection signals from these sensors, the main control unit 20 grasps which winning opening the game ball has won (winning).

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to an OUT monitoring switch 49a that detects a game ball (so-called out ball) discharged from the game machine through the out port 49 and each winning port, and the main control unit 20 is an OUT monitoring switch. The detection signal from 49a can be received. The main control unit 20 includes a counting means for counting the number of out balls based on the detection signal from the OUT monitoring switch 49a. This number of out balls is determined regardless of whether or not the start ports 34 and 35 have been won if the player continues to launch the game balls from the launching device 32, that is, whether or not the symbol variation display game is executed. It doesn't matter, it will increase. Since the launching performance of the launching device 32 according to the present embodiment is 100 shots per minute, for example, if "today's cumulative number of out balls is 30,000", the game machine 1 has been operating for 300 minutes today. Information (cumulative number of out balls (pieces) / firing performance (100 shots per minute) can be obtained. Therefore, the number of out balls (cumulative number of out balls) is one of the game performance information defined by a specific value. It can be said that the information regarding the number of out balls (counting result of out balls by the counting means) is used for calculating the base value (one of the game performance information) described later.

Further, a fraud detection sensor (for example, vibration sensor, radio wave sensor, magnetic sensor: not shown) for detecting fraudulent activity against the game machine 1 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 is connected to the fraud detection sensor. It is possible to monitor fraudulent activity against the game machine based on the detection signal of.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a normal electric accessory solenoid 41c for controlling the opening and closing of the movable wing piece 47 of the lower starting port 35, and a large winning opening solenoid 52c for opening and closing the opening door 52b of the large winning opening 50. Is connected, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for driving and controlling them.

Further, the special symbol display device 38a and the special symbol display device 38b are connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the special symbols 1 and 2. There is. Further, a normal symbol display device 39a is connected to the main control unit 20, and a control signal for displaying and controlling the normal symbol can be transmitted.

Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to the composite display device 38c, the right-handed display device 39b, and the round number display device 39c, and the main control unit 20 is for displaying and controlling various information displayed on these devices. The control signal can be transmitted.

Further, a frame external terminal board 21 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 provides predetermined game information (outer end signal) to the outside of the game machine via the frame external terminal board 21. It is possible to transmit to an external device such as a "data counter DT" or a "hall computer HC". Predetermined game information includes, for example, winning game start / end information, winning information, fluctuation start / fluctuation stop information of special symbols, prize ball number information, various security information (fraud detection information, RAM clear, door opening, etc. Occurrence information such as setting changes). The above-mentioned "data counter DT" is based on the game information included in the above-mentioned outer end signal, and for example, specific information about the game machine such as the number of big hits, the number of game executions (number of symbol fluctuations), and the number of game executions between big hits It is a game information notification device that can notify, and is usually installed on the upper part of the game machine. In addition, the hall computer HC is a game that monitors and collects the game information of the game machine based on the game information included in the above-mentioned outer end signal, and comprehensively manages the operating status of the game machine installed in the pachinko hall. It is a management computer dedicated to the store.

Further, the main control unit 20 includes a RAM clear switch 98 for initializing a predetermined area (memory in the area) of the RAM 203, and a setting key switch for switching to a setting change allowable state in which a setting value change operation described later can be performed. The 94, the setting change switch 95 for changing the setting value, and the setting change completion switch 96 for confirming the setting value selected by the setting change switch 95 are connected to the main control. The unit 20 can receive the detection signals from these switches.

In the case of this embodiment, the RAM clear switch 98, the setting change switch 95, and the setting change completion switch 96 are all push button type switches that can be operated by the operator. Further, the setting key switch 94 is a key switch that can be switched between a setting change allowable state (ON) and a setting change prohibition state (OFF) by inserting a setting key and performing an ON / OFF operation. It should be noted that these switches 95, 96, 98 are formed in appropriate places inside the game machine from the viewpoint of preventing goto acts (illegal acts) such as illegal change operations for set values, and unless the front frame 2 is opened, the game ON / OFF operation from outside the machine is impossible.

Further, a setting display 97 (setting display means) for displaying information related to the set value is connected to the main control unit 20, and the main control unit 20 can transmit a control signal for displaying and controlling the setting display 97. .. The setting display 97 according to the present embodiment is composed of one 7-segment display and is mounted on the main control unit (main control board) 20. The setting display 97 is not limited to the main control board 20, but the payout control board 28, the launch control board 29, and the relay board (relay board for relaying the connection between various display devices, switches, etc. and the control board: FIG. It can be provided at an appropriate place inside the game machine, such as an effect control unit (effect control board (including a liquid crystal control board)) 24 (not shown).

(About set value)
The main control unit 20 is provided with a "setting change function" that can change the expected value (profit) of the profit given to the player such as the ball output rate (so-called machine discount, PAYOUT rate) in stages. The above "set value" is a value indicating this stage. This set value can be confirmed by the setting display 97, and is appropriately set by the hall clerk based exclusively on the sales strategy of the pachinko hall (game store).

The "set value" defines, for example, the lottery probability (winning probability) of a jackpot (a hit type in which the condition device described later is activated) for each stage. The higher the set value, the higher the jackpot lottery probability (big hit). The winning probability) is set high, and it works in favor of the player. Such a set value can be provided with at least two stages (at least a first set value and a second set value). In the present embodiment, six setting values of settings 1 to 6 are provided. For example, at low probability, setting 1 is 1/240, setting 2 is 1/231, and setting 3 is 1/222. 4 is 1/210, setting 5 is 1/198, setting 6 is 1/189, and so on. That is, the higher the set value, the easier it is to win a big hit (the higher the machine discount), which is advantageous to the player. As described above, the "set value" is a value that defines the events that affect the machine discount for each stage, and means a value for a grade related to the likelihood of a special event such as a big hit. That is, the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability and / or the jackpot lottery probability at the low probability can be configured to be different depending on the set value. When the jackpot lottery probability is in a high probability state (when the special symbol probability variation function described later is activated), the probability can be increased to a value not exceeding 10 times. However, the rate of increase may be the same or different for each set value. In the case of this embodiment, the rate of increase is the same for each set value. In the above example, if the jackpot lottery probability at low probability is set 1 to 6 = 1/240 to 1/189 and the rate of increase is tripled, the jackpot lottery probability at high probability is set 1 to 6. = 1/80 to 1/63.

Further, when a plurality of types of jackpots are provided, the winning probability of one or a plurality of types of jackpots can be changed according to the set value. For example, if there are four types of jackpots 1 to 4, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of all jackpots 1 to 4, or some jackpots may be configured. Only a certain jackpot 1 to 3 may be configured to be high (in this case, the jackpot 4 has a common winning probability for all set values), or only a specific jackpot (for example, jackpot 1 only). ) May be configured to be high only (in this case, the winning probabilities common to all set values for jackpots 2 to 4). Further, the higher the set value is, the higher the total winning probability of the jackpots 1 to 4 may be. Further, the winning probability of the small hit type that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device may be changed according to the set value, as in the case of the large hit described above.

(About the operation to change the set value)
In the present embodiment, when the power is turned on, at least when the setting key switch 94 and the RAM clear switch 98 are in the ON state, the setting change is controlled to the allowable state, and when the power is turned on by any other switch operation, It is controlled to the setting change prohibition state. When the setting change switch 95 is turned on in this setting change allowable state, the current display value of the setting display 97 is "1 → 2 → 3 → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2 → 3 → ...". It is switched to the circulation type and displayed in the usage range of settings 1 to 6 as shown in. Then, when the desired setting value is displayed, when the setting change completion switch 96 is turned ON (setting confirmation operation), the current display value is confirmed as the current setting value, and the setting value data is the predetermined area of the RAM 203 (the setting confirmation operation). It is stored in the setting value storage area). Then, when the setting key switch 94 is operated from the current ON state to the OFF state, the setting change allowable state is terminated, and thereafter, the game is started under the fixed set value. The main control unit 20 of the present embodiment has a set value selection means capable of selecting any set value from a plurality of set values having different advantages to the player, and a set value selected by the set value selection means. It is equipped with a setting value setting means for setting. In addition, it may be a "game machine without setting" which does not have the setting function as described above.

Further, the main control unit 20 can transmit various game processing information such as information about the special symbol variation display game and error information to the effect control unit 24 by the effect control command according to the processing state. .. However, in order to prevent a goto action from the outside, the main control unit 20 only transmits a signal to the effect control unit 24, and the signal from the effect control unit 24 cannot be received. It has become.

(About performance indicator 99)
Further, the main control unit 20 is connected to a performance display 99 (information display means) for notifying information (hereinafter, referred to as “performance information”) related to the game result of a predetermined period (specific game period), and is connected to the main control unit 20. 20 is capable of transmitting a control signal for displaying and controlling the display. The performance display 99 of the present embodiment is composed of a plurality of 7-segment LEDs, and specifically, four 7-segment LEDs (7-segment displays 99a to 99d) in which a display unit and a circuit unit are unitized are laterally arranged. This is mounted on the main control board 20, for example, to form a display capable of displaying a 4-digit number. Further, each 7-segment LED has a decimal point DP (dot) below the 7-segment number. The above "performance information" is information mainly used by pachinko hall stores and related agencies for confirmation and investigation, and for example, abnormalities in ball ejection performance occur due to illegal adjustment of game nails or goto acts. Information for investigating whether or not the original ball ejection performance of the gaming machine (designed ball ejection performance) is properly exhibited, in other words, "information on game performance (game performance information)". .. Therefore, the performance information itself is information that is not directly related to the game progress itself when the player enjoys the game, unlike the advance notice effect and the setting suggestion effect described later. Therefore, the performance display 99 is not installed in a place that is visible to the player, but is mounted in a place that is easily visible inside the game machine, for example, on a control board or a board case that protects the control board.

In the present embodiment, the total number of payouts (the number of payouts in the normal state) in the normal state (the jackpot lottery probability is low probability (normal probability) and the state without electric support described later) and the cumulative number of out balls in the normal state (normal). The number of outs during normal times) is measured in real time, and the value obtained by dividing the number of outs during normal times by the number of outs during normal times multiplied by 100 (base value calculated by multiplying the number of outs during normal times by the number of outs during normal times x 100) , The above-mentioned "performance information" is adopted, and this is displayed in a predetermined mode by the performance display 99. As for the base value, the value rounded to the first decimal place is displayed on the performance display 99. However, instead of simply measuring permanently and displaying the base value (performance information), when the number of out balls being measured reaches a predetermined specified number (for example, 60,000), the measurement is temporarily terminated. , The base value at the end of the measurement is stored in the RAM 203 as history information (the current base value is stored), and the measurement of a new base value is started again. In addition, in the case of this embodiment, the above-mentioned "specified number (60,000 pieces)" that triggers the end of measurement is not the number of outs in the normal state, but the cumulative number of outs measured during all game states (including during the winning game). The number of balls (number of outs in all states) is adopted, and this "number of outs in all states" is also measured in real time. The processing program related to the display control and the base value on the performance display 99 and its work area are defined in an area (out-of-area memory) different from the area (in-area memory) accessed by the CPU 201 during normal game progress. ing. Further, the performance information is not limited to the above-mentioned base value in the normal state, and is not particularly limited as long as it is useful game performance information.

A payout control board (payout control unit) 29 is connected to the main control unit 20, and the payout control board 29 is connected to a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 that controls the launch device 32 and a game ball. A game ball payout device (game ball payout means) 19 for performing the above is connected.

The main roles of the payout control board 29 are reception of a payout control command from the main control unit 20, prize ball payout control of the game ball payout device 19 based on the payout control command, and information on a payout operation state to the main control unit 20 ( Status signal) transmission, etc. When it is necessary to pay out the balls, the main control unit 20 can send a control command related to the payout (“payout control command” for specifying the number of prize balls) to the payout control board 29, while the main control unit 20 can send the payout control command. The payout control board 29 can transmit the above status signal to the main control unit 20.

The payout control board 29 has a full detection sensor 60 for detecting the stored state of the game balls stored in the upper tray 9 (whether or not the upper tray 9 is full), a front frame 2 and / or a front operation panel. A door opening sensor 61 (ON when opened / OFF when closed) for detecting the open / closed state of No. 7 is connected, and the payout control board 29 can receive detection signals from these sensors.

Further, the payout control board 29 is detected by a supply shortage detection sensor 19a for detecting a supply shortage of game balls, a ball counting sensor 19b for detecting a game ball (prize ball) to be paid out, and the like provided in the game ball payout device 19. It is possible to receive signals. Further, the payout control board 29 can transmit a control signal for controlling the payout motor 19c (the motor for driving the ball payout mechanism unit (not shown) for paying out the game ball) of the game ball payout device 19. ing.

The payout control board 29 indicates a full state based on detection signals from various sensors such as a fullness detection sensor 60, a door open sensor 61, a replenishment shortage detection sensor 19a, and a ball counting sensor 19b as the above state signals. "Signal", "Door open signal" indicating that the front frame 2 and front operation panel 7 are open, "Supply out signal" indicating insufficient supply of game balls, Abnormal payout of prize balls (insufficient payout, excessive payout) Various status signals such as a "counting error signal" indicating "counting error signal" and a "payout completion signal" indicating that the payout operation has been completed can be transmitted to the main control unit 20. Based on these status signals, the main control unit 20 determines whether the front frame 2 and the front operation panel 7 are in the open state (door opening error) and whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal (whether the payout operation of the game ball payout device 19 is normal). The prize ball error) and whether or not the upper saucer 9 is full (ball jam error) are monitored.

Further, a launch control board (launch control unit) 28 is connected to the payout control board 29, and a launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) can be transmitted to the launch control board 28. The launch control board 28 controls energization of the launch solenoid (not shown) provided in the launch device 32 based on the launch control signal, and realizes a game ball launch operation by operating the launch operation handle 15. .. Further, the launch strength of the game ball can be changed according to the operation amount of the launch operation handle 15.

(2-2. Production control unit 24)
The effect control unit 24 is equipped with a microprocessor having a CPU 241 (effect control CPU), a ROM 242 (effect control ROM) that stores the effect data required for the effect control process, and a RAM 243 (effect control ROM) that functions as a work area or a buffer memory. It is mainly composed of a microprocessor equipped with an effect control RAM), an acoustic control unit (sound source LSI), an RTC function unit (Real Time Clock), and a counter circuit (16 bits) for generating a fixed range of hard random numbers. Counter for 8 bits), interrupt controller circuit, reset circuit, WDT circuit, etc. are provided to control the overall effect operation. In addition, the RTC function unit is a clock IC that keeps track of time, and relates to real-time time information and / or date (month, day, day of the week) such as the current time (“current time is hour, minute, second”). It works as a clock means to provide calendar information. Further, like the main control unit 20, it also has a backup function and soft random number generation means (for example, random number generation means for production lottery).

The main roles of the effect control unit 24 are receiving the effect control command from the main control unit 20, determining the selection of the effect based on the effect control command, controlling the image display of the liquid crystal display device 36, controlling the sound of the speaker 46, and various other types. Light emission control of the effect LED (decorative lamp 45, button LED 13b, other effect LED), operation control of various movable body accessories (clock type accessory 80, flower type accessory 90), and the like.

Further, the effect control unit 24 includes a display control unit (not shown) that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 36. This display control unit is developed by a VDP that controls overall video output processing such as image development processing and image drawing, an image ROM that stores image data (effect image data) that the VDP performs image development processing, and a VDP. A VRAM (Video RAM) that temporarily stores the image data, a liquid crystal control CPU that outputs control data necessary for VDP to perform display control, and a program that describes the display control operation procedure of the liquid crystal control CPU and its It is mainly composed of a liquid crystal control ROM that stores various data necessary for display control and a liquid crystal control RAM that functions as a work area or a buffer memory.

Further, the effect control unit 24 displays light on the light display device 45a including various effect LEDs such as a decorative lamp 45 and a button LED 13b in order to execute an image display effect, a light effect, a sound effect, or a movable body effect. Movable accessory motors 80c, 91c that operate the acoustic control unit (sound source LSI) for the acoustic generator 46a including the control unit and the speaker 46, and the movable accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped portion 91, arm 92). , 92c is provided with a drive control unit (motor drive circuit) and the like.

Further, a position detection sensor 82a that monitors the movement of the movable body accessory is connected to the effect control unit 24, and the effect control unit 24 is based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a and the current operation of the movable body accessory The operation mode is controlled while monitoring the position (for example, the amount of movement from the origin position). Further, the effect control unit 24 monitors the malfunction of the operation of the movable body accessory based on the detection information from the position detection sensor 82a, and if the malfunction occurs, performs a predetermined error notification process.

Further, the effect control unit 24 is connected to the effect button switch 13a for detecting the operation of the effect button 13 and the direction key switches 75a'to 75d' for detecting the operation of the direction keys 75 (75a to 75d) to control the effect. The unit 24 can receive the operation detection signal from the effect button 13 and the direction key 75.

When the effect control unit 24 receives the effect control command sent from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 determines by lottery or uniquely from a plurality of types of effect patterns prepared in advance based on the information contained in the command. Then, various production means are controlled at the required timing to bring out the desired production. As a result, the display of the effect image by the liquid crystal display device 36 (image display effect), the reproduction of the sound from the speaker 46 (sound effect), and the lighting / blinking drive of the decorative lamp 45 and other effect LEDs (light effect) are realized. , Various effect patterns (variable display operation of decorative symbols, notice effect, etc.) are developed in chronological order, and a "effect scenario" in a broad sense is realized. Further, the effect control unit 24 responds to the effect button 13 and / or the direction key 75 based on the operation detection signals from the effect button switch 13a and the direction key switches 75a'to 75d' during the predetermined operation reception valid period. It is configured so that it can be identified whether such an operation has been performed (for example, pressing, long pressing, repeated hitting, pressing order of the direction key 75 in the up / down / left / right direction, etc.) It is configured so that the production can be executed and controlled.

The effect control command defines the function by a 2-byte configuration consisting of a 1-byte length mode (MODE) and a 1-byte length event (EVENT), and in order to distinguish between MODE and EVENT, Bit7 of MODE is used. Bit7 of ON and EVENT is OFF. When this information is transmitted as valid, a strobe signal is output corresponding to each of the mode (MODE) and the event (EVENT). That is, when there is a command to be transmitted, the CPU 201 (main control CPU) sets and outputs mode (MODE) information for transmitting the command to the effect control unit 24, and the first time after a predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal of is transmitted. Further, the event (EVENT) information is set and output after a predetermined time has elapsed from the transmission of the strobe signal, and the second strobe signal is transmitted after the predetermined time has elapsed from this setting. The strobe signal is controlled to be active by the CPU 201 for a predetermined period during which the CPU 241 (effect control CPU) can reliably receive the command.

Further, the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) generates an interrupt based on the input of the strobe signal, executes the control program for the command reception interrupt process, and acquires the effect control command in this interrupt process. It has become. Further, unlike the CPU 201, the CPU 241 is executing an interrupt process (a timer interrupt process that is periodically executed) based on another interrupt when an interrupt occurs based on the input of a strobe signal. Even if there is, the command reception interrupt process is performed by interrupting the process, and the command reception interrupt process is preferentially performed even if other interrupts occur at the same time.

<3. Overview of operation>
Next, a game operation related to the game machine 1 using the control device (FIG. 3) will be described.

(3-1. Symbol variation display game)
(3-1-1. Special symbol variation display game, decorative symbol variation display game)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, the main control unit 20 receives a predetermined start condition, specifically, the game ball enters (wins) the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35. A "big hit lottery" is held by random number lottery. Based on the lottery result, the main control unit 20 variablely displays the special symbols 1 and 2 on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b to start the special symbol variable display game, and displays the result as a special symbol after a lapse of a predetermined time. Derived display is performed on the device, thereby ending the special symbol variation display game.

Here, in the present embodiment, the big hit lottery based on the winning of the upper starting port 34 and the big hit lottery based on the winning of the lower starting port 35 are performed separately and independently. Therefore, the jackpot lottery result for the upper starting port 34 is derived on the special symbol display device 38a side, and the jackpot lottery result for the lower starting port 35 is derived on the special symbol display device 38b side. Specifically, on the special symbol display device 38a side, the special symbol 1 is variablely displayed and the first special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the upper start opening 34. On the other hand, on the special symbol display device 38b side, the special symbol 2 is variablely displayed and the second special symbol variable display game is started on the condition that the game ball enters the lower start opening 35. ing. Then, when the special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a or the special symbol display device 38b is started, after a predetermined variation display time elapses, if the jackpot lottery result is a "big hit", a predetermined "big hit" In the mode, when the big hit lottery result is "small hit", the special symbol in the variable display is stopped and displayed in the predetermined "small hit" mode, and in other cases, in the predetermined "loss" mode. The game result (big hit lottery result) is derived by.

In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, the first special symbol variation display game on the special symbol display device 38a side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1", and the second special symbol display device 38b side is referred to as "special symbol variation display game 1". The special symbol variation display game of the above may be referred to as "special symbol variation display game 2". Unless otherwise required, "special symbol 1" and "special symbol 2" are simply referred to as "special symbol" (sometimes abbreviated as "special symbol"), and "special symbol variation display game 1" and "special symbol 2" are used. It may be referred to as a "special symbol variation display game" without distinguishing it from the "special symbol variation display game 2".

Further, when the above-mentioned special symbol variation display game is started, the decorative symbol (directing game symbol) is variablely displayed on the liquid crystal display device 36 to start the decorative symbol variation display game, which accompanies this. Then, various productions are developed. When the special symbol variation display game ends, the decorative symbol variation display game also ends, and the special symbol display device reflects a predetermined special symbol indicating the jackpot lottery result, and the liquid crystal display device 36 reflects the jackpot lottery result. The decorative design is derived and displayed. That is, the result of the special symbol variation display game is reflected and displayed by the dramatic decorative symbol variation display game including the variation display operation of the decorative symbol.

Therefore, for example, when the result of the special symbol variation display game (result of the jackpot lottery) is "big hit", the decorative symbol variation display game develops an effect that reflects the result. Then, in the special symbol display device, when the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a display mode indicating a big hit (for example, the 7-segment is in the display state of "7"), the liquid crystal display device 36 displays "left", "middle", and "right". In each display area of "", the decorative symbol reflects the "big hit" (hit symbol: for example, in each display area of "left", "middle", "right", three decorative symbols are "7" " 7 ”and“ 7 ”are displayed in the stop display mode).

In the case of this "big hit", specifically, the special symbol variation display game ends, and the decorative symbol variation display game ends accordingly, and as a result, the symbol mode of the "big hit" is derived and displayed. After that, the large winning opening solenoid 52c (see FIG. 3) of the special variable winning device 52 operates and the opening door 52b opens and closes in a predetermined pattern, whereby the large winning opening 50 is opened and closed, and the game is played more than in the normal state. A special game state (big hit game) that is advantageous to the player occurs. In this big hit game, the opening time of the big winning opening by the opening door 52b is until a predetermined time (maximum opening time: 29.8 seconds, for example) elapses, or the number of winning balls to the big winning opening 50 is the maximum number of winnings (maximum number of winning balls). The winning area is opened or expanded until the entrance is opened by one operation of the accessory, or the maximum number of winning balls allowed for the expanded winning opening: (for example, 10) is reached. A "round game" such that the big winning opening is closed when any of the conditions is met (the condition for ending the round game (closing condition) is satisfied) is a predetermined number of rounds (for example, a maximum of 10 rounds). )Repeated.

When the above jackpot game starts, the opening effect is first performed using the start interval time (start INT), and when the start INT ends, a plurality of round games are performed up to a predetermined number of predetermined rounds (maximum number of rounds). It is done once. Then, when the maximum number of rounds is completed, the ending effect is performed using the end interval time (end INT), and a series of big hit games is completed. When the current round game is completed, the next round game is started via a predetermined interval time (integ between rounds). In addition, "in-round production" appears during the round game, and "inter-round INT production" appears during the round game (during the inter-round INT). That is, the jackpot game is roughly classified into each game period of the opening period (start INT period), the round game period up to the maximum number of rounds, and the ending period (end INT period).

Regarding the information necessary for executing the above-mentioned decorative symbol variation display game, first, the main control unit 20 first enters (wins) a game ball into the upper start port 34 or the lower start port 35, and specifically. , "Big hit", "Small hit", or "Loss" on condition that the game ball is detected by the upper start opening sensor 34a or the lower start opening sensor 35a and the start condition (starting condition related to the special symbol) is satisfied. If it is a "big hit", the big hit type is selected, if it is a "small hit", the small hit type is selected, and if it is a "miss", the big hit type is selected. Perform a big hit lottery including'design lottery (winning type lottery)'to draw a lottery for the loss type (if there is only one type of big hit, small hit or loss, it is not necessary to perform the symbol lottery, so omit the lottery. Based on the lottery result information, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol and the special symbol (special stop symbol) to be finally stopped and displayed are determined. Then, as an effect control command for specifying the processing state, a "variation pattern designation command" including at least variation pattern information of the special symbol (for example, information on the jackpot lottery result and the variation time of the special symbol) is provided by the effect control unit 24. Send to the side. As a result, the basic information required for the decorative symbol variation display game is sent to the effect control unit 24. In the present embodiment, in order to enrich the variation of the effect, a "decorative symbol designation command" including information on the special stop symbol (design lottery result information) is also transmitted to the effect control unit 24.

In addition to the jackpot lottery result, the variation pattern information of the special symbol may include information for designating the execution of a specific advance notice effect (for example, a reach effect or a pseudo-ream effect (including the number of pseudo-reams) described later). it can. Specifically, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol is roughly classified into a "hit fluctuation pattern" in the case of a hit and a "loss fluctuation pattern" in the case of a loss, depending on the result of the big hit lottery. "Reach variation pattern" that specifies the execution of the reach effect (including the specification of the type of reach), "normal variation pattern" that does not specify the execution of the reach effect, and "pseudo-ream" that specifies the execution of the pseudo-ream effect and the reach effect. A plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are included, such as "with reach fluctuation pattern" and "pseudo-ream normal fluctuation pattern" in which execution of pseudo-ream effect is specified and execution of reach effect is not specified. Further, with respect to the reach fluctuation pattern and the fluctuation pattern with pseudo-ream, in order to secure the production time of the advance notice effect, basically, the fluctuation time longer than the fluctuation time of the normal fluctuation pattern is set.

The effect control unit 24 is time-series during the decorative symbol variation display game based on the information included in the effect control commands (here, the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command) sent from the main control unit 20. The content of the effect (effect scenario) to be developed in the game, the decorative pattern to be finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop pattern), etc. are decided, and according to the time schedule based on the variation pattern of the special symbol, the advance notice effect during the decorative symbol variation display game Controls the variable display effect of decorative patterns. As a result, the decorative symbol by the liquid crystal display device 36 is variablely displayed in synchronization with the variable display of the special symbol by the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b, and the period of the special symbol variable display game and the decorative symbol variable display game are in progress. The period of is substantially the same time width. Further, the effect control unit 24 controls the liquid crystal display device 36, the light display device 45a, or the sound generator 46a, respectively, so as to correspond to the effect scenario, and develops various effects in the decorative symbol variation display game. As a result, the reproduction of the image (image effect) on the liquid crystal display device 36, the reproduction of the sound effect (sound effect), and the lighting / blinking drive (light effect) of the effect LED such as the decorative lamp 45 are realized.

In this way, the special symbol variation display game and the decorative symbol variation display game have an inseparable relationship, and what reflects the display result of the special symbol variation display game is expressed in the decorative symbol variation display game. , These two symbol variation display games may be regarded as equivalent symbol games. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the above two symbol variation display games may be simply referred to as "symbol variation display games". In addition, the number of executions (number of games) of the symbol variation display game (particularly, the special symbol variation display game) is set to "number of symbol variation" or "number of variation" or "** rotation (for example, one rotation) for convenience of explanation. 10 rotations, 1000 rotations, etc.) ".

(3-1-2. Ordinary symbol fluctuation display game)
Further, in the game machine 1, based on the fact that the game ball has passed (winning) through the normal symbol start port 37, the main control unit 20 performs a "subsidy winning lottery" by a random number lottery. Based on this lottery result, the normal symbol represented by the LED is variablely displayed on the normal symbol display device 39a to start the normal symbol variable display game, and after a predetermined fluctuation time elapses, the result is turned on and off by the LED. It is designed to stop and display in combination. For example, when the result of the normal symbol variation display game is "auxiliary hit", the display unit of the normal symbol display device 39a is stopped and displayed in a specific lighting state (for example, all two LEDs 39 are in the lighting state).

In the case of this "auxiliary hit", the normal electric accessory solenoid 41c (see FIG. 3) is activated, whereby the movable wing piece 47 opens in an inverted "C" shape and the lower starting port 35 opens. Alternatively, the game ball is expanded to a state in which the game ball easily flows in (starting opening open state), and an auxiliary game state (hereinafter referred to as "solenoid open game") that is more advantageous to the player than the normal state occurs. In this general electric opening game, the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 operates (opens), and the opening time of the lower starting port 35 (starting opening open state time) is the maximum opening time (for example, maximum 6 seconds). ) Elapsed, or until the number of winning balls to the lower starting port 35 reaches a predetermined number (for example, a maximum of 10), the winning area is controlled to be open or expanded, and one of these conditions is satisfied. In that case, the opening operation of the movable wing piece 47 is completed and the lower starting port 35 is closed. The lower starting port 35 can be opened one or more times within the maximum opening time.

(3-1-3. Operation hold ball)
In the present embodiment, each start port 34, 35 or the normal symbol start port 37 wins a prize during the symbol variation display game, the normal symbol variation display game, the big hit game, the small hit game, or the normal electric open game. When it occurs, that is, when a detection signal is input from the upper start port sensor 34a, the lower start port sensor 35a, or the normal symbol start port sensor 37a and the corresponding start condition is satisfied, this is used as the start right of the variable display game. As such data, except for those related to the variable display, the maximum number of reserved storages, which is a predetermined upper limit, is retained and stored. The pending data that is not used for this symbol variation display operation or the game ball related to the reserved data is also referred to as an "operation pending ball". In order to clarify the number of operation holding balls to the player, a dedicated holding display (not shown) provided at an appropriate position in the game machine 1 or a holding display provided as an icon image on the screen by the liquid crystal display device 36. Turn on the device.

Further, in the present embodiment, up to four operation holding balls related to the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the ordinary symbol are reserved and stored in the corresponding storage area of the RAM 203, and are retained as the number of times the fluctuation of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol is confirmed. The maximum number of stored balls (maximum number of reserved balls) for each of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the normal symbol is not particularly limited. Further, all or part of the maximum number of reserved memories of each symbol may be different, and the number can be appropriately determined according to the playability. In the present specification, for convenience of explanation, each operation holding ball of the special symbol 1, the special symbol 2, and the ordinary symbol is referred to as "special figure 1 operation holding ball", "special figure 2 operation holding ball", and "special figure 2 operation holding ball", respectively. It is also called "Public figure operation hold ball".

(3-2. Game state)
Next, the gaming state will be described. The gaming machine 1 according to the present embodiment is configured to be capable of generating a plurality of types of gaming states in addition to the above-mentioned jackpot which is a special gaming state. In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, functions (means) related to the occurrence of various gaming states will be described.

The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment has a "probability variation function (probability variation function)" in which the main control unit 20 (CPU201) is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this, a probabilistic function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol probabilistic function") and a probabilistic function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "ordinary symbol probabilistic function").

The special symbol probability change function is a function that changes the jackpot lottery probability from a low probability of a predetermined probability (normal probability) to a high probability to generate a "high probability state (big hit high probability state)" that is more advantageous than the normal state. .. Under the gaming state (high probability state) in which this special symbol probability change function is operating, the jackpot lottery probability is high, so that a jackpot is likely to occur. As described above, in the case of the present embodiment, the jackpot lottery probabilities at the time of low probability and at the time of high probability differ depending on the set value (see FIG. 4).

The normal symbol probability change function changes the lottery probability per auxiliary from a low probability (normal probability) to a high probability (for example, changes from 1/256 to 255/256), which is more advantageous than the normal state. It is a function to generate a "probability change state per auxiliary". Under the game state (auxiliary hit probability change state) in which this normal symbol probability change function is operating, the auxiliary hit lottery probability becomes a high probability state, so that auxiliary hits are likely to occur, and the general electric open game frequently occurs. The operating rate is improved, in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state.

Further, the game machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a "variation time shortening function (time saving function)" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for the functional unit. There are two types of this: a time saving function related to a special symbol (hereinafter referred to as "special symbol time saving function") and a time saving function related to a normal symbol (hereinafter referred to as "normal symbol time saving function").

The special symbol time reduction function generates a "special symbol time reduction state" that shortens the average time required for one special symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the special symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (special symbol time saving state) in which this special symbol time saving function is operating, the average fluctuation time of the special symbol in one special symbol fluctuation display game is shortened (for example, the average required for the reachless loss fluctuation). The time is shortened from 8 seconds to 2 seconds), and the number of big hit lottery per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state.

The normal symbol time saving function generates a "normal symbol time saving state" that shortens the average time required for one normal symbol fluctuation display game (the average time from when the normal symbol starts to change to when it is stopped and displayed). It is a function to make it. Under the gaming state (normal symbol time saving state) in which the normal symbol time saving function is activated, the average fluctuation time of the normal symbol in one normal symbol variation display game is shortened (for example, from 20 seconds to 0.6 seconds). (Shortened), the number of lottery times per unit time is improved compared to the normal state.

Further, the game machine 1 of the present embodiment has an "open extension function" in which the main control unit 20 is responsible for its functional unit. This open extension function is a function of generating an "open extension state" in which the open operation period (opening time of the movable wing piece 47) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is extended from the normal state. Under the open extension state, the open operation period (starting port open state time) of the movable wing piece 47 is extended from, for example, 0.2 seconds to 1.6 seconds, and the number of times of opening and closing is, for example, once (open extension function). Is extended from (when is not operating) to twice (when the open extension function is operating), and the operating rate is improved, in which the operating rate of the movable wing piece 47 per unit time is improved as compared with the normal state. Therefore, when the open extension function is activated, the frequency of winning the lower starting port 35 increases. Therefore, as a game state, the frequency of establishment of the starting condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the big hit is higher than the normal state. Compared to the state in which the opening extension function is not activated (non-operating), the gaming state is advantageous for the player. In this respect, the open extension state is also referred to as an "electric chew support state (electric support state)".

By operating one or a plurality of types of each of the above functions, it is possible to change the internal gaming state (internal gaming state) of the gaming machine. In the following, for convenience of explanation, the gaming state in which the special symbol probability change function, the special symbol time saving function, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function are activated is referred to as a "probability change state", and among these functions, The game state in which the special symbol probability change function is removed is referred to as a "time saving state", and at least the game state in which the special symbol probability change function is activated and the open extension function is not activated (in the present embodiment, only the special symbol probability change function is activated). ) Is referred to as a "latent state", and a state in which all functions are not operating (non-operating) is referred to as a "normal state". Therefore, paying attention to the jackpot lottery probability in these gaming states, when the gaming state is the "time saving state" or the "normal state", the jackpot lottery probability becomes the "low probability state (normal probability)" and the gaming state becomes. In the case of "latent state" or "probability change state", the jackpot lottery probability is "high probability state". During the big hit related to the operation of the condition device, a hit game in which the big winning opening is opened and closed occurs, but all the functions are not activated for each of the above functions, and basically the same game state as the above normal state. It will be placed below and the variable display of the special symbol will be interrupted.

(High base game state)
In the present embodiment, the above-mentioned functions related to the normal symbol, that is, the normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time saving function, and the open extension function, operate at the same trigger. However, when the above-mentioned normal symbol probability change function, the normal symbol time reduction function, and the open extension function are individually focused on, when at least one of these functions is activated, the operation rate of the movable wing piece 47 is improved. Since the rate is improved and the frequency of winning the lower start opening 35 increases (it becomes easier to win), as a game state, the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game for deriving the lottery result of the jackpot or the payout of balls It becomes a "high base game state (starting port entry advantageous state)" in which the rate (base) is higher than the normal state. The "high-base game state" here refers to a game state when a function related to a normal symbol (at least one function of a normal symbol probability change function, a normal symbol time saving function, and an open extension function) is activated, and is a special symbol. This is different from the gaming state when at least one of the special symbol probability change function and the special symbol time saving function is activated.

On the other hand, when focusing on the functions related to the special symbol (special symbol probability variation function and special symbol time saving function) individually, when the above special symbol probability variation function is activated, the jackpot lottery probability becomes higher than the normal state, resulting in a "high probability state". When the above-mentioned special symbol time saving function is activated, the special symbol time saving state is set in which the digestion time of the special symbol variation display game is shorter than the normal state. In this respect, it is distinguished from the above-mentioned "high-base game state" in which the frequency of establishment of the start condition of the special symbol variation display game is higher than that in the normal state.

In the present embodiment, as an example of the above-mentioned "high-base gaming state", at least the electric chew support state to which the open extension function is provided is treated as the "high-base gaming state". Under this electric chew support state, the operating rate (opening time and number of times of opening) of the movable wing piece 47 of the normal variable winning device 41 is improved, the winning rate to the lower starting port 35 is increased, and the winning frequency per unit time is increased. Since it rises, it becomes an advantageous gaming state for the player as compared with the case where it is not in the electric chew support state (low base gaming state). Focusing on the presence or absence of this electric chew support state, when the game state is "normal state" or "latent state", it becomes "no electric chew support state", and the game state is "time saving state" or "probability change state". If it is, it means that there is an electric chew support state. In the present specification, "without electric support state" is referred to as "without electric support" or "non-electric support state", and "with electric chew support state" is referred to as "with electric support" or "electric support". Called "state".

(3-2-1. Internal gaming state (game status determination number YJ): FIG. 28)
Regarding the operating status of each of the above functions (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) that determine the game state, the main control unit 20 side has these functions. The operation (5AH) / non-operation (00H) is managed by the ON / OFF state of the corresponding flag. A gaming state focusing on the operating status of each function is also referred to as an "internal gaming state". What kind of internal gaming state the current internal gaming state is is managed by using an identifier of "game status determination number YJ". For example, if the game state determination number YJ is "00H", specify "normal state", if it is "01H", specify "probability change state", and if it is "02H", specify "time saving state". In the case of "03H", specify "latent state".

(3-2-2. Fluctuation pattern selection mode (variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode): FIG. 28)
Here, in the present embodiment, in order to realize various effects related to the above-mentioned internal gaming state, one internal gaming state can be further classified and managed. Details will be explained later, but for example, the normal state includes multiple types of normal states such as "general" and "precursor", and the probabilistic state includes multiple types such as "ST early stage", "ST middle stage", and "ST final stage". The probabilistic state of is included, and these are managed as different game states by using the identifier "variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode". The substance of the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is an identifier (variation pattern selection mode) used when selecting a "variation pattern distribution table" (see FIGS. 24 to 27 described later) corresponding to the current gaming state. Data that identifies). Therefore, for example, when the probability change state (game state determination number YJ = 01H) is divided into "ST early stage", "ST middle stage", and "ST end stage", that is, the fluctuation pattern vibration corresponding to the probability change state (YJ = 01H). If "ST early stage (Tcode = 02H)", "ST middle stage (Tcode = 03H)", and "ST late stage (Tcode = 04H)" are defined as the minute designation number Tcode (see FIG. 28), different fluctuation patterns are provided. It becomes possible to select a distribution table.

The above-mentioned "variation pattern distribution table" is used when determining the variation pattern of the special symbol related to the symbol variation display game, and one or a plurality of types of variation patterns (variation patterns of the special symbol) are at least. It is determined in association with the current game state (variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode) and the jackpot lottery result. For example, when the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "00H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the general mode is specified, and when it is "01H", the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the precursor mode is specified. Will be done. That is, even if the internal gaming state is the same "normal state", when the variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "00H", the variation pattern related to the variation pattern distribution table for the general mode is selected. When the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode is "01H", the fluctuation pattern related to the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the precursor mode is selected (see S413, FIGS. 24 to 27, etc. in FIG. 12 described later). ).

Further, due to this, a plurality of types of "effect modes" related to the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode are provided, and the effect control unit 24 side displays (executes) the effect under each effect mode. You can do it. The details of the effect mode will be described later.

Therefore, the operating status of each function (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time saving function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) related to determination of jackpot lottery probability and presence / absence of electric support, that is, "internal game" When focusing on the "state", even though it is the same "normal state", regarding the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, the selection of the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the different fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode of "general" or "precursor" can be selected. It has become possible, and it is possible to make an effect related to the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode appear.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 28, the types of the "internal gaming state" include a normal state, a time saving state, and a probabilistic state (see the column of "YJ" in FIG. 28). On the other hand, the type of the gaming state related to the determination of the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol, in other words, the type of the gaming state related to the "variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode" when focusing on the determination of the production, is different from the type of the internal gaming state. Many of them include "general", "precursor", "ceiling", "heaven", "shortening time", "ST early stage", "ST middle stage", and "ST late stage" (see the "Tcode" column in FIG. 28).

In this way, the "internal game state" when focusing on each function related to determining the jackpot lottery probability and the presence or absence of electric support, and the "variable pattern distribution" focusing on the determination of the variation pattern of the special symbol (determination of the production). By managing the "designated number Tcode" as different, even if the internal gaming state is the same (for example, the normal state), different fluctuation pattern distribution designation numbers Tcode (for example, in general and in the precursor) are supported. The fluctuation pattern can be selected. As a result, even under the same internal gaming state, it is possible to bring about a large change in the digestion time (variation time of the special symbol) of the symbol variation display game and the related effects, and under the same internal gaming state. It is possible to have a wide variety of productions in.

Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, at least the game state related to the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode is referred to as "game mode" (see the column of "game mode type" in FIG. 28). As shown in FIG. 28, this game mode is a game state related to the "variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode and the game state determination number YJ (internal game state)", in other words, "a game captured as a whole game machine". It can be treated as a "state". For convenience of explanation, the internal gaming state and the gaming mode may not be distinguished and may be simply referred to as the "gaming state". Further, the variable pattern distribution designation number Tcode is referred to as a "variable pattern selection mode (Tcode)", and is appropriately abbreviated as "Tcode".

<4. About hit>
Next, with reference to FIG. 4, the “hit” according to the present embodiment will be described. FIG. 4 is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining the hit type, the hit game operation mode, and the transition destination game state (shift destination game mode) after the hit game.

(4-1. About hit type)
In the game machine 1 of the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, a plurality of types of hit types such as probability variation big hits 1 to 6 and time saving big hits 1 to 2 are provided as the hit types for the big hit lottery target. These hits belong to the "big hit type" that triggers the operation of the conditional device, and are different from the hits (small hits) that belong to the so-called "small hit type" that does not trigger the operation of the conditional device. Here, the "condition device" is a device whose operation is a condition necessary for operating a accessory continuous operation device (a device for continuously operating a special electric accessory) for performing a round game, and is specified. The combination of the special symbols of is displayed, or the game ball operates when it passes through a specific area in the big winning opening (excluding the one that won the big winning opening while the accessory continuous operation device is operating). .. In addition, the operation of the accessory continuous operation device is a condition for causing an electric support state (open extension function operation) and probability fluctuation (shifting from one internal gaming state to another internal gaming state). ..

Therefore, when the small hit is won, the condition device does not operate and the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, so that the internal gaming state does not shift (the transition control of the internal gaming state due to the small hit winning is performed. I won't). In addition, in the hit game by the small hit (small hit game), the round game like the big hit is not executed because the accessory continuous operation device does not operate, but it looks like it depends on how the opening and closing pattern of the big winning opening is determined. It is possible to realize a "pseudo round game" that behaves as if a round game is being executed. The operation mode of the small hit game is basically the same as that of the big hit game except that the round game is not executed, and after the lapse of a predetermined start INT, the "open / close operation game" that opens the large winning opening is executed. Then, when the opening / closing operation game is completed, a series of small hit games are completed after a predetermined end INT. Such a small hit is a winning type that triggers a transition (execution trigger) of a hit game (special game state) that involves opening and closing of the big winning opening, similar to a big hit, and is simply a "loss" property. To be different.

Further, when the small hit is won, the internal gaming state is not changed, but the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be changed. If such a transition mode is used, for example, when the game state after the small hit game and the game state after another big hit game are shifted to the same variable pattern selection mode (Tcode), the same effect is produced on both sides. You can stay in the production mode. It is also possible to shift from the first fluctuation pattern selection mode to the second fluctuation pattern selection mode, or to shift from the second fluctuation pattern selection mode to the first fluctuation pattern selection mode again due to the small hit winning. Is. Although the "small hit" is not provided in the present embodiment, one or a plurality of types of small hits may be provided for the lottery target on the special figure 1 side and / or the special figure 2 side in consideration of game playability and the like. it can.

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the probability variation jackpots 1 to 3 and the time saving jackpots 1 to 2 are the jackpot lottery targets on the special symbol 1 side, and the probability variation jackpots 4 to 6 are the jackpot lottery targets on the special symbol 2 side. It has become. The symbol lottery probability is as shown in the figure.

(4-2. About winning games)
Next, the content of the winning game by each of the above-mentioned hits will be described.

The notations of "5R", "7R", and "10R" in the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 and the time saving jackpots 1 and 2 in the "hit content" column of FIG. 4 indicate the maximum number of rounds related to the jackpot, respectively. In each jackpot of the present embodiment, the maximum opening time of the large winning opening in one round game is sufficiently expected to reach the maximum number of winnings (10) in the large winning opening. (For example, 29.8 seconds) ”is a big hit. It is up to you to decide what kind of opening pattern the opening pattern of the big winning opening related to the round game should be. For example, the opening pattern of the large winning opening for at least some round games (round games of a specific number of rounds) is set to a "short opening time (for example, 1.8 seconds)" shorter than the above long opening time. , It may be set to be a shorter "extremely short opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds)". In addition, during the maximum opening time, the large winning opening may be continuously opened, or an opening pattern involving one or more closings (for example, "1.3 seconds opening + 0.5 seconds closing + 27 seconds opening"). May be. The profit status (profit degree) during the big hit game becomes higher as the maximum number of rounds is relatively larger, and the maximum opening time of the big winning opening is higher in the long opening than in the short opening. In the case of the present embodiment, since the maximum opening time for each jackpot is the same, the larger the maximum number of rounds, the higher the profit state during the jackpot game.

(4-3. Transition destination game state after hit game: Fig. 4)
Next, a game state (game mode) that is transferred after each of the above jackpot games is completed will be described. In the column of "game state at the time of winning / transition destination game state" shown in FIG. 4, the game state at the time of winning and the game state to be transferred after the winning game (transition destination game state) are shown according to the hit type. The relationship is shown.

In the present embodiment, the gaming state after the jackpot game is determined at least based on the winning jackpot type and the gaming state (internal gaming state) at the time of winning. Specifically, when a big hit is won, the game state after the big hit game is determined based on the game state (internal game state or game mode) at the time of winning and the winning big hit type. (See the game state transition table selection table of FIG. 21 and the game state transition table of FIG. 22, which will be described later). The "game state at the time of winning" in FIG. 4 indicates the game mode (corresponding internal game state in parentheses), and the "transition destination game state" indicates the transition destination game mode (corresponding in parentheses). (Internal game state) is shown.

In order to facilitate the understanding of the present invention, first, the internal gaming state that is transferred after the jackpot game will be described. Details of the transition mode of the game mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7.

(4-3A. If you win a time-saving jackpot (time-saving jackpot 1-2))
First, the case where the time saving jackpot 1 (5R time saving A) and the time saving jackpot 2 (5R time saving B) are won will be described. When these time-saving big hits 1 and 2 are won, at least the internal gaming state is shifted to the "time-saving state (YJ = 02H)" regardless of the gaming state at the time of winning. The time-saving jackpots 1 and 2 are referred to as "time-saving jackpots" in that they are jackpots that trigger the transition to the time-saving state.

When the game shifts to the above "time saving state", the number of times the special symbol variation display game is executed (the number of symbol variation) is continued until the specified number of times is completed, and the jackpot (however, the internal game state) When the special symbol fluctuation display game ends without winning (excluding small hits that do not trigger the transition), the time saving state ends and the game shifts to the "normal state (YJ = 00H)" from the next game. It has become. Whether or not the specified number of times has been reached is determined by counting the number of times the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 are executed (the same applies to the count of the number of STs and the count of the number of ceiling games described later). That is, the time saving state is terminated when the total number of executions of the special symbol variation display games 1 and 2 (total number of fluctuations of the special figures 1 and 2) is completed by a predetermined number of times without a big hit.

When the time saving jackpot 1 is won, the time saving number of times 100 times (time saving A) is set as the above-mentioned specified number of times, and when the time saving jackpot 2 is won, the time saving number of times 50 times (time saving B) is set. That is, the time saving jackpots 1 and 2 of the present embodiment are finite time saving jackpots that give a finite number of time saving times. In addition, a big hit (infinite time saving big hit) may be provided so that the time saving state is continued until the next big hit winning (the number of time saving is infinite). Further, the time reduction jackpots 1 and 2 may be the same number of time reductions, or only one type of time reduction jackpot may be used.

(4-3B. If you win the probability variation jackpot (probability variation jackpot 1-7))
Next, the case where the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 are won will be described.

When any of the probabilistic big hits 1 to 7 is won, at least the internal gaming state is shifted to the "probability change state (YJ = 01H)" regardless of the game state at the time of winning. Probability change jackpots 1 to 7 are referred to as "probability change jackpots" in that they are jackpots that trigger a transition to a probability change state.

In the case of shifting to the above-mentioned "probability change state", the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (number of symbol fluctuations) is continued until the predetermined number of times is completed, as in the case of shifting to the above-mentioned time saving state. When the special symbol variation display game ends without winning the jackpot within the specified number of times, the probability variation state ends, which is the so-called "number-cut probability variation type (ST type (finite probability variation type))". To be precise, after the jackpot lottery probability is shifted to a gaming state (probability change state or latent probability state) accompanied by at least a high probability state, if the above specified number of times is completed without winning the jackpot, the high probability state is terminated. Let's shift the jackpot lottery probability to a low probability state. The upper limit number of times that this high probability state is continued is referred to as "ST number of times". Therefore, after shifting to the probabilistic state, when the number of STs ends, the probabilistic state ends and the state shifts to the normal state (YJ = 00H) (probability change A described later), and when the number of STs ends. Cases where only the high probability state ends, for details, only the "special symbol probability change function" from the "special symbol probability change function, special symbol time reduction function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function" ends. This includes a case (probability change B, probability change C described later) in which the state is shifted to the “time saving state (YJ = 02H)”.

The probabilistic state of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of probabilistic states (probability change A, probability change B, and probability change C) having different ST times, and the probability change A, probability change B, and probability change state are provided according to the winning jackpot type. It is designed to be transferred to any of C. Although details will be described later, when focusing on the game mode, ST100 mode is used when shifting to probability variation A, ST75 mode is used when shifting to probability variation B, and ST25 mode is used when shifting to probability variation C. The game mode is set to correspond to the probabilistic changes A to C (see FIG. 6).

(Probability change A, Probability change B, Probability change C)
The above "probability change A", "probability change B", and "probability change C" will be described.

(B) Probability change A (ST100 mode)
Probability change A is a probability change state in which the number of STs is set to 100 times. In the present embodiment, when the probability variation big 1, the probability variation jackpot 4, or the probability variation jackpot 7 is won, the process is shifted to the probability variation A. In the case of shifting to probability change A, if the number of STs is 100 without winning a big hit, the "probability change state" ends, and the internal game state shifts to the "normal state" from the next game.
(B) Probability change B (ST75 mode)
Probability change B is a probability change state in which the number of STs is set to 75 times (ST number of probability change B <ST number of probability change A). In the present embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot 2 or the probability variation jackpot 5 is won, the process shifts to the probability variation B. In the case of shifting to probability change B, if the number of STs is 75 without winning a big hit, the "probability change state" ends, and from the next game, the game shifts to the "time saving state" of 25 times. Specifically, after shifting to the probability change state after the big hit game, when the predetermined number of STs is completed, only the high probability state is ended (special symbol probability change function is turned off), and the game state is changed to "low probability state + electric". It shifts to the "supported state", that is, the "time saving state" (here, the probability change B = "ST number 75 times + time saving number 25 times"). Then, when the number of time reductions of 25 times is completed without winning the big hit, the "time reduction state" ends, and the game shifts to the "normal state" from the next game. Therefore, the electric support itself is given 100 times as in the above-mentioned probability change A, but the above-mentioned probability change A is shifted to the time saving state after the end of the predetermined number of ST times. Is very different.
(C) Probability change C (ST25 mode)
The probability variation C is a probability variation state in which the number of STs is set to 25 (ST count of probability variation C <ST count of probability variation B). In the present embodiment, when the probability variation jackpot 3 or the probability variation jackpot 6 is won, the process shifts to the probability variation C. In the case of shifting to probabilistic C, if the number of STs is 25 without winning a big hit, the "probability changing state" will end, and from the next game, it will be shifted to the "time saving state" with 75 time saving times (here, Probability change C = "ST number 25 times + time reduction number 75 times"). Then, when the number of time reductions of 75 times is completed without winning the big hit, the "time reduction state" ends, and the game shifts to the "normal state" from the next game. Like the probability changes A and B, the probability change C is also given 100 times of electric support.

In addition, the probability variation jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 are "pure probability variation jackpots (probability variation)" in that they are jackpots (probability variation time reduction jackpots) that give "probability variation state of a predetermined number of ST times + time reduction state of a predetermined time reduction number of times". However, in the present specification, it is treated as belonging to the "probability change jackpot" in that it first shifts to the probability change state. Therefore, to be precise, the probability variation jackpot includes a "probability variation jackpot" that does not give a time saving state and a "probability variation time saving jackpot" that grants a time saving state.

The probability variation A, the probability variation B, and the probability variation C have the same number of times of electric support (the number of times with the electric support) (100 times), but at least one of the probability variation A, the probability variation B, and the probability variation C is different. It may be the number of electric support. For example, probability change A is electric support 200 times, probability change B is electric support 150 times, probability change C is electric support 100 times, probability change A is electric support 200 times, probability change B is electric support 150 times, probability change C is electric support 150 times. Can be times. Further, although the probabilistic change B and the probabilistic change C have been described as shifting from the probabilistic change state to the time saving state, the probabilistic change state alone does not shift to the time saving state, that is, the probabilistic change state may be accompanied by a predetermined number of STs. In other words, the probabilistic jackpots 2, 3, 5, and 6 may be defined as the same "probability variation jackpots" as the probabilistic jackpots 1 and 7 instead of the above "probability variation time reduction jackpot". Further, at least a part of the probability variation jackpot of the present embodiment may be a latent probability jackpot (a latent probability transition trigger jackpot). For example, the probability variation jackpots 1 to 3 on the special figure 1 side can be set as latent probability jackpots.

<5. About production>
(5-1. Production mode)
Next, the effect mode (effect state) will be described. The gaming machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a plurality of types of effect modes related to the gaming state (internal gaming state and / or variable pattern selection mode). For example, "normal effect mode" that produces effects related to "normal state", "time reduction effect mode" that produces effects related to time saving state, and "probability change effect mode (ST effect mode)" that produces effects related to probability change state. , There are a plurality of types of production modes related to each gaming state, such as a "time reduction production mode" that produces effects related to the time reduction state. The effect control unit 24 executes an effect based on the current effect mode, thereby realizing an effect related to the current gaming state. In addition, in each effect mode, background display (background effect) as the background of the variable display screen of the decorative pattern is used so that the player can grasp what kind of game state the player is staying in in the effect mode. BGM and the like are switched and controlled to the production modes related to the gaming state. The details of each effect mode will be described later with reference to FIGS. 6 to 7.

The effect control unit 24 (CPU 241) is configured to be capable of transition control between each effect mode according to the transition (update) of the game state, and is a functional unit (effect state transition control means) for transition control between a plurality of types of effect modes. ). Among the effect control commands sent from the main control unit 20 (CPU201), the effect control unit 24 specifies an effect control command including information on the game state, specifically, the current game state, or the game state. The game state (internal game state (YJ) and / or fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) is grasped based on the information included in the specific effect control command that specifies that the main control unit 20 is to be transferred. The production mode is managed in a way that is consistent with the game state on the side, and the transition from one production mode to another production mode (transition between multiple types of production modes) can be controlled according to the processing status. Has been done. The specific effect control commands described above include, for example, a variation pattern specification command, a game state specification command, and a specific command (big hit start command, big hit end command) transmitted during a hit.

(5-2. Notice production)
Next, the notice production will be described. The effect control unit 24 is based on at least the variation pattern information included in the variation pattern designation command (in this embodiment, the information included in the variation pattern designation command and / or the decorative symbol designation command), and various various related to the jackpot lottery result. It is configured so that the appearance of the "notice effect" can be controlled (preliminary performance appearance control means). The main role of the advance notice production is to suggest (notice) the degree of expectation (well-known "winning expectation degree") of whether or not a person has won the winning type, and the degree of expectation of occurrence of a specific advance notice effect (degree of expectation of occurrence of specific advance notice) Suggestions such as. Most of the advance notice productions work as "fanning effects" to fuel the player's expectation of winning. Typical notice productions include "reach production", "pseudo-continuous production", "player participation type production", "look-ahead notice production", etc., which accompany these productions in a complex (simultaneous) manner. , Duplicate), or there are various notice effects (so-called step-up effects, cut-in effects, etc.) that occur independently.

(5-2-1. Reach production)
The "reach effect" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a reach state (so-called tempai state), and specifically, an effect mode in which a game result can be derived and displayed via the reach state. In some reach effects, when a specific reach effect appears, the expectation of winning is relatively higher than when a normal reach effect (N reach (normal reach) appears). Such a reach effect Called "SP reach (super reach)". SP reach has a relatively longer production time (variable time) than N reach in order to fuel the player's expectation of winning, and usually goes through N reach. The N reach and SP reach include a plurality of types of reach associated with the winning expectation.

When the game result is a hit, most of them are derived and displayed as a winning symbol (for example, a matching symbol) via this reach effect. That is, in the process of deriving and displaying the winning symbol, some kind of reach effect may appear. Therefore, for the player, the presence or absence of the reach effect is a clue to know the possibility of winning. Therefore, a plurality of types of "notice effects" are provided as an effect mode that announces (suggests) the possibility of a reach effect, in other words, an effect mode that can more clearly announce the degree of expectation of winning. This "notice effect" plays a role as a fan effect that announces the degree of expectation of winning, but there is a possibility that a specific effect (for example, reach effect or pseudo-ream) may occur, or a specific effect may occur. It also plays a role of deterministically notifying the occurrence. Therefore, for example, in the reach effect scenario, a certain advance notice effect may occur before the reach effect occurs, foretelling the possibility of the reach effect and also foretelling the winning expectation. In other words, the degree of expectation of winning is clarified more clearly with other advance notice effects than when the reach effect is generated alone, and the player's sense of expectation of winning can be fueled. In addition, the advance notice effect may be generated by combining (simultaneously or overlappingly) one or more types of expected advance notice effects in relation to the jackpot lottery result, and by combining multiple types of expected advance notice effects. , A clearer expectation of winning is shown. For example, even if the low expectation notice production has a low winning expectation, if the high expectation notice production with a high winning expectation is combined, the winning expectation will be further increased, and if a plurality of high expectation notice productions are combined. , The expectation of winning will increase dramatically.

(5-2-2. Pseudo-ream production (pseudo-ream))
The "pseudo-ream" refers to an effect mode accompanied by a pseudo continuous fluctuation display state (so-called "pseudo-variation") of a decorative pattern. This "pseudo-variation" is a display operation in which a part or all of the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped in the decorative symbol variation display game, and the decorative symbol re-variation display operation is executed from the temporarily stopped state. A variable display mode that is repeated once or multiple times. In this respect, it is different from the "look-ahead notice effect" described later, which can be executed over a plurality of symbol variation display games. Basically, the rate of occurrence of "pseudo-ren" is set so that the higher the number of pseudo-variations, the higher the expectation of winning. For example, the expectation of occurrence of a notice effect (for example, SP reach) with a high expectation of winning is higher when the number of pseudo fluctuations is twice than when the number of pseudo fluctuations is once. Therefore, in the case of a production scenario including a reach effect, the "pseudo-ream" is mainly generated in the stage before the reach state is formed (the stage before the reach effect), and after performing one or more pseudo fluctuations. , This variation, the reach effect, is executed, and the final game result is derived and displayed. In the present specification, when referred to as pseudo-N, it means the total number of times of pseudo-variation M and this variation. For example, when it is described as "pseudo 2", it means "pseudo fluctuation 1 time + main fluctuation", and when it is described as "pseudo 3", it means "pseudo fluctuation 2 times + main fluctuation".

(5-2-3. Player participation type production)
The "player participation type effect" is an effect mode belonging to the so-called "button notice effect", and is a predetermined operation (for example, once pressed, long) with respect to the operation means (effect button 13 and / or direction key 75). When a push, repeated hits, etc. are performed, the content of the effect can be changed based on the operation content. In the player participation type production, an "operation instruction effect" for instructing the operation means to perform a predetermined operation appears during the predetermined button validity period, and the player operates the operation means during the button validity period. When the operation is performed, the effect being displayed changes to another effect (effect during operation) based on the operation content, and the winning expectation, winning, or setting suggestion information is changed according to the effect mode (effect content) before and after the operation. Etc. can be notified. The effect control unit 24 is a function unit (operation) that sets an operation valid period (button valid period) in which the operation of the operation means is effective, based on a predetermined setting condition (for example, a predetermined timing during the player participation type effect). Effective period setting means), pre-operation effect control means that can control the appearance of a predetermined pre-operation effect during the button validity period, and a predetermined operation-time effect based on the operation of the effect button during the operation valid period. It is equipped with an operation control means that can control execution.

(5-2-5. Pre-reading notice production)
"Look-ahead notice effect" (hereinafter abbreviated as "look-ahead notice") refers to an operation-holding ball (undigested operation-holding ball) that has not yet been used for executing a symbol variation display game (special symbol variation display operation). , Mainly, using the hold display mode (hold change system look-ahead notice) and the effect in the symbol change display game (design change middle system look-ahead notice) that is executed first in chronological order, the winning of the operation hold ball This is a production mode that can notify the degree of expectation in advance.

The outline of the screen display of the liquid crystal display device according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5, including the pre-reading notice. FIG. 5 is an explanatory diagram provided for explaining the screen display of the liquid crystal display device 36 according to the present embodiment.

In a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 (in the figure, below the display area of the decorative symbol), a hold display area 76 for displaying the number of the special figure 1 operation hold balls and the number of the special figure 2 operation hold balls are displayed. A hold display area 77 for displaying is provided, and the presence or absence of the operation hold ball is indicated by a lighting state (with operation hold ball: “○ (white circle)” in the figure) or an off state (without operation hold ball:). Information on the current number of pending balls is notified by the dashed circles in the figure).

The display regarding the presence or absence of the operation hold ball (hereinafter referred to as "hold display") is sequentially displayed in the order of occurrence (winning order), and in each of the hold display areas 76 and 77, the leftmost operation hold ball is displayed. It is displayed as the earliest (that is, the oldest) actuated hold ball on the time axis among all the actuated hold balls in the hold display. In the present embodiment, as shown in the figure, hold display units a1 to d1 (icon images) composed of hold icons (icon images) provided in a part of the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36 in the same number (4 pieces) as the maximum number of hold storages. (Corresponding to the special symbol 1 side) and a2 to d2 (corresponding to the special symbol 2 side) are provided. The display modes of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 are usually switched to the operation state (lighting state) by the same number as the number of operation hold balls existing at the time of pre-reading determination, for example, only three. Therefore, this hold display unit acts as a hold display means for displaying the number of operation hold balls. However, when executing the look-ahead notice described later, the hold display mode of one of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 corresponding to the hold display unit is changed to a predetermined look-ahead notice display mode (special hold display mode). This works as a means of generating a look-ahead notice.

Further, on the left side of the hold display areas 76 and 77, a changing display area 78 for showing the operation hold ball actually used in the special symbol change display game is provided. In the case of this embodiment, the changing display area 78 is configured so that an image in which the icon of the game in progress hold K currently used for the game is placed appears on the icon of the seat J. That is, when the variable display of the special symbol 1 or the special symbol 2 is started, the oldest icon (icon image) of the hold a1 or a2 displayed in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is the hold K during game execution. As an icon, it moves on the icon of the seat J in the changing display area 78, and its state is maintained for a predetermined display time.

Further, in the lower right corner of the liquid crystal screen shown in FIG. 5, as a display area for a sub-effect (sub-effect) different from the main effect such as a decorative pattern or a notice effect, the operation holding balls of Special Figures 1 and 2 are held. , A sub-display area 79 capable of displaying information on the number of balls on hold for operation of the liquid crystal, information on the variable display operation of the special figures 1 and 2, and information on the variable display operation of the liquid crystal is provided. The information in the sub-display area 79 continues to be displayed even when the display of the decorative symbol and / or the hold display unit is hidden in displaying the notice effect. Therefore, it is possible to identify whether or not the symbol variation display game is currently in progress and how many operation-holding balls are by the information in the sub-display area 79. In addition, in the case of the first gaming state (for example, in the normal mode (normal state)) according to the gaming state (game mode or internal gaming state), the hold display area 76 has priority over the hold display area 77. An effect image that is displayed (cooperatively) (displaying one and not displaying the other, or lowering the transmittance of one and increasing the transmittance of the other, displaying one relatively larger than the other, In the second gaming state (for example, the time saving mode (time saving state) or ST mode (probability change state) described later) during the second gaming state (for example, attached to one side and not attached to the other side), the hold display area 77 is set to the hold display area. It can be displayed with priority over 76. Further, both the hold display areas 76 and 77 can be displayed during the first game state, and the hold display area 77 can be displayed preferentially during the second game state.

(About pre-reading notice)
Next, the look-ahead notice will be described. Regarding the appearance control related to this look-ahead notice, first, when the operation hold ball occurs in the main control unit 20 (when the start condition is satisfied), the operation hold ball executes the symbol variation display game (variation display of the special symbol). Before being subjected to the operation), the "look-ahead hit determination" for determining the jackpot lottery result related to the operation hold ball in advance is performed (steps S318 to S320 (random number determination process-special stop symbol data creation process) in FIG. 11). ), Steps S410 to S410 of FIG. 12 (see the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory to the special stop symbol creation process).

Furthermore, using the above-mentioned "look-ahead hit determination" result, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern at the start of fluctuation) when the operation holding ball is used to execute the symbol variation display game in the future is determined in advance. "Look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination" is performed (see step S320 (starting opening winning random number determination process) in FIG. 11). This pre-determined variation pattern of the special symbol is referred to as a "look-ahead variation pattern". In this look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination, for example, it is determined in advance what kind of reach state the reach fluctuation pattern goes through, or whether the normal fluctuation pattern does not go through the reach state. In this way, a series of processes for determining the look-ahead fluctuation pattern through the look-ahead hit determination is referred to as "look-ahead determination".

When the information regarding the pre-reading determination result is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24, the effect control unit 24 performs the effect control process related to the pre-reading notice. In the case of the present embodiment, it is possible to specify the number of operation-holding balls at the time of pre-reading determination (the number of existing operation-holding balls including the operation-holding ball that occurred this time) and the above-mentioned look-ahead fluctuation pattern information (at least the information that pre-reads the winning result). When a "hold addition command" is transmitted from the main control unit 20 to the effect control unit 24 (see step S323 in FIG. 11 described later) and the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, it is based on the information contained in the command. , As a part of the display control process related to the above-mentioned hold display, the effect control process related to the look-ahead notice is performed.

Specifically, when the effect control unit 24 receives the hold addition command, it performs a "look-ahead notice lottery" regarding whether or not to execute (appear) the look-ahead notice based on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information, and executes the look-ahead notice. In that case, the effect scenario related to the look-ahead notice is determined, and the look-ahead notice is displayed according to the effect scenario (see, for example, FIG. 32 described later). The execution probability of the pre-reading notice lottery is higher in the "big hit" than in the "missing", and in the case of the pre-reading variation pattern type in which the winning expectation is relatively high. Therefore, the winning expectation is indicated by whether or not the pre-reading notice is generated. In addition, the look-ahead notice targets the current operation-holding ball at the timing when the operation-holding ball occurs, at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game that is performed earlier in chronological order, or at a predetermined timing during the game. A look-ahead notice can appear. In addition, the hold addition command is the data on the upper byte side that makes it possible to specify the special figure type information (different from special figures 1 and 2), and the data on the lower byte side that makes it possible to specify the operation hold ball number information at the time of pre-reading determination. It consists of 2 bytes with. Further, the hold addition command is composed of two bytes of data on the upper byte side that specifies the winning result and data on the lower byte side that makes it possible to specify the content of the look-ahead fluctuation pattern as the look-ahead determination information (FIGS. 24 to 27). reference).

The information regarding the pre-reading determination result includes the jackpot lottery result (big hit lottery result at the start of fluctuation) and the fluctuation at the start of fluctuation, which are executed when the operation holding ball is provided to the symbol variation display game in the main control unit 20. This is game information obtained when a pattern or the like is determined in advance. Therefore, the information regarding the pre-reading determination result includes at least the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading winning result) information of the winning lottery result at the start of the fluctuation, and in addition, the pre-reading determination result (pre-reading symbol result) information of the symbol lottery result and Pre-reading determination result (pre-reading fluctuation pattern) information regarding the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation can be included. For example, the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information includes not only information on whether it is a "hit fluctuation pattern" at the time of winning or a "loss fluctuation pattern" at the time of losing (information on the winning lottery result), but also a symbol lottery result. Pre-reading judgment result (pre-reading symbol result) information, information on the presence or absence of reach (type if there is reach) and information on the presence or absence of pseudo-ream (the number of times if there is pseudo-ream), etc. Can also be included. What kind of information is included in the hold addition command to be sent to the effect control unit 24 can be appropriately determined depending on what kind of notice content is to be notified. For example, the "look-ahead fluctuation pattern" obtained by the look-ahead determination when the operation-holding ball is generated does not necessarily have to be the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" obtained when the operation-holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. .. For example, in the case of a fluctuation pattern in which "N reach 1" is specified at the start of fluctuation, the content specified by the look-ahead fluctuation pattern is not the type of reach itself of "N reach 1", but the gist of it, "N reach". Species (N reach 1 or N reach 2) ”may be specified.

(Pre-reading notice at the time of winning: Hold change notice)
In this embodiment, when the look-ahead notice is executed (when the look-ahead notice lottery is won), the hold icons of the hold display units a1 to d1 and a2 to d2 (for example, the icons shown in Remark 3 of FIG. Among the alien icons shown in 32), the hold icon that is the target of the look-ahead notice is, for example, from the white of the normal hold display (normal hold display mode) to the white blinking, blue, yellow of the notice display. A hold change notice that changes to a hold display (special hold display mode) with a special hold color or color of green, red, or rainbow can be executed. Since this notice of change on hold can appear at the time of winning (holding display), it is also referred to as "pre-reading notice of winning time system".

As a notice of this hold change, FIG. 5 shows an example in which the hatched hold display unit b1 has changed to a special hold display. Here, the display of the hold icon in white, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow color means that the winning expectation is high in this order, and in particular, the display of the rainbow-colored hold icon is confirmed as a big hit. It is a premium hold icon (notice of reservation) that will be displayed. The blinking white icon display is a hold icon that suggests the possibility of the "step-up hold change notice" described later, and is expected to be the final hold color (hold color). May remain blinking white without changing). In the case of blinking white, if the hold display remains the same, the winning expectation is the lowest among the special hold displays, but if it changes to another hold color, the winning expectation due to the hold color increases.

In the present embodiment, regarding the advance notice effect, if the big hit lottery result is lost, it is selected with a relatively low probability (low appearance rate), and if it is a big hit, it is selected with a relatively high probability (high appearance rate). As a notice production with a high expectation of winning, such as, if the expectation of winning is equal to or higher than a predetermined expected value (in this embodiment, the expectation of winning is 20% or more), the "high expectation (expected winning) "High" notice production, and the others are treated as low expectation notice production. In the case of the above-mentioned pending change notice, the winning expectation of white flashing, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow color is 1%, respectively. If it is 5%, 9%, 20%, 30%, 100%, "green, red, rainbow color" belongs to the high expectation notice production, and the others (blinking white, blue, yellow) are low. It belongs to the expectation notice production. When a look-ahead notice occurs, a high expectation notice (high number of pseudo-reams, SP reach, etc.) with a relatively high winning expectation during the symbol variation display game targeting the operation pending ball ), Combined with the content of the pre-reading notice production, the expectation of winning the win will be further increased.

The existing operation hold balls are sequentially digested when the symbol variation display game is executed. At this time, in order to express that one operation-holding ball has been digested, the display position of the hold display unit corresponding to the existing operation-holding ball is moved forward (shifted to the left side in sequence), and the number of the display is reduced. Although control (shift display) is performed, the above-mentioned special hold display continues to be displayed continuously while changing the display position of the hold display during this period. In this respect, the look-ahead notice is a single symbol variation such as a pseudo-ream in that a dedicated advance notice effect can appear across multiple symbol variation display games (multiple symbol variation display operations). It is different from the advance notice effect performed during operation.

The special hold display related to the hold change notice is (A) a case where it appears when a prize is won, in other words, a case where it appears at the timing of the hold display, and (B) a normal hold display (white) when a prize is won. However, there are cases where the normal hold display is changed to a special hold display (blue, etc.), and (C) the special hold display, which has a relatively higher expectation of winning than the current special hold display, is changed (for example, from blue to yellow or higher hold). In some cases, the color is changed step-up). In the case of (B) or (C), a predetermined timing during the shift display, a predetermined timing during the previously executed symbol variation display game, a predetermined timing during the appearance of a specific advance notice effect, and a hold. It is possible to change from one hold display mode to another hold display mode during a player-participation type production for a change notice (for example, during a button operation valid period). It should be noted that the hold change notice that changes to the hold display with a higher winning expectation as in (B) or (C) above is referred to as "step-up hold change notice".

Further, when the hold K during game execution is placed on the seat J, basically, the same display mode as the hold display mode in the hold display areas 76 and 77 is maintained, and the symbol variation display game is related to this time. A look-ahead notice (special hold display) for the operation hold ball can be notified to the player even during the game, but the hold display mode of the game execution hold K at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game. May change to other hold display modes. Such a change in the display mode of the hold K during game execution is also treated as belonging to the above-mentioned step-up hold change notice.

As a general rule, there is no "falling down of the special hold display" that changes from the current holding color to the holding color with a relatively low expectation of winning, but if there is an exceptional downfall, the operation holding ball is correct. It is suggested that this is the same premium notice of change on hold as the notice of reservation. An example of a downfall is a case where the hold color changes to a hold display such as "blue → white" or "red → blue", which has a lower expectation of winning than the current hold display. In addition, the hold display mode is not limited to the hold icon display by still images (static display mode), but the hold icon display by moving images (animation) (dynamic display mode: for example, the hold icon is rotated, vibrated, swayed, and blinked. (High-speed blinking or low-speed blinking) may be displayed.

(Pre-reading notice during design fluctuation: Pre-reading notice during fluctuation)
Further, in the present embodiment, unlike the pre-reading notice effect of the above-mentioned "winning time system", the "pre-reading notice during fluctuation" that is performed when the symbol variation display game is started can be displayed. This pre-reading notice during change is also referred to as a pre-reading notice of "design change middle system (change start time change system)" because it can appear at a predetermined timing during symbol change display, unlike the above-mentioned pending change notice.

This "pre-reading notice during fluctuation" means, for example, displaying a notice image dedicated to pre-reading on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 36, and executing this in one or a plurality of symbol fluctuation display games (single or continuous display). ) Is a look-ahead notice. That is, the pre-reading notice during fluctuation temporarily holds the right to execute the symbol variation display game related to the establishment of the start condition when the game ball wins a prize at the start port and the start condition is satisfied during a certain symbol variation display game. At the same time, a look-ahead notice lottery is performed regarding whether or not to execute the look-ahead notice effect, and when this look-ahead notice lottery is executed, if there are a plurality of operation hold balls (hold memory) existing at that time, , All or part of the reserved memory, the symbol variation display game can be expressed in some relation. For example. (For example, a preview image imitating the lightning bolt of FIG. 5B) is displayed. In this case, in each symbol variation display game, a look-ahead notice in which all or a part thereof is different may appear. For example, when appearing over three symbol fluctuation display games, the first symbol variation display game is a thunderstorm image, and the second symbol variation display game is a rain image (an image display expressing how it rains from a thunderstorm) or. The thunderstorm image and the third symbol variation display game can be a lightning bolt image. In addition, the degree of expectation of winning may differ depending on the preview image. In the above example, the thunderstorm image can have a low expectation, the rain image can have a medium expectation, and the lightning image can have a high expectation. In this case, if only the thunderstorm image is used, the expectation of winning is low, but if the lightning bolt image is displayed, the expectation of winning can be dramatically increased. In addition, it may be used as a pre-reading notice of a step-up system in which the degree of expectation gradually develops (the degree of expectation increases) as "thunderstorm image-> rain image-> lightning bolt image" each time the symbol variation display game is executed.

It should be noted that the effect means used for the pre-reading notice during fluctuation and the content of the effect can be appropriately determined. For example, in the case of image display, a combination of a background image or a decorative pattern dedicated to look-ahead may be used, or a combination of a dedicated sound effect, a light effect, or a movable body effect is combined with this image display. May be good.

In the present embodiment, the pre-reading notice during fluctuation and the notice of pending change can appear independently. Specifically, the lottery for executing the notice of pending change and the lottery for executing the notice of pre-reading during change are independent lottery. Therefore, there are cases where the pending change notice is generated independently, cases where the variable look-ahead notice is generated independently, and cases where the pending change notice and the variable look-ahead notice are generated simultaneously (overlapping). It should be noted that the effect means used when executing the pre-reading notice during fluctuation and the content of the effect can be appropriately determined.

(4-2-6. Setting suggestion production)
Further, in the present embodiment, it is possible to appear an effect mode (setting suggestion effect) that suggests information about the above "set value". For example, the setting suggestion effects as shown in (a) to (shi) below.
(A) "Low setting suggestion effect" that suggests a low setting range (settings 1-3, 1-2, 2-3, etc.).
(S) "High setting suggestion effect" that suggests a high setting range (settings 4 to 6, 4 to 5, 5 to 6, etc.).
(G) "Even-numbered setting suggestion effect" that suggests even-numbered settings (settings 2, 4, and 6).
(Y) "Odd number setting suggestion effect" that suggests odd number settings (settings 1, 3, 5).
(M) "Specific setting confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6). For example, "setting N confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies "setting N". However, it is not preferable to inform the internal set value deterministically. The reason is that anything that definitively suggests a low setting region, such as setting 1 and setting 2 confirmation, reduces the player's willingness to play. Therefore, it is preferable to definitively notify any of the settings 4 to 6 in the high setting region. In particular, if a specific setting confirmation effect such as setting 5 confirmation or setting 6 confirmation appears, the player's willingness to play can be improved.
(M) A "specific setting denial effect" that deterministically notifies that the value is not a specific setting value (any of settings 1 to 6 may be used).
(S) "Specific range suggestion effect" that suggests the set value of a specific range. For example, settings 3 to 5 (α ≤ set value ≤ β) are suggested, settings 4 or more (α ≤ set values) are suggested, and a plurality of specific values of “settings 1, 3, 5, 6” are suggested. .. In addition, the appearance rate is made different according to the set value, suggesting that the possibility of a certain set value is high / low, for example, it is difficult to appear in setting 1, moderately appears in setting 4, and easy to appear in setting 6. It is possible to do.

The appearance rate (execution probability) of the setting suggestion effect can be appropriately determined according to the set value. For example, it may be set so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect decreases as the set value is relatively low. Further, the effect mode of the setting suggestion effect is not particularly limited, and one or more of the sound effect, the light effect, the image display effect, and the movable body effect can be used.

In addition, the setting suggestion effect can appear at a predetermined timing in the symbol variation display game, for example, in combination with the advance notice effect or independently. Further, it can be made to appear not only in the symbol variation game but also in the big hit game, the "demo start waiting effect" and the "customer waiting effect (demo display)" described later while waiting for the game to start.

Further, by defining the appearance rate of a specific advance notice effect according to the set value, the advance notice effect itself can be made to function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, the appearance rate of at least one of a specific reach effect, a specific pseudo-ream (a specific pseudo-ream mode or a specific number of pseudo-reams), a specific player participation type effect, and a specific look-ahead notice. By making it different according to the set value, the notice effect itself can function as a "setting suggestion effect". For example, "high setting rich" when a specific SP reach is likely to appear at the time of loss, "high setting rich" when a pseudo-ream 3 times (pseudo fluctuation 2 times + main fluctuation) is likely to appear at the time of loss, a specific button When an operation effect appears, it suggests "setting 6 is confirmed". In addition, it is possible to make the look-ahead notice mode dedicated to the setting suggestion effect appear by using the look-ahead notice effect. For example, when the hold icon blinks at high speed, it is a high setting rich, and when one or all of the hold icons are changed to a dedicated hold icon (dedicated character or item image), it is a "high setting rich" suggestion.

<6. Directing means ＞
Various effects in the game machine 1 are manifested by the effect means provided in the game machine. Such a directing means may be any stimulus transmitting means capable of exerting a directing effect by appealing to human perception such as sight, hearing, and touch, and is a light generating (light emitting) means such as a decorative lamp 45 or an LED device. Light effect means), sound generator (sound effect means) such as speaker 46, effect display device (display means) such as liquid crystal display device 36, pressurizing device that transmits contact pressure to the operator's body, vibration to the player Typical examples thereof are a vibrating device (for example, the firing operation handle 15 trembles), a wind pressure device that gives wind pressure to the player's body, and a movable body accessory that exerts a visual effect by its operation. Here, the effect display device is a display device that appeals to the eyes like the image display device (image display means), but differs from the image display device in that it includes a display device that does not depend on an image (for example, a 7-segment display). When referred to as an image display device, it mainly refers to a type that displays an effect (image display effect) by displaying an image, and a device that displays an effect other than an image, such as a 7-segment display, is a concept of the above-mentioned effect display device. Included in.

<7. Game mode transition form: Fig. 6, Fig. 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, the contents of the “game mode” related to the variation pattern selection mode and the transition control between the game modes (between the game states) will be described. 6 and 7 are game flows showing an outline of the game mode and the effect mode related thereto.

In the present embodiment, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, a plurality of types of game modes such as general, precursor, ceiling, heaven, and ST (ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST final stage) are provided, and these games are provided. The progress of the game is controlled under the mode.

(7-1A. About "normal mode")
The normal mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to the normal state, and this normal mode is initially started when the RAM is cleared (for example, when the RAM is cleared, when the setting is changed, etc.). It is in the game mode of.

This normal mode includes a "general mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "00H" and a "precursor mode" in which the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "01H". The "general mode" is a game mode in which the player can stay for the longest time while the game is in progress. Basically, the player wins a big hit from this general mode and shifts to another game mode (ST mode, time saving mode, etc. described later). Will be done.

(7-1A-1. About the production in the general mode)
During the general mode, the mode shifts to the "general effect mode" that produces an effect related to the general mode. The general effect mode according to the present embodiment includes a plurality of types of general effect modes. For example, a player operates an operation means (effect button 13 or direction key 75) while waiting for a customer to obtain a preferred general effect mode. It is possible to switch to the general production mode. In the case of this embodiment, as shown in the block frame of the normal mode of FIG. 6, "normal mode (normal A effect mode)", "simple mode (normal B effect mode)", "premium mode (normal B effect mode)" It is possible to select one of the three types of production modes (player selectable production mode). However, it should not be confused that these effect modes are the effect modes under the same variation pattern selection mode (Tcode = 00H), and the player can freely switch the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) itself. Does not mean. Therefore, depending on the difference between normal, simple, and premium modes, the effects that appear may differ, but the variation pattern of the special symbol (variation pattern distribution table) that is internally selected does not change, so the symbol variation display game. Time (variation time of special symbol) itself does not change.

The "normal mode" is the default production mode, and the "simple mode" is a production mode in which the appearance rate of a specific advance notice production is low or does not appear at all (appearance rate 0%) as compared with the normal mode. (Specific notice effect appearance rate change mode).
In the "simple mode", for example, (a) a specific high expectation notice with a relatively high winning expectation (for example, a winning expectation of 30% or more in the normal mode) appears at a higher rate than in the normal mode. The probability is low, and when the specific high-expectation notice appears, the winning expectation is greatly increased, and the excitement when the high-expectation notice appears is increased. In addition, (b) the appearance rate of a specific low expectation notice (for example, a production with a winning expectation of less than 30% in the normal mode, a look-ahead notice) with a relatively low winning expectation is lower than the normal mode (0%). (Including), and there is little excessive fanning effect (effect at the time of loss), which is suitable for players who like simple effect. In addition, (c) the appearance rate of the player participation type production is lower than that in the normal mode (including 0%), and the appearance rate of the production accompanied by the production button operation is lower, so that the game is a favorite game in a calm game. Suitable for people.
In the "premium mode", the appearance rate of the winning production (the production with a rich jackpot winning (for example, the winning expectation of 90% or more) or the production with the winning jackpot confirmed) has a higher probability than in the normal mode and the simple mode, and 1 or The appearance rate of multiple types of specific low expectation notices has a low probability (including 0%). Therefore, it is a production mode suitable for a player who wants to enjoy the appearance of a premium production that can foretell the accuracy.
It should be noted that, in any of the normal, simple, and premium production modes, the appearance rates of the setting suggestion effects may be the same probability or different probabilities.

In addition, in each of the normal, simple, and premium production modes, it is possible to identify which mode is being used, so that a unique production corresponding to each production mode appears. Specifically, an image display effect (for example, a background image (background display), a character appearing at the time of a notice effect, or a decorative pattern), a sound effect (for example, BGM, a sound effect), and a light effect (for example, a specific one). At least one of the light emitting modes of the effect LED) changes according to each effect mode. This makes it possible to identify whether the production mode is normal, simple, or premium. In the present embodiment, the "daytime background image" in which the sun shines is used as the base in the general mode, and the background image reminiscent of the season "spring" in the "normal mode" (for example, a background image including a cherry tree), " In "Simple mode", a background image reminiscent of the season'summer'(for example, a background image including the sea and sandy beach), and in "Premium mode", a background image reminiscent of the season'autumn' (for example, a background image including mountains and trees of autumn leaves). The background display (background effect) is switched and controlled at least according to each effect mode such as (image). Under other game modes, it is possible to switch between at least two production modes, normal, simple and premium modes. In this case as well, as described above, it is possible to have a configuration in which it is possible to distinguish which mode is in effect.

(7-1B. About precursor mode)
Further, the above-mentioned "precursor mode" is a game mode in which the "ceiling (hamari relief function)" described later is shifted to near arrival. For example, a "precursor effect" for notifying that the ceiling is approaching is executed. It is provided as a game mode for. This precursor mode is shifted when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning a big hit during the normal mode (normal state). In the case of the present embodiment, if 989 games are addicted during the general mode, the game shifts to the precursor mode from the 990th game (see the block frame (α) of the “precursor mode” in FIG. 7). The details of the "ceiling" will be described later, but in the present embodiment, when 1000 games (1000 rotations) are addicted (continue to lose) in the normal mode (at least the internal gaming state is in the normal state), the ceiling function is activated. Extraordinary benefits (ceiling benefits) are granted (see the column of examples of ceiling benefits in Note 2 of FIG. 7).

(7-1B-1. About the production in the precursor mode)
During the precursor mode, the mode shifts to the "precursor effect mode" that performs the effect related to the precursor mode (precursor effect). During the precursor mode, the "day background image" in which the sun shines in the general mode is switched to the "night background image" in which the stars shine, and the display is displayed to notify that the precursor mode is in effect. In addition, it is possible to switch to either normal / simple / premium mode even during the precursor mode (see the block frame (γ) of the precursor mode in FIG. 7). Further, during the precursory effect mode, a countdown display appears as an effect (remaining ceiling number display effect) that can identify the number of remaining games (number of remaining ceilings) until reaching the ceiling (in the precursory mode of FIG. 7). See block frame (δ)). This residual ceiling number display effect may appear during a part of the precursor mode, and for example, the residual ceiling number display effect may be started (countdown display start) from the 996th game near the ceiling. For example, a countdown display (for example, suggesting a count of zero in a ceiling game) can be performed between 996 games and 999 games or between 995 to 1000 games including a ceiling game in consideration of the maximum number of reserved memories of 4. If the number of games up to the ceiling is known, there is a dramatic merit that the player can prevent wasteful hitting until the ceiling arrives.

In addition, during the precursory effect mode, at least a hold display mode (hold icon) different from that of the general mode appears. For example, in the general effect mode, the hold display mode is based on the simple "round icon" shown in FIG. 5, but in the precursor effect mode, the hold display mode is based on the "character icon". (See the block frame (ε) in the precursor mode of FIG. 7, FIG. 32). In addition, in the general mode, one or more hold displays existing immediately before the transition to the precursor mode (989th game) are all changed to the dedicated hold display (character icon) after the transition to the precursor mode (990th game). Alternatively, only the hold display to be digested may be changed to the dedicated hold display during the precursor mode. To specifically explain the latter configuration, for example, in the case where there are three operation hold balls during the execution of the 988 game, the hold display related to the 989th game to the 991th game is displayed as a "'round icon (in general mode). Digestion target hold: 989th game) "" Character icon (digestion target hold in precursor mode: 990th game) "" Character icon (digestion target hold in precursor mode: 991th game) "". In addition, from the start of the precursor effect mode until the predetermined number of games is exhausted, the same hold display (round icon) as in the general effect mode is used, and the ceiling is approaching (for example, considering the maximum number of hold memories of 4, 996). (Between games and 999 games), the display may be switched to the hold display (character icon) dedicated to the precursor. Further, during the precursor effect mode, the above-mentioned "remaining ceiling number display effect" and / or "hold display dedicated to precursor" may be displayed.

(Regarding the selection of normal / simple / premium mode in precursor mode)
It has been explained that it is possible to switch to either "normal / simple / premium mode" during the precursory effect mode of the present embodiment, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the switching is impossible (under the non-switchable state). It may be configured as such. That is, during the precursor effect mode, the effect mode in which the player can be selected can be fixed. For example, it can be fixed to the effect mode selected in the general mode, or it can be forcibly fixed to one of the normal / simple / premium modes (for example, the default normal mode). (The same applies to the heaven mode described later). In this case, the phenomenon that the effect mode, which was switchable in the general mode, cannot be switched, gives the player a sense of discomfort and makes the player aware that the ceiling is about to be reached. In particular, when the precursor mode and the general effect mode are hidden in the effect (for example, the precursor mode and the general effect mode have a common background image, the effect mode common to the precursor mode and the general mode). (Internally, the precursor mode is the precursor mode, but the effect mode is the general effect mode), the precursor mode itself is not provided, etc.), and the player is given a sense of discomfort that the effect mode cannot be switched. It is possible to notify that the ceiling game) is approaching.

(7-2. About "ST mode")
The ST mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to a probability change state (YJ = 01H), and in this ST mode, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is "02H", "ST early mode" and "ST early mode". The "ST middle stage mode" of "03H" and the "ST final stage mode" of "04H" are included. This ST mode shifts to the case where one of the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 is won.

In the case of the present embodiment, the game mode is changed to any of the above-mentioned "probability A" to "probability C" depending on which of the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 is won. Specifically, the transition form is as follows (A-1) to (A-3).

(A-1: When the probability variation C (25 STs + 75 time reductions) is given to the probability variation jackpots 3 and 6 (5R probability variation ST25, 7R probability variation ST25))
If any of the probabilistic jackpots 3 and 6 is won, the process shifts to "probability variation C" as already explained in FIG. 4, and "ST number 25 times + time reduction number 75 times" is given. In this case, the transition mode of the game mode is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" from the 1st to 25th games (in the early stage of the ST number of times) and stay in the "time saving mode" until the 26th to 100th games (within the time saving number of times). It has become. Focusing on this series of transition modes of "ST early mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ time saving mode", the game mode that is transitioned when the probability variation jackpot 3 or 6 is won is also referred to as "ST25 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(A-2: When the probability variation B (75 ST times + 25 time reductions) is given to the probability variation jackpots 2 and 5 (5R probability variation ST75, 7R probability variation ST75))
If any of the probability variation jackpots 2 and 5 is won, the process shifts to the above "probability variation B", and "ST number 75 times + time reduction number 25 times" is given (see FIG. 4). Therefore, in this case, the transition mode of the game mode is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" from the 1st to 25th games (ST middle stage) and to the 26th to 75th games (ST middle stage). It is designed to stay in "time saving mode" until the 76th to 100th games (within the time saving number of times). Focusing on this series of transition modes of "ST early stage mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle stage mode (ST 50 times) ⇒ time saving mode", the game mode that is transferred when the probability variation jackpot 2 or 5 is won is also called "ST75 mode". (See FIG. 4).

(A-3. When the probability variation A (ST number 100 times) is given to the probability variation jackpot 1, 3, 7 (5R probability variation ST100), 10R probability variation ST100, special 7R probability variation)
If any of the probabilistic jackpots 1, 3 and 7 is won, the process shifts to the above-mentioned "probability variation A" and "ST count 100 times" is given (see FIG. 4). Therefore, in this case, the transition mode of the game mode is to stay in the "ST early stage mode" from the 1st to 25th games (ST middle stage) and to the 26th to 75th games (ST middle stage). Stay in "ST end mode" until the 76th to 100th games (end of ST number). Focusing on this series of transition forms of "ST early stage mode (ST 25 times) ⇒ ST middle stage mode (ST 75 times) ⇒ ST final stage mode (ST 25 times)", the game mode that is transferred when the probability variation jackpot 1, 3, or 7 is won. Is also referred to as "ST100 mode" (see FIG. 4).

(B. Probability change A to Probability change C (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode) consecutive villa performance)
Since the "ST number" differs depending on which of the above probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 is won, that is, whether the transition is made to any of "probability variation A to probability variation C", the state with electric support in probability variation A to probability variation C ( The jackpot pullback rate (so-called "ream villa rate") in the probabilistic state or the time saving state is also different. That is, the advantage to the player (profit state (profit degree) given to the player) is different. For example, in the case of setting 6 (1/189 at low probability, 1/63 at high probability), the consecutive villa rate of probability variation A (ST number of 100 times), that is, the consecutive villa rate during ST is about 79.8%. .. In addition, the rate of consecutive villas in Probability B (“75 ST times + 25 time reductions” electric support 100 times) is about 70% for ST middle villas and about 12.4% for time reductions. The overall rate of consecutive villas (75 STs + 25 time reductions) is about 73.6%. In addition, the rate of consecutive villas in Probability C (“25 ST times + 75 times of time reduction”, 100 times of electric support) is about 33% for ST middle villa rate and about 32.8% for time reduction middle villa rate. The overall rate of consecutive villas (with electric support) is about 55%. In addition, the rate of consecutive villas in the case of a big hit in a short time (the rate of consecutive villas in a short time) is about 41.2%.

As described above, in the present embodiment, since a plurality of probabilistic jackpots having different ST times are provided, the degree of consecutive villas during ST can be made different depending on the winning jackpot type. In particular, as in the present embodiment, the number of times with electric support (number of times of electric support) is the same (for example, 100 times), but the number of STs is different (for example, ST25 times, ST75 times, ST100 times). The degree of profit and the degree of consecutive villas in the state with electric support can be greatly different depending on the winning jackpot type. As a result, the degree of freedom in playability is increased, and the fun of the game can be further improved. In addition, the degree of freedom of the related effect (ST effect mode described later) during the ST mode is also improved, and the effect can be made various.

(7-2-1. Fluctuation state of ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST late stage)
As described above, the "ST early stage mode", "ST middle stage mode", and "ST final stage mode" have different variable pattern selection modes (Tcode) (see FIG. 28). As a result, the variation pattern distribution table (see FIGS. 25 and 27) corresponding to each ST mode can be selected, so that each ST mode can create a characteristic ST mode. For example, in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the ST early stage mode, a fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 2 seconds is selected with a high probability, and in the fluctuation pattern distribution table for the ST middle stage mode, the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 3 seconds is high. The average fluctuation time (variation) of the special symbol related to each ST mode is selected by probability, and the fluctuation pattern with a fluctuation time of 4 seconds is selected with high probability in the fluctuation pattern distribution table in the ST final mode. (Pattern fluctuation time), in other words, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game (average execution time of the symbol variation display game per game or the number of executions of the symbol variation display game per unit time: (Also called "digestion time") can be slowed down. The average digestion time (average digestion time) of the above-mentioned symbol variation display game is at least the average digestion time at the time of loss, that is, the "average variation time of the loss variation pattern" in each ST mode.

In the case of the present embodiment, the relationship of the average digestion time related to the ST mode is defined so as to satisfy "ST final stage mode <ST middle stage mode <ST early stage mode" (see FIG. 27). That is, the ST early stage mode is controlled under "high speed fluctuation state (fastest in all game modes (average digestion time shortest)", the ST middle stage mode is controlled under "medium speed fluctuation state", and the ST final stage mode is controlled under "low speed fluctuation state". .. As long as the average digestion time (digestion speed) in each mode satisfies the above-mentioned relationship of "ST final stage mode <ST middle stage mode <ST early stage mode", the time is not particularly limited. However, the ST mode is a game mode related to the probability change state, and since the "special symbol time saving function" operates during the ST mode, any change state is at least more than the normal mode (normal state) of the symbol change display game. The average digestion time is short. Each of the above-mentioned fluctuation states (high-speed, medium-speed, and low-speed fluctuation states) has the following characteristics.

The above-mentioned "high-speed fluctuation state" is mainly useful in a game mode (game state) that emphasizes game playability, such as "increasing the average digestion speed of the game and increasing the time efficiency related to the progress of the game". During the ST mode (probability change state), it becomes "electric support state + high probability state (special symbol probability change function operation) + special symbol time reduction state (special symbol time reduction function operation)", and at least the symbol variation display game compared to the normal mode. The average digestion time of the game is relatively short, and the game state is devised so that the big hit can be easily won. However, in such a game state, some players may enjoy the production. Many players want to get a big hit as soon as possible. Therefore, in the present embodiment, in the case of the ST early stage mode, it is easy to select a fluctuation pattern having a relatively short fluctuation time, and a “high-speed fluctuation state” is generated.

On the other hand, under the "medium speed fluctuation state" or the "low speed fluctuation state" in which the fluctuation pattern with a relatively long fluctuation time is easily selected with respect to the above "high speed fluctuation state", the average of the symbol fluctuation display game Although the digestion time is longer than that in the "high-speed fluctuating state", it is possible to take a longer production time instead, which is useful for a game mode that emphasizes playability such as "enjoying the production".

(7-2-2. About the production in ST mode)
As described above, the ST mode according to the present embodiment includes the "ST early stage mode", the "ST middle stage mode", and the "ST final stage mode". Therefore, as the production modes corresponding to these ST modes (ST production mode), the production related to the "ST early stage" (ST early stage production) appears and is related to the "ST early stage production mode" and the "ST middle stage". "ST mid-stage production mode" in which the production to be performed (ST mid-stage production) appears, and "ST final stage production mode" in which the production related to "ST final stage" (ST final stage production) appears. ing.

(7-2-3. Example of production in ST mode: Fig. 29)
FIG. 29 shows an example of the effect during the ST early stage effect mode, the ST middle stage effect mode, and the ST final stage effect mode.

With reference to FIG. 29, the “ST early stage production mode” according to the present embodiment is an “underwater acoustic battle mode” that expresses a battle between submarines, and the “ST middle stage production mode” is a battle between fleets. The "water battle mode" and "ST final stage production mode" that produce the expressed effects are the "land battle modes" that express the battle between tanks. In other words, the ST mode period is divided into three, ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST late stage, according to the number of remaining STs, and which of these three ST divisions you are staying in is mainly used as the ST division effect. In addition, the player is notified by the dynamic change of the fluctuation pattern (change of the fluctuation state of high speed, medium speed, low speed) and the accompanying effect (switching of background effect, notice effect, etc.). In addition, the display of "right-handed ⇒" in the figure is a launch guidance notification effect (right-handed instruction effect) that encourages the player to strike right. Further, the hold icon is shown only in the effect example (effect example related to ST100 mode) in the figure (a), and (b) and (c) are omitted. Further, in the figure, the decorative symbol is shown to be stopped and displayed, but for convenience of explanation, this indicates when the game is finished and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and is actually operated. If there is a holding ball, naturally, the variable display of the decorative symbol is executed under the current effect mode.

Regarding the "ST division production" that divides the production mode during the ST period, the underwater acoustic battle mode is available in each of the "ST early stage production mode", "ST middle stage production mode", and "ST final stage production mode". , It is switched to the battle mode production such as the surface battle mode and the land battle mode, and it is notified that the number of STs is gradually approaching the final time.

In the present embodiment, regardless of which of the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 is won, the effect mode is started from the "underwater acoustic battle mode" of the ST early stage effect mode. That is, the ST early stage effect mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) is common to each ST mode (ST25, ST75, ST100 mode) as shown in the figure. However, each ST mode has a different transition form of the game mode, and accordingly, the transition form of the effect mode also differs.

(In ST25 mode: Fig. 29 (c))
In the case of the ST25 mode (ST number 25 times + time reduction number 75 times), as shown in FIG. 29 (c), the ST early stage effect mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) is stayed between 1 to 25 games. Then, when the 25th game of the final ST is finished, the game mode is changed from the ST early stage mode to the time saving mode, and along with this, the production mode is also changed from the ST early stage production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) to the time reduction production mode (fighters). (The details of the time-saving mode and the time-saving production mode will be described later). In this time saving production mode (air combat mode), the player stays for 26 to 100 games (time saving final game). Although not shown, when the 100th game is finished, the time saving mode ends (the state with electric support ends) and the mode shifts to the normal mode. Along with this, the effect mode also changes from the time saving effect mode to the normal effect mode. (General production mode) is shifted (the same applies to ST75 mode described later).

(In ST75 mode: Fig. 29 (b))
In the case of the ST75 mode (75 STs + 25 time reductions), as shown in FIG. 29 (b), the player stays in the ST early stage production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) between 1 to 25 games. When the 25th game is completed, the game mode is changed from the ST early stage mode to the ST middle stage mode, and the production mode is also changed from the ST early stage production mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) to the ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode). Then, until the 75th game, he stays in this ST midfield production mode (water battle mode). Then, when the 75th game of the final ST is finished, the game mode is shifted from the ST middle stage mode to the time saving mode, and along with this, the production mode is also changed from the ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode) to the time reduction production mode (air combat mode). Will be migrated. In the case of the ST75 mode, the player stays in the time saving effect mode (air combat mode) for 76 games to 100 games (time saving final game).

(In ST100 mode: Fig. 29 (a))
In the case of the ST100 mode (ST number of times 100 times), as shown in FIG. 29A, the above-mentioned ST75 mode is the same game mode and effect mode transition up to the 75th game. However, when the 75th game is finished, the game mode is shifted to the ST middle stage mode ST final stage mode, and along with this, both the production mode and the production mode are changed from the ST middle stage production mode (water battle mode) to the ST final stage production mode (land battle mode). Will be migrated to. In the case of the ST100 mode, all 100 games until the end of the state with electric support are in ST (probability change), and this land battle mode is a special production mode that occurs only in the ST100 mode. Also, in the case of ST100 mode, the background is switched in sequence in all sections of ST mode, so the player's tension is that the production mode is underwater acoustic battle (ST early stage), water battle (ST middle stage), land battle. It becomes stronger every time you switch to the mode (late ST), and becomes the strongest when you reach the land battle mode at the end of ST. Although not shown, when the 100th game is finished, the ST mode ends (the state with electric support ends) and the mode shifts to the normal mode. Along with this, the production mode also changes from the ST final stage production mode to the normal production. It shifts to the mode (general production mode).

As described above, in the present embodiment, whichever jackpot is won, the game starts from "ST early stage mode + ST early stage production mode". That is, regardless of the transition destination game state (probability change A to probability change C) of the big hit game, in other words, regardless of the initial remaining ST number (the number of STs given), the start effect mode after the big hit game (initial) The production mode) is common.

(Modification example related to ST mode: FIG. 30, FIG. 31)
The transition of the ST mode and the ST effect mode in the progress of the game is not limited to the above embodiment (FIG. 29), and can be configured to follow the transitions shown in the following modifications 1 and 2. Hereinafter, modifications 1 and 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 and 31.

(Modification example 1: FIG. 30 related to ST mode)
FIG. 30 shows a modification 1 according to the ST mode of the present embodiment. In addition, in FIG. 30, the hold icon corresponding to the effect mode is omitted (the same applies to FIG. 31 described later).

In the case of this example (modification example 1), the ST mode is also divided into a plurality of ST modes, but the start effect mode differs according to each ST mode (according to the winning jackpot type), and according to the remaining number of STs. , It is designed to start from a different production mode.

With reference to FIG. 30, in the case of the ST100 mode, as shown in FIG. 30 (a), the same mode transition as in the above embodiment (FIG. 29 (a)) is followed.

However, in the case of the ST75 mode (75 STs + 25 time reductions), paying attention to the fact that the initial remaining STs are 75, as shown in Fig. (B), the following mode transitions ( ST mode, transition of corresponding production mode) is followed.
"Between 1 to 25 games": "ST midfield mode + ST midfield production mode (water battle mode)"
"Between 26 and 75 games": "ST final stage mode + ST final stage production mode (land battle mode)"
"Between 76 and 100 games": "Time saving mode + Time saving production mode (air combat mode)"

Further, in the case of the ST25 mode (ST number 25 times + time reduction number 50 times), paying attention to the fact that the initial remaining ST number is 25 times, as shown in Fig. (C), the following mode transition is performed. It is designed to be followed.
"Between 1 to 25 games": "ST final stage mode + ST final stage production mode (land battle mode)"
"Between 26 and 100 games": "Time saving mode + Time saving production mode (air combat mode)"

In the case of this example, the "ST early stage mode" exists only in the ST100 mode, and the "ST middle stage mode" exists in the ST100 mode and the ST75 mode. And the ST final stage mode exists in common in each ST mode. The difference between this example and the above embodiment is as follows.

In the case of this example, focusing on the fluctuation state, in the ST75 mode, since the ST75 mode is started from the ST middle stage mode (water battle mode), the fluctuation state is started from the “medium speed fluctuation state”. Further, in the ST25 mode, since the ST25 mode is started from the ST final stage mode (land warfare mode), the fluctuation state is started from the “low speed fluctuation state”. That is, in the case of this example, as the initial number of STs is relatively small, the game mode in which the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game is slower is started. Therefore, the section (between 1 to 25 games) corresponding to the "high-speed fluctuation state" in the early stage of ST of the above embodiment is the section of the medium-speed fluctuation state or the low-speed fluctuation state, so that even when the number of STs is small. , There is no fear that the ST period will end in a blink of an eye, and there is an advantage that the ST period can be enjoyed for a long period of time.

(Modification example 2: FIG. 31 related to ST mode)
FIG. 31 shows a modification 2 of the ST effect mode according to the present embodiment. This example is started from the common "ST effect mode" regardless of the number of STs, and is shifted to the "time saving mode" when the time saving state is shifted. In the figure, an example starting from the ST middle stage mode is typically shown.

In the case of this example, as shown in FIGS. 31A to 31B, all of the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes are the common ST mode and ST effect mode (water battle mode). That is, the fluctuation pattern selection mode is the same during the ST mode (in this example, “03H” in the ST middle mode), and at least the fluctuation state (average digestion time) does not change according to the number of remaining STs. In this respect, it is significantly different from the above-described embodiment and the first modification. However, in the case of ST25 mode or ST75 mode, when the number of STs is completed, the ST mode is switched to the time saving mode (the variation pattern selection mode is updated to the time saving mode "05H"), and the effect mode is accompanied by this. Also shifts from the ST midfield production mode to the time saving production mode. In other words, in the case of ST25 and ST75 modes, the game mode (variable pattern selection mode) shifts in the state with electric support, and in the case of ST100 mode, the game mode (variable pattern selection mode) in the state with electric support occurs. ) Does not occur.

In the case of this example, since the ST effect mode (ST mode) does not change according to the number of STs, for example, the number of STs is relatively small such as "5 times, 10 times, 15 times" (low ST probability variation state). It is suitable when a plurality of types are provided. This is because when the number of STs is small, if the effect mode or the variable pattern selection mode is changed indiscriminately, the player feels rather annoyed.

In ST mode, the "normal mode", "simple mode", and "premium mode" described in the normal mode may be non-switchable, or the player can switch between them as in the normal mode. (The same applies to other game modes (time saving mode and heaven mode described later)). In the case of a switchable configuration, in each production mode of "normal mode", "simple mode", and "premium mode", a specific color (for example, a dark type) is set so that the background image color becomes darker in this order. You can switch to the background display color of (color), and change the display color and pattern of weapon images (submarines, ships, tanks, fighters (in the case of the time saving production mode described later)) related to each ST mode to normal / simple / premium mode. It is possible to perform display processing such as changing in each effect mode so that it is possible to identify which effect mode is switched to. In addition, how to determine the fluctuation state (average digestion time) in each mode is free. In the present embodiment, the relationship of "ST final stage mode <ST middle stage mode <ST early stage mode" has been described, but it may be configured as the variable state of the modified examples 1 and 2, or "ST early stage mode <ST middle stage mode <ST final stage". Like the relationship of "mode", the fluctuation state may be relatively slowed down according to the number of STs.

The following configurations (1) to (10) can be adopted for the "remaining ST number notification effect" for notifying the remaining ST number and the "remaining power support number notification effect" for notifying the remaining power support number.
(1) In each of the ST effect modes (each ST mode), the "remaining ST number notification effect" and / or the "remaining power support number notification effect" can be displayed.
Further, (2) When the remaining ST number notification effect is displayed, the remaining ST number of each effect ST mode may be notified. For example, in the ST early mode, the countdown is displayed from the remaining 25 times, in the ST middle mode, the countdown is displayed from the remaining 50 times, and in the ST final mode, the countdown is displayed from the remaining 25 times. And so on.
Further, (3) a configuration in which the remaining ST number notification effect does not appear (a configuration in which the remaining ST number cannot be grasped) may be used. In this case, only the residual power support number notification effect may be displayed.
Further, (4) the residual ST number notification effect may be started after a predetermined number of games have elapsed from the start of ST. For example, the countdown display may be started 5 games before the end of ST.
Further, (5) the residual ST number notification effect may appear only in a specific ST mode. The specific ST mode may be any of ST25, ST75, and ST100, but the player tends to play the game while paying attention to the number of remaining STs. Therefore, in ST75 or ST100 mode other than ST25 mode. It is preferable to make it appear.
Further, (6) the remaining ST number of times notification effect may be displayed during the ST effect mode (ST mode), and the residual power support number notification effect may be displayed during the time reduction effect mode (time reduction mode).
Further, (7) the residual ST number notification effect and the residual power support number notification effect are not separately displayed, but may be, for example, an effect mode that also serves as a countdown display. For example, using the same countdown display, the number display is set to "white" in ST mode and "red" in time saving mode, or a predetermined effect image around the number image in ST mode ((( For example, the display is provided with lights (glow effect and shadow effect), gradation, blurring, embossing, and other appropriate effect image processing, but no effect is used during the time saving mode.

(7-3. About "time saving mode")
Returning to the description of FIG. The time saving mode is a game mode in which the internal gaming state is related to the time saving state (YJ = 02H), and in the case of this embodiment, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is one type of "05H". In the time saving mode, in addition to the case where the time saving jackpot 1, 2 (5R time saving A, 5R time saving B) is won, the probability variation jackpot 2, 3, 5, 6 (5R probability variation ST75, 5R probability variation ST25, 7R probability variation ST75, 7R probability variation This is a game mode in which the transition is made even after the end of the number of STs when the ST25) or the like is won. After the time reduction mode ends (after the time reduction number ends), the mode shifts to the "normal mode" (see the thick upward arrow in the block frame of the time reduction mode in FIG. 6).

(7-3-1. Fluctuation state in time saving mode)
During the above time saving mode, "low probability (special symbol probability change function not activated) + electric support + special symbol time saving state", but regarding the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game, the high speed related to the above ST mode It is up to you whether the fluctuation state is the same as or substantially the same as the fluctuation state, the medium speed fluctuation state, or the low speed fluctuation state, or the fluctuation state has a different average digestion rate. However, the time saving mode is also shifted from the ST mode. Specifically, in the case of the ST25 mode, the transition is made from the "ST early mode (high-speed fluctuation state)" to the "time saving mode", and in the case of the ST75 mode. Is the point that shifts to "time saving mode" through "ST early stage mode (high speed fluctuation state)" and "ST middle stage mode (medium speed fluctuation state)", and the point that the jackpot lottery probability is low during the time saving mode (loss) It is preferable to position it as a game mode that emphasizes playability such as "enjoying the production" during the time saving mode in consideration of the fact that Therefore, it is preferable that the fluctuation state (average digestion time) in the time reduction mode is "variation state in the time reduction mode <high-speed fluctuation state in the ST mode", and more preferably "variation state in the time reduction mode ≤ ST mode". Medium speed fluctuation state ". As with the ST mode, the time saving mode may be configured so that a plurality of time saving modes can be switched. In this case, a plurality of variation pattern selection modes for the time saving mode may be provided.

(7-3-2. About the production in the time saving mode)
During the time saving mode, the mode shifts to the "time saving effect mode" in which the effect related to "in the time saving state" appears. In the time-saving production mode, it becomes an "air combat mode" that expresses the battle between fighters, and is distinguished from each game mode (ST early stage, ST middle stage, ST final stage mode) in the above ST mode. In the present embodiment, in addition to the case where the time saving jackpots 1 and 2 are won, the time saving mode after the ST completion of the probability variation jackpots 2, 3, 5 and 6 is also shifted to the same time saving effect mode. , The present invention is not limited to this. For example, the time-saving jackpot 1 and the time-saving jackpot 2 may be shifted to a time-saving effect mode (for example, a time-saving A effect mode when one time-saving jackpot is won, and a time-saving B effect mode when two time-saving jackpots are won). .. Further, the time saving effect mode at the time of winning the time saving big hit and the time saving effect mode after the end of ST at the time of winning the probability variation big hit (the time saving effect mode related to ST25 and ST75) may be different time saving effect modes.

(7-4. About "ceiling mode": Fig. 7)
Next, the "ceiling mode" will be described with reference to FIG. 7. In the present embodiment, a "ceiling function" is provided as a relief function in the case of a large hit. This ceiling function is a function of granting a predetermined profit state (ceiling privilege) in order to rescue the player when a predetermined number of games (predetermined number of fluctuations) is reached without winning a big hit. The ceiling privilege is given a profit state that is at least more advantageous than the normal state in terms of the hamari relief function. The number of ceiling games of this embodiment is the number of games (number of ceiling games) considering the jackpot lottery probability at low probability of settings 1 to 6, and is the 1000th game of Hamari in the normal mode (three times the number at low probability). ~ 4 times), the ceiling mode is a game mode that occurs in the 1000th game. The value of the number of ceiling games can be determined as appropriate. For example, when the jackpot lottery probability in the normal state is a relatively high probability (around 1/100) of the "Amadeji type", the number of ceiling games can be set to about 300 to 500 games. In the present embodiment, the number of ceiling games is the same regardless of the set value, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling game can be different in all or part of each set value. For example, settings 1 to 6 may have different numbers of ceiling games (for example, 1100 games to 1050 games: the higher the setting value, the smaller the number of ceiling games), or the high setting area (settings 4 to 6) may have 1000 ceiling games. As a game, the medium / low setting areas (settings 1 to 3) can be set to 1032 games, or only a specific setting value (for example, setting 6 of the highest setting) can be set to a number of ceiling games different from other setting values.

First, the types of ceiling benefits will be explained. The types of ceiling benefits are, for example, "infinite time reduction", "finite time reduction", "infinite probability change", "finite probability change", and "infinite probability change", as shown in the list of "examples of ceiling benefits" in Remark 2 of FIG. There are "infinite latency", "finite latency", "forced hit" and so on. These benefits can be broadly divided into "infinite time reduction" and "finite time reduction" as "ceiling time reduction type", "infinite probability variation" and "finite probability variation" as "ceiling probability variation type", and "infinite latency" and "finite latency". "Probability" is a ceiling privilege belonging to "Ceiling latent probability type", and "Forced hit" is a ceiling privilege belonging to "Ceiling hit type". Hereinafter, these ceiling privilege types will be described one by one.

(Infinite time reduction)
(A) "Infinite time reduction" is a privilege that grants a time reduction state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite time reduction, the number of time reductions is "no limit (infinity)", but it depends on the number of time reductions reaching the next big hit, such as 10000 times or 65536 times. Even when there is no possibility of ending the time saving state (when it is safe to think that it is 0%) or when giving an indigestible time saving number during the business hours of the pachinko hall (for example, 65536 times) In the present invention, it can be treated as belonging to infinite time saving.

(Limited time reduction)
(B) The "finite time reduction" is to give a time reduction state up to a predetermined number of time reductions so as to obtain an appropriate jackpot winning rate. This point is different from the above-mentioned infinite time reduction, which has no limit. As a typical example, the number of time reductions given is 100 times, which is the same as the time reduction jackpots 1 and 2, or 75 times, but the number of time reductions is not limited to the same as the time reduction jackpot, and different time reductions are given. The number of times (for example, 75 times, 150 times, 200 times, etc.) can be given. It should be noted that even when the number of time reductions that is "substantially until the next big hit" in the above "infinite time reduction" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite time reduction in that the number of times is limited, but as described above, the present invention. Then, it can be treated as belonging to infinite time saving.

(Specific example when giving a finite time reduction)
Here, when the finite time saving is given, the following giving forms (1) to (4) (finite time saving giving forms 1 to 4) can be used.

(Limited time reduction grant form 1)
(1) There are multiple types (number of types A) of the number of time reductions due to big hits (the number of time reductions given due to winning a big hit (time reduction state)), but the types of time reductions due to ceiling benefits (time reduction state) are more than that. Defined in a small number of types (number of types B). Specifically, it is configured to satisfy the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A".

In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, there are two types (number of types A) of 100 times (time reduction A) and 50 times (time reduction B) due to the jackpot. Then, only one type of time reduction of 100 times (time reduction A) is given. If the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A" is satisfied, the number of time reductions (for example, 150 times) different from the number of time reductions due to the big hit may be given. In addition, when two or more types of time reduction times (time reduction state) due to the ceiling privilege are provided (when "2 ≤ number of types B <number of types A"), one of the time reduction times (time reduction state) is performed by a predetermined lottery. ) Can be configured to be decidable.

(Limited time reduction grant form 2)
(2) When there are multiple types of time reduction times (time reduction state) due to ceiling benefits, one of the time reduction times (time reduction state) is determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery).
For example, it can be determined by lottery from a plurality of time saving times (50 times and 100 times in this embodiment) given due to the big hit winning. In this case, the same number of time reductions as the jackpot can be given. Of course, it may be determined by lottery from a plurality of time saving times (for example, 100 times, 75 times and 25 times) including the time saving times different from the time saving times given due to the big hit winning. In this case, a time saving number different from that of the big hit may be given. The lottery probability (selection rate) of the ceiling privilege type (here, each time reduction number of times) to be drawn may be the same or substantially the same, or all or part of it may be different. In addition, the lottery target may include a "ceiling privilege loss" that does not grant the ceiling privilege. When the ceiling privilege loss is included, the ceiling privilege is not necessarily given even if the ceiling game is reached, but in this case, "execution of the ceiling privilege lottery" will play a role as a hamari relief function.

Further, the lottery probability according to the "set value" may be determined, and the number of time reductions (time reduction state) may be determined by a predetermined lottery (ceiling privilege lottery according to the set value). For example, as the set value becomes higher, a relatively large number of time reductions (time reduction state) is easily selected. In other words, as the set value increases, benefits with a relatively high degree of profit are likely to be given (the same applies to other ceiling benefits described later). Specifically, when "100 times, 75 times, 50 times" is set as the type of time reduction, and "25%, 35%, 40%", "setting" when these lottery probabilities are "setting 1". In the case of "6", it is "45%, 30%, 25%" or the like. However, on the contrary, considering that the lower the set value is, the easier it is to make a big hit, it may be configured so that a relatively large number of time reductions can be easily selected as the set value becomes lower. In other words, as the set value becomes lower, it is easy to give a privilege with a relatively high degree of profit (the same applies to other ceiling benefits described later). Further, the configuration may be such that "when a specific ceiling privilege is given, a specific set value is fixed". For example, when 25 times of time reduction is given, "setting 6 is confirmed", and when 75 times is given, "setting 4 or more is confirmed". As described above, the ceiling privilege determination method related to the set value can give the player useful information such as the setting guessing element, and is useful for improving the player's motivation to play when he / she encounters the hamari.

(Limited time reduction grant form 3)
(3) When the average number of time reductions due to the time reduction jackpot is N and the average number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Equation 1) to (Equation 3).
(Equation 1) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of time reductions N <average number of time reductions M". In the case of the present embodiment, the average number of time reductions N due to the jackpot is 75 times, so the average number of time reductions M due to the ceiling privilege is set to be a larger number of time reductions. In the case of this example, since the ceiling privilege has a relatively higher profit margin than the normal jackpot winning, it is a nice privilege for the player who has a big hit and the motivation to play is significantly reduced. The average number of time reductions M may be an infinite number. When the average number of time reductions M is infinite, it is equivalent to the case where the above "infinite time reduction" is given.
(Equation 2) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of time reductions N = average number of time reductions M". In this case, the profit degree by the big hit (the number of time reductions) and the profit degree by the ceiling privilege are the same.
(Equation 3) It is configured so as to satisfy the relationship of "average time reduction N> average time reduction M". In this case, the profit degree by the jackpot is relatively lower than the profit degree by the ceiling privilege, and it is possible to prevent excessive privilege grant.

(Limited time reduction grant form 4)
(4) As in (Equation 3) above, paying attention to the fact that excessive benefits are not given, the number of hours saved is set to at least satisfy the relationship of "number of hours saved by ceiling benefits ≤ maximum number of hours saved by big hit". In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege is less than or equal to the number of time reductions of "time reduction A" due to the time reduction jackpot 1, for example, 100 times or 90 times. Further, paying attention to the minimum number of time reductions due to the big hit, the number of time reductions that satisfies the relationship of "minimum time reduction number due to the big hit ≤ time reduction number due to the ceiling privilege <maximum time reduction number due to the big hit" may be satisfied. In the present embodiment, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege is equal to or greater than the number of time reductions B due to the time reduction jackpot 2 and less than the number of time reductions of "time reduction A" due to the time reduction jackpot 1, for example, 50 times or 60 times.

(Infinite probability change)
(C) "Infinite probability change" is a privilege to give a probability change state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite probability change, the number of STs is "no limit on the number of times (infinite)", but as in the same event as the above "infinite time reduction", the number of STs until the next big hit (for example, 10,000 times) And 65536 times) may be given.

(Limited probability change)
(D) The "finite probability variation" is different from the above-mentioned infinite probability variation, in which a probability variation state is given up to a predetermined number of STs so as to obtain an appropriate jackpot winning rate. For example, as in the case of probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7, the number of STs is 100, 75, 25, or the like. Of course, it does not have to be the same number of STs as the probability variation jackpot 1 to 7, and 50 times, 150 times, etc. may be given. It should be noted that even when the number of STs that is "substantially until the next big hit" in the above "infinite probability change" is given, it can be said that it belongs to this finite probability change in that the number of times is limited, but it is the same as the above "infinite time reduction". Like an elephant, it may be treated as belonging to an infinite probability variation, or may be treated as belonging to a finite probability variation (the same applies to the infinite latency probability described later).

(Specific example when giving finite probability variation)
Here, when the finite probability variation is given, the following ceiling privilege granting forms (finite probability variation granting forms) 1 to the same phenomenon as those described in the finite time saving granting forms 1 to 4 of the above "finite time saving" It can be 4. In the following finite probability variation giving forms 1 to 4, the "time saving number" described in the above "finite time saving giving form 1 to 4" is appropriately read as "ST number", and the "time saving state" is appropriately read as "probability changing state". Since it is substantially the same as the content (concept), for convenience of explanation, the content will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

(Limited probability variation imparting form 1)
(1) The number of STs due to a big hit (the number of STs given due to winning a big hit (probability change state) is multiple types (number of types A), but the number of STs due to a ceiling privilege (probability change state) is less than that (type The number of types is B). That is, the configuration is such that the relationship of "number of types B <number of types A" is satisfied.

In the case of this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 4, the number of STs (probability change state) given to the probability change jackpot due to winning is 100 times (probability change A), 75 times (probability change B), and 25 times (probability change C). ), For example, in the ceiling privilege, only one type of ST number of 100 times (probability change A) is given.

(Limited probability variation grant form 2)
(2) When there are a plurality of types of ST times (probability change state) due to the ceiling privilege, one of the ST times (probability change state) is determined by a predetermined lottery. This point is substantially the same as the content in which the "time reduction number" explained in "(Limited time reduction grant form 2)" in the above finite time reduction is appropriately read as "ST number" and "time reduction state" as "probability change state". Is.

(Limited probability variation imparting form 3)
(3) When the average number of STs due to the probability variation jackpot is N and the average number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is M, it can be configured to satisfy the following relationships (Equation 4) to (Equation 6). Regarding these (Equation 4) to (Equation 6), the wording and the like of "Time reduction number" of (Equation 1) to (Equation 3) explained in "(Limited time reduction granting form 3)" in the above finite time reduction is "ST number of times". It is practically the same as the content replaced with the wording of ".
(Equation 4) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N <average number of STs M". The average number of STs M may be an infinite number. When the average number of STs M is infinite, it is equivalent to the case where the above "infinite probability variation" is given.
(Equation 5) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N = average number of STs M".
(Equation 6) It is configured to satisfy the relationship of "average number of STs N> average number of STs M".

(Limited probability variation imparting form 4)
(4) Focusing on the point of preventing excessive privilege granting, the number of STs satisfying at least the relationship of "ST number of times due to ceiling privilege ≤ maximum number of STs due to big hit" is set. In the present embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is less than or equal to the number of STs due to the probability variation jackpot 1, for example, 100 times or 90 times. Further, paying attention to the minimum number of STs due to the big hit, the number of STs satisfying the relationship of "minimum number of STs due to big hit ≤ number of STs due to ceiling privilege <maximum number of STs due to big hit" may be satisfied. In the present embodiment, the number of STs due to the ceiling privilege is equal to or greater than the number of STs due to the probability variation jackpot 6 and less than the number of STs due to the probability variation jackpot 1, for example, 25 times, 50 times, 75 times (the same number of STs as ST75). Is.

(Infinite latency)
(E) "Infinite latency" is a privilege that grants the latency state until the next big hit. In the case of infinite latency, the number of STs is "no limit (infinity)", but as with the above infinite time reduction and infinite probability variation, even if the number of STs that will be the next big hit is given. Good.

(Limited latency)
(F) The "finite latent probability" is different from the above-mentioned infinite latent probability, and the latent probability state is given up to a predetermined number of STs so as to have an appropriate winning rate. In the present embodiment, the latent probability jackpot that triggers the transition to the latent probability state is not provided, but if a part of the latent probability jackpot is a latent probability jackpot, the finite probability variation imparting embodiment 1 described in the finite probability variation The same configuration as in ~ 4 (configuration related to the number of STs) can be used. Since this point is substantially the same as the finite probability change (content in which the wording of "probability change state" is appropriately read as the wording of "latent state"), detailed explanation is omitted to avoid duplicate description. ..

(Forced hit)
(G) “Forced hit” means that a jackpot win is forcibly granted regardless of the jackpot lottery. "Unrelated to the big hit lottery" means that the big hit lottery itself is not executed, or even if the big hit lottery is executed, the result is treated as invalid, and the big hit lottery is completely irrelevant. Not limited to meaning.

The type of jackpot by forced hit is either probability variation jackpot (finite probability variation jackpot, infinite probability variation jackpot), time saving jackpot (finite time saving jackpot, infinite time saving jackpot), or latent probability jackpot (finite latent probability jackpot, infinite latent jackpot). There may be. In addition, the maximum number of rounds or the round game mode can be appropriately determined. In addition, the transition destination game state after the forced hit can be appropriately determined. For example, it may be in the same transition destination gaming state (for example, time saving A, time saving B, or probability variation (ST) A to C) as when the big hit shown in FIG. 4 is won, and the finite time saving explained in the above ceiling privilege. It is possible to shift to the same gaming state as the granting forms 1 to 4 and the finite probability variation granting forms 1 to 4.

However, in order not to give excessive benefits, as a compulsory hit, one of the big hits of the big hit lottery target (in this embodiment, one of the probabilistic big hits 1 to 7 and the time saving big hits 1 to 2) ) Is preferable. More preferably, the profit margin is not higher than the total jackpot. The profit referred to here means "profit from the jackpot game" or "profit including the jackpot game and the transition destination game state". In the present embodiment, it is preferable to satisfy at least the relationship of "profit from forced hit ≤ profit from probability variable jackpot 4 (the jackpot with the highest degree of profit among all jackpots)".

The ceiling privilege described above is useful as a hamari relief function because it can give a profit equal to or different from the profit degree given by the jackpot lottery result.

In addition, although various ceiling benefits have been described above, it is up to you to decide which ceiling benefit to use. In addition, ceiling benefits may include multiple types of benefits with different personalities (for example, finite time reduction and finite probability variation), or benefits with the same personality but different advantages (profit status) (for example, finite number of time reductions of 100 times). A plurality of types of time saving A and a finite time saving B having 50 times of time saving can be provided. In this case, what kind of plurality of types of ceiling benefits (two or more ceiling benefits) should be provided can be appropriately determined. For example, a finite time reduction and a finite probability variation can be provided, and which ceiling privilege is to be given can be determined by a predetermined lottery. In this case, the lottery probability may be the same regardless of the set value, but it is preferable to set the lottery probability according to the set value as in the above-mentioned "ceiling privilege lottery". Specifically, as the set value becomes higher, a privilege with a relatively high degree of profit (for example, the "finite probability change" side in the case of drawing a finite time reduction and a finite probability change) is likely to be given, or conversely, As the set value becomes higher, a privilege having a relatively low profit degree (for example, the "finite time reduction" side in the case of drawing a finite time reduction and a finite probability variation) can be easily given. In the case of a hit, the above-mentioned case of "providing multiple types of benefits with different personalities" includes, for example, a case of "providing at least two of a time-saving jackpot, a probabilistic jackpot, and a latent jackpot", and "having the same personality". However, in the case of "providing multiple types of benefits with different advantages (profit status)", for example, "case of providing multiple jackpots with different time reduction times (time reduction jackpots)" and "multiple jackpots with different ST times (probability variation jackpots)" Or there is a case where a latent jackpot) is provided.

In addition, after the ceiling privilege is granted, the game state (game mode) related to the ceiling privilege is controlled until the ceiling privilege is exhausted or until the jackpot is won. Specifically, if it is a "finite system privilege" such as finite time reduction, finite probability variation, or finite latent probability, the specified time reduction number or ST number is completed without winning the big hit, or the big hit is won. In some cases, the ceiling privilege will not be granted until the mode is changed to the normal mode (normal state) and the ceiling activation opportunity (ceiling game) arrives again. On the other hand, if it is an "infinite system privilege" such as infinite time reduction, infinite probability change, or infinite latency, the privilege state will be continued until the next big hit, and the privilege state will be terminated when the big hit is won.

In addition, when the ceiling privilege is finite probability variation, it is a "finite probability variation time reduction type" ceiling privilege that shifts to the time reduction state (finite time reduction or infinite time reduction) when the specified number of ST times is completed, as in ST75 mode and ST25 mode. You may. This "finite probability variation time saving type" includes the following types (A) to (Ding).
(A) A "finite probability variation / finite time reduction" type ceiling privilege that shifts to a finite time reduction (for example, 100 time reductions) when the specified ST number of times (for example, 75 times) is completed.
(B) A "finite probability change / infinite time reduction" type ceiling privilege that shifts to infinite time reduction when the specified number of STs is completed.
(Hei) When the first specified ST number (for example, 75 times) is completed, only the electric support state ends, and the second specified ST number (for example, 100 times) shifts to the finite latent probability. "Type ceiling privilege (the first specified ST number and the second specified ST number may be the same number or different times).
(Ding) When the specified number of STs (for example, 75 times) is completed, only the electric support state ends, and the "finite probability variation / infinite latency" type ceiling privilege that shifts to infinite latency.

Returning to the description of the ceiling mode of FIG. 7. Here, a configuration in which "finite time reduction" (100 times of maximum time reduction by big hit) is adopted as a ceiling privilege will be described as a typical example.

The ceiling mode is a game mode in which the internal game state is related to a time saving state or a probability change state according to the ceiling privilege, but since an example in which "finite time saving" is given is explained here, the ceiling mode is , It becomes a game mode related to the time saving state (YJ = 01H). However, in the ceiling mode, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to the dedicated "06H" in order to select the fluctuation pattern dedicated to the ceiling. Here, when reaching the ceiling (during the ceiling game), a fluctuation pattern of a relatively long fluctuation time (variation pattern for the ceiling) is selected in order to secure the production time width of the "ceiling effect" described later. There is. In the present embodiment, the longest variation pattern is selected in all game modes (during total variation pattern selection mode) (see the column of "ceiling variation" in FIG. 26). The fluctuation pattern for the ceiling is not particularly limited as long as the production time width of the "ceiling effect" can be secured, but a variation pattern having a fluctuation time of at least SP reach or more (at least SP reach without pseudo-ream) in the normal mode is used. It is preferable to configure it so that it can be selected.

In addition, since the big hit lottery is executed as usual in the 1000th game (ceiling game), if the big hit is won in the 1000th game, the big hit game will be started as usual after the end of the 1000th game. Become. Details will be described later, but in the present embodiment, when a big hit is won by chance in the ceiling game, the activation of the ceiling function is restricted (prohibited) (see the ceiling activation management process in FIG. 13 described later). ), If the ceiling privilege is given, it will be the case that the 1000th game is "missing". If a small hit is provided, even if the small hit is won in the 1000th game, the ceiling privilege will be given in the same way as the loss. This point is not limited to the case where the ceiling privilege has a finite time reduction, and the same applies to the case of infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation, finite probability variation, infinite latency, or finite latency. However, if the ceiling privilege is "forced hit", the jackpot winning state is forcibly controlled, so the jackpot lottery itself for the 1000th game is not executed, or the result is invalid even if the jackpot lottery is executed. It should be treated as if the jackpot for the ceiling was won. Therefore, when the ceiling privilege is "forced hit", after the end of the 1000th game, the jackpot game (forced jackpot game) related to the jackpot for the ceiling is started in the same way as when the normal jackpot is won. It becomes. In addition, the hitting effect during the forced jackpot game may be the same as the normal jackpot (same as any of the time saving jackpot 1 and the probability variation jackpot 1 to 7), or the hitting effect dedicated to the forced jackpot appears. You may.

(7-4-1. About the production in the ceiling mode)
During the ceiling mode, the mode shifts to the "ceiling effect mode" in which an effect (ceiling effect) for notifying the arrival of the ceiling appears. This ceiling effect mode is an effect mode dedicated to the ceiling (1000th game), and in the case of this embodiment, it is an effect mode for one game only (one rotation only). As an example of the effect in the ceiling effect mode, for example, a decorative symbol whose ceiling decorative symbol (ceiling decorative symbol) is at least different from that of the normal mode (number symbols 1 to 9) appears. The reason for choosing "at least a decorative pattern different from the normal mode" is that the ceiling is reached when a large hamari is encountered in the normal mode, and a decorative pattern different from the decorative pattern that has appeared in the normal mode for a long time is used. This is because it is appropriate to make it appear and notify the arrival of the ceiling.

Specifically, the decorative design for the ceiling is a special design (decorative design for the ceiling) that displays a special character, item, or character, and the decorative design for the ceiling is a design that has a strong impact in terms of production. Preferably, for example, the decorative symbol 778 (decorative symbol of "heaven", "☆", and "well") shown in Remark 1 of FIG. 7 is used. The usual decorative symbol rows are the right symbol, the middle symbol, and the left symbol (see FIG. 5), but the ceiling decorative symbol row does not necessarily have to be the three symbol rows. For example, it can be four symbol sequences of "heaven", "well", "arrival", and "tatsu", or two symbol sequences of "heaven" and "well". Further, in order to emphasize that it reaches the ceiling, a huge decorative symbol having a larger display area than a normal decorative symbol, or one with a predetermined effect image may be used. In addition, regarding the decorative symbols related to the ceiling game, normal decorative symbols are used during variable display (all or part of the decorative symbols are the same), and only the decorative symbols that are finally stopped (decorative stop symbols) are used as the decorative symbols for the ceiling. May be good.

In addition, a dedicated character image 777 appears as a background display of the decorative pattern. This character image 777 is a special effect that appears only in the ceiling game. In addition, as one of the characteristic effects, the "right-handed instruction image 779 (launch guidance notification effect)" that encourages right-handed hitting has appeared at the start of the symbol variation display game.

The reason why the right-handed instruction image 779 appears is as follows. When a finite time reduction is given as a ceiling privilege (the same applies when an infinite time reduction, a finite probability change, or an infinite probability change is given), the "state with electric support" occurs at the start of the 1000th game. For this reason, it is for the purpose of immediately notifying that the right-handed hit is advantageous and not causing a disadvantage to the player. In the present embodiment, the right-handed instruction image 779 appears at the same time as or substantially at the same time as the start of the symbol variation display game. In addition, in consideration of the fact that the "state with electric support" occurs at the time of ceiling (1000th game), during the precursor mode or for a part of the period (for example, the game immediately before the ceiling game (the final precursor mode)) It is preferable to bring out an effect (pre-launch guidance notification effect) that notifies that the player will be "right-handed" soon.

Further, in the case of "missing" in the symbol variation display game at the ceiling (1000th game), it is preferable not to display a specific advance notice effect. For example, at least one of the high-expectation notice effects does not appear, or at least one of the pseudo-ream, reach effect, and player participation type effect does not appear. The reason is that there is no need for a voluminous notice production that fuels the expectation of winning a big hit at the ceiling. However, this does not apply when a pseudo-ream, reach effect, player participation type effect, or the like is provided as a notice effect dedicated to the ceiling mode (ceiling game). However, in any case, it is preferable not to show the advance notice effect that arouses the expectation of winning. It is preferable to use a ceiling-only production mode that is different from the production mode that appears in the mode. In addition, as a privilege of reaching the ceiling, a setting suggestion effect may appear. This is because giving the player useful information such as a setting guessing factor is useful for improving the player's motivation to play when he encounters Hamari. When the setting suggestion effect is displayed on the ceiling, the appearance rate may be 100%, or the setting suggestion effect may be displayed by a predetermined lottery.

On the other hand, in the ceiling game (1000th game), if a big hit is accidentally won, the effect related to the ceiling effect mode is not displayed, but in the normal effect mode (for example, in the general mode or the precursor mode). The notice effect that can be displayed at the time of winning the big hit related to the above is to appear (see the column of "ceiling" in FIG. 24). This is because even if a big hit is made in the ceiling game, if the effect for the ceiling is made to appear, it becomes unclear whether the big hit or the ceiling privilege is given, and the player is confused.

(7-5. Heaven mode)
Heaven mode is a game mode that shifts to the next game (1001st game) of the ceiling game, and the internal game state becomes a game mode related to a time saving state, a probability change state, etc., depending on the ceiling privilege. Since the example in which "finite time reduction (time reduction number of times 100 times)" is given is described, the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the time reduction state (YJ = 01H). Further, in the heaven mode, the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated to the dedicated "07H" in order to select the fluctuation pattern dedicated to heaven. In addition, when shifting to this heaven mode, it is the case of ceiling benefits other than "forced hit" (finite time reduction, infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation, finite probability variation, infinite latency, or finite latency, etc.).

The heaven mode is terminated when the jackpot is won, or when the specified number of time reductions or STs is completed without winning the jackpot if it is the above-mentioned finite system ceiling privilege. Here, the ceiling privilege is explained as "finite time reduction (time reduction 100 times)", so the heaven mode is when the time reduction 100 times is completed or when the big hit is won during the time reduction digestion. It will be terminated. Then, when the heaven mode ends, the mode shifts to the normal mode. If the ceiling privilege is finite probability variation or finite latency, it will end when the number of STs ends or if a big hit is won within that number of STs, and infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation and infinite latency In that case, it will be terminated when the big hit is won.

(7-5-1. Fluctuation state related to heaven mode)
Here, during the heaven mode, any of the above-mentioned high-speed fluctuation states, medium-speed fluctuation states, low-speed fluctuation states, and other fluctuation states can be adopted. However, it is preferable to determine the fluctuation state in the heaven mode according to the ceiling privilege type. For example, when the ceiling privilege is finite time reduction or infinite time reduction, it is preferable to position it as a game mode that emphasizes playability such as "enjoying the production" as in the time reduction mode. That is, the fluctuation state in heaven mode when finite time reduction or infinite time reduction is given is "variation state in heaven mode <high-speed fluctuation state in ST mode" or "variation state in heaven mode ≤ medium speed fluctuation state in ST mode". It is preferable to say. However, in the case of infinite time reduction, a high-speed fluctuation state may be used in consideration of the fact that there is no limit to the number of time reductions.

On the other hand, in the case of finite probability variation or infinite probability variation, the jackpot lottery probability is high in addition to the state with electric support, so it is possible to make the fluctuation state the same as or substantially the same as the high speed fluctuation state in the ST mode. preferable. On the other hand, in the case of infinite latency or finite latency grant, the jackpot lottery probability is high, but it is controlled under the state without electric support, so it is difficult for the operation holding ball to occur as in the normal state. .. In consideration of this point, in the case of infinite latency or finite latency grant, the fluctuation state is the same as or substantially the same as the normal mode, or at least the fluctuation state slower than the time saving mode (the fluctuation state in which the average digestion time is relatively long). ) Is preferable. That is, the relationship satisfies "variable state in normal mode ≤ infinite latent probability or variable state in finite latent probability <variable state in time saving mode".

(7-5-2. About the production in heaven mode)
During the heaven mode, the mode is changed to the "heaven production mode" that performs the production related to the heaven mode (the production for heaven). This heaven effect mode is an effect mode dedicated to the next game on the ceiling (after the 1001 game), and ends when the heaven mode ends. During this heaven effect mode, the background display is switched to a special background display different from other game modes (for example, a "space background image" expressing outer space), and the heaven mode is notified.

In addition, when giving a finite time reduction or an infinite time reduction as a ceiling privilege, the above-mentioned "time reduction effect mode (air combat mode)" related to the time reduction state may be adopted as the heaven effect mode.

In addition, when finite probability variation, infinite probability variation, finite latency, or infinite latency is given as the ceiling privilege, the above-mentioned "ST effect mode" related to the probability variation state may be adopted as the heaven effect mode. In this case, as in the ST effect mode, the mode may be changed to a different ST effect mode according to the number of ST digestions. Specifically, depending on the number of ST digestions, the production modes are sequentially set in the order of "ST production early stage mode (underwater acoustic battle mode) ⇒ ST production middle stage mode (water battle mode) ⇒ ST production final stage mode (land battle mode)". Can be migrated. In the case of infinite probability change or infinite latency, there is no limit on the number of STs, so after the 101st ST, the ST final stage production mode may be continued as it is, or a new ST production mode (ST continuation production mode) may be continued. May be migrated to. Further, the ST 101th stage may return to the ST effect early stage mode, and the transition of "ST effect early stage mode ⇒ ST effect middle stage mode ⇒ ST effect final stage mode" may be looped again.

Further, during the heaven production mode, it may be configured to be switchable to either normal / simple / premium mode as in the same event as the contents of the "precursor production mode" and "ST production mode" already described. , The configuration may be such that switching between normal / simple / premium modes is impossible (controlled under the non-switchable state).

In addition, as a part of the relief measures for the player who has made a big hit, the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect may be higher in the heaven mode than in the other game modes. For example, the heaven mode is configured so that the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion effect that can appear in the symbol variation display game) is higher than that of the normal mode (general mode and / or precursor mode). Can be done. In particular, if the ceiling privilege is a privilege with electric support (ceiling privilege other than infinite latency and finite latency), the player is placed in a high base state during heaven mode, so the player has his own ball (game). It is possible to proceed with the game without significantly reducing the game medium owned by the person or the game value equivalent thereto, or while maintaining the current situation. Therefore, some players can get advantageous information by eating the hamari, contrary to the normal mode, such as "You may eat a little hamari until you see the setting suggestion effect". It is thought that there are many players who want to do it. In consideration of such a point, it is preferable to change the appearance rate of the setting suggestion effect with a high probability during the heaven mode to function as a "setting suggestion appearance chance zone". As a result, the player's willingness to play can be improved after the hamari.

<8. Game progress mode: Fig. 6, Fig. 7>
Next, with reference to FIGS. 6 and 7, a specific game progress mode related to the game machine 1 will be described while paying attention to the game mode transition control and the effect aspect.

It should be noted that what kind of hitting method the player should take to obtain an advantageous situation basically changes according to the internal gaming state (when focusing on the gaming mode, it is related to the internal gaming state). It changes according to the game mode to be played). As already explained, in the normal state (normal mode), the "left-handed" aiming at the game ball so as to pass the left flow path 3b is considered to be advantageous, and the probability change state (ST mode) or the time saving state (ST mode) or the time saving state ( In the case of time saving mode, ceiling mode, heaven mode), "right-handed" is advantageous in aiming the game ball so as to pass through the right-hand flow path 3c. In the following, it is explained that the player follows an advantageous striking method according to the gaming state, and unless otherwise specified, in the case of a left striking advantage (normal state), "design variation display game 1 on the special figure 1 side". Is executed, and in the case of right-handed advantage (probability change state, time saving state), it is assumed that the “design variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side” is executed. Further, the game mode will be described as starting from the "normal mode" which is the initial game mode.

If a big hit is won during the normal mode, it becomes a so-called "first hit", and the big hit game according to the winning big hit is started (see the block frame of "first hit" in FIG. 6). The way of hitting during the big hit is "right hit" aiming at the big winning opening 50 side.

To explain by focusing on the production side, if the probability variation jackpot 1 (5R probability variation ST100: special figure 1 side highest profit jackpot) is won during the normal mode, the decorative symbols will stop at "7 symbol alignment (777)". You will be informed that you have won the jackpot that will bring you the highest profit. As for the winning effect at the time of winning the probabilistic big hit 1, the "ST rush confirmation effect" that deterministically notifies the ST mode rush is displayed, and the transition to the ST100 mode is notified. Then, after the jackpot game, the mode shifts to the ST100 mode.

On the other hand, if the probability variation jackpots 2, 3 and the time saving jackpots 1 and 2 are won in the normal mode, the decorative symbols stop except for "7 symbol alignment", which is the probability variation jackpot in this symbol variation display game. It is not notified whether it is a time saving big hit. If the game is stopped except for "7 symbols", the "ST rush challenge effect" of the player participation type effect will be developed in the subsequent hit effect during the big hit game, and the big hit type will be notified by this effect result. .. In this ST rush challenge production, if a success production appears, it is definitely notified that it is a probabilistic jackpot, and if a failure production appears, it is a time-saving jackpot. In addition, there are two types of success productions, "great success production" and "normal success production", and when "great success production" appears, it means that you have won the probability change jackpot 2 (ST75 mode). However, when the "normal success effect" appears, it is notified that the probability variation jackpot 3 (ST25 mode) has been won. On the other hand, there are two types of failure effects, "great failure effect" and "normal failure effect". When "great failure effect" appears, the time reduction jackpot 2 (time reduction B: time reduction 50 times) When the "normal failure effect" appears, it is notified that the player has won the time saving jackpot 1 (time saving A: time saving 100 times).

If the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 3 are won, the game shifts to the corresponding ST mode after the jackpot game (see the block frame of the ST mode in FIG. 6), and if the time saving jackpots 1 and 2 are won, after the jackpot game. , Shift to the time saving mode (see the block frame of the time saving mode in FIG. 6). Then, during the ST mode and the time saving mode, as described above, the “right-handed advantage” is obtained, and the symbol variation display game 2 on the special figure 2 side is executed. If the big hit is won on the special figure 2 side, as shown in FIG. 4, all are probabilistic big hits, so as long as the big hit continues to be won during the ST mode or the time saving mode, the ST mode loops and a great profit for the player. Is supposed to bring.

If any of the probabilistic jackpots 4 to 7 is won during the ST mode, the decorative symbol corresponding to the jackpot type is stopped and displayed. For example, if you win the "Probability change jackpot 4 (10R probability variation ST100)" of the highest profit jackpot on the special figure 2 side (the jackpot of the highest profit among all jackpots), a special decorative pattern (for example, a number) that is not displayed in the normal mode The symbol that displays the character, not the symbol) stops and congratulates the big hit winner. In addition, if the profit margin is lower than the probability variation jackpot 4 (10R probability variation ST100) but the profit margin is higher than the probability variation jackpot 6 (7R probability variation ST25), the "odd number" is won. When "matching symbols" is stopped and "probability variation jackpot 6 (7R probability variation ST25)" with the lowest profitability is won, "even-numbered symbol alignment" is stopped. In addition, during the big hit game, the hitting effect according to the big hit type appears.

(When winning "Probability change jackpot 7 (special 7R probability change)")
However, when the "probability variation jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation)" is won, the "odd symbol alignment" or "even symbol alignment" is stopped and displayed with a predetermined probability. If even-numbered symbols are won to stop, during the subsequent jackpot game, at least a part of the same probability variation jackpot 5 (7R probability variation ST25) and / or probability variation jackpot 6 (7R probability variation ST75) will be produced. Information (for example, confirmation of entry into ST mode (ST100 mode)) regarding the winning of 7 probable big hits is notified (promoted) at a predetermined timing of the hitting effect, for example, during a specific round effect or ending effect. Be notified). As a result, even if "even numbered symbols" is stopped, the possibility of entering ST100 mode, which can be expected to be highly profitable, remains, and the expectation of entering ST mode can be fueled by the hit-and-miss production. It has become.

However, in the hitting effect, the same (same) hitting effect as the probability variation jackpot 5 (7R probability variation ST25) and / or the probability variation jackpot 7 (7R probability variation ST75) appears in the production without performing the above promotion notification. You may conceal the winning of the probability variation jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation) and notify the winning of the probability variation jackpot 7 (special 7R probability variation) in the ST mode after the jackpot game.

When the above promotion notification is performed during the ST mode (ST production mode), it may be during the period until the ST early mode ends (until the ST number 25 times ends), but the ST early mode end game (ST). It is preferable to notify during the 25th rotation). Specifically, until the number of first STs (for example, 25 STs by winning 5 probabilistic jackpots) or the number of second STs (for example, 100 STs by 7 probabilistic jackpots) is reached, whichever is smaller (for example, the number of games during ST) The display can be controlled so as not to directly indicate whether it is the first hit (for example, the probability variation jackpot 5) or the second hit (for example, the probability variation jackpot 7) until the number reaches 25 times. Is. However, the timing is not limited to such notification timing, and for example, the timing of the promotion notification may be a predetermined timing at the start of the next game after the ST early stage production mode ends or in the ST middle stage mode. Further, a "step-up" promotion notification may be performed in which the first promotion notification is performed in the ST early stage production mode and the second promotion notification is performed in the ST middle stage production mode. In this case, the first promotion notification is a promotion notification that notifies that the ST75 mode entry or higher is definite, and the second promotion notification is a promotion notification that deterministically notifies the ST100 mode entry. In this way, it is possible to maintain a feeling of tension as to whether the winning jackpot type is any of the probabilistic jackpots 5 to 7 for a long period of time during the jackpot game to the ST mode. In other words, the expectation of transition to ST100 mode can be maintained. Whether to notify the promotion during the hitting effect or to notify the promotion during the ST mode can be determined by a scenario lottery when determining the winning effect scenario at the start of the big hit game.

(Transition to ceiling mode)
Further, in the normal mode, if the jackpot is not won until the 989th game, the game shifts to the "precursor mode" from the 990th game (see the block frame of the precursor mode in FIG. 7). Then, if the player cannot win the jackpot even during the precursor mode and reaches the 1000th game (reaching the ceiling), the game shifts to the "ceiling mode" and the ceiling function is activated. In the present embodiment, in the case of loss, the ceiling privilege "finite time reduction" is given, and after the 1001st game, the mode is shifted to the heaven mode.

<9. About the specific advance notice production prohibition function in the precursor mode: Fig. 32>
Here, in the present embodiment, the specific notice effect prohibition function (specific notice effect prohibition means) operates during the precursor mode. Specifically, paying attention to the fact that the precursor mode is a game mode related to notification of the proximity of the ceiling and the ceiling mode is a game mode related to the granting of ceiling benefits, the precursor mode (precursor effect mode) and the ceiling mode (ceiling effect) In mode), the appearance of a specific notice effect is prohibited. In the case of the present embodiment, as the prohibition function, "pre-reading notice prohibiting means (specific look-ahead notice prohibiting means)" for prohibiting the execution of the look-ahead notice is provided. Hereinafter, “means for prohibiting pre-reading notice during precursors” will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 32.

FIG. 32 is an explanatory diagram for explaining a case where the look-ahead notice is prohibited by the means for prohibiting the look-ahead notice during the precursory sign. FIG. 32 describes a mode in which the “holding change notice” is treated as a prohibited object by the precursory pre-reading notice prohibiting means, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the “holding change notice” and / or “variation” as the prohibited object. It can be a "middle look-ahead notice".

(A. Configuration without pre-reading notice prohibition means in precursors (normal case): Fig. 32 (a))
A “normal case” will be described with reference to FIG. 32 (a). This "normal case" indicates a configuration in which the precursory middle-ahead advance notice prohibition means is not provided, and a configuration in which the precursory middle-ahead advance notice prohibition means described later is provided (Fig. (C-1) (c-2)). ) Is shown as a comparative example. The illustrated hold icon 770 is a "normal hold display (white hold)", and the hold icon 771 is a "high expectation hold display" of the special hold display (normal hold change notice), and the hold icon 772. Indicates "Ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice)". Further, the hold icon 771 here indicates, among the special hold displays, the "rainbow-colored hold (reserved hold display)" that can appear at the time of winning a big hit.

Further, in FIG. (A), for convenience of explanation, when three operation-holding balls of the 997th to 999th games exist, the operation-holding ball related to the 1000th game (ceiling game) is used as the fourth operation-holding ball. This is a representative case in which (hereinafter referred to as "ceiling game hold ball") has occurred.

In the case of the comparative example shown in Fig. (A), since the configuration does not provide the "preliminary advance notice prohibition means", the presence or absence of the special hold display (hereinafter referred to as "normal hold change notice") before the arrival of the ceiling game Regardless of this, the 1000th game hold display is allowed to execute the ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice). Here, "allowing" the ceiling hold display means that it may appear either when it always appears or when it appears when a predetermined lottery is won ((b) described later). ) (C) (C) (C). Therefore, in the case of this comparative example, even if there is a notice of change in the hold of the third rainbow-colored hold (this secured stay), the hold display of the fourth ceiling game hold ball is Fujimaru-kun's hold icon 772 (for ceiling). Can be changed to (pending display).

However, if a big hit is won before reaching the ceiling, the ceiling function will not be activated (the number of ceiling games will be reset), so it can be said that there is little need to execute the hold display for the ceiling. In addition, if the hold change notice (special hold display) that announces the winning expectation and the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) that announces that it is a ceiling game are displayed at the same time, a notice with a different personality The display will appear at the same time, which may confuse the player. Therefore, in the present embodiment, these problems are solved by providing a means for prohibiting pre-reading notice in the precursor.

(B. Configuration example in which the pre-reading notice prohibiting means is provided: FIG. 32 (b), (c-1), (c-2))
Hereinafter, a configuration example in which the above-mentioned “means for prohibiting pre-reading notice during precursory” is provided will be described. This includes the "case of preferentially executing the normal look-ahead notice" shown in Fig. (B) and the "case of preferentially executing the ceiling look-ahead notice" shown in Figures (c-1) and (c-2). is there.

(Case of preferentially executing normal look-ahead notice: Fig. 32 (b))
FIG. 32 (b) shows a "case in which the normal look-ahead notice is prioritized", specifically, "a case in which the ceiling look-ahead notice is prohibited when the reserved reservation exists before the arrival of the ceiling game (ceiling game hold ball). (Case where pre-reading notice is prohibited) ”is shown. Here, as in the case of the above figure (a), the case where the third operation holding ball is the “reserved retention” is shown.

In the case of this example, if the reserved reservation exists before the arrival of the ceiling game, the hold display of the 1000th game (ceiling game) is not changed to the ceiling hold display (ceiling hold change notice) and is "normal hold display". Appears. In other words, the "pre-reading prohibition target hold" by the pre-reading notice prohibition means is set as the "ceiling game hold ball".

The reason why the pre-reading prohibited target hold is set to "ceiling game hold ball" is as follows. If there is a reserved stay before the ceiling game, the jackpot will be won before the ceiling function is activated (before the ceiling privilege is granted), so there is little need to display the hold display for the ceiling. In addition, if the reservation display for the ceiling is prohibited when the reservation is present, if the hold display for the 1000th game remains the normal hold display, it is presumed that there is a reservation before the ceiling game is reached. There is also a dramatic merit that the player who knows this can prevent wasteful hitting until the ceiling is reached. However, instead of prohibiting the ceiling hold display at all when the reserved stay exists, when the hold change notice (rainbow color hold) related to the secured stay has not appeared, that is, the look-ahead for the secured stay If the advance notice lottery is "missing", the ceiling hold display may appear (allow). If the notice of change on hold related to the reserved stay has not been issued, the player cannot know that the reserved stay exists before the arrival of the ceiling game, but even if the hold display for the ceiling has appeared. Even so, if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached, there is no particular disadvantage to the player. In addition, when the hold change notice (rainbow color hold) related to this reservation is displayed, the appearance of the ceiling hold display is not prohibited, but the high expectation hold change notice or higher (for example, green hold or higher) When the notice of change on hold is displayed, the display of the hold display for the ceiling may be prohibited.

(Case of prioritizing pre-reading notice for ceiling: Fig. 32 (c-1) (c-2))
Next, the "case of preferentially executing the pre-reading notice for the ceiling" will be described.

FIG. 32 (c-1) shows, as an example of "a case where the pre-reading notice for the ceiling is preferentially executed".
(Α) A configuration example of "in the precursor mode, a part of the normal look-ahead notice is prohibited, while the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) is allowed".
(Β) It shows a configuration example that "in the precursor mode, the normal look-ahead notice is totally prohibited, while the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) is allowed".
In the configuration example shown in this figure (c-1), as shown in the above figure (b), the look-ahead prohibited target hold is not set as the “ceiling game hold ball”, but the look-ahead prohibited target hold is “digested during the precursor game”. This is a configuration example in which only the operation holding ball to be performed is used, and the ceiling game holding ball is excluded from the prohibition target.

In the above (α), "prohibiting a part of the normal look-ahead notice" means, for example, that among the normal hold change notices (special hold display), the appearance of the low expectation hold change notice is allowed, but it is high. Expectation hold The appearance of change notice is prohibited. Specifically, it has the following configurations 1 and 2.
(Structure 1) Hold change notices below yellow hold (blue hold and yellow hold) are allowed to appear, and hold change notices above green (green hold, red hold and rainbow color), which have a higher expectation of winning than the yellow hold. The appearance of (pending) is prohibited.
(Structure 2) A configuration in which the appearance of a hold change notice (holding display other than rainbow-colored hold) indicating other than the correctness is allowed, and the appearance of the hold change notice holding indicating the correctness is prohibited.

The above-mentioned "Structure 1" is intended to prohibit only high-expectation pending change notices such as green, red, and rainbow colors in the case of the reserved stay. On the other hand, the above-mentioned "Structure 2" prohibits only the "rainbow-colored hold" of the current reservation display among the high-expectation hold change notices. Therefore, in the case of the configuration 2, the occurrence of a hold change notice other than the “rainbow color hold” indicating the correctness is allowed.

In (β) above, "totally prohibiting pre-reading notice" means that normal pre-reading notice (here, hold change notice) is prohibited at all, and the appearance of the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) is It is a configuration that allows. Therefore, in the case of the above configuration (β), the normal look-ahead notice does not appear at all in the precursor mode, and only the ceiling hold change notice (ceiling hold display) appears.

The reason for making the figure (c-1) ((α) or (β) above) is as follows. If the appearance of the normal hold change notice (special hold display) is allowed indiscriminately, the normal hold change notice and the ceiling hold display will be displayed at the same time, and the player (especially, the hold display) It causes confusion for beginners). In particular, if the high expectation hold change notice and the ceiling hold change notice are mixed, the degree of confusion of the player will increase. Therefore, it is preferable to prohibit the pre-reading notice itself, or at least prohibit the high expectation pending change notice. Also, if part or all of the look-ahead notice is prohibited during the precursory mode, the player does not know that the reserve is present or likely to exist before the ceiling game is reached, but even so. This is because even if the high-expectation hold change notice indicating that is not displayed, if the jackpot is won before the ceiling game is reached, it will not be particularly disadvantageous to the player. In addition, if the pre-reading notice itself in the precursor mode is completely prohibited, the burden of directing control can be reduced.

FIG. (C-2) is a configuration example in which the ceiling hold change notice is preferentially executed by defining a part of the period in the precursor mode as the look-ahead prohibited section, unlike the above figure (C-1). As a typical example, FIG. (C-2) shows an example in which the maximum number of reserved balls before the ceiling game (the section from the 996th to the 999th game) is set as the look-ahead prohibited section. In the case of this example, the look-ahead notice is completely prohibited in the section of the 996th to 999th games. However, instead of prohibiting the look-ahead notice at all in the section, a configuration may be configured in which "a part of the look-ahead notice is prohibited" as shown in (α) of the above figure (c-1).

In addition, all of (a), (b), (c-1) and (c-2) of FIG. 32 are the number of ceiling games by the specific notification effect such as the above-mentioned "countdown display (remaining ceiling number display effect)". It is possible to configure so that the number of remaining games up to can be notified. Here, the countdown display itself does not foretell the winning expectation, but merely informs the remaining ceiling game, and does not perform the advance notice function such as the look-ahead advance notice. However, the winning expectation may be announced by using the effect mode of the countdown display, that is, the possibility of the existence of the secured stay may be notified. For example, in the case where the pre-reading notice for the ceiling shown in Fig. (C-1) or (C-2) is preferentially executed, the operation holding balls (1-2) that occur in chronological order earlier than the secured retaining (third) Each time the item) is digested, a special countdown display (for example, a difference in display color or a difference in display size) that is different from the normal countdown display (display mode when there is no reserved retention) is performed to confirm. It may suggest the existence of a hold. For example, if the normal countdown display uses a white number image, the special countdown display changes the number image to a color other than white (red), or the number image becomes huge. is there.

The present embodiment may include, for example, the following configuration regarding the look-ahead notice.
Based on the establishment of the starting condition (when the starting means detects the game ball), the acquisition means (S301, S302 in FIG. 10, S314 in FIG. 11) for acquiring predetermined game information, and
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a lottery regarding winning based on the game information acquired by the above acquisition means, and
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a variable display operation of the symbol and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to the stop display mode of the symbol.
The hold storage means (hold storage area of RAM 203) holds and stores the game information acquired by the acquisition means up to a predetermined maximum number of hold storages until it is subjected to the variable display operation of the game symbol in the symbol display means. , S311 to S314) in FIG.
Before the variable display operation of the game symbol based on the reserved memory is executed, at least the pre-reading determination means (S318 in FIG. 11) for pre-reading the lottery result by the lottery means
A look-ahead notice effect control means (effect control unit 24, S1008 in FIG. 19) configured to be able to execute and control a look-ahead notice that notifies information related to the look-ahead determination result by the look-ahead determination means.
A look-ahead notice prohibition control means (FIG. 32) that prohibits execution (display) of the look-ahead notice based on a predetermined prohibition condition, and
Ceiling privilege control means (S420, S421, S412, FIGS. 13 to 15, etc. in FIGS. 7 and 12) that grants a ceiling privilege that is more advantageous than the normal state (execution control of the ceiling privilege) based on a predetermined grant condition. When,
The above ceiling privilege is given (for example, the ceiling game is imminent, the ceiling privilege is given within the existing number of operation holding balls, or the symbol variation display game related to the target operation holding ball With the ceiling privilege advance notification control means for executing and controlling the ceiling front notification effect (for example, the ceiling hold change notice (hold display for ceiling) in FIG. 32) that notifies in advance that the ceiling privilege is given when it is executed. , And can be configured to control a plurality of types of game states (game modes). The pre-reading notice prohibiting means prohibits execution of the pre-reading notice during all or part of the specific game mode (FIGS. 32 (b) (c-1) (c-2)). The specific game mode is, for example, a game mode before reaching the ceiling game (before shifting to the ceiling mode), and specifically, a precursor mode immediately before reaching the ceiling game (game mode immediately before shifting to the ceiling mode). In addition, the ceiling privilege control means specifically, after the predetermined start condition is satisfied (for example, after the end of the electric support or after the big hit game, or after shifting to the game state with a low probability state, etc.), the hit game. Is not generated (or without winning a big hit), and when the number of fluctuations (number of games) of the symbol executed in the game state with a low probability state reaches a predetermined upper limit number (number of ceiling games), it is usually It works as a functional unit that controls the ceiling privilege (privilege game state) that is more advantageous to the player than the game state.

(Game mode related to latent state)
In addition, when the latent probability state is provided, for example, as shown in FIG. 28, it is sufficient to set different data values between the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) corresponding to other game states and the game state determination number YJ. A "latent mode" may be provided as a game mode corresponding to the latent state, and a "latent effect mode" may be provided as an effect mode related to the latent mode. Further, although all the ST modes according to the present embodiment have been described as game modes corresponding to the "probability change state", all or part of the ST mode can be treated as a game mode corresponding to the "latent state". The fluctuation state under the latent probability mode (latent probability state) is explained in the above-mentioned "(7-5-1. Fluctuation state related to the heaven mode)" When infinite latent probability or finite latent probability is given "". It is preferable to set the fluctuation state to be the same as or substantially the same as that of the normal mode, or at least a fluctuation state slower than the time saving mode (a fluctuation state in which the average digestion time is relatively long).

<Processing on the main control unit side: FIGS. 8 to 18>
Next, the game operation processing on the main control unit 20 side of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 8 to 18. The processing on the main control unit 20 side is an infinite loop-shaped main processing (main control side main processing: FIG. 8) and a timer interrupt processing activated by a fixed interrupt from the CTC (main control side timer interrupt processing: FIG. 9) and are mainly configured.

<12. Main control side main processing: Fig. 8>
The main process on the main control unit 20 side (main process on the main control side) will be described with reference to FIG.

FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing the details of the main processing on the main control side. When the main control side starts the main process, the watchdog timer (WDT) function is exhibited and the CPU is activated when a system reset occurs when recovering from a power failure or power failure, or when the control program runs out of control. May be forcibly reset (WDT reset). In any case, when the main control side main process is started, the main control unit 20 (CPU201) first executes the initial setting process necessary for starting the game operation as a part of the power-on process (step S011). ).

After completing the initial setting process in step S011, it is then determined whether or not the setting value can be changed in the setting change mode transition state (step S014). In the present embodiment, the setting key switch 94 (operated to the setting change mode side) and the RAM clear switch 98 are turned on when the power to the game machine 1 is turned off and the door is opened (door open sensor 61 is ON (opening detection)). When the power of the game machine 1 is turned on while the operation is performed (both the setting key switch signal and the RAM clear signal are ON), the setting change mode transition condition is satisfied and the setting value can be changed. It is controlled to (setting change mode transition state).

In the case of the setting change mode transition state (step S014: YES), the setting change process for managing the change operation of the set value (steps 1 to 6) is executed (step S023). In this setting change process, first, is the setting value Nc (setting value data) stored in the setting value storage area of the RAM in the area an abnormal value (a value other than 00H to 05H corresponding to settings 1 to 6)? Judge whether or not. If it is a normal game operation, the set value data (set value Nc) of any one of "00H to 05H (normal value)" is stored in the set value storage area corresponding to the settings 1 to 6. However, there is a possibility that the set value data is damaged due to some trouble and a value that does not correspond to any of the settings 1 to 6 is set (setting error). Therefore, when the set value Nc is not a normal value, the set value storage area is cleared to zero and returned to the initial value of 00H (here, setting 1).

If it is returned to the initial value or is a normal value, the current set value is displayed on the setting display 97. After that, the ON / OFF operation of the setting change switch 95 is monitored, and the current set value Nc is changed (updated) every time the setting change switch 95 is turned ON. As for the setting value during the setting change (during the setting change operation), as described above, each time the setting change switch 95 is operated, the setting is switched to the cyclic type in the range of settings 1 to 6, and the setting is changed to the setting display 97. The current setting value in is displayed. Then, when the ON operation of the setting change completion switch 96 is confirmed, it is assumed that the set value is confirmed, and the current set value Nc (setting work value) is stored in the set value storage area of the RAM 203. As a result, the setting change process is exited. Then, the processing state is shifted to the in-region RAM clear processing (step S031) described later.

The RAM clear switch 98 may function as the setting change switch 95 without providing the setting change switch 95. Each time the RAM clear switch 98 is pressed, any of the setting values 1 to 6 can be selected and configured. Further, the setting key switch 94 may function as the setting change completion switch 96 without providing the setting change completion switch 96. In this case, the setting change operation can be ended by turning off the setting key switch 94.

On the other hand, when it is not in the setting change mode transition state (step S014: NO), the contents of the RAM are checked to determine the presence or absence of the abnormality (step S015). Specifically, it checks whether the set value data (set value Nc) in the set value storage area is a normal value, whether the checksum value at the time of backup is a normal value, and the like. If there is an abnormality in the contents of the RAM (step S015: YES), the power re-on wait process (step S020) related to the RAM abnormality described later is executed.

When there is no abnormality in the contents of the RAM, that is, it is normal (step S015: NO), then it is determined whether or not the backup flag BF is in the ON state (5AH) (step S016). This backup flag BF has a BF flag storage area of the RAM in the area of "5AH (normal value)" when the backup process is normally executed in the process of the power supply abnormality check process (step S081 in FIG. Is set to. Therefore, under normal conditions, the backup flag BF should be 5AH. However, there may be a case where the backup flag BF is not a normal value (≠ 5AH) due to some trouble. Therefore, when the backup flag BF is not in the ON state (step S016: NO), the power re-on wait process is executed (step S020).

In the process of waiting for the power to be turned on again in step S020, the game is controlled to the game stop state in which the progress of the game process is forcibly stopped. When this power re-turning wait process is executed and the game is stopped, the power of the game machine 1 is turned on again, and when the power is turned on again, the operation is performed so that the setting change mode transition state is set. Unless the above-mentioned setting change process (step S023) is executed, the RAM error state currently occurring cannot be resolved. In the present embodiment, after the above setting change process (step S023) is executed (after the set value storage area is cleared in the case of a setting error error), the in-area RAM clear process of step S031 described later is executed. As a result, substantially the entire area of the RAM 203 (however, the RAM area related to the performance display (the RAM area outside the area) is excluded) is cleared. As a result, the RAM 203 returns to the initial state, and the RAM error is eliminated.

When the backup flag BF is in the ON state (step S016: YES), it is determined whether or not it is in the RAM clear mode transition state (step S025). In the present embodiment, in the state where the power to the game machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is turned off (not operated to the setting change mode side), and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned on (the setting key switch signal is turned off). , RAM clear signal ON) When the power to the game machine 1 is turned on, it is controlled to the RAM clear mode transition state on the assumption that the RAM clear transition condition is satisfied.

When the RAM clear mode transition state is set (step S025: YES), the in-region RAM clear process is executed (step S031). In this in-area RAM clearing process, at least the out-of-area RAM area related to the performance display and the in-area RAM area other than the set value storage area in the storage area of the RAM 203 are cleared. Therefore, the value of the backup flag BF and the checksum value set when the power is cut off are both cleared to zero in this process. Further, here, various commands necessary for clearing the RAM (for example, "RAM clear command" indicating that the RAM has been cleared, "customer waiting command", etc.) are transmitted to the effect control unit 24. When the effect control unit 24 receives the RAM clear command, the initialization notification effect for notifying the RAM clear is executed, and the effect mode is set to the "normal effect mode" as the effect mode in the initial state. That is, when the in-area RAM clear processing is executed, the game mode is set to the normal mode of the initial mode, and the effect mode is also the normal effect mode (for example, normal (normal A effect mode)) and simple (normal) related to the normal mode. It will be set to either B production mode) or premium mode (normal C production mode).

After completing the in-area RAM clearing process in step S031, the initial setting process for clearing the RAM (initial data setting process when the power is turned on) is then executed (step S032). In the initial data setting process at power-on, for example, 30000 ms is set in the timer for transmitting the RAM clear signal (one of the security signals), and the special symbols displayed on the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b (special diagram 1 stop symbol, Special figure 2 Stop symbol) Loss symbol data is set as data. Then, the CTC setting process (step S036) described later is executed.

Returning to the description of step S025, if the RAM clear mode transition state is not reached (step S025: NO), then it is determined whether or not the current setting value can be confirmed in the setting confirmation mode transition state (setting confirmation allowable state). (Step S026). In the case of the present embodiment, in the state where the power to the game machine 1 is turned off, the setting key switch 94 is turned on and the RAM clear switch 98 is turned off (setting key switch signal ON, RAM clear signal OFF). When the power to the machine 1 is turned on, it is controlled to the setting confirmation mode transition state on the assumption that the setting confirmation mode transition condition is satisfied (see steps S014 to S026).

When the setting confirmation mode is in the transition state (step S026: YES), the setting confirmation process (step S027) for controlling the current setting value to the confirmable setting confirmation state is executed, and when the setting confirmation process is completed, the process continues. Then, the backup restoration process (step S028) for restoring the game processing from the backup data backed up at the time of power failure is executed. In the setting confirmation process of step S027, a display process for displaying the current setting value (setting confirmation display) on the setting display 97 is performed. The display of the set value is terminated when the setting key switch is turned off. Then, after the setting key switch 94 is turned off, the backup restoration process is performed, and the CTC setting process (step S036) described later is executed.

On the other hand, when it is not in the setting confirmation mode transition state (step S026: NO), that is, when the power is simply turned on to the game machine 1, the backup restoration process (step S028) is performed, and the game at the time of backup is performed based on the backup data. Restore processing.

After executing any of the above-mentioned setting change processing (step S023), in-area RAM clear processing (step S031), setting confirmation processing (step S027), and backup restoration processing (step S028), the CTC setting The process is executed (step S036). Here, the CTC setting process for generating a timer interrupt is executed periodically every 4 ms. As a result, after that, the interrupt request signal to the interrupt controller is periodically output, and the main control side timer interrupt process (4 ms interrupt process) shown in FIG. 9 is executed.

Then, assuming that the game startable state is ready, the launch control signal (launch permission signal ES) for permitting the launch operation of the launch device 32 is set from the OFF state (launch prohibition state) to the ON state (launch permission state), and the game is played. The start command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. As a result, the launching operation of the game ball from the launching device 32 is allowed. Further, when the effect control unit 24 receives the game start command, the initial operation (initialization operation) related to the movable body accessory is executed. However, during the initialization operation, the image display mode of the liquid crystal display device 36, the light emission mode of the decorative lamp 45, and the sound output from the speaker 46 do not change. The initialization operation here is exclusively an operation check at the time of turning on the power of the movable body accessory.

It should be noted that it is necessary to execute the operation of confirming whether or not the performance indicator 99 is operating normally in the step before executing the CTC setting process of step S036 after executing the backup restoration process of step S028. The "operation check setting process" may be configured to be executable. In the confirmation operation of the performance display 99, for example, the display modes of the four 7-segment displays 99a to 99d are periodically repeated "all blinking" for a predetermined time (for example, 5 seconds). Control in the "display (operation confirmation display)" mode (operation confirmation display processing). This makes it possible to check for defects such as missing segments. In this case, the display process related to the operation check is performed in the performance display monitor process (step S102: out-of-area program) during the main control side timer interrupt process described later. Since the display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is executed in the performance display monitor process (step S102) during the main control side timer interrupt process after the CTC setting process in step S036, the setting change process (step S023). ) And the setting confirmation process (step S027), the display of the base value by the performance indicator 99 is not executed at this stage. Utilizing this point, at least one of the four segments 99a to 99d of the performance indicator 99 is configured to be usable as the setting indicator 97, and the performance indicator 99 is temporarily used as the setting indicator 97. It may be configured to function. In this case, since the setting display 97 can be replaced with the performance display 99, it is possible to contribute to reduction of control load and cost reduction.

When the series of power-on processing is completed, the infinite loop processing of steps S040 to S045 related to the normal game progress is executed. As a result, the game is controlled in a game startable state in which the game can proceed. When entering the loop process, first, various random number update processes are executed (step S041) with the CPU set to the interrupt disabled state (step S040). In this various random number update process, various software random numbers (random numbers circulating in a predetermined numerical range by increment processing) used in the special symbol variation display game and the normal symbol variation display game are updated. For example, a special symbol judgment random number used for a symbol lottery, a random number related to an auxiliary hit lottery (auxiliary hit judgment random number used for a winning lottery per auxiliary, and a normal symbol judgment used for a symbol lottery per auxiliary). Random numbers used to change the initial value (start value) of random numbers (random numbers) (initial value random numbers for special symbol judgment, initial value random numbers for auxiliary hit judgment, etc.), random numbers for fluctuation patterns used for selecting fluctuation patterns, etc. Update.

After completing the various random number update processes (step S041), the performance display monitor aggregation division process of the out-of-area program is then executed (step S043). In this performance display monitor aggregation division processing, processing necessary for calculating the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 is executed.

When the performance display monitor aggregation division processing in step S043 is completed, the interrupt enabled state is set (step S045), the process returns to step S040, and the processes in steps S040 to S045 are repeatedly executed thereafter (main loop processing). .. The CPU 201 repeatedly executes various random number update processes and performance display monitor aggregation / division processes, except during the timer interrupt process that is intermittently executed.

<13. Main control side timer interrupt process: Fig. 9>
Next, the timer interrupt processing on the main control side will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 9 is a flowchart showing the timer interrupt process on the main control side. This main control side timer interrupt process is started by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (about 4 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the execution of the main control side main process.

In FIG. 9, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 immediately executes a power supply abnormality check process without saving the contents of the register (step S081). In this power supply abnormality check process, the power supply level supplied from a power supply board (not shown) is monitored, and if a power supply abnormality such as a power failure occurs, the backup flag BF is set (BF ← 5AH) and the checksum value. Checksum calculation (here, 8-bit addition calculation processing for the RAM in the area), backup processing including storage of the calculation result, and the like are performed. The power supply abnormality check process functions as a backup means for retaining data in a predetermined area of the RAM even after the power supply is cut off.

Next, the timer management process is executed (step S082). The timer values of various timers (time) used for the game operation control of the game machine 1 are updated here.

Next, the input management process is executed (step S083). In the input management process, various counters (for example, winning counters for counting winning balls provided for each winning opening) are updated based on the detection information of various sensors and switches provided in the game machine 1. Further, here, the input data is created based on the input information of the status signal from the payout control board 29. If the status signal indicates an abnormality, a predetermined error process is performed in the error management process (step S089) described later.

Next, the setting abnormality check process is executed (step S084). In the setting abnormality check process, it is determined whether the set value data is a normal value (value indicating settings 1 to 6), and if the value is not within the normal range, it is assumed that an abnormality has occurred in the set value data and a setting error occurs. Set the flag to the ON state (5AH). Then, the setting value abnormality command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to exit the setting abnormality check process. When the effect control unit 24 receives the set value abnormality command, the effect means is used to execute the setting error error notification (RAM error notification). If the setting error flag is ON when this setting error check process is executed again, the process is exited as it is without doing anything.

Next, the random number management process in the timer interrupt is executed (step S085). In the random number management process in the timer interrupt, the random number related to each variable display game is updated periodically. Specifically, in order to make the count value of the random number counter random, the random number is updated (+1 addition for each interrupt) for the special symbol judgment random number and the auxiliary hit judgment random number, and the random number counter goes around. Each time, the start value of the random number counter is changed. Since the internal lottery random number (big hit determination random number) is generated by the above random number generation circuit, it is not updated here.

Next, the error management process is executed (step S089). In this error management process, based on the detection information related to various switches and sensors, the status signal from the payout control board 29, etc., it is monitored whether or not an error (abnormality) has occurred in the game operation, and an error has occurred. In this case, an error command capable of specifying the error type is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and error processing according to the error type is executed. When the error is cleared, an error clearing command is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to execute the error clearing process.

Next, the prize ball management process is executed (step S090). In this prize ball management process, the winning counter is confirmed, and if there is a winning, a payout control command for specifying the number of prize balls is transmitted to the payout control board 29. When the payout control board 29 receives the payout control command, the payout control board 29 controls the game ball payout device 19 based on the prize ball number information included therein, and executes the payout operation of the designated prize ball number.

Next, the normal symbol management process is executed (step S091). In this normal symbol management process, necessary processing is executed for the normal symbol variation display game (variation display operation of the normal symbol). Here, it is monitored whether or not a game ball is detected by the normal symbol start port sensor 37a, and if the game ball is detected, predetermined game information (random number for determining auxiliary hit, etc.) required for the auxiliary hit lottery is input. It is acquired (Pseudo-random number acquisition process), and the game information is held and stored as hold data (Pseudo-random number operation hold ball) up to the maximum number of hold storages (4 in this case) (Pseudo-draw hold storage process). Then, when a predetermined variation display start condition is satisfied, an auxiliary hit lottery based on the normal symbol operation holding ball is performed, a variation pattern of the normal symbol is selected based on the auxiliary hit lottery result, and a stop display mode of the normal symbol (normal stop). Design) is decided. Further, here, in order to operate the normal symbol in a variable display operation, the LED display data for the variable display is created if it is changing, and the LED display data for the stop display is created if it is not changing (normally). Design display data update processing).

Next, the normal electric accessory management process is executed (step S092). In this ordinary electric accessory management process, the process necessary for executing the normal electric accessory management process is executed. Here, when the lottery result of the auxiliary hit lottery is a win, the solenoid control data setting process for the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c is executed. The solenoid control data set here is converted into an excitation signal by the solenoid management process in step S100 described later, and the excitation signal is output to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c. As a result, the opening / closing operation pattern of the opening / closing lid 47 is controlled.

Next, the special symbol management process is executed (step S093). In this special symbol management process, processing related to the special symbol variation display game is executed. In this special symbol management process, pre-reading judgment and big hit lottery in the special symbol fluctuation display game are mainly performed, and based on the lottery result, the fluctuation pattern of the special symbol (look-ahead fluctuation pattern, fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation) and special stop Determine the design etc. The details of the special symbol management process will be described later in FIG.

Next, the special electric accessory management process is executed (step S095). In this special electric accessory management process, it is necessary for the winning game, such as the execution control of the winning game according to the winning hit and the setting process of the transition destination game state after the big hit game, mainly based on the big hit lottery result. Perform various processing. The special electric accessory management process works as a special game control means for executing and controlling a winning game according to the winning type. The details of the special electric accessory management process will be described later in FIG.

Next, the right-handed notification information management process is executed (step S097). In this right-handed notification information management process, the right-handed display device 39b is turned on when the game is in a "right-handed advantageous" gaming state (during a hit game, in a state with electric support (time saving state or probable change state)). LED data is created, and in the case of a "left-handed advantageous" gaming state (normal state), LED data for turning off the right-handed display device 39b is created.

Next, the LED management process is executed (step S098). In this LED management process, output control of control signals (dynamic lighting data) is executed for various LED display devices such as a normal symbol display device 39a, a special symbol display device 38a, 38b, and a right-handed display device 39b. The control signal based on the LED display data created in the above-mentioned normal symbol management process (step S091), special symbol management process (step S093), right-handed notification information management process (step S097), etc. is output by this LED management process. Will be done.

Next, the external terminal management process is executed (step S099). In this external terminal management process, various outer end signals are created through the frame external terminal board 21 and output control is executed for an external device such as a hall computer HC.

Next, the solenoid management process is executed (step S100). In this solenoid management process, the solenoid control data set in the ordinary electric accessory management process (step S092) and the special electric accessory management process (step S094) is applied to the ordinary electric accessory solenoid 41c and the large winning opening solenoid 52c. On the other hand, the output control of the excitation signal is executed. As a result, the movable wing piece 47 and the open door 52b are driven and controlled, and the lower starting port 35 and the large winning opening 50 are opened and closed.

Next, all the registers are saved (step S101), the performance display monitoring process belonging to the out-of-area program is executed (step S102), and then all the registers are restored (S103). In the performance display monitor processing, necessary processing related to calculation of the base value to be displayed on the performance display 99 and display control is executed.

Next, the count value of the WDT is cleared (step S104). As a result, the WDT is reset for each interrupt and the count value is returned to the initial value.

When the processing of steps S081 to S104 is completed, the timer interrupt processing is completed and the main processing on the main control side is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

<19. Special symbol management process: Fig. 10>
Next, the special symbol management process (step S093) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol management process.

In FIG. 10, the CPU 201 first performs the “special figure 1 start port check process” regarding the special figure 1 side (upper start port 34 side) (step S301), and then the special figure 2 side (lower start port 35 side). "Special figure 2 start port check process" is executed (step S302). Details of the special drawing 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

When the start port check process in steps S301 to S302 is completed, the state of the small hit medium flag is determined (step S303). This "small hit medium flag" is a flag for designating whether or not the small hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the small hit game is in progress. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the small hit game is not in progress. Although the small hit is not provided in this embodiment, it will be described below assuming that the hit type includes "small hit".

When the small hit middle flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S303: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S304). This "condition device operation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not a big hit game is in progress, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the big hit game is in progress, and the flag. When is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the jackpot game is not in progress.

During the small hit game (step S303: = 5AH) or during the big hit game (step S304: = 5AH), step S309 is performed as it is without performing the processing related to the variation display operation of the special symbols in steps S306 to S308. Proceed to the special symbol display data update process of. Therefore, when either the small hit game or the big hit game is in progress, the variable display operation of the special symbol is not performed. That is, during the hit game, the stop display mode of the special symbol is held as being fixedly displayed as the small hit symbol or the big hit symbol.

On the other hand, in step S304, when the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S304: ≠ 5AH), that is, when neither the small hit game nor the big hit game is performed (step S303: ≠ 5AH, and step S304: ≠ 5AH), processing is performed according to the special symbol operation status (00H to 03H). The "special symbol operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special symbol, and this status value is changed according to the processing state and stored in the special symbol operation status storage area of the RAM 203.

In the special symbol operation status branching process in step S305, it depends on which of the status values "waiting (00H, 01H)", "changing (02H)", and "confirming (03H)" the special symbol operation status is. The process according to any one of steps S306 to S308 is executed. Specifically, when the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H, 01H)", the special symbol change start process (step S306) is performed, and when the special symbol operation status is "changing (02H)", it is special. When the symbol changing process (step S307) is "confirming (03H)", the special symbol confirmation time process (step S308) is executed. Here, the above-mentioned "waiting" means that the behavior of the special symbol is in a standby state for the next fluctuation, and "changing" means that the behavior of the special symbol is changing (variation display). Indicated, the above-mentioned "confirming" indicates that the change of the special symbol is completed and the stop (confirmation) is being displayed (during the special symbol confirmation time). By these processes, the fluctuation display operation of the special symbol (display operation in which the fluctuation start and the fluctuation stop are set) is realized. The details of the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) and the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308), which are closely related to the present invention, will be described later in FIGS. 12 and 16A to 16B, respectively.

When any of the processes of steps S306 to S308 is completed, the special symbol display data update process of step S309 described later is performed. In this special symbol display data update process, it is determined whether or not the special symbol is changing, and if it is changing, the data of the special symbol that repeats blinking at predetermined time intervals (data for 7-segment blinking display during fluctuation). ) Is created, and if the special symbol is not changing, data for stop display (data for 7-segment blinking display during stop display) is created. The display data of the special symbol created here is output as LED data in the LED management process (step S098) of FIG. 9, and the variable display and the stop display of the special symbol in the special symbol display devices 38a and 38b are realized. .. When the special symbol display data update process is completed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG. 9 is executed.

<11. Special figure 1 Starting port check process: Fig. 11>
A special figure 1 start port check process (step S301 in FIG. 10) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing details of the special drawing 1 start port check process. This special figure 1 start port check process serves as a winning process executed based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, and is mainly a process related to hold memory when a game ball wins a prize in the upper start port 34. And, it is mainly composed of processing related to pre-reading judgment. It should be noted that the special figure 1 start port check process and the special figure 2 start port check process differ only in whether the processing content is related to the special figure 1 side or the special figure 2 side. The processing contents are substantially the same. Therefore, here, in order to avoid duplicate description, the special figure 1 starting port check process will be focused on.

In FIG. 11, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not a winning (winning ball) is detected at the upper starting port 34 (step S311).

When the winning of the upper starting port 34 (starting port on the special drawing 1 side) is detected (step S311: YES), it is determined whether or not the number of balls held in special drawing 1 is 4 or more (step S312). That is, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is less than the maximum number of reserved balls (here, 4). If the winning of the upper starting port 34 is not detected (step S311: NO), the special drawing 1 starting port check process is exited without doing anything.

Special figure 1 When the number of pending balls is 4 or more, that is, when an over-winning exceeding the maximum number of reserved balls occurs (step S312: YES), an over-winning command for designating the over-winning (in the case of special figure 1). B006H, B106H in the case of special drawing 2) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S324). On the other hand, if the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 is not 4 or more, that is, less than 4 (step S312: NO), 1 is added (+1) to the number of reserved balls in Special Figure 1 (step S313), and step S314. Proceed to the process of.

Proceeding to the process of step S314, various random numbers used in the special symbol variation display game 1 related to the special figure 1 operation holding ball generated this time are acquired (step S314). Specifically, the current values of the jackpot determination random number, the special symbol determination random number, and the fluctuation pattern random number are acquired from various random number counters, and the acquired random number values are stored in the reserved storage area of the RAM in the area. This hold storage area is an area for storing predetermined game information related to the symbol variation display game as an operation hold ball (hold data), and in this hold storage area, the above-mentioned various random values as hold data are special symbols. Until the variable display operation of 1 is performed (until the special symbol variable display game 1 is executed), the start conditions are held and stored in the order of establishment (winning order). The reserved storage area includes a reserved storage area corresponding to the special symbol 1 side and the special symbol 2 side (special symbol 1 reserved storage area (first reserved storage area) corresponding to the special symbol 1) and a special symbol. A special figure 2 hold storage area (second hold storage area) corresponding to No. 2 is provided, and hold data for the maximum number of operation hold balls can be stored in each.

Next, the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") for prohibiting the look-ahead determination is acquired in the command data (winning command 1) corresponding to the lower byte side (EVENT) of the "hold addition command" (step S315). Subsequently, it is determined whether or not the "look-ahead prohibition condition" is satisfied (step S316). This "pre-reading prohibition condition" is a condition for prohibiting pre-reading judgment (prohibiting pre-reading notice) targeting the special figure 1 operation holding ball side when the special figure 1 start port check process is in progress (special figure 1 pre-reading prohibition condition). ), And when the special figure 2 start port check process is in progress (not shown), the condition for prohibiting the look-ahead judgment for the special figure 2 operation holding ball side (prohibiting the look-ahead notice) (special figure 2 look-ahead prohibition condition) ). In the present embodiment, if the special figure 2 operation hold ball can occur with a higher probability than the special figure 1 operation hold ball in the "gaming state with electric support (time saving state or probability change state)", the special figure 1 Pre-reading is prohibited', and conversely, if the special figure 1 operation hold ball can occur with a higher probability than the special figure 2 operation hold ball, it is a "game state with no electric support (normal state or latent state)". For example, "Special figure 2 look-ahead is prohibited". Therefore, in the determination process of step S316, when the current gaming state is the time saving state or the probabilistic state, it is assumed that the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is being satisfied, and the determination result is “YES”. Further, as a pre-reading prohibition condition, it is possible to prohibit pre-reading in a specific game mode (for example, in a precursor mode).

Here, in the present embodiment, since the current game mode can be specified by the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) type (see the Tcode column of FIG. 28), when determining the game mode, the variable pattern selection mode (see the Tcode column) The value of (Tcode) may be determined, but an identifier (for example, game mode determination number YM) that can identify each game mode itself is provided separately from the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), thereby providing the current value. The game mode may be determined. For example, when "general mode A" and "general mode B" are provided as game modes belonging to the general mode, these have the same variable pattern selection mode (Tcode), but as different game modes as the game mode. This is the case you want to manage. In any case, when performing some processing based on the current game state (internal game state or game mode) (when performing game processing that requires information on the game state), the current internal game state, the current fluctuation pattern. The game operation is performed by appropriately using one or more identifiers of the selection mode or the identifier that can identify the current game mode (game state determination number YJ, variation pattern distribution designation number Tcode, the above-mentioned game mode determination number YM, etc.). The configuration may be processable. In the present embodiment, it is assumed that the game mode can be specified by the value of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode).

When the special figure 1 look-ahead prohibition condition is satisfied (step S316: YES), the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and the process proceeds to the process of step S322 described later. In this case, the look-ahead determination for the operation hold ball of this special figure 1 is not executed, and the hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created (see step S322 described later). ). As a result, the execution of the look-ahead notice of the current operation hold ball is controlled to the prohibited state (the look-ahead notice for the current action hold ball is not executed).

Special Figure 1 When the read-ahead prohibition condition is not satisfied (step S316: NO), then it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S317). When the setting error flag is in the ON state (step S317: = 5AH), that is, when a RAM error (setting error error) has occurred, the process related to the look-ahead determination (steps S317 to S321) is skipped, and step S322 described later is performed. Proceed to processing. In this case as well, the look-ahead determination for the operation hold ball this time is not executed, and the hold addition command having the look-ahead prohibition data (EVENT: "9FH") is created, so that the look-ahead notice is not executed. In other words, the read-ahead prohibition data (9FH) can be said to be data that specifies that the processes related to the look-ahead determination (steps S318 to S321) have not been executed.

When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S317: ≠ 5AH), the random number determination process is executed after transmitting the "setting value command" (step S318). This random number determination process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "winning lottery at the start of fluctuation (described later)" is executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. In step S410) of FIG. 12 in FIG. 12, a'look-ahead winning / failing determination'is performed in advance.

(Set value command)
The above "setting value command" is used when the effect control unit 24 side includes information that can specify the current set value and controls the appearance of the advance notice effect (setting suggestion effect described later) based on the set value. Will be done. This set value command is transmitted every time an operation hold ball is generated in the start port check process. As a result, the effect control unit 24 can control the appearance of the advance notice effect (for example, the setting suggestion effect related to the look-ahead advance notice effect) related to the operation holding ball based on the correct set value information.

In the random number determination process of step S318, first, the “hit random number determination table (not shown)” is acquired, and the random number value for jackpot determination is acquired. Then, based on the acquired random number value for jackpot determination and the winning random number determination table, the winning lottery (pre-reading winning determination) for the current operation pending ball is executed, and the lottery result (pre-reading winning result) is acquired.

The hit random number determination table includes the hit random number determination table (special symbol 1) corresponding to each of the special figure 1 operation hold ball (special symbol variation display game 1) and the special figure 2 operation hold ball (special symbol variation display game 2). A hit random number determination table and a special figure 2 hit random number determination table) are provided. The "random number determination table for special figure 1" is referred to during the special figure 1 start port check process, and the "random number determination table for special figure 2" is referred to during the special figure 2 start port check process. This hit random number determination table is also used when performing a winning lottery in the "random number determination process for determining the operation of a special electric accessory (step S410 in FIG. 12)" described later.

In these hit random number judgment tables, a judgment area (judgment value) for determining a winning type (whether a big hit, a small hit, or a loss) is provided for each big hit lottery probability state (high probability and low probability). The jackpot judgment random number value (the size of the jackpot judgment random number: 65536) is defined in association with each other. Specifically, the winning type depends on which judgment value the jackpot judgment random number value belongs to. It is supposed to be decided.

In the case of the present embodiment, the hit random number judgment table is provided with a hit judgment table corresponding to each set value (settings 1 to 6) (a table in which at least the lottery probabilities of big hits are different depending on the settings 1 to 6). Has been done. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the ratio of the jackpot lottery probability at the time of high probability to the jackpot lottery probability at the time of low probability (probability increase ratio: high probability / low probability) is the same at each set value, and the ratio is 10. It is set to a value that does not exceed. For example, setting 6 "low probability 1/189, high probability 1/63", setting 5 "low probability 1/198, high probability 1/66", ..., Setting 2 "low probability 1 / With 231 "high probability 1/77" and setting 1 "low probability 1/240, high probability 1/80", a big hit is won. The probability increase rate may be different for each set value.

After completing the random number determination process in step S318 described above, the special stop symbol data creation process is then executed (step S319). This special stop symbol data creation process is performed as a part of the'look-ahead determination'process, and here, the "symbol at the start of fluctuation" executed when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation. A'look-ahead symbol determination'for determining the lottery (step S411 in FIG. 12 described later) in advance is performed.

In the above special stop symbol data creation process, the "symbol table (not shown) according to the pre-reading winning result obtained in step S318 and the special symbol type (special figure 1 and special figure 2) to be processed this time. ) ”Is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random value obtained in step S314 is acquired, and based on the selected symbol table and the acquired special symbol determination random value, the symbol lottery (look-ahead) for the current operation pending ball is performed. (Symbol judgment) is executed, and the lottery result (look-ahead symbol result) is acquired.

The above "design table" includes a "big hit symbol table", a "small hit symbol table", and a "missing symbol table" for determining a jackpot type, a small hit type, and a loss type, and each symbol table is a special symbol. It is provided according to the type. These symbol tables are also used when performing a symbol lottery at the start of fluctuation in the special stop symbol creation process (step S411 in FIG. 12) described later.

In the symbol table, the determination area (judgment value) for determining the winning type (symbol type) and the special symbol determination random value (for example, the size of the special symbol determination random value: 200) are defined in association with each other. Specifically, the winning type is determined according to a predetermined symbol lottery rate depending on which determination value the special symbol determination random value belongs to, and the special symbol is used as data indicating the lottery result. Judgment data and special stop symbol number are acquired. In the present embodiment, in the case of a big hit, one of the big hits is determined according to the symbol lottery rate of FIG. In addition, although not shown, the loss types on the special figure 1 side are provided with loss A and loss B, and the symbol lottery rate is 95% for loss A and 5% for loss B. .. When the loss B is selected, a reach other than the N reach (for example, a reach of SP reach or higher) is selected with a high probability (see FIG. 26). Further, the loss type on the special figure 2 side is one type of loss A. The type of loss is not particularly limited, and one or more may be provided.

The above "special symbol judgment data" is data that identifies the winning type (winning type: big hit type, small hit type, and loss type), and specifically, the winning type (probability variation big hit 1 to 7, time saving). This is data for identifying whether the jackpot 1 to 2) or the loss type (loss A, loss B) (not shown) was won. This special symbol determination data is a process that requires winning type information (for example, a game state transition preparation process in step S412 of FIG. 12, a process related to a special symbol variation pattern creation process in step S413, and a process related to execution control of a jackpot game). It is used in (special electric accessory management process of FIG. 17) and the like. The above-mentioned "special stop symbol number" is data for designating a special stop symbol mode to be stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device, and is a main control. It is used when the stop symbol type of the special symbol is specified on the unit 20 side. The normal symbol is also provided with the normal symbol determination data and the normal stop symbol number in the same manner as the special symbol.

A common symbol table may be defined for all settings, but a symbol table may be defined according to the settings. For example, it can be configured as follows (A) and (B).
(A) The symbol selection rate of one or a plurality of winning types is different in a part or all of each set value. For example, the symbol lottery rate of 1 probability variation jackpot can be set so that the higher the set value, the higher the probability.
(B) The probability variation inrush rate (at least the total symbol lottery rate of the jackpot with a high probability state (probability variation jackpot and / or latent probability jackpot)) is different in all or a part of each set value. For example, the probability variation inrush rate on the special figure 1 side is 50% (see the probability variation probability of symbols 1 to 3 in FIG. 4). For example, the probability variation inrush rate of settings 1 to 6 is set to, for example, "40%, 42. %, 44%, 46%, 48%, 50%, etc., and so on, the higher the set value, the higher the probability (easier to enter the probability change). The same applies to the time saving rush rate (total symbol selection rate for time saving jackpots).
In any case, as the setting becomes higher, the ball ejection performance (machine discount) may be determined to be advantageous to the player.

After completing the special stop symbol data creation process in step S319 described above, the start opening winning random number determination process is then executed (step S320). This start port winning random number judgment process is also performed as part of the'look-ahead judgment'process, and here, the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" when the operation holding ball is subjected to the fluctuation display operation is described. Performs'look-ahead fluctuation pattern judgment'to be judged in advance. Specifically, the result of the "special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413)" shown in FIG. 12, which will be described later, is pre-read and determined.

Specifically, for the pre-reading symbol determination result (at least the winning lottery result obtained in the random number determination process (step S318)) obtained in the special stop symbol data creation process (step S319) and the variation pattern acquired in step S314. Using a random number (magnitude of random number value: 10000), the "variation pattern at the start of fluctuation" related to the operation hold ball this time is pre-read and determined. Since the look-ahead pattern judgment determines the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation in advance, a separately provided "look-ahead judgment table" having the same basic configuration as the fluctuation pattern distribution table used at the start of fluctuation. Refer to. However, in the case of this embodiment, in order to reduce the program capacity, the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 24 to 27 is provided as "at the time of winning (pre-reading judgment) / at the time of starting fluctuation", and the prize is won. At both the time and the start of the fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern at the start of the fluctuation is pre-read and determined based on the random value for the fluctuation pattern acquired in the process of step S314.

The look-ahead determination regarding the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation will be described with reference to the “hit fluctuation pattern distribution table” of FIG. The notation of "probability" shown in FIG. 24 means the probabilistic jackpot, the notation of "hour" means the time saving jackpot, and the notation of "probability 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7" means the probabilistic jackpot 1-7. "Times 1 and 2" mean time-saving jackpots 1 and 2. With reference to FIG. 24, for example, the pre-reading symbol result of this time is "probability variation jackpot 1 (probability 1)", the current gaming state (variation pattern selection mode Tcode is "general mode (00H)", and variation pattern. When the random number is a value belonging to the judgment value (judgment area 0 to 49) of "normal fluctuation direct hit", EVENT1 "21H" shown in the figure is acquired (see the column of EVENT1 of "normal fluctuation direct hit". ). The Arabic numerals shown in the figure indicate the judgment value (the size of the judgment area) (the same applies to FIGS. 25 to 27). For example, when the random number for the fluctuation pattern belongs to the judgment value 0 to 49, "normal fluctuation direct hit". When "hit" is selected (selection rate: 50/10000) and belongs to the judgment values 50 to 129, "normal medium N reach B" is selected (selection rate: 80/10000) and belongs to the judgment values 130 to 209. "Normal SP reach A" is selected (selection rate: 80/10000), ..., "Special reach" is selected when it belongs to the judgment values 9850 to 9999 (selection rate: 150/10000). It has become.

The above-mentioned "EVENT1" is data (winning command data 1) used for creating a hold addition command, and is data of the second byte (lower byte) of the hold addition command. As a result, the look-ahead prohibition data "9FH" acquired in step S315 is updated to a data value that specifies the content of the look-ahead variation pattern in this process, and the look-ahead variation pattern is specified. The data of the first byte (upper byte) of the hold addition command (data regarding the number of operation hold balls) is acquired in step S322 described later.

In the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination, the number of balls on hold during the look-ahead determination is not taken into consideration. The reason is as follows. At the stage of determining the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation, the fluctuation pattern is determined in consideration of the number of operation-holding balls (see, for example, the column of the number of operation-holding balls in FIGS. 26 to 27). However, at the time of pre-reading determination, since the number of operation-holding balls at the time of pre-reading determination does not always match the number of operation-holding balls at the start of fluctuation, it is not possible to determine an accurate fluctuation pattern (detailed pattern) at the start of fluctuation. Therefore, in the look-ahead fluctuation pattern determination, the fluctuation pattern type (basic pattern), which is the essence of the fluctuation pattern at the start of fluctuation, is determined without considering the number of balls on hold at the time of pre-reading determination. For example, referring to the columns of normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s and normal medium N reach A in the “loss fluctuation pattern distribution table” shown in FIG. 26, at the start of fluctuation, any of normal fluctuation 4s to normal fluctuation 12s is normal. Different data (see the COM2 (variation pattern specification command data) column) are acquired in order to identify the N reach A during fluctuation or normal, but at the time of pre-reading judgment, regardless of the number of pending balls. , Data (EVEN1 "01H") common to the normal fluctuation 4s to the normal fluctuation 12s and the normal medium N reach A is acquired.

After finishing the random number determination process at the start opening of step S320, the winning command data 2 (MODE) on the upper byte side is acquired based on the current number of pending balls and the special symbol type. Here, "B6H to B9H" are acquired according to 1 to 4 special figure 1 operation holding balls, and "BBH to BEH" are acquired according to 1 to 4 special figure 2 operation holding balls.

Then, the acquired prize command data 2 (MODE: the number of operation hold balls (the number of existing operation hold balls including the operation hold ball generated this time) and the special symbol type information) and the upper entry prize command data 1 (EVENT) on the lower byte side. : Based on the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information), a "hold addition command" is created (step S322), and without storing this in the RAM 203 (since the data related to the hold addition command is unnecessary thereafter), the effect control unit. It is transmitted to 24 (step S323). In this embodiment, the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information and the number of operation-holding balls at the time of pre-reading determination (the number of operation-holding balls and special symbol type information) are transmitted by one command (hold addition command). However, the present invention is not limited to this. The look-ahead fluctuation pattern information, the number of pending balls and the special symbol type information may be transmitted by separate commands. Specifically, as a configuration for transmitting a first command (command at the time of winning) that can specify the look-ahead fluctuation pattern information and a second command (hold addition command) that can specify the number of pending balls and special symbol type information. May be good. In this case, the effect control unit 24 may be configured to be able to execute the effect process related to the pre-reading notice (such as the pre-reading notice lottery described later) when the first command and the second command are received.

If read-ahead prohibition is in progress or an error occurs in the set value data, the look-ahead prohibition data "9FH" is maintained as it is, so a hold addition command having "look-ahead prohibition data" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. (Refer to the processing route of steps S315 → S322 or S316 → S322).

When the hold addition command is transmitted from the main control unit 20, the effect control unit 24 that receives the command can execute the look-ahead notice if the information included in the hold addition command is "other than the pre-reading prohibition designation". A lottery (pre-reading notice lottery) is performed, and if this is won, a pre-reading notice production scenario is created, and based on that scenario, the pre-reading notice for the current operation pending ball is controlled to appear. On the other hand, in the case of "pre-reading prohibition designation", the pre-reading notice lottery is not executed, or the pre-reading notice lottery is executed, but the lottery result is forcibly processed as a loss, and the occurrence of the pre-reading notice is prohibited. In this embodiment, the hold addition command for which read-ahead prohibition is specified is transmitted in both the case where read-ahead prohibition is in progress and the setting abnormality error occurs. The reason is as follows. ..

In the case of the present embodiment, the game operation is not forcibly stopped and controlled even if a setting abnormality error occurs. The first reason is that the resolution of the setting abnormality error can be resolved by performing the setting change operation as described above, but the setting change operation during business is a matter that inspires gambling from the viewpoint of legal request. There is a high possibility that it falls under the prohibited items. Secondly, if the game operation process is forcibly stopped immediately when a setting abnormality error occurs, the player feels distrust at the sudden stop of the game. For example, when the symbol variation display game in process is executed during normal operation, or when a big hit game is in progress, a setting error error occurs by chance, and the game is controlled so that the game cannot be played immediately. If this happens, the profit that the player should originally obtain will be lost, causing the player to feel distrust. In consideration of such circumstances, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the error notification is stopped, and the game progress itself is conditional, but the game progresses as it is. The expression "conditionally" is used because when a setting abnormality error occurs, the look-ahead notice is prohibited or the result of the symbol variation display game is forcibly lost (Fig. 11). See step S317 (= 5AH) and the processing route of step S409 (= 5AH) in FIG. 12 described later).

As described above, the special figure 1 start port check process is exited, and then the special figure 2 start port check process (step S302) is executed.

<21. Special symbol change start processing: Fig. 12>
Next, the special symbol variation start processing (step S306) in FIG. 10 will be described. FIG. 12 is a flowchart showing the details of the special symbol variation start processing.

In FIG. 12, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is zero (step S401), and if the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (step S401: NO), FIG. 2 The processing (steps S403 to S416) at the start of the fluctuation targeting the number of pending balls is executed. On the other hand, when the number of special figure 2 operation hold balls is zero (step S401: YES), it is subsequently determined whether or not the special figure 1 operation hold ball number is zero (step S402), and the special figure 1 operation hold ball is determined. If the number is not zero (step S402: NO), the processing at the start of fluctuation (steps S403 to S416) for the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 is executed. By the processing of steps S401 and S402, "priority" of which of the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially subjected to the variable display operation (which operation holding ball is digested). "Fluctuation order" is decided. In the present embodiment, when the operation holding ball is present in both the special figure 1 operation holding ball and the special figure 2 operation holding ball, the special figure 2 operation holding ball is preferentially digested.

When the number of operation-holding balls in both the special figure 2 operation-holding ball number and the special figure 1 operation-holding ball number is zero (step S401: YES and step S402: YES), the state of "no operation-holding ball". Will be. This "no operation hold ball" state is a state in which a special symbol is waiting and there is no hold memory. Therefore, when "no operation hold ball" is set, the process proceeds to step S417, and it is determined whether or not the special symbol operation status is "waiting (00H)" indicating the state of the above "no operation hold ball". Step S417).

When the special symbol operation status when the above-mentioned "no operation hold ball" state is "waiting (01H)" (step S417: NO) (process during the special symbol confirmation time of FIG. 16A described later). (Refer to step S472 in the middle), the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (00H)" (step S418). Then, as an effect control command, a customer waiting command (BA04H) is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S419), and the special symbol change start process is exited. When the production control unit 24 receives the above-mentioned customer waiting command, a demo movie for explaining and introducing (demonstrating) the game related to the game machine 1 is played based on a predetermined execution condition. ) ”Is revealed. Specifically, after receiving the customer waiting command, the game is not started, that is, the operation hold ball is not generated (without receiving the hold addition command), and the predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) is set. When it has passed, the customer waiting effect is displayed. Until the waiting time (180 seconds) until the start of the customer waiting effect elapses, the display state of the decoration stop symbol stopped after the end of this symbol variation display game is continuously displayed, and the decoration lamp 45 emits light in a predetermined light emission pattern. Then, the speaker 43 exhibits a "demo start waiting effect" in which the sound is muted (a predetermined sound effect may be executed), and this state is maintained until the customer waiting effect is started. Further, the effect control unit 24 ends the customer waiting effect and shifts to the "power saving mode" when a predetermined transition condition (power saving mode transition condition) is satisfied after the start of the customer waiting effect (demo display). In the case of this embodiment, when a predetermined time (for example, 120 seconds) elapses after the start of the customer waiting effect (demo display) without generating the operation hold ball and switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). , The effect mode is changed to the power saving mode, the liquid crystal display device 36 displays the power saving screen (for example, the character display of "power saving is in progress" on the liquid crystal screen), and a part of the decorative lamp 45 or other effect LEDs or Control to turn off everything (power saving control).

If the number of balls on hold in FIG. 1 or the number of balls on hold in FIG. 2 is not zero (steps S401: NO or S402: NO), steps S403 to S416 are sequentially executed. It should be noted that the processing method of steps S403 to S416 described below is substantially different in that the target is the special figure 1 operation holding ball or the special figure 2 operation holding ball. Is the same. Therefore, in order to avoid duplicate description, unless there is a particular need, the process will be described without distinguishing which operation holding ball is targeted.

Proceeding to step S403, the number of operation-holding balls on the special drawing side to be used for the current fluctuation display operation is subtracted by 1 (step S403), and a "hold subtraction command" including information on the number of operation-holding balls after the subtraction is issued to the effect control unit 24. (Step S404).

Next, the special symbol operation confirmation data is stored (step S405). This special symbol operation confirmation data is information for designating the special symbol type of the fluctuation start side this time, and is "00H" if the special figure 1 is the fluctuation start side, and if the special figure 2 is the fluctuation start side. For example, "01H" is stored in the special symbol operation confirmation data.

Next, the hold data stored in the hold storage area of the RAM 203 is shifted (step S406), and the hold 4 storage area is cleared to zero (step S407). In the processing of steps S406 to S407, the reserved data stored in the reserved storage area (reserved 1 storage area) corresponding to the number of reserved storages n = 1 is read and stored in the determination random number storage area of the RAM in the area. , Hold data stored in the hold storage area corresponding to the hold n storage area (n = 2, 3, 4) is stored in the hold storage area corresponding to'n-1'(step S406), and hold 4 Clear the storage area and provide a free area (step S407). As a result, the start order of the special symbol variation display game coincides with the order of the number of operation-holding balls n (n = 1, 2, 3, 4), and the operation-holding balls acquired at the time of winning the starting opening are stored in any of the holdings. It is possible to identify whether it corresponds to the area and to hold and store a new operation holding ball.

Next, the game state information transmission process is executed (step S408). In the game state information transmission process, a "game state designation command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. The game state designation command here includes game state information that can specify the game state at the start of the game. Upon receiving the game state designation command, the effect control unit 24 grasps the game state based on the information contained therein, and manages the effect mode in a form that maintains consistency with the game state managed by the main control unit 20 side. To do. The game state information included in the game state specification command may be the minimum information necessary for performing the target game process, and is, for example, "internal game state (game state determination number YJ)" and / or "variation pattern". It can be information including the distribution designation number Tcode. In addition, as a game state specification command, an "internal game information command" that can specify the game state determination number YJ and / or a "distribution mode specification command" that can specify the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) can be transmitted. can do.

Further, here, if necessary, a "time reduction command" including information on the special symbol time reduction counter (time reduction information) and an "ST number command" including information on the special symbol probability variation counter (ST number information) are used. Will be sent. Based on the information included in these commands, the effect control unit 24 grasps the remaining time reduction number and the remaining ST number, and informs the remaining time reduction number or the remaining ST number in an effectful manner. Countdown display) ”is configured to be controllable. Specifically, as the remaining number of times display effect, the "remaining time reduction display effect" is displayed in the time saving mode, and the "remaining ST number display effect" is displayed in the ST mode. It should be noted that the time reduction command and the ST number command transmitted in this process are transmitted as counter values in which the current game amount is not subtracted (the counter subtraction process is a special case of FIGS. 16A to 16B related to the end of the game). During the processing during the symbol confirmation time (S479, S484)), the effect control unit 24 appropriately performs subtraction processing on the grasped counter value, and has a configuration capable of displaying the remaining number of times display effect (described later). The same applies to the ceiling count command). However, in the case of this embodiment, the time reduction count command is transmitted when the special symbol time reduction counter is other than zero (the time reduction counter ≠ 0), and the ST count command is also sent when the special symbol probability variation counter is other than zero. It is transmitted when (the probability variation counter value ≠ 0). Of course, even if the counter value is zero, a time saving command or an ST number command including information that is zero may be transmitted.

It should be noted that, depending on the game state, it is possible to determine whether to send only the time saving number command, only the ST number command, or both commands. However, when the infinite ceiling privilege is given, specifically, "infinite time reduction" with no limit on the number of time reductions, "infinite probability change" or "infinite latent probability" with no limit on the number of STs, or substantial When an unlimited number of times (65536 times, etc.) is set and infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation, or infinite latency that can be regarded as "infinite number of times" is given, the game state related to the privilege. In (in this embodiment, the heaven mode), in order to reduce the control load, the time reduction command and the ST command may not be transmitted. Further, when the time saving state or the probability change state given by the big hit winning is to continue until the next big hit, the time saving number command and the ST number command may not be transmitted in the same manner.

Further, the above-mentioned "remaining number of times display effect" can be configured to be able to appear in any of the game modes of the time saving mode, the ST mode, and the heaven mode. The remaining number display effect related to the infinite system is preferably an effect mode for notifying that the remaining number of times is infinite. For example, in the case of an image display effect, "remaining ∞ times" or "continue until the next big hit".

(About the display of the number of remaining ceilings)
Further, in the game state information transmission process in step S408, a "ceiling count command" including information on the number of remaining ceiling games (information about the ceiling counter described later) is also transmitted. Based on the information included in the ceiling count command, the effect control unit 24 grasps the number of games remaining until reaching the ceiling, and controls the appearance of the "remaining ceiling count display effect". In the case of the present embodiment, this residual ceiling number display effect appears in the form of a countdown display during the precursor mode (precursor effect mode).

The above-mentioned "remaining ceiling count display effect" can appear in all or part of the monitoring target (counting target) period of the ceiling game. In the present embodiment, it can appear in "general mode" and / or "precursor mode". Further, when the remaining ceiling number display effect is displayed in the normal mode, the effect mode can be different between the general mode and the precursor mode. For example, in the general mode, the number of remaining ceilings is notified in a small display area at the corner of the LCD screen (the countdown display is displayed small), and in the precursor mode, the number of remaining ceilings is displayed in the large display area in the center of the LCD screen. Notification (large countdown display) can be displayed.

(Processing route when the set value is normal: Processing route following S420)
Next, it is determined whether or not the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S409). When the setting error flag is not in the ON state (step S409: ≠ 5AH), the above-mentioned "setting value command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and then the ceiling function management process shown in FIG. 13 is executed (step S420).

<13. Ceiling function management process: Fig. 13>
The ceiling function management process (step S420) will be described. FIG. 13 is a flowchart showing the details of the ceiling function management process (step S420). This ceiling function management process is mainly a process of managing the number of remaining games up to the number of ceiling games.

In FIG. 13, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the “ceiling counter” is zero (step S901). This ceiling counter is a counter for managing (monitoring) the number of remaining ceiling games, and in the case of the present embodiment, it is used as a counter for managing the number of games that triggers the setting of data related to the granting of ceiling benefits ( See steps S903 to S904 (turning on the ceiling flag) and step S915 in FIG. 15 showing details of the game state transition preparation process (step S412) in FIG. 12, which will be described later. The above-mentioned "ceiling counter" functions as a counting means for counting the number of times a specific event is executed, the number of times it is established, or the number of times it occurs, and functions as a functional unit for monitoring the arrival of a ceiling activation trigger (ceiling privilege granting trigger). The "specific event" here means execution of a symbol variation display game (hit fluctuation or loss fluctuation), winning of a big hit or small hit or loss, transition to a specific game state (transition or specification to a specific game mode). (Transition to the variable pattern selection mode, or transition to a specific internal gaming state), execution of a big hit game or a small hit, and a specific event such as the establishment of a specific condition related to the game. In the present embodiment, the value of the ceiling counter is monitored to determine the arrival of the ceiling function activation trigger. Such a counting means is, for example, in the modification 1 and the modification 2 (FIGS. 33 and 34, grant forms (α) to (μ)) of the privilege granting form described later, the ceiling activation trigger or the predetermined privilege granting. It is used as a functional unit to monitor the arrival of an opportunity.

When the ceiling counter is zero (step S901: YES), the ceiling function management process is exited as it is without doing anything. The initial value is set in the ceiling counter when the RAM is cleared by the RAM clear in the area (step S031) during the main control side main processing shown in FIG. 8 or from another game mode to the normal mode. This is the case of shifting, that is, the case where the internal gaming state shifts to the normal state (see steps S481 and S486 of FIG. 16B described later).

On the other hand, if the ceiling counter is not zero (step S901: NO), the ceiling counter is subtracted by 1 (step S902), and if the subtraction result is not zero (step S903: NO), the ceiling function management process is exited and zero. If (step S903: YES), the ceiling flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S904). This ceiling flag is a flag for designating whether or not the ceiling counter has become zero, and is used in the game state transition preparation process in step S412 described later (see step S915 in FIG. 15). With the above, the ceiling function management process is omitted.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again, when the ceiling function management process in step S420 is completed, the random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory is then executed (step S410). In this special electric accessory operation determination random number determination process, the jackpot determination random number value is used to execute a "winning lottery at the start of fluctuation" for the operation holding ball used for the current variation display operation. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the random number determination processing of step S318 of FIG. 11 already described, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

In this random number determination process for determining the operation of the special electric accessory, first, based on the special symbol operation confirmation data, the hit random number determination table on the processing target side this time (for example, if the special figure 1 side is the processing target, the hit for the special figure 1). Random number table) is acquired. Next, the jackpot determination random number value stored in the determination random number storage area is acquired, and the winning lottery based on the jackpot determination random number value and the winning random number determination table is executed. Then, if the lottery result is "big hit", the big hit judgment flag is set to "5AH", and if the lottery result is "small hit", the small hit judgment flag is set to "5AH", and "big hit" and "small hit" are set. If none of the "hits" is won, that is, in the case of "loss", "00H" is set for both the big hit judgment flag and the small hit judgment flag.

Next, the ceiling activation management process shown in FIG. 14 is executed (step S421).

<14. Ceiling activation management process: Fig. 14>
FIG. 14 is a flowchart showing details of the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in FIG. In this ceiling activation management process, necessary setting processing related to the granting of ceiling benefits is performed.

In FIG. 14, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state, that is, whether or not the current game result is a “big hit” (step S920).

When the jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (step S911: ≠ 5AH), then it is determined whether or not the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S921). This "ceiling activation flag" is a flag for designating whether or not to activate the ceiling function (whether or not to grant the ceiling privilege), and when the flag is ON, the ceiling privilege is given. It is specified that the ceiling privilege is not given when the flag is OFF. The ceiling activation flag is a flag that is set to the ON state when the ceiling counter becomes zero in the game state transition preparation process in step S412 described later (step 15 in FIG. 15 showing details of the game state transition preparation process). See S915-S916). When this ceiling activation flag is ON, it is determined that the ceiling activation trigger has arrived in this game (step S921: = 5AH), and the processing necessary for granting the ceiling privilege (steps S922 to S925) is performed. Will be executed. On the other hand, when the ceiling activation flag is not in the ON state (step S921: ≠ 5AH), it is assumed that the ceiling activation trigger has not arrived, and the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything.

When the ceiling activation flag is in the ON state (step S921: = 5AH), the processing necessary for granting the ceiling privilege (ceiling activation) is executed. Here, first, the value of each state buffer set in the game state transition preparation process (step S412) described later is set in the corresponding state flag and counter (step S922: state flag setting process). As a result, it is controlled to the designated ceiling privilege state. In the case of the present embodiment, a finite time reduction (time reduction state of 100 times reduction) is specified, and the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from the precursor mode "01H" to the ceiling mode "06H". It has become. Then, as the end process when the ceiling privilege is given, each state buffer is cleared (step S923: various setting processes when the ceiling is activated), and then the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H) (step). S924 to S925). Next, the game state information transmission process (step S926) is executed, and the ceiling activation management process is exited. In the game state information transmission process here, a game state designation command including finite time reduction (time reduction state) information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. As a result, it is controlled to a finite time reduction state with the start of this game (1000th game), and a special symbol variation pattern based on the ceiling mode is selected in the special symbol variation pattern creation process (step S413) described later, and the ceiling effect mode. The production below will appear.

Returning to the description of step S911, when the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (step S911: = 5AH), the ceiling activation management process is exited without doing anything. Therefore, when the big hit is won, even in the ceiling game, it is controlled to the "ceiling activation prohibited state", and the processing when the big hit is won is preferentially executed. Therefore, in order for the ceiling privilege to be granted, it is a condition that the player has been addicted to 1000 games. As described above, in the present embodiment, the monitored game section of the number of Hamari games (the number of consecutive losses) is set to 1000 games in the normal mode (normal state), and the ceiling privilege is given when the game is addicted between the games. ing.

(Modification example 1 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
If the jackpot is won, the ceiling privilege may be given without controlling the ceiling function to the prohibited state. However, in this case, it will be a ceiling privilege only for this game (only for one game). This is because the jackpot game will start after the end of this game. However, even if it is a ceiling privilege for only one game, if a time saving state or a probability change state accompanied by a state with electric support is given, the benefit of electric support will be provided until the end of this symbol variation display game. Can receive. Specifically, there is an advantage that the lower starting port 35 can be easily won and the operation holding ball on the special drawing 2 side is likely to be generated. As a ceiling privilege, when a game state with electric support is given, at least the "right-handed instruction image 779" shown in FIG. 7 is displayed in this game to encourage the player to right-handed. preferable.

(Modification example 2 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
In the present embodiment, the configuration in which the ceiling privilege is given when the game starts is described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a configuration in which the ceiling privilege is given when the game ends may be used. That is, the configuration is such that the ceiling is activated at the end of the ceiling game. In the case of this modified example, the ceiling privilege will be given immediately after the end of the symbol variation display game. For example, when the ceiling privilege is a finite time reduction, the time reduction state can be set immediately after the end of 1000 games. If the ceiling privilege is "forced hit", the big hit game (forced hit game) by forced hit will be started after 1000 games are completed. When the end of the game is used as the trigger for activating the ceiling, the ceiling activation management process (step S421) is performed during the special symbol confirmation time process (FIG. 16B) described later, which is related to the process at the end of the symbol variation display game, for example. It may be executed after the process of step S495.

(Modification example 3 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
Further, in the present embodiment, it has been described that the ceiling privilege is given in the 1000th game, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the ceiling is based on the fact that the second grant condition is satisfied after the first grant condition is satisfied. Benefits may be granted. For example, if 1000 games are addicted (the first grant condition is satisfied), the ceiling privilege grant right is established, and the ceiling privilege is granted after the predetermined number of precursor games have been exhausted (the grant of the ceiling privilege is temporarily suspended, and multiple games are granted. Scheduled first). In this case, a plurality of types of precursor games can be provided (for example, 1 to 16 games), and the number of precursor games can be determined by lottery (lottery for the number of precursor games). When determining the number of precursor games by lottery, the lottery probability of each precursor game may be the same in all settings (settings 1 to 6), but it is preferable to determine the lottery probability according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of games, and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of games.The lottery probability of each precursor game number is set according to the set value. If determined, it is possible to give the player a setting estimation element based on the difference in the number of games. Further, when a specific number of precursor games (for example, 7 games) is selected, the lottery probability can be determined according to the set value, such as high setting confirmation or setting 6 confirmation.

(Modification example 4 of the timing of occurrence of ceiling benefits)
In the above-described third modification, an example in which the ceiling privilege granting right is temporarily suspended until the predetermined number of precursor games is exhausted, that is, an example in which the right holding period depends on the number of times the game is executed has been described. However, the right holding period does not depend on the number of times the game is executed, but may depend on the passage of time. For example, it is a "timed" ceiling granting form in which a ceiling privilege is granted when a predetermined time has passed from the start of the ceiling game. Specifically, the ceiling privilege is given at a predetermined timing during the symbol variation display game related to the ceiling game. In this case, using the interval time from the start of the ceiling game to the start of the ceiling privilege, an effect of notifying in advance that a finite time reduction will occur soon, for example, "right-handed instruction image 779" shown in FIG. 7 is displayed. It is possible to urge the player who is hitting left to hit right and prevent the player from hitting wastefully.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12, when the ceiling activation management process of step S421 is completed, the special stop symbol creation process is executed (step S411). In this special stop symbol creation process, the "design lottery at the start of fluctuation" is executed by using the winning lottery result in step S410 and the random value for determining the special symbol. Since the basic processing procedure of this processing is the same processing procedure as the special stop symbol data creation processing (step S319) shown in FIG. 11 already described, the description will be omitted as appropriate to avoid duplicate description.

Here, first, a symbol table (either a big hit symbol table, a small hit symbol table, or a lost symbol table) is selected according to the special symbol operation confirmation data (special symbol type) and the winning lottery result in step S410. For example, when the special symbol operation confirmation data is 00H and the jackpot judgment flag is 5AH, that is, when the fluctuation start side of this time is'special figure 1 side'and the winning lottery result is'big hit', "special". "Big hit symbol table for FIG. 1" is selected. Then, the special symbol determination random number value stored in the above-mentioned determination random number storage area is acquired, a symbol lottery based on the selected symbol table and the special symbol determination random number value is executed, and the special symbol determination which is the lottery result is executed. The data and the special stop symbol number are stored in the corresponding areas of the RAM in the area.

After completing the special stop symbol creation process in step S411, the game state transition preparation process is then executed (step S412).

<15. Game state transition preparation process: Fig. 15>
The game state transition preparation process (step S412) will be described. FIG. 15 is a flowchart showing details of the game state transition preparation process.

In this game state transition preparation process, when a big hit is won, data for designating the transition destination game state (see FIG. 4) after the big hit game is stored in a predetermined buffer (state buffer). (Steps S911 to S914), which is a loss and is divided into processes (steps S915, S916, S917) for storing data for designating the ceiling privilege in a predetermined buffer when the ceiling flag is ON. ing. First, the processing content of the former "when a big hit is won" will be described.

(If you win the jackpot)
When the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (step S911: = 5AH), the "game state transition table selection table" shown in FIG. 22 is acquired (step S912). Next, referring to the acquired jackpot game state transition table selection table, the current game state (game state at the time of winning (game state determination number YJ in this embodiment)) and the hit type (special symbol determination data) Acquires the game state transition table (any of JTTBL-1 to 5) according to the above (step S913), and stores the data defined in the acquired game state transition table in various state buffers (step S914: state). Buffer setting process). In this game state transition table, various data for shifting to the target game state are defined. JTTBL-1 to 5 are provided in the game state transition table according to the present embodiment. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 22, JTTBL-1 is "time saving A" and JTTBL-2 is "time saving B". , JTTBL-3 is defined as "probability variation A", JTTBL-4 is defined as "probability variation B", and JTTBL-5 is defined as "probability variation C".

The value stored in the state buffer is read out in the jackpot end process (see step S509 in FIG. 17 and step S592 in FIG. 18 showing the details thereof) shown in FIG. 18 described later, and the predetermined storage area of the RAM 203 (see step S592 in FIG. It is stored in the flag storage area and the counter storage area corresponding to each state buffer), and thereby the game state after the big hit game (the transition destination game state in FIG. 4) is specified.

The roles of the various state buffers are as follows.
(Α) "Public accessory open extension transition state buffer, normal symbol time saving transition state buffer, normal symbol probability change transition state buffer, special symbol time saving state transition state buffer, special symbol probability change transition state buffer"
ON / OFF designation data of each function for designating the internal game state is set. Specifically, the normal symbol open extension state flag that specifies the operating state of the open extension function, the normal symbol time saving state flag that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol time saving function, and the normal symbol that specifies the operating state of the normal symbol probability change function. Data for the symbol probability change state flag, the special symbol time reduction state flag that specifies the operation state of the special symbol time reduction function, and the special symbol probability change state flag that specifies the operation state of the special symbol probability change function are set.
(Β) "Special symbol time reduction counter buffer"
Data for designating the number of time reductions (number of times of electric support) (data for a special symbol time reduction counter) is set (see steps S478 to S481 of FIGS. 16A to 16B).
(Γ) "Special symbol probability variation counter buffer"
Data for designating the number of STs (data for a special symbol probability variation counter) is set (see steps S483 to S486 in FIG. 16B).
(Δ) "Special symbol fluctuation count counter 1-3 buffer"
Data (data for a special symbol fluctuation count counter) for designating the number of continuations of a specific fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is set.
(Ε) "Fluctuating pattern distribution designation numbers 1 to 3 buffers"
When the predetermined update condition is satisfied, the data (data for the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number Tcode) that specifies the fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode) to be the update destination is set.

For example, when the current game state is "normal state (YJ = 00H)" and "probability change jackpot 2 (5R probability change ST75)" is won, "JTTBL" is based on the game state transition table selection table shown in FIG. -4 ”, that is, the game state transition table (see FIG. 22) for the probability change B is acquired. In this case, "5AH (ON designation)" is set for each of the general electric accessory open extension transition state buffer to the special symbol probability change transition state buffer, and the special symbol time reduction counter buffer is set to "100 times (100 times of electric support)". Is set, and "75 times" is set in the special symbol probability variation counter buffer. As a result, the transition destination game state after the big hit game is designated as "ST number 75 times + time reduction number 25 times" (after the probability change state 75 rotations is completed, the time reduction state shifts to 25 rotations). Further, as the game mode transition designation data, "02H (ST early stage designation)" is set in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number 1 buffer, and "25 times (ST early stage mode continuation count)" is set in the special symbol fluctuation count counter 1 buffer. Is set, "02H (ST middle stage designation)" is set in the fluctuation pattern distribution designation number 2 buffer, and "50 times (ST middle stage mode continuation number)" is set in the special symbol fluctuation count counter 2 buffer. To. As a result, the game mode transition mode of "ST early stage mode 25 times ⇒ ST middle stage mode 50 times ⇒ time saving mode" is specified.

(Example of modification of S.ST number / time reduction number: case where ST number or time reduction number differs depending on the set value)
In the present embodiment, it has been described that when the same big hit is won, the same game state transition table is selected regardless of the set value. That is, regardless of the current setting of 1 to 6, for example, when the probability variation jackpot 1 is won, the probability variation state (probability variation A (ST100 mode)) specified by JTTBL-3 is entered. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and even when the same big hit is won, it may be shifted to a probability variation state in which the number of STs is different, or a time saving state in which the number of time reductions is different, depending on the set value. In this case, at least the data values related to the special symbol probability variation counter and / or the special symbol time reduction counter may be configured so that different game state transition tables can be selected according to the set values.

Further, although the case where the same big hit is won has been described above, it is also possible to focus on different big hits and have the following configuration. For example, the presence / absence of a specific number of STs or the presence / absence of a specific number of time reductions may be determined according to the set value. Specifically, in the case of the first set value, there is a specific jackpot that gives a specific number of STs, and in the case of the second set value, the specific jackpot does not exist. That is, in the case of the first set value, the "specific jackpot" is included in the jackpot lottery target, but in the case of the second set value, the "specific jackpot" is not included in the jackpot lottery target.

With the above configuration, if a specific probability variation jackpot (may be a latent probability jackpot) or a specific time saving jackpot is won, the playability as described in (SA) and (SB) below is created. be able to.

(SA) For example, when a specific probability change jackpot is won, different ST times may be set for each setting value (settings 1 to 6) (shifted to a probability change state with different ST times), or at least. A different number of STs may be set in the set value of 1 (at least the set value of 1 is shifted to a probabilistic state of the number of STs different from the other set values). As a typical example, in the former example, when the same probability variation jackpot is won, for example, "the number of STs of settings 1 to 6 is 100 to 105 times" (any setting value is found according to the number of STs). Case) can be. In the latter example, when the same probability variation jackpot is won, for example, "settings 1 to 5 have 100 ST times, setting 6 has 101 times" (a case where setting 6 is confirmed by digesting 101 ST times) or " Settings 1 to 4 are 100 ST times, settings 5 and 6 are 101 times "(case where the high setting is confirmed by digesting 101 ST times)," At least the first setting value is 100 ST times, the second setting value is 105 It can be "times" and so on.
In the case of focusing on different probabilistic jackpots, for example, "among the hit types subject to the jackpot lottery, if the first hit is won, the first ST number (for example, ST100 times) is set, and if the second hit is won. Is the second ST number (for example, 105 times) different from the first ST number, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second hit is not included. ”
In the case of these configurations, when a certain probability variation jackpot is won, the number of STs differs depending on the set value, so that it is possible to suggest the setting according to the number of STs. Specifically, when the number of STs is specific, any of settings 1 to 6 can be found, or in a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, setting 1 negative, setting 6 confirmed, etc.). It turns out that there is. In other words, it is possible to create a novel playability such as creating a function (setting suggestion) of the setting suggestion effect by using the "ST number of times".

(SB) Similarly, when a specific time saving jackpot is won, different time saving times may be set for each set value (settings 1 to 6), or at least one setting value may be set for different time saving times. You may. In addition, in the case of focusing on different probabilistic jackpots, for example, "among the hit types subject to the jackpot lottery, if the first hit is won, the first time reduction number (for example, 100 time reductions) is set, and the second hit is won. If this is the case, the second time reduction number (for example, 105 times) different from the first time reduction number is set, and in the case of the first set value, at least the second hit is not included. " In these cases as well, as in the configuration of (SA) described above, when the number of time reductions is specific, either setting 1 to 6 or a specific setting value area (low setting area, high setting area, It is possible to make setting suggestions according to the number of time reductions, such as setting 1 denial, setting 6 confirmation, etc., and the novelty of creating the function (setting suggestion) of the setting suggestion effect using the "time reduction number of times". It is possible to create a certain playability.

The specific jackpot in this example can be one or more jackpots. As the specific jackpot, it is preferable that the jackpot has the lowest symbol lottery rate (for example, the probability variation jackpot 1) or the jackpot with the lowest advantage (profit state). The reason is as described below. The jackpot with the lowest symbol lottery rate is positioned as a "rare jackpot" that cannot be won in the middle. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information such as "setting suggestion" as a privilege. In addition, the jackpot with the lowest advantage (profit state) has a low profit even if the jackpot is won with difficulty, and it becomes a disappointing jackpot for the player, which may reduce the player's willingness to play. Therefore, when the jackpot is won, it is preferable to provide the player with advantageous information of "setting suggestion" to prevent the player's motivation to play.

The configuration of the above (SA) can be, for example, the configuration of the following (SA-1).
(SA-1)
A lottery means that executes a lottery for multiple types of hits when the starting means detects a game ball,
A symbol display means that displays the variation of the symbol and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to the stop display mode of the symbol.
When the lottery result by the above lottery means is a hit, the hit game execution control means for executing and controlling the hit game and the hit game execution control means
After the winning game is completed, until the number of fluctuations of the symbol reaches a predetermined upper limit, the lottery probability of winning is higher than the predetermined normal probability (specifically, high probability). It is equipped with a probability fluctuation control means that can control the game state accompanied by the probability state (probability change state or latent state).
A gaming machine in which the probability that the result of the above-mentioned winning lottery will be a predetermined result differs depending on the set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages.
The setting value that can be changed in multiple stages includes at least the first setting value and the second setting value.
The above probability fluctuation control means
When the set value is the first set value, if the first hit is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the first upper limit is reached.
When the set value is the second set value, when the first hit is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is reached until the second upper limit, which is different from the first upper limit, is reached. It can be configured to control.

Further, the above (SA-1) may be configured as described below (SA-2).
(SA-2)
The above probability fluctuation control means
When the first hit is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the first upper limit is reached.
When the second hit is won by the lottery means, the high probability state is controlled until the second upper limit, which is different from the first upper limit, is reached.
When the set value is the first set value, at least the second hit may not be included in the lottery result by the lottery means.

In the case of the above (SB) configuration, instead of the probability fluctuation control means, "the ball entry state into the starting means is more advantageous than the normal gaming state (normal state)" (electric support state). An advantageous game state control means for controlling the advantageous game state (time saving state) accompanied by the above is provided. And
The above-mentioned advantageous game state control means
When the set value is the first set value, if the first hit is won by the lottery means, the advantageous gaming state is controlled until the first upper limit is reached.
When the set value is the second set value, when the first hit is won by the lottery means, the advantageous gaming state is reached until the second upper limit, which is different from the first upper limit, is reached. The configuration may be such that it is controlled.

(When the jackpot is not won (missing) and the ceiling flag is ON)
Returning to the description of FIG. 15 again. When the jackpot determination flag is not in the ON state (5AH) (step S911: ≠ 5AH) and the ceiling flag is in the ON state (step S915: = 5AH), the ceiling activation start pre-processing (pre-processing for granting the ceiling privilege) As a part of the above, the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S916). The ceiling activation flag set to the ON state in this process is confirmed in the ceiling activation management process (step S421) in the next game.

Next, the "ceiling game state transition table" shown in FIG. 23 is acquired (step S917). In FIG. 23, JTTBL-6 to JTTBL11 (finite time reduction to infinite latency) are illustrated as ceiling game state transition tables corresponding to various ceiling benefits. Actually, a necessary ceiling game state transition table may be provided according to the ceiling privilege type.

Next, the data defined in the acquired ceiling game state transition table is stored in the above-mentioned state buffer (step S914: state buffer setting process). The values stored in these state buffers are read out in the ceiling activation management process (see step S421 and step S922 in FIG. 14), and are stored in predetermined storage areas (each) of the RAM 203 as in the case of winning the jackpot. It is stored in the flag storage area and counter storage area corresponding to the status buffer of. As a result, the game state related to the ceiling privilege is specified. In addition, "* (times)" and "* (H)" in the figure are arbitrary data values, and mean that appropriate values can be set according to playability and design values. For example, in the case of the present embodiment, "finite time reduction (time reduction number of times 100)" is typically described as a ceiling privilege. Has been done.

When both the jackpot determination flag and the ceiling flag are in the OFF state (00H) (when step S911 is ≠ 5AH and step S915 ≠ 5AH), the game state transition preparation process is exited as it is without doing anything.

Returning to the description of the special symbol change start process of FIG. After completing the game state transition preparation process in step S412, the special symbol variation pattern creation process is then executed (step S413). In the special symbol variation pattern creation process, at least the variation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 24 to 27) corresponding to the current game state and the symbol lottery result (special symbol determination data) in step S411 is acquired, and the acquired variation. The fluctuation pattern is determined based on the pattern distribution table and the random value for the fluctuation pattern (variation pattern lottery). In the case of the present embodiment, the current set value, the current fluctuation pattern selection mode (Tcode), the symbol lottery result, and the number of operation-holding balls (excluding the operation-holding balls used for the current variation display operation), the existing operation hold The "variable pattern distribution table" according to the number of balls 0 to 3: see step S403) is acquired. ..

(Fluctuating pattern distribution table: FIGS. 24 to 27)
FIGS. 24 to 27 show a variation pattern distribution table. FIG. 24 shows a variation pattern distribution table for each of "general use, precursor, ceiling, time saving, and heaven time saving", and FIG. 25 shows fluctuations for each of "ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage". "Pattern distribution table", Fig. 26 shows each loss variation pattern distribution table for "general use, precursor, ceiling, time saving, heaven time saving", and Fig. 27 shows ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage. It shows each "loss fluctuation pattern distribution table" for. Further, "FB1 to FB17" shown in FIGS. 24 and 25 indicate the hit variation pattern distribution table type selected at the time of winning, and "FH1 to FH22" shown in FIGS. 26 and 27 indicate the hit variation selected at the time of loss. The pattern distribution table type is shown.

The "heaven time reduction" (see the "time reduction / heaven time reduction" column) of the fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 24 and 26 is the same table as the time reduction mode. The reason for using a common table is from the viewpoint of reducing the control load. When the same game state as the ceiling privilege is provided, a common variable pattern distribution table can be provided for the ceiling privilege and the game state. Of course, a dedicated variable pattern distribution table may be provided according to the ceiling privilege. For example, in the case of finite time reduction or infinite time reduction, "variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heaven time reduction", in the case of finite probability variation or infinite probability variation, "variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heaven probability variation", finite latency or infinite latency In the case, it is a "variation pattern distribution table dedicated to heaven latency".

Further, although not shown, the fluctuation pattern distribution table is provided with a fluctuation pattern distribution table corresponding to the set values (settings 1 to 6). That is, the probability that one or a plurality of specific fluctuation patterns are drawn may differ depending on the set value. For example, a setting estimation element is given depending on the difference in the appearance rate of the effect related to the specific fluctuation pattern. Can be done.

As shown in FIGS. 24 to 27, in each fluctuation pattern distribution table, one or a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns are displayed in the game state (variation pattern selection mode (Tcode)) and the number of pending balls (this time, the fluctuation display operation is performed). The number of existing operation-holding balls, excluding the operation-holding balls to be performed), the symbol lottery result, and the random value for the fluctuation pattern are defined. As shown in the figure, various fluctuation patterns are provided as the types of fluctuation patterns. The relationship between high and low expectations for winning is as follows. The relationship between reaches of the same type is "N reach A <N reach B" between N reach and "SP reach A <SP reach B <SP reach C" between SP reach. The relationship between different types of reach is "N reach A <N reach B <SP reach A <SP reach B <SP reach C <special reach". Further, the "fan reach" is mainly provided as a special reach selected when a prize is given to the lower starting port 35, which is the starting port on the special drawing 2 side, in the normal mode.

In addition, when the pseudo-ream and other notice effects are executed in combination, the winning expectation may change. For example, even if SP reach A has a relatively low expectation of winning, such as "SP reach B <pseudo 3 + SP reach A", the expectation of winning is higher than that of SP reach B or SP reach C when accompanied by a pseudo-ream. It may be expensive. Further, in the case of this embodiment, when the pseudo 4 is accompanied, the occurrence of SP reach B or higher is confirmed. Further, in the figure, N reach is "no pseudo-ream", but in reality, N-reach with pseudo-ream, for example, pseudo 2-3 + N reach A, pseudo 2-3 + N reach B, etc. are included, and pseudo. When 3 or more is accompanied, the occurrence of SP reach is confirmed.

The special symbol variation pattern creation process is basically the same as the start-up winning random number determination process (step S320 in FIG. 11), which is the look-ahead variation pattern determination process described above. Here, the fluctuation pattern distribution table is referred to, and the fluctuation pattern corresponding to the random value for the fluctuation pattern is determined (the fluctuation pattern designation command data COM2 shown in FIGS. 24 to 27 is acquired). Once the variation pattern is determined, the corresponding variation time is determined (see the "TIME" column in the illustration). This fluctuation time (execution time of the symbol fluctuation display game) is set in the "special symbol accessory operation timer" which is the timer management area of the RAM in the area. Then, in order to inform the effect control unit 24 of the content of the determined variation pattern, a "variation pattern specification command" including the variation pattern information capable of specifying the variation pattern content is created as an effect control command, and the effect control is performed. It is transmitted to the unit 24 side. Specifically, the special symbol variation pattern creation process includes the following processes (A) to (D) as the process related to the determination of the "variation pattern specification command" for specifying the variation pattern at the start of the variation. Has been done.

(A) "Fluctuation pattern distribution table determination process at the start of fluctuation" that determines the "variation pattern distribution table"
(B) With reference to the "fluctuation pattern distribution table (FIGS. 24 to 27)" determined in (A) above, the number of pending spheres and the random number value for the variation pattern acquired in the process of step S314 are set. Based on this, the "variation pattern specification command data acquisition process" (variation pattern lottery process) that determines the variation pattern and acquires the command data (COM2) of the corresponding variation pattern specification command,
(C) "Variation time setting process" that determines the variation time corresponding to the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determination process and sets it in the "special symbol accessory operation timer" which is the timer management area of the RAM in the area. ,
(D) It is configured to include a "command transmission process" for transmitting the variation pattern designation command acquired in the above (B) to the effect control unit 24.

The information regarding the fluctuation pattern determined in this way includes at least another winning / losing lottery result (in the case of the present embodiment, detailed symbol lottery result information is included in the decorative symbol designation command). It can include the current game state, variable time information, and execution designation information of a specific advance notice effect (presence / absence and type of reach effect, pseudo-continuous designation information, etc.). The main control unit 20 transmits a "variation pattern specification command" capable of specifying the contents to the effect control unit 24, and the information included in the variation pattern specification command is the design variation of this time on the effect control unit 24 side. It is used when determining a production scenario related to a display game (variable display of decorative symbols, various advance notice effects, setting suggestion effects during fluctuations, etc.).

(About characteristic elements related to fluctuation patterns)
Here, characteristic elements related to the fluctuation pattern will be described while paying attention to the point of having a plurality of types of ST modes and the point of having a ceiling function.

(About fluctuating state)
The above-mentioned fluctuation state (high-speed, medium-speed, low-speed fluctuation state) in each game mode is realized exclusively by the fluctuation pattern group and its selection rate defined in the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIGS. 26 to 27. For example, referring to the “ST middle-use loss fluctuation pattern distribution table” shown in FIG. 27, in the early stage of ST, in order to realize a high-speed fluctuation state, the normal fluctuation on the special figure 2 side (the fluctuation pattern belonging to the normal fluctuation pattern). The shortest fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 2s at the beginning of ST), which has the shortest fluctuation time of 2s (seconds), is selected with high probability. Further, in the middle stage of ST and the final stage of ST, a fluctuation pattern having a longer fluctuation time (normal fluctuation in the middle stage of ST 3s, normal fluctuation in the final stage of ST 4s) is selected with a high probability, thereby causing a medium speed fluctuation. Realize a state or a low-speed fluctuation state. Further, as shown in FIG. 27, at the time of loss, the reach variation pattern is easily selected in the order of "ST final stage, ST middle stage, ST early stage" mode (in this embodiment, the selection rate of the reach fluctuation pattern is high during the early stage of ST). Zero), and the fluctuation time is also relatively long. From this point as well, the average digestion time of the symbol variation display game is relatively long in this order of ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage mode.

Further, in the ST early stage mode, only the normal fluctuation type (ST early stage normal fluctuation 2s, 8s) is selected at the time of loss. That is, during the early stage of ST (within 1 to 25 games), when the reach is applied, it becomes "correct" (when the big hit is won, "direct hit reach" is selected (see FIG. 25)). In the present embodiment, when the player wins in the ST early stage mode, the common fluctuation pattern distribution table "FB9" is selected regardless of the winning type, but the present invention is not limited to this. Similar to the ST middle stage mode and the ST final stage mode, a different variation pattern distribution table may be selected according to the hit type.

Further, by utilizing the fact that there are a plurality of types of ST modes, the configuration as shown in (I) or (II) below can be obtained.
(I) A Tcode dedicated to the final round of the ST mode may be provided so that a specific fluctuation pattern (final fanning fluctuation) can be selected in the final round. The Tcode dedicated to the final round can be provided in at least one ST mode of the ST early stage mode, the ST middle stage mode, and the ST final stage mode. For example, "ST early stage final fanning A, ST midfield final fanning A, ST final stage final fanning A" shown in Remarks 2 to 4 in FIG. 25 (at the time of big hit), and "Remarks 2 to 4 in FIG. 27 (at the time of loss)" ST early stage final fan B, ST mid stage final fan B, ST final stage final fan B "and so on. In this case, the following effects can be produced. Typically, taking the final game of the ST early mode (25th game in ST) as an example, in the final game, "ST early final fanning A" is selected at the time of a big hit, and "ST early early final fanning A" is selected at the time of loss. "B" is selected. At this time, in any of the symbol variation display games related to the final fanning A and B in the early stage of ST, a common specific effect is displayed during a predetermined time from the start of the game (until the predetermined variation time elapses from the start of the game). , Keep the player secret for a while whether it is a loss or a big hit, and arouse the tension of the player. Then, if it is lost, it is stopped at the "missing symbol (blank eye)" as it is without applying reach, and if it is a big hit, it is stopped at "matching symbols (hit symbol)" by applying reach. In particular, in the case of this embodiment, since it is correct when "reach" is applied during the early stage of ST, as the above-mentioned common specific effect, if an effect that incites whether or not reach is applied appears. It can fuel the tension of the player and the expectation of winning. The fluctuation time of the final fan A (at the time of hit) and the final fan B (at the time of loss) may be the same fluctuation time, but the fluctuation time at the time of the big hit is longer than that at the time of loss, and the winner is won after the reach production. Appearing specific effects such as a blessing effect to congratulate and a promotion effect that can notify the promotion display of even-numbered symbols to odd-numbered symbols or the non-promotion display from even-numbered symbols to even-numbered symbols depending on the winning jackpot type. It is preferable to let them.

(II) When the winning jackpot type (which may be one or more specific jackpot types) is set to the concealed state and the destination game state is set to the concealed state (in the effect during the symbol variation display game and the effect during the hit). , When the winning jackpot type is kept secret), for example, in the final game of the ST early mode (ST25th game), if there is a loss, whether the ST mode ends or continues by using the final ST early game The "continuous fanning production" is revealed. For example, when the current game mode is ST25 mode, as a result of the continuous fanning effect, a continuation failure effect for notifying ST discontinuation is displayed, and when it is ST75 or ST100 mode, ST continuation is notified. Make the continuous success production appear.

Any of the above-described configurations (I) and (II) can arouse the tension of the player in the final ST game and improve the fun of the game in the ST mode. Further, the above-mentioned "final fanning fluctuation" may be configured to be selectable in all ST modes or some ST modes. However, in the ST mode that forms a "high-speed fluctuation state" such as the ST early stage mode, it is preferable to configure the final fanning fluctuation to be selectable. Under the "high-speed fluctuation state", if the player continues to lose without winning the jackpot, the ST (probability change state) will end in a blink of an eye, and the player will feel more disappointed. Therefore, it is preferable to select "final fanning fluctuation" in the final round so that the player's feeling of tension is maintained in order to improve the fun of the game. Further, the configuration is not limited to the ST final game, and the "final fan" may be continuously selected from a game one or a plurality of games before the final game. For example, during the three games of the ST23 to 25th games, "final fanning" is continuously selected.

(About the fluctuation pattern related to the ceiling mode)
Further, with reference to the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, in the ceiling mode, as shown in the “ceiling” column in the figure, the common “ceiling fluctuation” is performed regardless of the special figure type and the number of pending balls. Is now selected. However, in the case of this embodiment, since there are a plurality of types of loss, "common ceiling fluctuation" is selected regardless of "type of special figure, number of balls on hold, and type of loss". The reason for doing this is as described below. First, when reaching the ceiling, it is preferable to display a common ceiling effect regardless of at least the special figure type and the number of balls on hold, and notify the ceiling activation (granting the ceiling privilege). Secondly, for the ceiling game only for one game (one rotation only), preparing multiple types of variable pattern distribution tables and displaying an effect based on these tables increases the control burden and reduces the control burden. This is because it is not preferable from the viewpoint of. Further, in the case of hitting, as in the case of the above-mentioned "loss", the configuration described below is provided from the viewpoint of effect and reduction of control load. As already explained, in the ceiling game (1000th game), if a big hit is won by chance, the effect related to the ceiling effect mode is not displayed, but in the normal effect mode (for example, the general mode). It is preferable to make the effect at the time of winning related to (in the middle or the precursor mode) appear (see the description of "7-4-1. About the effect in the ceiling mode" above). Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in the "ceiling" column of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, when a big hit is won, the hit fluctuation pattern related to the normal mode (general mode and / or precursor mode) is involved. "FB2" is selected from the distribution tables FB1 to FB4. In addition, it is not limited to "FB2", and may be any of FB1 to FB4.

(About the fluctuation pattern related to the precursor mode)
Further, paying attention to the "precursor mode" of the loss fluctuation pattern distribution table shown in FIG. 26, in the case of this embodiment, in the precursor mode, the high-speed fluctuation state (in the normal mode) in which the fluctuation state is the fastest among the normal modes. , The game mode with the fastest average digestion time). This is in consideration of the player's feelings. It is thought that many players will become more motivated to "get to the ceiling quickly when they come to this point" and "to get the ceiling benefits quickly" when they are close to the ceiling. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the average digestion time in the precursor mode is increased. Further, in the case of this embodiment, when the big hit is won in the precursor mode, as shown in FIG. 24, the hit fluctuation pattern distribution tables FB1 to FB4 common to the general mode are adopted, but the present invention uses this. Not limited to this, a hit variation pattern distribution table dedicated to the precursor mode may be provided. For example, a “precursor per variability” can be provided as a dedicated hit variation during the precursor mode (see Note 2 “precursor per variability” in FIG. 24).

In addition, when the final game in the precursor mode is "missing", a specific fluctuation pattern (variation pattern having a relatively long fluctuation time) is selected in order to make the above "pre-launch guidance notification effect" appear. It may be a possible configuration (see Note 2 “Precursor Final Fluctuation” in FIG. 26). This pre-launch guidance notification effect is an effect of instructing "how to hit" in the game before the game in which the state with electric support occurs, and the game in which the conventional state with electric support occurs (probability change). Or a launch guidance notification effect such as instructing "right-handed" in a game that causes a short time, or instructing "left-handed" in the game without electric support, that is, there is actually electric support. The character is different from the notification effect that instructs how to hit in the game in which none occurs. In this respect, the pre-launch guidance notification effect is an effect peculiar to a game machine equipped with a ceiling privilege.

Returning to the description of FIG. 12 again. After completing the special symbol fluctuation pattern creation process in step S413, the changing flag corresponding to the current fluctuation start side is set to the ON state (5AH) (step S414). The above-mentioned "changing flag" is a flag indicating which of the special symbols 1 and 2 is changing, and when the flag is in the ON state (5AH), it indicates that the special symbol is changing. When the flag is in the OFF state (00H), it indicates that the special symbol is stopped. In this embodiment, the "special symbol 1 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 1 and the "special symbol 2 changing flag" corresponding to the special figure 2 are dealt with. For example, if the special symbol 1 side is the processing target (variation start side) this time, the special symbol 1 changing flag is set to ON, and the special symbol 2 changing flag is set to OFF.

Next, a decorative symbol designation command capable of specifying the symbol lottery result information obtained in the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is created, and this is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 (step S415). The decorative symbol designation command includes information on the special symbol type on the variable side and the winning type (symbol lottery result). This decorative symbol designation command mainly includes a combination of decorative symbols when forming a reach state (a symbol type whose component is a reach symbol), a combination of decorative symbols that are finally stopped and displayed (decorative stop symbol), and a combination of decorative symbols. It is used when determining the advance notice effect corresponding to the winning type in the symbol variation display game. When the effect control unit 24 receives the variation pattern designation command and the decorative symbol designation command, the effect control unit 24 starts the present decorative symbol variation display game based on the information contained in these commands, and performs various effects during the symbol variation display game. Control the appearance.

Then, as the setting process at the start of fluctuation, the special symbol operation status is switched to "changing (02H)" (02H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and 00H is stored in the random number storage area for determination (zero clear) (step S416). ).

As described above, when the special symbol variation start process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and thus the variation display of the special symbol is started. As a result, the process goes through the special symbol management process (step S093) and proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) of FIG.

(About the case where a setting error occurs: Processing route from S409 to S411)
Returning to the description of the determination process in step S409, in step S409, when the setting error flag is in the ON state (5AH), that is, when a setting error error is occurring (step S409: = 5AH), the special electric combination in step S410. The random number determination process (winning lottery) for determining the object operation is skipped, and the special stop symbol creation process in step S411 is executed. That is, when a setting abnormality error occurs, the winning lottery at the start of fluctuation is not executed, and the winning lottery result this time is always processed as "loss" (forced loss control). In the case of a setting abnormality error, it is preferable to provide a fluctuation pattern dedicated to the error and select it, but it may be configured so that a specific existing fluctuation pattern is selected. When selecting an existing fluctuation pattern, consider that a serious error called "setting error" has occurred, do not select a reach fluctuation pattern type that fuels the expectation of winning, but only the normal fluctuation pattern type. It is preferable to select. In the situation of forced loss, it no longer makes sense for the game, so it is preferable to select the long fluctuation pattern type, and more preferably, the longest normal fluctuation pattern (normal fluctuation 16s in this embodiment). Select only. Further, in the case of a setting abnormality error, it may be configured so that the symbol variation display game itself is not started (the symbol variation is not started) as "the game cannot be continued". In this case, the error notification is continued until the power of the game machine is turned off. In the present embodiment, the error notification is continued even if the power is turned on again until the setting change process (step S023) shown in FIG. 8 is executed and the setting abnormality error is cleared.

<A. Processing during special symbol change: Fig. 10>
Next, the process during special symbol change (step S307) shown in FIG. 10 will be described.

In the special symbol changing process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the fluctuation time T of the special symbol set in the special symbol accessory operation timer has elapsed. If the fluctuation time T has not elapsed (variation time T ≠ 0), the special symbol is changing, so the process during the change of the special symbol is exited without doing anything. When the fluctuation time T of the special symbol has elapsed (variation time T = 0), a "fluctuation stop command (BF01H)" indicating that the fluctuation of the special symbol has ended is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 as an effect control command. .. When the effect control unit 24 receives the fluctuation stop command, it grasps that the special symbol variation display game has ended after the variation time of the special symbol has elapsed, and stops the decorative symbol being displayed in the variation display (confirmed display). As a result, the decorative symbol variation display game ends at the same time as the special symbol variation display game ends.

Next, as a setting process when the fluctuation of the special symbol is stopped, the special symbol confirmation signal output time (for example, 100 ms) and the confirmation display time (for example, 500 ms) are stored in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and the special symbol operation status is set. Switch to "Confirming (03H)" (03H is stored in the special symbol operation status), and the OFF state is stored in the special symbol changing flag. Then, when the setting process at the time of stopping the change of the special symbol is completed, the process during the change of the special symbol is exited. The above-mentioned "special symbol confirmation signal output time" is a margin time for securing the output time of the special symbol confirmation signal for notifying the hall computer HC from the frame external terminal board 21 that the special symbol has been confirmed and displayed. Is. Further, the "fixed display time" is a time (stop display time) for holding the stop display when the variable display of the special symbol is completed and the special symbol is stopped and displayed.

When the above special symbol changing process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, the special symbol management process is exited, and the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process of step S095 of FIG.

<16. Special symbol confirmation time processing (processing when fluctuation stops): Fig. 16A and Fig. 16B>
Next, the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) will be described. 16A and 16B are flowcharts showing the details of the special symbol confirmation time processing (step S308) of FIG.

In FIGS. 16A and 16B, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S471). A “fixed display time” is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S307 of the above-mentioned special symbol changing process). Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S471: NO), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol operation timer becomes zero (step S471: YES), it is assumed that the special symbol variation display game has ended, and the special symbol operation status is switched to "waiting (01H)" (special symbol operation). 01H is stored in the status) (step S472), and the current game state information is stored in the game state determination area of the RAM (step S473).

Next, the jackpot determination flag is acquired, and the state of the jackpot determination flag is determined (step S474).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is ON)
In the determination in step S474, when the jackpot determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S474: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the jackpot symbol is stopped (step S475). Here, as shown in the figure, the jackpot determination flag is set to the OFF state (00H), the condition device operation flag is set to the ON state (5AH) assuming that the jackpot is won, and the probability and electric support during the jackpot game are low. Set to the state of no state (clear various flags and counters). Further, the ceiling flag and the ceiling activation flag are set to the OFF state (00H), and the ceiling counter is cleared (00H).

(When the jackpot judgment flag is OFF)
In the determination of step S474, when the big hit determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S474: ≠ 5AH), then the small hit determination flag is acquired and the state of the small hit determination flag is determined (step S476). When the small hit determination flag is in the OFF state (00H) (step S476: ≠ 5AH), that is, in the case of "loss" which is neither a big hit nor a small hit, the process proceeds to step S478.

On the other hand, when the small hit determination flag is in the ON state (5AH) (step S476: = 5AH), various setting processes are performed when the small hit symbol is stopped (step S477). Here, 00H (OFF state) is stored in the small hit determination flag, and 5AH (ON state) is stored in the small hit medium flag as various setting processes (process before starting the small hit game) when the small hit symbol is stopped. When the various setting processes at the time of stopping the small hit symbol are completed, the process proceeds to step S478.

Proceeding to the process of step S478, it is determined whether or not the special symbol time reduction counter (remaining time reduction counter) is zero (step S478). When the special symbol time reduction counter is zero (step S478: YES), the process proceeds to step S483.

On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter is not zero (step S478: NO), the special symbol time reduction counter is subtracted by 1 (step S479) as the digestion of the fluctuation number this time, and the special symbol time reduction counter after the subtraction is set. It is determined whether or not it is zero (step S480).

If the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is not zero (step S480: NO), the number of end times of the special symbol time reduction state has not been reached, so the process proceeds to step S483 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol time reduction counter after subtraction is zero (step S480: YES), it is assumed that the end number of the special symbol time reduction state has been reached, and the setting process at the end of the time reduction is performed (step S481).

(Setting process at the end of time reduction: Step S481)
Here, as the setting process at the end of the time reduction, the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension function) is set to the OFF state (general electric accessory open extension state flag, normal symbol time reduction). Set the status flag and the normal symbol probability change status flag to 00H respectively), and set the transition to the "state without electric support". Further, in order to end the operation of the special symbol time saving function, the special symbol time saving function is set to the OFF state (the special symbol time saving state flag is set to 00H), and the game status notification LED output number (status notification of the composite display device 38c) is set. Store 00H that specifies the non-special symbol time saving state in (data) (in the case of "01H", specify the special symbol time saving state).

The case where the "setting process at the end of the time reduction" in step S481 is executed is the case where the game mode shifts from the "time reduction mode" to the normal mode (general mode), specifically, the internal game state is the "time reduction state". This is the case of shifting to the "normal state". Therefore, here, the initial value (999 times) is set in the ceiling counter in order to start counting the number of remaining ceiling games as the next game shifts to the normal state (general mode). In the present embodiment, the game in which the ceiling counter value becomes zero is the game immediately before the ceiling game (999th game), and in the game immediately before the ceiling game, various setting processes before the start of the ceiling privilege, concretely In the game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12), the ceiling activation flag is set to the ON state (5AH), and data for designating the ceiling privilege is stored in each state buffer (FIG. 15). Steps S915-S917, S914). Then, in the ceiling activation management process (step S421 in FIG. 12) at the start of the next game (ceiling game), the data in the state buffer is read out and set in various flags and counters related to the game state designation. (S921 to S926 in FIG. 14). As a result, the ceiling privilege is given at the start of the ceiling game. The ceiling counter may be set to "1000" as an initial value. In this case, it is monitored whether the ceiling counter has become zero, that is, whether it is the 1000th game, and if it is zero. For example, it is sufficient to directly set the specified data related to the ceiling privilege to various flags and counters without going through the state buffer.

(Control processing when a ceiling privilege is given when the game ends)
Here, in the case where the ceiling privilege is given at the end of the game (when the symbol is stopped), as described above, the subroutine "ceiling activation management process (step S421)" is, for example, the symbol variation. The ceiling activation management process (step S421) may be executed after the final process (step S495 described later) of the special symbol confirmation time process at the end of the display game. In this case, when 999 is set in the ceiling counter as in the present embodiment, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of the 999 game, and when 1000 is set, the ceiling privilege is given at the end of 1000 games. In any case, a specific event related to the game (here, the number of losses in the normal state) is counted, and when the count value reaches a predetermined value (here, zero), the ceiling function activation trigger or the ceiling privilege is given. It may be configured so that it can be given. If the processing method of this embodiment (see FIGS. 12 to 16B) is adopted, the ceiling activation trigger is set at the start of the game on the old model, but the ceiling activation trigger is set at the end of the game on the new model. It has the advantage of facilitating design changes and improving compatibility between old and new models.

When the setting process at the end of the time reduction in step S481 is completed, the game state update process is then executed (step S482). Here, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "05H" in the time saving mode to "00H" in the general mode. The updated game state information is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 by the game state designation command in step S495 described later. Therefore, when the setting process at the end of the time reduction in step S481 is executed, the game state specification command transmitted in step S495 described later includes information for designating the "general mode", and the game state specification command is used. The effect control unit 24 grasps that the time saving mode (time saving state) has ended in this game, and grasps that the game shifts to the general mode (normal state) from the next game. As a result, in the next symbol variation display game, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the "general mode" is selected, and the effect under the "general effect mode" appears.

Next, it is determined whether or not the special symbol probability variation counter (remaining ST count) is zero (step S483). When the special symbol probability variation counter is zero (step S483: YES), the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol probability variation counter is not zero (step S483: NO), the special symbol probability variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S484) as the number of fluctuations of the special symbol this time, and the special symbol probability variation after the subtraction is performed. It is determined whether or not the number of times counter is zero (step S485).

If the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S485: NO), the ST count has not ended, so the process proceeds to step S488 without doing anything. However, when the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero (step S485: YES), it is assumed that the ST count has ended, and the setting process at the end of the probability variation is executed (step S486). Here, as the setting process at the end of the probability change state, the function related to the probability change state is set to the OFF state to end the probability change state. However, the processing content differs depending on the value of the special symbol time reduction counter. The details will be described below.

(1) "When the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero and the special symbol time reduction counter is not zero", in this case, the ST count becomes zero in this game and the ST mode ends. This is a case where the game is switched to the time saving mode from the next game because the time saving number remains. That is, when the number of STs is 25 during the ST25 mode, or when the number of STs is 75 during the ST75 mode (“JTTBL-4, 5” in the game state transition table shown in FIG. 22 is displayed. reference). Therefore, in this case, only the special symbol probability change function is set to the OFF state (00H) (00H is stored in the special symbol probability change state flag), the transition setting from the probability change state to the time saving state is set, and the game state determination number YJ is set to " Update to "02H (shorter working hours)". When this process is executed in the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated in the subsequent step S491.

(2) On the other hand, "when the special symbol probability variation counter after subtraction is zero and the special symbol time reduction counter is also zero", in this case, the ST number is zero and the time reduction count is also zero in this game. This is the case where the number becomes zero, that is, the case where the player stays in the ST100 mode but the ST100 mode ends in this game (see "JTTBL-3" in the game state transition table shown in FIG. 22). Therefore, in this case, as the process required to end the probability change state, the electric chew support function (normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time saving function, and open extension function) is set to the OFF state (general electric accessory open extension state flag, 00H is stored in the normal symbol time saving state flag and the normal symbol probability change state flag, respectively), and the special symbol time saving function and the special symbol probability change function are turned off (00H is stored in the special symbol time saving state flag and the special symbol probability change state flag, respectively). ), The game state notification LED output number 00H is stored, the initial value is set in the ceiling counter, and the game state determination number YJ is updated to "00H (normal state)". The same applies when the latent state is terminated (when a finite latent jackpot is provided). As a result, the ST100 mode (probability change state) is terminated, and the game shifts to the normal mode (general mode) from the next game. In the ST100 mode, when the special symbol probability variation counter becomes zero, the special symbol time reduction counter also becomes zero (when the ST number becomes zero in this game, the time reduction also becomes zero). ), In the above-mentioned "setting process at the end of time reduction (step S481)" executed when the special symbol time reduction counter becomes zero, the function related to the time reduction state such as the electric chew support function is set to OFF. In this process, only the special symbol probability change function is turned off, and all functions related to the probability change state (special symbol probability change function, special symbol time reduction function, normal symbol probability change function, normal symbol time reduction function, and open extension). Function) may be set to OFF. Further, regarding the setting of the ceiling counter, the initial value (999 times) may be set in the above-mentioned "setting process at the end of time reduction (step S481)", or may be set in this process.

When the setting process at the end of the probability change in step S486 is completed, it is then determined whether or not the special symbol fluctuation number counter is zero (step S488). The determination process of the special symbol change number counter here is mainly monitoring of the change pattern selection mode (Tcode) switching game (update game) in the ST mode.

When the special symbol change count counter is zero (step S488: YES), the process is exited during the special symbol confirmation time without doing anything. On the other hand, when the special symbol variation counter is not zero (step S488: NO), the special symbol variation counter is subtracted by 1 (step S489) as the digestion of the current variation, and the special symbol variation counter after the subtraction is subtracted. Determines whether or not is zero (step S490).

If the special symbol variation counter after subtraction is not zero (step S490: NO), it is considered that the game is not the update game of the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode), and the process is exited during this special symbol confirmation time without doing anything.

When the special symbol change count counter after subtraction is zero (step S489: YES), it is assumed that the update game of the change pattern selection mode (Tcode) has arrived, and the game state update process is executed (step S491). Here, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) in the ST mode is updated. The variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated when (α) ST early mode ends, (β) ST middle mode ends, (γ) ST late mode ends, and so on. .. To be precise, the update process is performed according to the ST25, ST75, and ST100 modes.

In the case of the ST25 mode, since the mode shifts to the time saving mode when the ST early stage mode ends, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from the ST early stage mode "02H" to the time saving mode "05H".

In the case of ST75 mode, when the ST early mode ends, the mode shifts to the ST middle mode (first update). Therefore, at this time, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from the ST early mode "02H" to the ST middle mode. Update to "03H". Then, when the ST middle stage mode ends, the mode shifts to the time saving mode (second update). At this time, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from the ST middle stage mode "03H" to the time saving mode "05H". To do.

In the case of the ST100 mode, when the ST early mode ends, the mode shifts to the ST middle mode (first update). Therefore, as in the case of the ST75 mode described above, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is set to the ST early mode "02H". To "03H" in ST midfield mode. After that, when the ST middle stage mode ends, the mode shifts to the ST final stage mode (second update). At this time, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from "03H" in the ST middle stage mode to "04H" in the ST final stage mode. Update to. Then, when the ST final stage mode ends, the mode shifts to the ST final stage mode (third update). At this time, the variable pattern selection mode (Tcode) is changed from "04H" in the ST final stage mode to "00H" in the general mode. Update.

The process of step S491 described above works as a variation pattern mode updating means for updating (changing) the selection condition of the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the establishment of the predetermined modification condition.

Next, when the game state update process of step S491 is completed, the special figure fluctuation number counter update process is then performed (step S492). Here, (1) a process of setting the duration of the ST middle mode (ST number of 50 times) after 25 ST times of the ST early mode have been exhausted (a process of setting the value of the special symbol fluctuation number counter 2). , (2) After the ST count of 50 in the ST middle mode is exhausted, the process of setting the duration of the ST end mode (ST count of 25) (the process of setting the value of the special symbol fluctuation counter 3) is performed. (For the value of the special symbol change counter to be updated, refer to the columns of the special symbol change counters 1 to 3 buffers in the game state transition table of FIG. 22). In the present embodiment, the ST early stage, ST middle stage, and ST final stage modes are realized by the processes of steps S488 to S491.

Next, the precursor mode transition management process is executed (step S493). In the precursor mode transition management process, the ceiling counter is confirmed, and it is determined whether or not the value of the ceiling counter is the number of precursor mode transition trigger games. In the case of the present embodiment, since the precursor mode is entered from the 990th game (see FIG. 7), when the ceiling counter N indicates the 989th game in this game (ceiling counter N = 10), the transition to the precursor mode is performed. Perform the setting process. Specifically, the variation pattern selection mode (Tcode) is updated from "00H" in the general mode to "01H" in the precursor mode. As a result, the mode shifts from the 990th game of the next game to the precursor mode, the variation pattern of the special symbol based on the precursor mode is selected, and the effect under the precursor effect mode appears.

After completing the precursor mode transition management process in step S493, the game state information transmission process is then executed (step S495). This game state information transmission process transmits a game state designation command in the same manner as the game state information transmission process (step S408) during the special symbol variation start process shown in FIG. However, the game state designation command transmitted here is information about the game state related to the end of the game, that is, information including the contents updated in steps S482, S491, S494 and the like. Therefore, the effect control unit 24 can grasp whether or not the transition of the game state occurs by the game state designation command transmitted in this process, and can control the transition of the effect mode at the end of the current game. For example, even if the 990th game is not started after the 989th game is finished, the day background in the general effect mode can be switched to the night background in the precursor mode immediately after the 989th game is finished.

When the game state information transmission process of step S495 is completed, the special symbol confirmation time process is exited, the special symbol display data update process (step S309) of FIG. 10 is performed, and the special symbol management process (step S093) is exited. Then, the process proceeds to the special electric accessory management process (step S095) of FIG.

<23. Special electric accessory management process: Fig. 17>
Next, the special electric accessory management process (step S095) in FIG. 9 will be described. FIG. 17 is a flowchart showing details of the special electric accessory management process in step S095.

In FIG. 17, the CPU 201 first determines the state of the small hit medium flag (step S501). When the small hit middle flag is ON (step S501: = 5AH), the small hit process is performed (step S504), and the special electric accessory management process is exited. In this small hit process, necessary processing for controlling the small hit game operation is executed.

When the small hit medium flag is in the OFF state (step S501: ≠ 5AH), then the state of the condition device operation flag is determined (step S502). When the condition device operation flag is in the OFF state (step S502: ≠ 5AH), in this case, it is not in the small hit game (step S501: ≠ 5AH), and it is not in the big hit game, so this special electric accessory does nothing. Exit the management process.

When the condition device operation flag is ON (step S502: = 5AH), processing is performed according to the special electric accessory operation status (00H to 04H) (step S503: special electric accessory status branch processing). The "special electric accessory operation status" is a status value indicating the behavior of the special variable winning device 52, and this status value is changed according to the processing state, and the special electric accessory operation status storage area of the RAM in the area is stored. Stored in. The special electric accessory operation status includes "start processing (00H)" that specifies that the state is in the standby state before the start of the big hit game, and "during operation start processing (00H)" that specifies that the state is in the standby state before the start of the round game. 01H) ”,“ Operating (02H) ”which specifies that the round game is being executed, and“ Continuing judgment (03H) ”which specifies that it is being determined whether or not to continue the next round game. , "Big hit end processing (04H)" for designating that the end processing at the end of the big hit game is in progress is included.

In the special electric accessory operation status branching process in step S503, the special electric accessory operation status values are "start processing (00H)", "operation start processing (01H)", "operating (02H)", and "continuation determination" ( One of the processes of steps S505 to S509 is executed depending on whether the status value is any of "03H)" and "Big hit end processing (04H)". These processes are processes for executing and controlling the jackpot game, and the hit games corresponding to various hits are realized through the processes of steps S505 to S509. The processing contents of steps S505 to S509 will be described below.

<Big hit game control process (steps S505 to S509)>
(9-1. Big hit start processing)
The “big hit start process” in step S505 will be described. At the start of the jackpot game, the special electric accessory operation status is set to the initial value of "start processing (00H)". Therefore, when it becomes a "big hit", this "big hit start process" is first executed.

When entering the jackpot start process, the CPU 201 first sets the accessory continuous operation device operation flag to the ON state as the setting process (setting process at the start) required when starting the jackpot game. As a result, the continuous operation (round game) of the special electric accessory becomes an allowable state. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is updated to "operation start processing (01H)", and 01H for designating the first 1R is set in the "continuous number counter" for counting the number of rounds. Next, according to the winning type (special symbol judgment data) won this time, the "maximum number of rounds" corresponding to this big hit is set in the corresponding area of the RAM in the area, and the "start interval time" is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer. To set. The "start interval time (start INT)" means that after the confirmation display time of the special symbol has elapsed (see step S471 in FIG. 16A) and the big hit is confirmed, until the special variation winning device 52 is activated (1R round). It is an interval section (until the game starts), and refers to the time width that defines the opening production section.

Next, the "big hit start command" is transmitted to the effect control unit 24, and the big hit start process is exited. In addition to the role of instructing the start of the opening effect, the "big hit start command" includes information that can identify the type of the big hit this time and the game state at the time of winning the big hit. It is also used when determining a series of hit effects (opening effect, middle round effect, round end effect, ending effect, etc. corresponding to each jackpot type) to be developed inside. Thus, the jackpot game is started.

(9-2. Special electric accessory operation start processing)
Next, the “special electric accessory operation start process” in step S506 will be described.

Upon entering the special electric accessory operation start process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. The interval time before the start of the round is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here. As this interval time, in the first round (1st round), the "start interval time (start INT)" set in the above "big hit start processing (step S505)" is monitored, but the main processing is performed in the 2nd and subsequent rounds. When passing through (step S506), the "interval time before opening", specifically, the interval time between rounds (int between Rs) from the end of this round game to the start of the next round game is set. Be monitored. Until this special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, this round game has not ended, so the special electric accessory operation start process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, if the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero, that is, when the pre-opening interval time (start interval time in the case of the 1st round) has elapsed, the jackpot type (special symbol judgment data) and the current number of rounds (continuous count counter) The opening / closing operation pattern of the large winning opening 50 is set according to the value) (large winning opening opening / closing operation setting process). Here, the large winning opening opening / closing operation time (maximum opening time) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the solenoid control data for controlling the large winning opening solenoid 52c (large executed according to the number of rounds). Data for winning opening opening / closing operation pattern) is set.

Further, along with the operation of starting the opening of the large winning opening, a command for opening the large winning opening is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "large winning opening opening command" includes information on the current number of rounds, and is used when the effect control unit 24 displays an effect during a round corresponding to the number of rounds. Then, the operation status of the special electric accessory is switched to "operating (02H)", and the special electric accessory management process is exited. As a result, the large winning opening 50 is opened up to the opening / closing operation time of the large winning opening, and this round game is started.

(9-3. Processing during operation of special electric accessory)
Next, the “processing during operation of the special electric accessory” in step S507 will be described.

When the special electric accessory is in operation, the CPU 201 first monitors whether or not the number of winning balls in the large winning opening 50 has reached the maximum winning number, and if the maximum winning number is reached, the special symbol combination Clear the object operation timer to zero. As a result, the timer value set in the above-mentioned "special electric accessory operation start processing (step S506)" is forcibly set to zero, and the maximum number of winnings is reached. Will be closed. Further, here, every time there is a prize in the large prize opening 50, a "large winning opening winning command" is transmitted to the production control unit 24. This grand prize opening winning command includes information on the occurrence of winning in the large winning opening and information on the number of winning balls (the setting value information may also be included), and a prize is notified that the large winning opening 50 has been won. In addition to being used for production, it is also used for controlling the appearance of setting suggestion effects using prize-winning effects. For example, when there is an over-winning effect that exceeds the maximum number of winnings, a special over-winning effect is displayed instead of the normal over-winning effect according to the appearance rate determined according to the set value.

In addition, do nothing until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, that is, until the large winning opening opening operation time (maximum opening time) elapses or the maximum winning number is reached. As it is, exit the processing during operation of the special electric accessory.

If the maximum number of prizes is reached or the maximum opening time has elapsed and the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero, it is assumed that this round game has ended, and the special electric accessory operation status is "Continued judgment". (03H) ”, and the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer. This "remaining ball discharge time" refers to the spare time for discharging the remaining balls inside the large winning opening after the large winning opening is closed. Further, with the closing of the big winning opening (end of the round game), an interval command between rounds is transmitted to the effect control unit 24. This "inter-round interval command" includes information on the end of the round game and information on the current number of rounds, and the effect control unit 24 performs an effect (inter-round interval effect) during the inter-round interval (inter-R INT) until the next round. It is used when making it appear. As a result, the process during operation of this special electric accessory is exited.

(9-4. Special electric accessory operation continuation judgment processing)
Next, the “special electric accessory operation continuation determination process” in step S508 will be described.

When entering the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero. Since the remaining ball discharge time (1980 ms) after the big winning opening is closed is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here (see step S507), it is determined whether or not the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed. Will be done. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero, the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process is exited without doing anything.

When the special symbol accessory operation timer reaches zero (the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed), the value of the continuous number counter is acquired, and it is determined whether or not the current number of rounds has reached the maximum number of rounds. If the maximum number of rounds has not been reached, 1 is added (+1) to the continuous number counter as processing when the round game is continued, and the "interval time before opening" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer, and the special electric combination The object operation status is switched to "operation start processing (01H)".

On the other hand, when the current number of rounds reaches the maximum number of rounds, the "end interval time (end INT)" is stored in the special symbol accessory operation timer as a setting process at the end of the final round, and the special electric accessory is stored. The operation status is switched to "End processing (04H)". The above-mentioned "end interval time" is an interval section from the end of the round game of the final round to the end of the jackpot game after the remaining ball discharge time has elapsed, and refers to the time width in which the ending effect section is defined. ..

Then, a "big hit end command" instructing the start of the ending effect is transmitted to the effect control unit 24 to exit the special electric accessory operation continuation determination process. As a result, the round game of the maximum number of rounds is completed. The jackpot end command includes information on the current jackpot type and the game state at the time of winning, that is, information capable of identifying the game state after the jackpot game ends, and the effect control unit 24 performs after the jackpot game. It is also used when determining the production mode of.

(9-5. Big hit end processing: Fig. 18)
Next, the “big hit end process” in step S509 will be described. FIG. 18 is a flowchart showing the details of the jackpot end processing.

In FIG. 18, the CPU 201 first determines whether or not the special symbol accessory operation timer is zero (step S591). Since the end interval time (end INT) is set in the special symbol accessory operation timer here, it is determined here whether or not this end interval time has elapsed. Until the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (step S591: NO), the jackpot end process is exited without doing anything.

On the other hand, when the special symbol accessory operation timer becomes zero (the end interval time has elapsed) (step S591: YES), the state flag setting process is executed (step S592). Here, each value of the state buffer set in the "game state transition preparation process (step S412 in FIG. 12)" already described is set in the flag area and the counter corresponding to the state buffer, respectively. As a result, the game state after the big hit game is specified.

Next, various setting processes at the end of the big hit are executed (step S593). Here, various data used during the jackpot game control process (for example, the flags and counter values used in steps S505 to S509) are cleared, the game status notification LED output number is updated, and the special electric accessory operation status is changed. Switch to "Start processing (00H)".

When the jackpot end process is completed, a series of control processes related to the jackpot game is completed, and the current jackpot game is completed. The series of control processes related to the jackpot game described above is the same even when a "forced hit" is given by the ceiling privilege.

<19. Processing on the production control unit side: FIGS. 19 to 20>
Next, the effect control process on the effect control unit 24 side of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 19 to 20. The processing on the effect control unit 24 side is mainly a predetermined main process (effect control side main process: FIG. 19) and a timer interrupt process activated by a scheduled interrupt from the CTC (effect control side timer interrupt process: It is mainly composed of FIG. 20).

<19. Production control side main processing: Fig. 19>
FIG. 19 is a flowchart showing a main process on the effect control unit side (main process on the effect control side). When the power is turned on from the outside to the game machine main body, the effect control unit 24 starts the main process on the effect control side shown in FIG.

In the main processing on the effect control side, the effect control unit 24 (CPU241) first performs necessary initial setting processing before the start of the game operation (step S1001). Here, as the initial setting processing, for example, command reception interrupt setting, starting point return processing of the movable body accessory, CTC initial setting, timer interrupt permission, initial setting of the register value inside the CPU including each part of the microcomputer, etc. I do.

When the above initial setting process is completed, the main loop process of steps S1003 to S1011 is performed at predetermined time intervals (16 ms) as the process during normal operation, and the effect software random number update process of step S01012 is repeated otherwise.

In the process of step S1002, the CPU 241 refers to the main loop update counter and determines whether or not the main loop update cycle (counter value> 15) that triggers the execution of the main loop process has arrived (step S1002). The main loop update counter is a counter that is incremented during the effect control side timer interrupt process, which is executed every 1 ms (see step S1057 in FIG. 20). In the present embodiment, the main loop process is performed every about 16 ms. In the determination process of step S1002, the main loop update counter value is determined, and when the value is larger than "15" (step). S1002: YES), assuming that the execution timing of the main loop process has arrived, the processes of steps S1003 to S1011 are executed, and in other cases, various effects are produced until the main loop update cycle arrives (step S1002: NO). The lottery random number is updated (step S1012).

When the main loop update cycle has arrived (step S1002: YES), the main loop update counter is cleared to zero (step S1003), and then error processing is executed (step S1004). Here, the setting of the effect scenario for error notification during an error and the error cancellation process when the error is cleared are executed. In addition, errors related to the effect means (movable body accessory error, voice IC error, etc.) are monitored here.

Next, the demo / power saving mode process is executed (step S1005). In this demo / power saving mode process, the demo start waiting effect, the customer waiting effect, and the setting process required for the power saving mode are executed.

Next, the effect switch input process is executed (step S1007). In this effect switch input process, the operation state of the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored, and when an operation is detected, the effect control process corresponding to the operation is executed. The input state of the operating means is monitored by the button input state update process (step S1052) in FIG. 20, which will be described later.

Next, command analysis processing is performed (step S1008). In this command analysis process, it is monitored whether or not the effect control command is stored in the command reception buffer, and if the effect control command is stored, this command is read and the effect process corresponding to the read effect control command is executed. To do. When an interrupt based on the strobe signal from the main control unit 20 side occurs, a command reception interrupt process (not shown) is executed. By this command reception interrupt processing, the effect control command is acquired, and the data is stored in the command reception buffer of the RAM 243.

In the command analysis process, for example, when a variation pattern designation command is received, the content of the command is first analyzed, the variation pattern information of the special symbol which is the content is acquired, and stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. The effect during the symbol variation display game is not yet determined at this point, but is determined when the decorative symbol designation command sent following the variation pattern designation command is received. That is, based on the fluctuation pattern information stored here and the information (design lottery result information) included in the decorative symbol designation command, the production scenario (decorative symbol variation display) in the symbol variation display game (decorative symbol variation display game) , Notice production, etc.) are to be decided. For example, when a variation pattern specification command and a decorative symbol specification command are received, in the command analysis process, one or more types of effect patterns are generated based on the information (variation pattern information and winning type information) included in these commands. decide. The production pattern determined here works as a "parts production" as an element constituting the production scenario. Next, a time schedule is determined as to when and how much production time width the above-determined production pattern (parts production) should appear, thereby constructing a production scenario and then The production scenario data is stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 243. By developing various production patterns (parts production) incorporated in this production scenario one after another or at the same time, a "production scenario" in a broad sense is realized. In the present embodiment, the production scenario in the symbol variation display game is determined based on the information contained in the variation pattern specification command and the decorative symbol specification command, but the present invention is not limited to this, and at least the variation pattern specification command is used. It can be decided based on the information contained in. Since the variation pattern specification command includes winning information and variation pattern information, if the winning type (symbol lottery information) itself is not required, the symbol variation display game is performed based on this variation pattern specification command. You can also configure a production scenario.

Further, for example, when a "hold addition command" is received, it is determined by a look-ahead notice lottery whether to execute a look-ahead notice (hold change notice and / or a look-ahead notice during change), and when the look-ahead notice is executed. Determines the effect scenario, stores the data of the effect scenario in the corresponding area of the RAM 243, and appropriately uses it when executing the look-ahead notice. Similarly, when another look-ahead notice, for example, a ceiling hold change notice (FIG. 32) is displayed, when the ceiling hold change notice is executed, the data of the effect scenario is stored in the corresponding area of the RAM 243. It is stored in the ceiling and used as appropriate when executing the hold change notice for the ceiling. As a result, the normal look-ahead notice (holding change notice, changing look-ahead notice) and the ceiling-only look-ahead notice (ceiling hold change notice) are realized.

After completing the command analysis process, the scenario update process is subsequently executed (step S1009). In this scenario update process, the contents of the timer required to execute the effect scenario are updated, and the process of advancing the effect scenario is executed based on the timer value. A typical timer is an effect scenario timer that manages a time schedule related to the occurrence timing of the effect. For example, within the variable period in which the special symbol is variablely displayed (special symbol variable period) and within the variable period in which the decorative symbol is variablely displayed (decorative symbol variable period), that time. This timer manages a temporal schedule of what kind of effect pattern appears on the axis with what time width and by what effect means. Such an effect scenario timer is also used in the LED drive data update process (step S1011) and the effect accessory operation update process (step S1053), which will be described later. Here, this effect scenario timer is monitored, and when the time when one effect occurs, sound data for the speaker 46 and a liquid crystal command for image display control are created and stored in a designated area of the RAM 243. .. The LED data for the optical display device is created in the LED drive data update process (step S1011) described later, and the motor control data for the movable body accessory is created in the effect accessory operation update process (step S1053) described later. LED.

Next, sound output processing is performed (step S1010). In this sound output process, the sound data created in the scenario update process of step S1009 is acquired, and if there is sound data to be reproduced, a phrase, volume, etc. are created based on the sound data set for each sound channel. The data is output to the sound control unit (sound source LSI), and the sound effect is displayed from the speaker 46 through the sound control unit. As a result, the sound production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the LED drive data update process is executed (step S1011). In this LED drive data update process, LED data for an optical display device such as a decorative lamp 13 and various LED for directing is created based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer, and the decorative lamp unit 45 and the decorative lamp unit 45 are created through the light display control unit. Turn on and blink the LED. As a result, a light effect that matches the effect scenario is realized.

As described above, when the main loop processing is completed, the production software random number update processing in step S1012 is performed until the next main loop update cycle arrives.

<31. Effect control side timer interrupt processing: Fig. 20>
Next, with reference to FIG. 20, the timer interrupt processing on the effect control side will be described. FIG. 20 is a flowchart showing the effect control side timer interrupt process. This effect control side timer interrupt process is activated by an interrupt from the CTC at regular time intervals (1 ms), and is interrupted and executed during the effect control side main process execution.

In FIG. 20, when a timer interrupt occurs, the CPU 201 saves the contents of the register in the stack area (step S1051) and then executes the button input state update process (step S1052). In this button input state update process, when the input state of the operation detection signal from the operation means (effect button 13, direction key 75) is monitored and it is confirmed that the operation detection signal has been received, the detection information is set to the predetermined value of the RAM 243. Store in the area. This operation detection information is used in the scenario update process (step S1009) of FIG. 19 when displaying information related to a player participation type effect, a menu screen, or a menu item. In this embodiment, it is possible to detect a single press, a long press, a continuous hit, and the like.

Next, the effect update operation update process is executed (step S1053). In this effect accessory operation update process, a process of creating motor control data for the movable body accessory is performed based on the effect scenario data and the effect scenario timer.

Next, SOL / MOT output processing is performed (step S1054). In this SOL / MOT output process, the control data for the movable body accessory created by the effect accessory operation update process is output to the drive control unit. The drive control unit outputs a control signal based on the control data to the movable body accessory motor of the movable body accessory to be operated, and controls the operation. As a result, the movable body production by the movable body accessory (clock-shaped accessory 80, flower-shaped accessory 90, etc.) according to the effect scenario is realized.

Next, the liquid crystal command transmission process is performed (step S1055). In this liquid crystal command transmission process, if there is a liquid crystal command created in the scenario update process (step S1009) of FIG. 19, the liquid crystal command is transmitted to the display control unit (liquid crystal control CPU) to display an image on the liquid crystal display device 36. Execute display control. As a result, the image production according to the production scenario is realized.

Next, the RTC information acquisition process is executed (step S1056). In this RTC information acquisition process, date and time information (RTC information) timed by the RTC is acquired. This RTC information is used when displaying an effect based on the RTC information.

Then, the main loop update counter is incremented (step S1057). This main loop update counter is reset in step S1003 during the main processing on the effect control side described above, and is incremented in this processing. Therefore, when step S1057 is executed, the main loop update counter value is any of 0 to 15.

When the process of step S1057 is completed, the contents of the saved register are restored (step S1058), the timer interrupt process is terminated, and the effect control side main process is executed until the next timer interrupt occurs.

[Modified example of privilege granting form 1: FIG. 33]
In the above embodiment, a configuration has been described in which a ceiling privilege is given when a predetermined number of games are executed without winning a big hit during the normal mode (at least the internal gaming state is in the normal state). However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the following imparted forms (α) to imparted forms (ζ) can be used.

<Grant form (α): Fig. 33 (a)>
(Α) When the number of executed games is counted regardless of the game mode or the internal game state, and the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning a big hit. Is given a ceiling privilege (see Fig. 33 (a)). In the case of this configuration, not only the normal mode (normal state) but also the number of games executed in the time saving mode (time saving state) and the probability change mode (probability change state) are counted. Therefore, the ceiling privilege can be given purely according to how many games have been addicted to from this big hit.

<Grant form (β): Fig. 33 (b)>
(Β) The number of games in the "game state with a low probability state (low probability game state)" is counted, and the counted number of games is the predetermined number of games (for example, the 1000th game) without winning a big hit. ) Is reached, a ceiling privilege will be given. In the case of this example, the number of games executed during the gaming state (high probability gaming state) accompanied by the high probability state is excluded from the counting target. Here, the "game state with a low probability state" corresponds to the "normal state" or "time saving state" when focusing on the internal gaming state, and the "normal mode" or "time saving state" when focusing on the game mode. "Mode" is applicable.

FIG. 33 (b) typically shows a time-saving jackpot 1 (shift destination game state is time-saving A), a probability variation jackpot 3 (transition destination game state is ST25 mode (probability variation C)), and a probability variation jackpot 2 (transition destination game). The case where the state is ST75 mode (probability change B)) and the probability change jackpot 1 (the transition destination game state is ST100 mode (probability change A)) is applied to this example (granted form (β)) is shown. In the figure, in order to make it easy to compare the three, "a big hit that gives 100 times of electric support" is shown. For each jackpot, the number of games required (referred to as "required number of games X" in this example) from the end of the electric support (101st game) to the ceiling game (1000th game) is as follows.

With reference to FIG. 33 (b), in the case of the time reduction A big hit, the time reduction state is shifted to the time reduction state of 100 times of the time reduction after the end of the big hit game, and the time reduction of 100 times is counted. Therefore, the required number of games X is "900 games" (see "Time saving A" in FIG. 33 (b)).
On the other hand, in the case of a big hit when the ST mode shifts, the number of games from the end of the electric support to the arrival at the ceiling differs depending on the ST mode. Specifically, with reference to "ST25", "ST75", and "ST100" in FIG. 33 (b).
In the ST25 mode (25 STs + 75 time reductions), the required number of games X is "925 games" because the 75 time reductions after the end of 25 STs are counted.
In the ST75 mode (75 STs + 25 time reductions), the required number of games X is "975 games" because 25 time reductions after the end of ST75 are counted.
In the ST100 mode (ST count 100 times), the ST mode is in progress for 100 games until the end of the electric support, so these 100 games are excluded from the count target. Therefore, the required number of games X is 1000 games. In the case of the ST mode, the lower the profitability of the ST mode, the smaller the number of games required from the end of the electric support to the number of ceiling games.

Summarizing the relationships shown in the figure, the relationship of "time reduction A (time reduction 100 times) <ST25 mode <ST75 mode <ST100 mode" is obtained with respect to the above "required number of games X". That is, the more the game mode (internal game game state) with a relatively low profit level is shifted, the more the required number of games (the number of games required in the normal mode (normal state)) from the end of the electric support to the arrival at the ceiling. It becomes a peculiar relationship that it decreases. This point that "the number of games required to be played in the normal mode (normal state) is reduced" can be said to be a relief function having a character different from the ceiling privilege.

<Grant form (γ): Fig. 33 (c)>
(Γ) The number of games in a specific variable pattern selection mode (specific Tcode) is counted, and a ceiling privilege is given when the counted number of games reaches a predetermined number without winning a big hit. In order to make it easier to understand this example, as a virtual game machine, there are two game modes, "normal A mode" and "normal B mode", which have different variable pattern selection modes as game modes corresponding to the normal mode. A gaming machine capable of transition control of a plurality of types of gaming machine modes including modes will be described as an example. In this case, as shown in FIG. 33 (c), for example, the count target is the number of executed games in the "normal B mode". In this case, since the execution game of "normal A mode" is not counted, the ceiling privilege is not given no matter how much the game is executed in normal A mode, but it is executed during "normal B mode". The ceiling privilege can be given when the number of games reaches a predetermined number. The transition conditions between "normal A mode" and "normal B mode" (transition conditions for variable pattern selection mode) include, for example, "cause mode transition when a small hit is won" or "number of executed games (number of executed games). Depending on the number of fluctuations), a mode transition occurs. " Using this example, it is possible to create the playability as shown in (A) or (B) below.

[(A) Case where the fluctuation pattern selection mode shifts due to the small hit winning]
A case where the transition of the variable pattern selection mode is caused by the small hit winning will be described. As an example of this case, for example, when a small hit (winning probability 1/50) is provided on the special figure 1 side and a small hit (promotion lottery) is won during the "normal A mode" regarding the transition of the variable pattern selection mode. To "normal B" (shift to normal B mode after small hit game), and if you win the small hit again during "normal B mode" (fall lottery), switch to "normal A mode" Shift (shift to normal A mode after a small hit game). Then, regarding the granting of ceiling benefits, if a predetermined number of games (for example, 70 games) are addicted without winning a small hit or a big hit in the "normal B mode" (70 games are lost continuously in the normal B mode). If) Ceiling benefits are granted. In the case of this case, the ceiling privilege is not given no matter how much you are addicted to in the normal A mode, but if you are addicted to 70 games in the normal B mode, the ceiling privilege is given. Therefore, it is possible to create a novel playability in which the normal B mode functions as a "ceiling privilege granting chance period", that is, a "chance zone", which is advantageous to the player. A plurality of small hits may be provided. For example, when the first small hit is won during the normal A mode, the mode shifts to the normal B mode, and when the second small hit is won during the normal B mode, the normal A You may shift to the mode. In this case, the first small hit and the second small hit may have different winning probabilities, or may have the same winning probability. In addition, the winning probability of a small hit can be determined according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the higher the winning probability of the first small hit (the small hit that triggers the transition to the normal B mode (chance zone)), and the second small hit (the trigger to shift to the normal A mode). If the winning probability of (small hit) is set low, the higher the setting, the lower the probability of falling from the normal B mode. That is, it is possible to create a playability in which the higher the set value, the higher the probability of granting the ceiling privilege. The probability of winning a small hit, the variable pattern selection mode for counting, and the number of games for which ceiling benefits are given can be appropriately determined in consideration of playability.

[B: A case where the fluctuation pattern selection mode shifts due to the number of fluctuations]
Next, a case where the fluctuation pattern selection mode shifts due to the number of fluctuations will be described. As an example of this case, for example, regarding the transition of the variable pattern selection mode, when the first number of games (for example, 50 games) are executed during the normal A mode, the transition to the "normal B mode" is performed, and the "normal B mode" is set. When the second number of games (for example, 40 games) is executed during the process, the mode shifts to "normal A mode". Then, when the number of games in the normal B mode reaches a predetermined number of games (for example, 400 games), the ceiling privilege is given. In this example, the number of games that reach the ceiling can reach 400 games when the mode is changed to the normal B mode 10 times. The number of games reaching the ceiling is not fixed, but a plurality of types of games such as 400 games, 600 games, and 800 games are provided, and any number of games can be determined by lottery. You may. In this case, the number of games reaching the ceiling is randomized, and the fun of the game can be improved. Further, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of games (400 games), and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of games (800 games). If the lottery probability is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. It is also possible to give the player a setting estimation element depending on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling.

Further, instead of counting the number of games in the specific fluctuation pattern selection mode, the count target may be "the number of transitions to the specific fluctuation pattern selection mode". In this case, the ceiling privilege can be given when the number of transitions to the specific variation pattern selection mode (normal B mode in this example) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 10 times). Further, a plurality of types of the above-mentioned transition times may be provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, 10 times, etc.), and any of the transition times may be determined by lottery (transition number lottery). In this case, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of transitions (for example, 7 times), and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of transitions (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability of the number of transitions is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. It is also possible to give the player a setting estimation element depending on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling.

<Grant form (δ)>
In addition, instead of counting the number of executions of the special symbol variation display game (the number of fluctuations of the special symbol), (δ) "the number of executions of the normal symbol variation display game (the number of fluctuations of the normal symbol)" is counted. May be good. In this case, it is preferable to count the "number of fluctuations of the normal symbol" in the gaming state accompanied by the low probability state (normal state and / or time saving state). For example, when the number of executions of the normal map variation display game in the normal mode (normal state) is counted and the predetermined number of games (for example, the 2000th game) is reached, the ceiling privilege can be given.

<Grant form (ε)>
Further, (ε) the number of times of winning a "small hit" in which the condition device does not operate can be counted, and the ceiling privilege can be given when the number of times of winning reaches a predetermined number without winning a big hit. For example, the probability of winning a small hit is set to 1/100, and when the winning of a small hit reaches 10 times, a ceiling privilege is given. In addition, instead of the number of times the "small hit" is won, the number of times the special electric accessory is operated (the number of times the small hit game is executed) when the small hit is won may be counted. Further, a plurality of types of the above-mentioned winning times may be provided (for example, 7 times, 8 times, 9 times, 10 times), and any number of times may be determined by lottery (ceiling transition winning number lottery). In this case, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of winnings (for example, 7 times), and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of winnings (for example, 10 times). If the lottery probability of each winning number is determined according to the set value, the higher the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege, and conversely, the lower the setting, the easier it is to give the benefit of the ceiling privilege. Further, depending on the difference in the number of games reaching the ceiling, a setting estimation element can be given to the player (the same applies to the "granting form ζ" described below).

<Grant form (ζ)>
Further, (ζ) the number of times of winning “per auxiliary” is counted, and when the predetermined number of times of winning is reached, the ceiling privilege can be given. In this case, it is preferable to count the number of winnings in a gaming state (normal state and / or latent state) with at least a low probability of lottery per auxiliary (normal symbol probability change function not activated). In addition, instead of the number of winnings of "subsidy per", the number of executions of the Fuden open game may be counted.

The above-mentioned grant forms (ε) and (ζ) are characterized in that the condition for granting the ceiling privilege does not depend on the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (number of symbol variation).

It has been described that the above-described embodiment, grant form (α) and grant form (β) are granted ceiling benefits when a predetermined number of games (number of ceiling games) is reached, but the present invention is not limited to this. As in the above-mentioned grant form (γ), the number of ceiling games may be determined by a predetermined lottery (lottery for the number of ceiling games). Specifically, a plurality of types of ceiling games can be provided (for example, 500 games, 700 games, 1000 games), and the number of ceiling games can be determined by lottery. In this case as well, the higher the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively small number of games, and the lower the set value, the easier it is to select a relatively large number of games.The lottery probability of each ceiling game number depends on the set value. Can be determined.

[Modification 2 of the privilege granting form (divided privilege granting form): FIG. 34]
In the first modification of the above embodiment and the privilege granting embodiment, the embodiment in which the ceiling activation trigger is once (the ceiling privilege is granted in the 1000th game) has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this. For example, it is possible to set multiple (at least twice) privilege activation triggers (small privilege granting triggers), and to grant large benefits (for example, profit equivalent to ceiling benefits) by the small benefits granted by each privilege activation trigger. It can be configured (split privilege grant form). This modification 2 is a specific gaming state (for example, a normal state (for example, a normal state (for example)) rather than the purpose of "giving a privilege to rescue the player from a big hit" in that the privilege activation trigger is used a plurality of times. The purpose of "base up in normal mode))) is strong.

As a typical example of this modification 2, for example, an upper limit is set for the number of time reductions given between big hits, and the upper limit number of time reductions is given in a plurality of times. Specifically, a "large privilege (corresponding to a ceiling privilege)" with a finite time reduction of 100 times is given (divided) in four times according to a "small privilege" with a finite time reduction of 25 times. Is. Therefore, this modification satisfies the following relational expression (10).

The upper limit of the number of time reductions to be given (hereinafter referred to as "upper limit time reduction number") is X times, the number of times of grant is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit time reduction number is divided (hereinafter referred to as "division time reduction number") is Zk times (k = 1 to Y: In the following, it may be simply referred to as "Z")
"ΣZk = X k = 1 to Y" ... Equation (10)
Meet. For example, when the upper limit time reduction number X is 100 times and the division grant number Y is 4 times, the total number of division time reductions (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4) in the case of granting 4 times before the next big hit is won is 100 of the upper limit time reduction times. The time saving state is given so that the number of times (Z1 + Z2 + Z3 + Z4 = 100). The number of division time reductions Zk may be the same or substantially the same number of division time reductions, or at least one may be a different number of division time reductions. That is, it may be configured to divide and grant small benefits of the same or substantially the same profit, or may be configured to divide and grant different small benefits. As an example of the former, for example, 25 times of time saving are divided into 4 times and the upper limit time saving number is 100 times (the same number of times of dividing time is given), and as an example of the latter, for example, the first time to the fourth time. The number of division times is set to "20 times, 20 times, 20 times, and 40 times" (partially different number of division times) and "15 times, 35 times, 20 times, and 30 times" (different division time reductions, respectively). Number of times) and so on. In addition, as the number of Hamari games increases, a small privilege with a relatively high degree of profit may be given. For example, the number of times of division time reduction from the first time to the fourth time can be set to "10 times, 20 times, 30 times and 40 times".

It should be noted that the values for setting the upper limit time reduction number X, the granting number Y, and the division time reduction number Z can be appropriately determined in consideration of game playability and the like. For example, the upper limit time reduction number X can be set to the number of times (for example, 300 times) that satisfies the relationship of "upper limit time reduction number X> maximum time reduction number due to big hit". However, in order not to give excessive benefits, the upper limit time reduction number X is set to at least a relationship that satisfies "upper limit time reduction number X ≤ maximum time reduction number due to big hit (100 times)" or "minimum time reduction number due to big hit (50 times) ≤ upper limit". It is preferable that the relationship satisfies "time reduction number X <maximum time reduction number by big hit (100 times)".

In addition, there may be a plurality of privilege activation triggers (granting number Y), for example, "what game to give or how many games are given regardless of the game state", "specific game". It is also possible to appropriately determine which game of the state to give, "how many games are played in a specific gaming state," and the like.

In addition, after the maximum number of time reductions (large privilege) has been granted, no further time reduction status is granted, and the privilege is not granted until the next big hit. After the grant of the big privilege is finished, the sufficient privilege is given, in other words, it is assumed that the relief function is fulfilled, and the privilege is not given until the next big hit. However, a ceiling privilege (FIGS. 7 and 23) may be provided separately. For example, after the division privilege grant is completed, the ceiling privilege can be granted when the predetermined number of games is addicted to 1000 games without winning the next big hit. In addition, the setting suggestion effect can be configured to appear in at least one of the plurality of privilege activation triggers. In this case, when the privilege activation opportunity (privilege granting game) arrives, the setting suggestion information can be obtained in addition to the privilege granting, so that the fun of the game can be improved.

Further, here, a configuration in which a finite time reduction is given as a great privilege has been described, but it goes without saying that it can also be applied to finite probability variation or finite latency. In this case, if the above-mentioned "time reduction number" is appropriately read as "ST number" and "time reduction state" is appropriately read as "probability change state" or "latent probability state", a finite probability change (large privilege) is divided and given (small privilege). It is self-evident that the concept is a configuration in which a finite probability variation is given multiple times, or a configuration in which a finite latent probability (large privilege) is divided and given (a finite latent probability of a small privilege is given multiple times). For example, the upper limit time reduction number X may be read as “upper limit ST number X”, the division time reduction number Z may be read as “division ST number”, and the like. As an example, in the above formula (10), the upper limit of the number of STs to be given (upper limit ST number) is X times, the number of grants is Y times, and the number of times the upper limit ST number is divided (number of divided STs) is Zk times. When (k = 1 to Y) is set, it may be read as satisfying "ΣZk = X k = 1 to Y".

(Specific example of modification 2: FIG. 34)
This modification (modification example 2) can be roughly divided into a "periodic grant form" in which a privilege is given periodically (regularly) such as "a small privilege is given each time a predetermined number of games are executed". There is a "aperiodic grant form" in which the grant is not periodically divided. First, a periodic grant form will be described with reference to FIG. 34.

[Periodic grant form]
<A. Specific Example 1 of Periodic Grant Form (Grant Form (κ)): FIG. 34 (a)>
FIG. 34 (a) shows an example of the periodic grant form (grant form (κ)). In FIG. 34 (a), every time a predetermined number of games (here, 100 games) are executed during the normal state (normal mode) after the end of the electric support by the big hit (p0 in the figure) ( P1, p3, p5, p7) shown in the figure, and a small privilege "finite time reduction of 25 times of time reduction (25 times of division time reduction)" are given. Here, the number of grants is set to 4, and by granting a total of 4 small benefits, the grant of the large benefit "finite time reduction of 100 times of time reduction (upper limit of 100 times of time reduction)" is completed. It shows the case to do.

For details, as shown in FIG. 34 (a), the 100 games from the 1st to the 100th games (p1) after the end of the electric support (p0) are controlled to the normal state (period without division), and the 101st game. When the first privilege activation opportunity (privilege grant opportunity) arrives, a finite time reduction (25 times of time reduction) of small benefits is given, and the 25 games from the 101st to 125th games (p2) are controlled to the time reduction state. (Controlled to a shorter time by the first small privilege).
Next, the 100 games from the 126th to the 225th games (p3) are controlled to the normal state again (period without division grant), and the second privilege activation opportunity arrives at the 226th game, and the finite time reduction of the small privilege ( The time saving number 25 times) is given, and the time saving state is controlled between the 25 games from the 226th to the 250th games (p4) (controlled to the time saving state by the second small privilege).
Next, the 100 games from the 251 to 350th games (p5) are controlled to the normal state again (period without division grant), the third privilege activation opportunity arrives at the 351st game, and the finite time reduction of the small privilege ( The time reduction number 25 times) is given, and the time reduction state is controlled until the 351 to 375th game (p6) (control to the time reduction state by the third small privilege).
Then, from the 376th to the 475th games (p7), the normal state is controlled again, and the final (4th) privilege activation opportunity arrives at the 476th game, and the finite time reduction (25 times of time reduction) of the small privilege is reached. It is granted and controlled to the time saving state from the 476th to the 500th game (p8) (controlled to the time saving state by the 4th small privilege), and with the above, the grant of the big privilege "Limited time saving of 100 times of time saving" is completed. To do. That is, small benefits (25 times of time reduction) are given periodically (every 100 games) divided into 4 times, and if 500 games are addicted after the end of the electric support, all of the maximum number of time reductions of 100 times will be given. Become. In other words, such a grant form is the same phenomenon as granting a maximum of 4 sets with the game period of "100 times of executed games in the normal state + 25 times of shortened time" as one set, and the limiter function is provided. It can be said that it has a privilege granting function. Although the production mode is not shown, it may be in the normal production mode if it is in the normal state (normal mode) or in the time saving state (time saving mode) as in the above embodiment (FIGS. 6 and 7). For example, it may be configured so that the transition control can be performed to the effect mode according to the game state, such as the time saving effect mode (air combat mode).

(When granting infinite benefits)
In the above example, the configuration in which the finite time reduction is divided and given as a big privilege has been described, but the upper limit time reduction number is infinite, that is, the "infinite time reduction" can be divided and given. When the big privilege is "infinite time reduction", for example, a predetermined number of division time reductions (small privilege) may be permanently given every 100 games until the next big hit is won. Further, as in FIG. 34A, 25 times of division time reduction are given for every 100 games, but an infinite number of division time reductions may be given to the 476th game (p7 of the final grant). In this case, the time saving state can be continued even after the 501st game. Of course, an infinite probability variation or an infinite latent probability with an infinite upper limit ST number can be divided and given. In this case, as described above, the above-mentioned "time reduction number" may be appropriately read as "ST number" and "time reduction state" may be appropriately read as "probability change state" or "latent state".

<B. Specific Example 2 of Periodic Grant Form (Grant Form (κ)): FIG. 34 (b)>
In the above-mentioned grant form (κ), the periodic grant form of “dividing the ceiling privilege” has been described. Next, as another periodic grant form, the profit state granted by winning the jackpot is "infinite time reduction", "finite time reduction", "infinite probability variation", "finite probability variation", "infinite latency", or "finite". A configuration (grant form (λ)) in which "infinity" and the like are divided and given by triggering a plurality of benefits will be described.

In this example, the profits such as the time saving state (infinite time saving, finite time saving), the probability change state (infinite probability change, finite probability change), and the latent probability state (infinite latent probability, finite latent probability) given by winning the big hit are obtained multiple times. It is a configuration that will be given in installments according to the trigger of the privilege activation. That is, instead of immediately giving the total number of time reductions and the total number of STs after the big hit game as in the above embodiment (see FIGS. 4, 6 to 7, etc.), the total number of times is given to the small amount over a long game period. It is a structure that goes. In this example, in the case of a time-saving big hit, the number of time reductions given by the big hit corresponds to the "upper limit time reduction number" (large privilege), and the number of time reductions given in installments corresponds to the above "divided time reduction number" (small privilege). To do. Further, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot or a latent jackpot, the number of STs given by the jackpot corresponds to the "upper limit ST number" (large privilege), and the number of STs given in division is the above "divided ST number" (small privilege). Corresponds to. A specific example is shown in FIG. 34 (b).

FIG. 34 (b) shows, as a representative example of this example (granting form (λ)), time-saving jackpots α to γ (time-saving jackpots with 50 times of time-savings, finite time-saving jackpots with 100 times of time-savings). The case of winning the infinite time saving jackpot) is illustrated. FIG. (A) shows a case of normal granting without dividing the number of time reductions when the time reduction jackpot of 50 times (corresponding to the time reduction jackpot 2 in FIG. 4) is won, and FIG. When a time-saving jackpot of 100 times (corresponding to 1 time-saving jackpot in FIG. 4) is won, the 100 times of time-savings are divided into two and given in two parts (50 times of divided time-savings are divided into two times). (Case) is shown, and FIG. (C) shows the case where the time saving number of times is given infinitely (including the number of times when it becomes substantially infinite). When the time saving jackpot is won, the time saving number of times is given 50 times for the first time and the second time. Shows the case where an infinite number of times is given to.

With reference to FIG. 34 (b), as shown in FIGS. Fifty times are awarded, and then different game transitions are followed according to the winning jackpot type. Here, as shown in the figure, when it is determined that the effect modes are shared, the playability described below can be created.

(Time saving number of secret games)
When the time-saving jackpots α to γ are won, the jackpot type won in the symbol variation display game (such as a notice effect including the decoration stop symbol) and the hit-in effect is kept secret. The production mode after the big hit game is also a common time reduction production mode (air combat mode: see FIGS. 29 to 31) up to the first time reduction of 50 times (between 1 to 50 games) (sections a0 to p0 in the figure). ), And the subsequent 51st to 150th games are also common normal production modes (for example, general production modes) (sections p0 to p1 in the figure). Therefore, the winning jackpot type is kept secret from the production until the 150th game elapses, and during this time, the player enjoys the game while expecting the winning of the time-saving jackpot β or the time-saving jackpot γ. Here, if the jackpot won this time is the time-saving jackpot α, the normal production mode is continued after the 151st game (p1 or later), so at this point, the jackpot won this time was the time-saving jackpot α. It turns out that. However, if the winning jackpot is a time-saving jackpot β or a time-saving jackpot γ, a time-saving state occurs in the 151st game, and the game shifts to the time-saving effect mode again. Therefore, at this stage, the time-saving jackpot β or the time-saving jackpot γ It is a secret state which of γ was won. Therefore, the player enjoys the game while hoping that the time saving state does not end in 200 games (p2 in the figure) (while expecting the winning of the time saving jackpot γ). Then, if the time saving state continues after 201 games, it is confirmed that the winning jackpot is the time saving jackpot γ, that is, the infinite time saving, and the player can proceed with the game under the high base state until the next jackpot with peace of mind. Can be done. In this way, by gradually disclosing the number of time reductions in the concealed state, the player's expectation for the continuation of the electric support, the tension of the end of the electric support, and the uplifting feeling when the continuation of the electric support is found are fueled. It is possible to create such playability (hidden game with a reduced number of times). In the time saving state after 201 games in which the infinite time saving is known, the normal time saving effect mode (air combat mode) may be set, but as shown in the figure, a special time saving effect mode different from the normal time saving effect mode (for example). , A background display (not shown) different from the air combat mode may be displayed to definitively notify that the time was infinite.

In the above, the relationship between the three time reduction jackpots α to γ (finite time reduction jackpot with 50 time reductions, finite time reduction jackpot with 100 time reductions, and infinite time reduction jackpot) with different number of time reductions has been described. If there are two different time-saving jackpots, the above-mentioned time-saving number of concealment games can be realized. Further, in the example of FIG. 34 (b), the time-saving jackpots α to γ having different time-saving times have been described, but a plurality of probabilistic jackpots having different ST times (for example, a finite probability-changing jackpot α with 50 STs and 100 STs). The same event applies to the finite probability variation jackpot β and the infinite probability variation jackpot γ), and in this case, it is possible to realize a “ST number concealment game” in which the ST number in the concealed state is disclosed step by step.

[Aperiodic grant form]
<Grant form (μ)>
In the above-mentioned grant forms (κ) and (λ), the mode in which the small benefits are given periodically has been described, but the form in which the small benefits are given aperiodically may be used (aperiodic grant). form). For example, the privilege activation trigger is the 200th game, the 350th game, the 600th game, the 800th game, and the like. In the case of the aperiodic grant form, a plurality of privilege activation triggers may be determined by lottery, or a plurality of privilege activation trigger scenarios (scenarios in which the number of multiple privilege trigger games is predetermined) may be set. It may be provided so that one of the privilege activation trigger scenarios can be determined by lottery. Since other points (matters related to large benefits, small benefits, etc.) overlap with those described in the above-mentioned grant forms (κ) and (λ), detailed description thereof will be omitted.

[Other grant forms]
<Grant form (ν)>
In the above-mentioned split benefit granting form, a mode in which the small benefit is split and granted up to the profit of the large benefit has been described. However, the configuration may not be limited to the profit of the big privilege. For example, "specific benefits" are given periodically or aperiodically, but there is no upper limit on the profits given. In short, the big privilege is the infinite system privilege (infinite time reduction, infinite probability variation or infinite latent probability), and the small privilege is the finite system privilege (predetermined time reduction number of time reduction state, predetermined ST number of finite probability variation or predetermined ST). The number of times is finite latency), and the small privilege is given periodically or aperiodically until the next big hit without any limitation on the number of times Y is given. This example is different in character from the "divided grant" which has an upper limit in that the number of grants Y is unlimited (the number of grants is infinite). Explaining this example with reference to FIG. 34 (a), for example, the small privilege "finite time reduction of 25 times of time reduction" is periodically given (granted every 100 games in the normal state). The grant will not be completed at the time of p8 (4th time), and will be granted permanently until the next big hit. Further, for example, to explain using FIGS. 34 (b) and (C), at the time of p2, instead of switching the privilege to be given to "infinite time reduction", the small privilege "finite time reduction of 50 times reduction" is given. , P2 and later are also given periodically (give every 100 games in the normal state). When the number of grants reaches a predetermined number of times or a predetermined number of games, the advantage (profit state) of the small privilege may be increased. For example, according to FIG. 34 (a), when the number of grants reaches 10, the “time reduction number of times”, which is relatively more advantageous than the current small privilege “time reduction of 25 times, finite time reduction”. It can be "50 times finite time reduction" (medium privilege). The condition for switching from the small privilege to the medium privilege can be the case where the predetermined number of times of grant and / or the predetermined number of games are reached.

The above-described embodiment can have the following configurations (1) to (6). The corresponding elements in the embodiments are shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited thereto.
(1) A launching means (launching device 13, FIG. 3) capable of launching a game ball into the gaming area (game area 3a in FIG. 2), and
When the starting means (starting openings 34, 35) detects the game ball, the lottery means (S410 in FIG. 15) for drawing a lottery for a plurality of types of hits, and
When the lottery result by the lottery means is a win, the hit game execution control means (FIG. 17) for executing and controlling the hit game and
A gaming machine including symbol display means (special symbol display devices 38a, 38b) that display variable symbols and display the lottery result by the lottery means according to the stop display mode of the symbol.
A gaming state control means capable of controlling a low probability gaming state with a low probability state in which the lottery probability of winning is a predetermined normal probability and a high probability gaming state with a high probability state in which the lottery probability is higher than the normal probability. (S412 of FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIG. 18, FIG. 21, FIG. 22) and
After the predetermined start condition is satisfied, the number of fluctuations of the symbol executed in the low probability game state is set to the predetermined upper limit number (for example, 1000 times) without the hit game being generated by the hit game execution control means. Bonus game state control means (FIG. 7 (ceiling mode, heaven mode column), FIG. 12) for controlling the privilege game state (ceiling privilege (FIG. 7, 23)) which is more advantageous to the player than the normal state when the value is reached. S420 to S421, S412, FIGS. 13 to 15, FIG. 23, FIG. 33, etc.).
A game machine characterized by that.
(2) Advantageous gaming state control means (for example, a time saving state) in which the entry state into the starting means is controlled to an advantageous gaming state (for example, a time saving state) accompanied by an advantageous entry state (for example, a state with electric support) which is more advantageous than the normal gaming state. 6 (column of time saving mode), S412 of FIG. 12, FIG. 15, FIGS. 16A to 16B, FIG. 18, FIG. 21, FIG. 22, FIG. 28, etc.) are further provided.
The advantageous game state control means is configured to be able to control the advantageous game state after the hit game.
The gaming machine according to (1) above.
(3) The above-mentioned privilege game state and the above-mentioned advantageous game state have different advantages to the player (for example, the number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege and the number of time reductions due to the big hit are different).
The gaming machine according to the above (2).
(4) The advantageous game state control means is
Depending on the winning type won by the lottery means, at least a first advantageous gaming state (for example, time saving B) and a second advantageous gaming state (for example, time saving A) having a higher advantage than the first advantageous gaming state. At least configured to be controllable,
The gaming machine according to the above (2).
(5) The above-mentioned privilege game state control means is
The privileged gaming state is controlled to the first advantageous gaming state (for example, a case where the number of time reductions due to the ceiling privilege is 50 times, which is the same as the time reduction B).
The gaming machine according to (4) above.
(6) The above-mentioned privilege game state control means is
The second advantageous gaming state is controlled as the privileged gaming state (for example, a case where the number of time savings due to the ceiling privilege is 100 times, which is the same as the time saving A).
The gaming machine according to (4) above.
(7) The effect control means capable of controlling a plurality of types of effect modes related to the game state is further provided (effect control unit 24), and the effect mode related to the privileged game state and the effect mode related to the advantageous game state are different. Production mode (for example, time saving production mode (FIG. 6, 29), heaven production mode (FIG. 7)),
The gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (6) above, characterized in that.

Further, the above-described embodiment and the imparting modes (granting forms (α) to (μ): FIGS. 33 to 34) related to the modified examples can be the following (configuration A) to (configuration G).
(Structure A)
A launching means that can launch a game ball into the game area,
A lottery means for executing a lottery regarding winning when the starting means detects a game ball,
A symbol display means that performs a variable display operation of the symbol and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to the stop display mode of the symbol.
A gaming machine provided with a profit state generating means capable of generating a profit state advantageous to a player based on a predetermined generation condition.
The above-mentioned means of generating a profit state is
When the lottery by the above lottery means is won, the winning game execution control means for executing and controlling the winning game and the winning game execution control means
After the above-mentioned winning game is completed, the first profit state generating means for generating the first profit state and
A second profit state generating means for generating a second profit state when a specific generation condition is satisfied without executing the above-mentioned hit game after the predetermined start condition is satisfied is provided.
A game machine characterized by that.
(Structure B)
The first profit state and the second profit state are the same profit state,
The gaming machine of the above configuration A, characterized in that.
(Structure C)
The first profit state and the second profit state are different from each other.
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A, characterized in that.
(Structure D)
The profit status of the second profit status is lower than that of the first profit status.
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A, characterized in that.
(Structure E)
The first profit state is started after the end of the winning game, and then ends when a predetermined game period elapses.
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is satisfied, then ends once when the predetermined game period elapses, and is restarted when the specific occurrence condition is satisfied again. ,
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A or the above configuration B.
(Structure F)
The first profit state is started after the end of the winning game, and then ends when a predetermined number of games have elapsed.
The second profit state is started after the specific occurrence condition is satisfied, and then continues until the winning game is won.
The gaming machine according to the above configuration A or the above configuration C.
(Structure G)
The first profit state is started after the end of the winning game, and then ends when the first game period elapses.
The second profit state is started when the specific generation condition is satisfied, and then ends when the second game period shorter than the first game period elapses, and when the specific generation condition is satisfied again, the second profit state is satisfied. 2 Profit status resumes,
The gaming machine according to any one of the above-mentioned configuration A, the above-mentioned configuration C, and the above-mentioned configuration D.

[Second Embodiment]
<Ball ejection performance with electric support>
By the way, in recent years, due to legal demands, it has been required to appropriately suppress the arousal of gambling. In the time saving state or the probability change state, the state with electric support is set, and the control is performed under a higher base state than in the normal state (low base state without electric support). Under this electric support state (high base state), the player can aim for the next big hit without reducing the number of balls held compared to the normal state, which is advantageous for the player. However, if the base value (so-called ball output rate: "safe number of balls / out number of balls" x 100) is lowered excessively in order to suppress the arousal of gambling, the player will be able to play with electric support. The speed at which the number of balls held is reduced increases, which not only reduces the player's willingness to play, but also results in an increase in the amount of money (consumed amount) used by the player. It diminishes the willingness to play. In particular, when infinite time reduction or infinite probability change is given as a ceiling privilege, most of the players continue the game until the next big hit is won, so the more games until the next big hit win, the larger the number of games. The number of balls you have will also decrease. In other words, the player will face a situation in which the investment amount will increase even during the ceiling privilege, and the motivation for playing will be significantly reduced. In this way, if the amount of money used increases even if the game is continued in an attempt to benefit from the ceiling benefits, the significance of the ceiling function as a hamari relief function will be lost, and on the contrary, the spirit of gambling will be fueled. There is a problem that it can also be true.

Therefore, it is necessary to devise a way to prevent the number of balls held from decreasing extremely. For example, it can be said that it is appropriate that the ball output rate (base value) in the high base state is at least "100% ≤ ball output rate" from the viewpoint of suppressing the player's willingness to play and gambling. Preferably, it is "100% ≤ ball output rate ≤ 120% to 130%". A specific configuration for achieving such a high base ball output rate will be described in detail below.

In the case of the present embodiment, as described above, since the player strikes in either "left-handed" or "right-handed" depending on the game state, "left-handed advantage" under no electric support. Therefore, there is a possibility that the general winning openings 43a to 43d (first general winning means) and the upper starting opening 34 (first starting means) belonging to the left flow path 3b will win, but they belong to the right flow path 3c. The general winning opening 43e (second general winning means) and the lower starting opening 35 (second starting means) do not win a prize. On the other hand, if there is electric support, it will be "right-handed advantage", so there is a possibility that the general winning opening 43e and the lower starting opening 35 (special figure 2 starting opening) belonging to the right flow path 3c will win. , The general winning openings 43a to 43d belonging to the left flow path 3b and the upper starting opening 34 (special drawing 1 starting opening) are not awarded. Further, in a general game machine, the ball ejection rate (ball ejection rate at low base) in the state without electric support (normal state or latent state) is approximately 30% to 40% (at least less than 100%, preferably less than 100%). The ball ejection rate (ball ejection rate at high base) is approximately 80% to 95% in the state with electric support (time saving state or probability variation state), and the ball ejection rate is less than 100% in both cases (less than 50%). If left untouched). Assuming that the game machine 1 is used, the design value of the expected ball output rate is, for example, the general winning openings 43a to 43d (three prize balls) with respect to the average number of winnings per minute in the state without electric support. Are 2, 0.6, 0.4, and 1.04, respectively, and if the upper starting port 34 (4 prize balls) is "5.52", the ball output rate at low base is On the other hand, regarding the average number of prizes per minute in the state without electric support, the general prize opening 43e (3 prize balls) is 12.5, and the lower start opening 35 (1 prize ball) is 34.2%. ) Is 58.2, the ball output rate at high base is 95.7%.

Here, in the case of a game machine such as the game machine 1 according to the present embodiment, which needs to be divided into "left-handed" and "right-handed" depending on the game state, the above-mentioned high base payout rate is set. In order not to reduce it extremely, the layout and prizes of the general winning openings 43a to 43e (3 prize balls), the upper starting port 34 (4 prize balls), and the lower starting port 35 (1 prize ball) This can be achieved by devising the number of balls. Specifically, it can be realized by the following methods (A) to (H).

(A) Increase the number of prize balls in the general winning opening 43e and / or the lower starting opening 35 (starting port on the normal variable winning device 41 side (starting port with electric chew)). Specifically, the number of prize balls of the general winning opening belonging to the right flow path 3c is set to be larger than the number of prize balls of the general winning opening belonging to the left flow path 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is set to be larger than the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the left flow path 3b. Alternatively, the number of prize balls in the general winning opening and the lower starting port 35 belonging to the right flow path 3c is set to be larger than the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the left flow path 3b. For example, the number of general winning openings 43e is four, the number of lower starting openings 35 is two, and the like.

(B) At least increase the number of general winning openings 43e (increase the number of general winning openings belonging to the right flow path 3c from 1 to 2 and increase the number of winnings (number of winnings / minute) for the general winning openings when hitting right. Raise the bottom). Specifically, the number of general winning openings belonging to the right flow path 3c (number of installations) is larger than the number of general winning openings belonging to the left flow path 3b (number of installations). In the present embodiment, four general winning openings (general winning openings 43a to 43d) belonging to the left flow path 3b are arranged. For example, this is set as one, and the general winning openings 43e belonging to the right flow path 3c are used. For example, the number is 2 to 4, which is more than that.

(C) At least increase the winning rate (ball winning rate) of the general winning opening 43e (for example, increase from 12.5 pieces / minute to 20 pieces / minute). When a plurality of general winning openings 43e are provided, at least one winning rate is increased. Specifically, the ball entry rate M of the general winning opening belonging to the right flow path 3c is set to be higher than the ball entry rate N of the general winning opening belonging to the left flow path 3b.
In the case of the present embodiment, since a plurality of general winning openings 43a to 43d are arranged, the configuration may be as follows. When the lowest entry rate among the general winning openings 43a to 43d is "Nmin" and the highest entry rate is "Nmax", the following relational expression (Equation 1) or (Equation 2) is satisfied. can do.
(Equation 1) "Nmin <M"
(Equation 2) "Nmax <M"
Further, in the case of the present embodiment, the number of general winning openings 43e is one, but when a plurality of general winning openings 43e are provided, the following may be configured. When the lowest general winning opening 43e is set to "Mmin" and the highest winning rate is set to "Mmax" among the plurality of general winning openings 43e, the following relational expressions (Equation 3) to (Equation 6) ) Can be configured to satisfy any of.
(Equation 3) "N <Mmin" (when there is one general winning opening belonging to the left flow path 3b)
(Equation 4) "Nmin <Mmin"
(Equation 5) "Nmax <Mmin"
(Equation 6) "Nmax <Mmax"

(D) Start INT (interval time until the opening of the movable wing piece 47) and / or end INT (interval time from the end of the opening operation of the movable wing piece 47 to the end of the normal power opening game) ) Is lengthened (for example, the start INT and / or the end INT is changed from 500 ms to 700 ms). In this case, it is possible to increase the number of balls held (increase the ball output rate) by avoiding wasted balls (dead balls) at the time of leaving the ball, so-called "stop hitting". For example, the ball ejection rate (BA) can be set to about 95% in the case of leaving the ball untouched, and the ball ejection rate can be set to about 120% in the case of stopping the ball. This stop is particularly effective when the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is large (for example, about 3 to 4).

(E) One or a plurality of small hits that cause a small hit game operation such that the number of balls to be ejected during the small hit game does not increase or the number of balls to be ejected decreases (in the present embodiment, the small hit is provided at least on the special figure 2 side. ). For example, the opening time of the big winning opening is set to a short time (about 0.1 seconds to 1 second), and the "starting INT and / or ending INT (may be the total time of each INT)" which is the closing period of the big winning opening is the second. It is a small hit game operation with a long order (for example, about 1 second to 5 seconds). In such a small hit game, the ball ejection performance is low, and when the game ball is left unattended, the ball ejection may not increase (the ball ejection rate during the small hitting game is 100%), or the ball ejection may decrease. (The ball output rate during the small hit game is less than 100%). In this case, as in (D) described above, if "stop hitting" is used during the start INT and the end INT, the number of balls held can be increased contrary to the ball ejection performance during the small hit game. Therefore, the ball output rate can be improved. In particular, if the small hit is won with a high probability (the frequency of small hit games is increased), for example, if the small hit is won at least about 1/5 to 1/20, the effect is further enhanced.

(F) The number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls in the upper starting port 34. If the number of prize balls on the starting port side, which can be won frequently during electric support, is increased, the stopping effect will increase (the degree of technical intervention will increase), and there is a risk of causing inequality among players. .. Therefore, it is preferable that the winning opening that greatly affects the ball output rate is a winning opening other than the lower starting opening 35 (particularly, a general winning opening belonging to the right flow path 3c).

(G) The number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is set to be smaller than the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the right flow path 3c. There is a difference in the winning rate due to the stop hitting. There is no difference in the winning rate due to the stopping hitting than the number of prize balls in the "lower starting opening 35" of the "general winning opening (general winning opening 43e)" belonging to the right flow path 3c. By increasing the number of prize balls, it is possible to reduce the elements of capture by stopping.

(H) The number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is one, and the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the right flow path 3c is at least two. If the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 is 1, even if the winning rate is 100%, the net increase will be 0, and how to make full use of the stoppage by aiming at the opening operation of the lower starting port 35. In both cases, the number of balls held by the player does not increase. Therefore, by setting the number of prize balls in the lower starting port 35 to one and setting the number of prize balls in the general winning opening belonging to the right flow path 3c to at least two, the capture element due to the stop hit is completely eliminated and the output is achieved. The ball rate can be improved.

In the case of (D) or (E) described above, there is a risk of causing a feeling of inequality in earned profits between those who make full use of the stoppage and those who do not. Therefore, it is preferable to adopt the above-described configurations (A) to (C) and (F) to (H) relating to the general winning opening having no stopping effect. In particular, the above-described configurations (B), (C), (F) to (H) are effective in reducing the stopping effect and improving the ball ejection rate. Further, the number of the general winning openings belonging to the left flow path 3c or the general winning openings belonging to the right flow path 3c can be one or more.

(Modification example related to model type)
In this embodiment, the ST type model has been described. However, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the ST type model, and may be a model in which the transition mode of the gaming state is defined as follows, for example, the following models (machine 1) to (machine 3).

(Machine 1) "V probability variation type"
If a specific area through which the game ball can pass is provided in the large winning opening and one or more specific big hits (for example, probabilistic big hits 1 to 7) are won, the game ball can easily pass through the specific area (passable). ), On the other hand, when another big hit (for example, time saving big hits 1 and 2) is won, it is configured to make it difficult or impossible to pass through a specific area, and when a game ball passes through a specific area (so-called "" Only in the case of "V winning"), a so-called "V probability variation type" model may be used, in which a special symbol probability variation function is activated to shift to a probability variation state or a latent probability state.

(Machine 2) "Fall lottery type"
In the game state (latent state or probability change state) accompanied by a high probability state, a so-called "fall lottery" is performed in each game with a predetermined fall probability, such as a transition lottery from a high probability state to a low probability state (fall lottery). It may be a "lottery type" model. In this fall lottery type, when a fall lottery is won, the winning game (falling game) shifts to a low probability state (at least the special symbol probability change function is set to OFF), and the big hit lottery in the winning game is also in a low probability state. It is designed to be drawn at. There are the following cases (A) to (C) as the game state transition form when the fall lottery is won. (A) Probability change state (ST mode) → time saving state (time saving mode), (B) Probability change state → normal state (normal mode), (C) latent state (latent mode) → normal state (normal mode). In such a fall lottery type, the fall game is shifted to a gaming state with at least a low probability state. Therefore, when the execution game in the normal state or the time saving state is counted as the ceiling game, it is preferable to count the falling game as the first game. In addition, except for the fall game, the next game may be counted as the first game.

The ST type model described in the above embodiment and the fall lottery type of this example (machine 2) are mainly "presence or absence of fall lottery (fall lottery means)" and "fall transition control based on the fall lottery result (fall lottery result). The only difference is the presence or absence of the fall transition control means). Therefore, regarding the game-related matters (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34) described in the present embodiment, before winning the fall lottery (in the case of a game state with a high probability state), it can be applied to the embodiment related to the ST mode. After winning the fall lottery (when the fall lottery is won and the game state is shifted to the game state with a low probability state), the embodiment related to the normal state or the time saving state (the game state of the fall transition destination) is set. Applicable.

By the way, the conventional fall lottery type has only one type of fall probability regardless of the jackpot type (type of winning symbol), and the game tends to be monotonous, which lacks the fun of the game. Therefore, a plurality of types of fall probabilities are provided according to the jackpot type. In this case, each jackpot may have different fall probabilities, or some may have the same or different fall probabilities. Assuming that the game machine 1 according to the above embodiment is a "fall lottery type", for example, the probability of falling is 1/200, 1/150, 1/100 for the probability variation jackpot 1-3 (special figure 1 side). The jackpots 4 to 7 (special figure 2 side) are 1/240, and if the jackpot belonging to the special figure 1 side is won, the fall probability is different, and if the jackpot on the special figure 2 side is won, the same fall probability. Can be. Further, as a means for providing a plurality of types of fall probabilities, the fall probabilities can be determined according to the set values (settings 1 to 6). In other words, at least the first set value and the second set value can be configured so that the fall probabilities are different. For example, the lower the set value, the higher the fall probability can be set.

Further, the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, may be different, or may be partially different. Further, the number of STs can include not only a finite number but also an infinite number. For example, the number of STs may be 25, 75, 100, or the number of STs for each jackpot may be 100, infinite, or the like, as in Probabilistic Big Hits 1 to 7 shown in FIG. However, in the case of the fall lottery type, if the fall lottery is won before the number of STs is exhausted, the probability is forced to shift to the low probability state (the number of STs is forced to be zero). Further, when the fall lottery is won, the setting suggestion effect (fall setting suggestion effect) may be made feasible by the effect means. In this case, the execution probability of the fall setting suggestion effect can be determined according to the set value.

Regarding the above-mentioned fall lottery type, for example, the following configurations (T1) to (T3) can be used.
(T1)
An acquisition means (for example, FIG. 11) for acquiring a plurality of types of game information including a first game information (random number for jackpot determination) and a second game information (random number for fall determination) based on the establishment of the start condition. S314: In the case of this example, a random number for jackpot judgment, a random number for special symbol judgment, a random number for fluctuation pattern, and a random number for fall judgment can be acquired).
A lottery means (S410 in FIG. 12) that executes a lottery regarding a plurality of types of hits based on the first game information acquired by the acquisition means.
A symbol display means (special symbol display device 38, S309 in FIG. 10) that performs a variable display operation of the symbol and displays the lottery result by the lottery means according to the stop display mode of the symbol.
When the symbol is stopped and displayed in a specific display mode in the symbol display means (when the lottery result of the lottery means is a hit), the hit game execution control means (FIG. 17) for controlling the execution of the hit game, and
After the winning game is completed, the probability fluctuation control means (S412, FIG. 15, FIG. 18 in FIG. 12) that can control the lottery probability of winning by the lottery means to a high probability state in which the probability is higher than the predetermined normal probability. , Fig. 21, Fig. 22),
In the case of the high probability state, the fall lottery means (mainly) for executing the fall lottery as to whether or not to shift from the high probability state to the low probability state based on the second game information (fall determination random value). Control unit 20) and
A gaming machine T including a fall transition control means (main control unit 20) that controls the transition from the high probability state to the low probability state when the fall lottery is won.
The plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit.
The above is the case where the first hit is won (when the winning game by the first hit is executed) and the case where the second hit is won (when the winning game by the second hit is executed). It can be configured so that the fall lottery probabilities by the fall lottery means are different.

(T2)
The game machine T is configured so that the probability that the result of the big hit lottery will be a predetermined result differs depending on the set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages. In this case, the set value that can be changed in the plurality of steps includes at least the first set value and the second set value, and the first set value and the second set value are configured so that the fall probability is different. be able to.

(T3)
The game machine T is configured so that the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a predetermined result differs depending on the set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages.
The plurality of types of hits include at least a first hit and a second hit.
The setting values that can be changed in the above-mentioned multiple stages include at least the first setting value and the second setting value.
The fall lottery probability by the fall lottery means is configured to be different depending on whether the first hit is won or the second hit is won.
When the set value is the first set value, at least the second hit is not included in the lottery result by the lottery means.

The game machine T is configured to be able to control a plurality of types of gaming states (at least two gaming states including the probabilistic state and / or the latent state among the probabilistic state, the latent probability state, the time saving state, and the normal state). can do. Further, in the above ((T1) to (T3)), when the fall lottery by the fall lottery means is won, the setting suggestion effect execution means capable of executing the setting suggestion effect suggesting the current set value can be further provided. ..

(Machine 3) "Limiter mounted type"
When a big hit is won (a specific big hit may be won), it has a limiter function that limits the number of transitions to a high probability state by the probability fluctuation control means to a predetermined upper limit number (limit number of times), that is, so-called " It may be a "limiter-equipped type" model. This limiter-mounted type corresponds to, for example, the so-called "limiter machine (set type)" disclosed in Japanese Patent No. 5075301.

In the case of the limiter-equipped type, until the number of jackpot wins reaches a predetermined limit (until the number of continuous operations of the conditional device reaches a predetermined upper limit), the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is a gaming state with a high probability state ( Move to the probabilistic state or the latent state). For example, when the limit number of times is 5, the game state after the big hit game is controlled to a high probability state from the first big hit to the 4th big hit, and the benefit of the big hit lottery under the high probability state up to 4 big hits. You can receive it. However, when the fifth jackpot is won, the "limiter function" starts operating when the limit number of times is reached (limiter function is ON), and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends is a gaming state with a low probability state (time saving state). Or it shifts to the normal state). If a jackpot is won while the limiter function is operating, the limiter function during operation is canceled (limiter function is OFF), and the gaming state after the jackpot game ends shifts to a gaming state with a high probability until the limit number is reached again. Will be done. In this respect, a limiter machine having a limit of 5 times is also called a "5-time pack machine".

By the way, the conventional limiter machine has only one type of limit number of times, and the game tends to be monotonous, which lacks the fun of the game. Therefore, a plurality of types of limit times are provided according to the jackpot type. In this case, each jackpot may have a different limit number of times, or a part of it may have a different limit number of times.

For example, the jackpots A to D can be provided, and the limit number of jackpots A to D can be set to 2, 3, 4, 5, and 5. In addition, the symbol lottery rate for each jackpot can be determined as appropriate. In addition, it can be appropriately determined whether to shift to the probabilistic state or the latent state depending on which jackpot is won. For example, all of each jackpot A to C may be transitioned to a probabilistic state or a latent state, or only one or a plurality of specific jackpots may be transitioned to a probabilistic state (for example, when jackpot A is won). Will shift to the probable state, and if the other jackpots B, C, and D are won, it will shift to the latent state). Further, the number of STs is preferably infinite, but the number of STs may be the same for each jackpot, may be different, or may be partially different. Further, when the number of STs is finite, even if the number of STs ends and the state shifts to the normal state or the time saving state, the gaming state after the big hit game is again in the high probability state until the limit number is reached. It is possible to shift to a gaming state accompanied by. In addition, among the jackpots A to D, when a specific jackpot is won, the game state (time saving state or normal state) accompanied by the low probability state may be shifted to the gaming state (time saving state or normal state) without shifting to the high probability state. It can be appropriately determined whether to shift to the normal state or to shift to the normal state.

Also in the case of the limiter machine, the matters related to game playability described in the present embodiment (for example, FIGS. 21 to 34) are applied to the embodiment related to ST mode with respect to the gaming state with a high probability state before reaching the limiter number of times. It is possible, and the gaming state with a low probability state after reaching the limiter number of times can be applied to the embodiment related to the normal state and the time saving state (the gaming state after reaching the limit number of times).

(Appearance of the game machine seen from the front: Fig. 35)
In order to facilitate understanding, the appearance of the gaming machine when the gaming machine of the present invention is viewed from the front will be described with reference to FIG. 35. In FIG. 35, the frame 1010 is the same as the front frame 2 that is openably and closably arranged on the front side of the outer frame 4 (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “frame”), from the frame upper portion 1011, the frame middle portion 1012, and the frame lower portion 1013. It is configured and includes a viewing window that makes the game area visible. The frame 1010 here is a rough depiction of the shape and size that can be visually recognized when the game machine is viewed from the front (front). Various shapes and sizes of the front frame 2 are used, and it is free to use any shape and size. The frame 1010 here has a frame upper portion 1011 made of a horizontal member located at the upper part, a frame middle portion 1012 made of a vertical member located on both the left and right sides, and a panel-shaped frame lower portion 1013 located at the lower side. It is a rectangular frame shape that forms a rectangular viewing window as a whole.

Reference numeral 1020 is a game board described as the game board 3 in FIG. 2, and is mounted in the game board storage frame attached to the back surface of the front frame 2, or is provided in the outer frame 4 (shown in the figure). It is installed inside. That is, the game board is mounted on the game board storage frame (hereinafter, referred to as "main body frame") regardless of whether the front frame 2 side or the outer frame 4 side is attached. The game board 1020 mounted on the main body frame 1020 has a game area 1021 (game area 3a in FIG. 2) on which a game ball inside the guardrail flows down and a non-game area outside the guardrail when the game machine is viewed from the front. It has 1022 (four corners of the game board 3 in FIG. 2).

When viewed from the front, the game board 1020 is provided with a main liquid crystal display device 1031 (liquid crystal display device 36 in FIG. 2) in the center of the game area 1021 and a sub liquid crystal display device 1032 below the game area. .. Note that 1023 indicates a starting port (upper starting port 34 in FIG. 2), and 1024 indicates a large winning opening (large winning opening 50 in FIG. 2).

Regarding the relationship between the game board 1020 and the frame 1010, the frame 1010 is located on the front side of the game board 1020 when viewed in the front-rear direction. Therefore, a part of the game board surface is covered with the frame 1010. That is, there is a part of the game board surface that is covered with a part of the frame upper part 1011, the frame middle part 1012, and the frame lower part 1013 and cannot be seen from the front side. The main liquid crystal display device 1031 has a rectangular display surface, and is provided so that the entire display surface can be seen from the front side through a viewing window. In other words, the main liquid crystal display device 1031 is provided with a size, shape, and arrangement such that the display surface is not hidden by the frame 1010. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 located below the main liquid crystal display device 1031 in the game board surface is provided in a state where the lower part of the display surface is covered with the frame lower part 1013.

However, the main liquid crystal display device 1031 may be provided so that a part thereof is covered with a part of the frame 1010. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 can also be provided so that the display surface can be completely seen from the viewing window, that is, no part of the display surface is covered by the frame lower portion 1013. The liquid crystal display device 1030 including the main liquid crystal display device 1031 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 serves as an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image. The sub liquid crystal display device 1032 can be omitted as appropriate.

The lower frame 1013 corresponds to the front operation panel 7 of FIG. 1, and is composed of an upper plate 1013a, a lower plate 1013b, and a base portion 1013c corresponding to the upper plate unit 8 when viewed from the front. The upper plate 1013a is a front view of the upper plate unit 8 of FIG. An effect button 13 is provided on the upper plate 1013a as the lower operation means 1041 of the operation means 1040, and an effect button is provided on the frame middle portion 1012 as the upper operation means 1042.

The base portion 1013c of the frame lower portion 1013 corresponds to the lower portion of the front operation panel 7 of FIG. 1, and is provided with a handle 1050 (launch operation handle 15) when viewed from the front.

In a ball game machine, identification information consisting of characters, figures, symbols, three-dimensional shapes, combinations of these, or combinations of these and colors (mark of Article 2 of the Trademark Law) is placed in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device. Is done to display. FIG. 36A is an example in which the model name “Fujimaru-kun” is added as identification information to the game board surface, to be exact, the game area 1021 of the game board, and FIG. 36B shows the model name “Fujimaru-kun” attached to the upper part 1011 of the front frame 1010. This is an example with "Fujimaru-kun" attached.

<Separate Embodiments 1 to 4>
<1. Another embodiment 1: Display the identification information on the liquid crystal screen>
(1-1: Conventional problems)
By the way, in recent game machines, various problems have arisen in addition to the problems described above that may impair the interest of the player. This point will be described in detail below.

Compared to the game machines that were introduced to the market more than 10 years ago, the current game machines have various changes, but one of the most significant changes in the last few years is "Game machines. "Expansion of size" can be mentioned. Up until now, we have seen an increase in the size of the liquid crystal, an increase in the size of the board, and an increase in the operation device (operation means such as buttons and levers), but the size of the game machine itself (simply, vertical x horizontal) There was not much change in size).

One of the reasons why the size of the game machine itself did not change significantly is that the space in which the game machine is installed is limited (that is, the appropriate size is fixed). If the manufacturer of the game machine ignores this point and sets the size freely, even if the player tries to deliver it to a game store (pachinko hall) and install it, there arises a problem that it does not fit in the installation space.

The game store has equipment for installing game machines, and it is decided how many machines should be installed in a row while considering the space between the game machines. Further, a data display (display indicating the number of big hits, the current rotation speed, etc .: for example, the data counter DT shown in FIG. 3) is installed above the game machine. Therefore, it was considered that the size of the game machine could not be increased any more in both the left-right direction and the upward direction, so that the size of the game machine body did not change so much.

However, as mentioned above, the situation has changed in the last few years, and sub-liquid crystals, operating devices, light emitting means, etc. are provided on the left and right parts (especially on the right side) of the game machine body, and the effect is produced on the upper part of the game machine body. Sometimes game machines are actually put on the market, such as a movable object that protrudes enough to cover the data display, or a structure that protrudes upward enough to hide the data display in the standby state. There is.

All of these were done for the purpose of "increasing the decorative effect". And while it can be evaluated that the effect is actually shown (there are a certain number of players who prefer luxuriously decorated game machines), "Keep the data display visible to the players. There is also a view that the conventional implicit rule such as "the left and right parts of the main body have the front door of the game machine opened and closed so that it does not get in the way" has been violated.

As described above, when a turning point is reached in a part or all of the game machines, the effect that has been conventionally achieved may be reduced or completely eliminated as a compensation.

As described above, the description will be made by a new configuration adopted to achieve a certain purpose (in the above example, a configuration in which the size of the game machine body is increased in order to enhance the decorative effect). In the case where the effect that was previously achieved (in the above example, the data display was easily visible because the upper part of the game machine was not projected) was lost, a new configuration was added. After adopting it, that is, we will explain in detail what to do to realize the effects that were previously acquired while also acquiring new effects.

First, as an adverse effect of the expansion tendency of game machines, a problem is a decrease in the discriminating power of "identification information", and a means for solving the problem will be described. As shown below, various types and purposes of identification information have been attached to game machines.
(I) For example, outside the game area of the game board, "model name (model name)", "big hit probability", "probability variation inrush rate", "number of prize balls", etc. are written and affixed on the sticker.
(Ii) For example, outside the game area on the game board, "special symbol fluctuation state", "special symbol operation hold ball number (holding number)", "normal symbol change state", "normal symbol operation hold ball""Number","number of big hit rounds", etc. are displayed by a plurality of LEDs.
(Iii) For example, in the game area or outside the game area, "model name (subject)", "model name (subtitle)", "face or name of a character appearing in the game machine", "right-handed or aim", etc. Identification information such as "instruction content" and "game method (game explanation)" is arranged as a structure (movable body, non-movable body), printed on the game board surface or game parts, or written on a sticker and attached. Or something.

Conventionally, in a game machine, for example, a ball game machine, an internal lottery for a big hit is performed and a symbol variation display game is performed when the ball enters the starting port, and the above internal lottery is performed during the symbol variation display game. It is configured to entertain the game by displaying various notice effects that reflect the results of. Further, in this type of game machine, there is also known a game machine in which a model name, a manufacturer name, etc. are arranged on a frame or a board for the purpose of exerting a trademark function (self-other product identification function, etc.) (for example, special feature). Kai 2001-259169, JP-A-2018-175949)

However, due in part to the recent expansion of gaming machines and the excessive pursuit of decorative effects, it has become possible to arrange a large number of identification information, and as a result, issues related to the display of identification information (for example, identification information is overlooked). In some cases, the identification information was misidentified as different identification information, or the purpose of displaying the identification information was not accurately conveyed to the player, trader, or third party.

Therefore, an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine that solves a problem related to display of identification information.

A specific solution will be described later, but this makes it possible to provide a game that can solve a problem related to display of identification information.

Looking at the issues in a little more detail, in the past, for example, a logo indicating the model name was often placed near the liquid crystal, and the player and the trader were informed that the model was the "trade". While playing the effect of a "mark" or "service mark", it also played a role as a "directing means" by moving or emitting light at a predetermined timing (such as when a notice production with a high expectation of winning occurs). ..

However, in the example of the prior art document (for example, FIG. 1 of JP-A-2018-175949), as a result of the increased degree of freedom of arrangement, the logo is arranged in the frame (that is, it is displayed larger at a higher position). Although the effect as a trademark and service mark has been enhanced by this, the effect as a directing means has become farther from the display means (that is, it has deviated from the player's point of view). Has become low.

(Solution)
As solutions to the above-mentioned problems (problems), the following embodiments 1 to 4 are shown. According to the separate embodiments 1 to 4, the identification information is appropriate as necessary while ensuring the function as identification information having a self-other product identification function, a source display function, and other display functions indicating performance and features. By displaying in the display mode, it is possible to provide a game machine that also has a directing effect.

(1-2: Specific example of another embodiment 1)
38 to 43A and 43B show examples in which various identification information is described in the game machine. Although the figure is divided for each type of identification information for the sake of explanation, different types of identification information may be mixed in the actual game machine.

(Purpose of displaying identification information)
When a player who has entered a game store selects a table to be played from now on, what is used as the basis for selection differs among the players. To give an example that can be the basis for selection
(I) A game console that has just been introduced and installed in a game store,
(Ii) A game table that is a fan of the original motif,
(Iii) A game table having a performance that one likes (difficult to hit a big hit but has a lot of big hits, or a small number of big hits but easy to hit, etc.). Of course, there are other reasons for choosing a game console.

There are various reasons why various identification information is attached to the game machine. For example, when the type of identification information is "model name", one of the reasons why the identification information is attached to the player is to the player. Therefore, it is possible to improve the discriminating power of what kind of model the model is. If the model name is not listed, it is difficult, or at least not easy, for the player to find the desired gaming machine.

In addition, when the type of identification information is "performance display", one of the reasons why the identification information is attached is to improve the discriminating power of the player as to what the performance of the model is. Be done. If the performance display is not described, it is difficult to identify what kind of performance the model has, or at least it is hard to say that it is easy.

In any case, when the player selects the game machine, by checking some identification information displayed on the game machine, it is recognized at least whether or not the game machine is the target game machine, and also , It is confirmed whether any of the above conditions (grounds for selection) are satisfied.

Hereinafter, with reference to FIGS. 38 to 43A and 43B, the types of identification information will be described, and the display position, display size, and the like suitable for the respective identification information will be described.

(1-21: Type / category of "identification information other than liquid crystal")
(B) Model name First, the model name will be explained.
As shown in FIG. 38, a three-dimensional structure (model name logo: model name display object, logo accessory, etc.) with the mark "Fujimaru-kun", which is the model name, is attached to the upper part of the front frame 1010 of the game machine 1. 1090 is arranged. This logo accessory (model name logo) 1090 has each character bordered by a plated member, a light emitting means (full-color LED, etc.) is arranged inside each character, and a translucent member is arranged on the front side thereof. There is. Each character has a display area of about "10 cm in length x 10 cm in width". The first font (here, POP font) is used as the font (font) with the intention of giving a soft and friendly impression. As shown in the figure, the model name is described in a prominent position (such as the upper part of the board or the upper part of the frame 1011) in a conspicuous size (for example, a person with a visual acuity of about 0.7 can identify characters even if the distance is several meters). It is preferable to have.

The "logo" (mark) here is a concept that includes a "logotype" consisting of letters and a "logo mark" consisting of symbols, patterns, etc., and may be composed only of the logotype or logo mark. It may be composed of both a logotype and a logo mark. In addition, the logotype refers to a stylized or decorated character or character string, but also includes a character or character string using a very common font.

To further mention, the arrangement and size are suitable depending on whether (a) you want to make it stand out for "the person who is selecting the game machine" or (b) you want to make it stand out for "the person who is currently playing". Is different. In the case of the former (a), it is easy to see from a distance if it is "above", "front", and "side" as much as possible, and in the case of the latter (b), it is as "close to the liquid crystal (around the liquid crystal)" and "board surface". It is easy to see if it is "inside".

Subsequently, a sticker 1061 on which the model name is described is arranged at the lower part of the game board surface. More precisely, on one sticker,
(B) P: A mark indicating that the machine complies with the new rules, which came into effect in February 2019.
(B) Fujimaru-kun: "Theme (main title") in the model name,
(C) ~ Save Fujika-chan ~: "Subtitle" in the model name,
(D) [With 6 levels of setting]: A description indicating that the device has a 6-level setting function.
(E) Jackpot probability: Setting 1 to setting 6 (1/300 to 1/240): A description showing the jackpot probability at the lowest setting and the highest setting.
(F) Probability change inrush rate: 65%: Description showing the probability change inrush rate,
(G) Number of prize balls: 4 & 1 & 10 & 15: Starting port 1 & starting port 2 & other winning openings & a description showing the number of winning balls at the time of winning a large winning opening is added.

By looking here, the player can know both the model name and the performance display. On the other hand, there is also a drawback, because the display area (seal size) is small, the contents cannot be identified unless it is very close.

If the display area is enlarged in order to solve the above difficulties, the size of the sticker will increase, which will increase the cost, and if the sticker with a large amount of information is enlarged, the place where it can be placed will be limited. It is also necessary to be aware that the problem arises. Since the notation by this sticker is not intended to give the player softness and familiarity, the character font is the second font (here, Gothic font).

Further, as shown in FIG. 43A, the liquid crystal display device 1030 which is a display means (since this is a case where one liquid crystal display device is dealt with and described, the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 is included and is simply referred to as a liquid crystal display device 1030. The same applies to), the model name 1080 of "Fujimaru-kun-Save Fujika-chan- [with 6 settings]" has a predetermined display timing (for example, "waiting for customers", "big hit game", "big hit game". It can be displayed in "During a specific notice production" etc.). In the liquid crystal display, there is a high degree of freedom of expression, such as changing the color, emitting light, and enlarging (or reducing) the display size. Here, the main title is displayed in the first font (POP body) like the logo character mentioned above, and the subtitle is also displayed in the first font (POP body) accordingly, but "with 6 levels of setting" is displayed. Since it is not a model name, it is displayed in the second font (Gothic font). Since the information with settings is also important information for the player, it is highlighted in red.

(B) Function name Next, the function name will be described.
The "function" of the function name is a structural function such as "handle", "electric chew", "attacker (big winning opening)", control of "big hit game", "probability change game", "small hit rush", etc. In a broad sense, it refers to the functions that make up a game machine, such as functional functions, quality functions such as "3D sound" and "full-color LED". Furthermore, among these function names, terms that are widely used among those skilled in the art (generalized names) are used as general function names (ordinary function names and non-special function names are also possible), and model-specific names are used. The set ones (such as "Daikichi RUSH" and "DANGER SOUND" described later) may be referred to separately from the special function names. In particular, the reason for setting a model-specific name is, for example,
(I) To impress the player with the model image
(Ii) To impress the player with the amount of benefits
(Iii) To impress the product features (selling points).

As shown in FIG. 39, the function name 1070 composed of the characters "MAX BONUS" is described on the game board surface 1020 of the game machine 1. Of the notations of "5R", "7R", and "10R" in the probabilistic jackpots 1 to 7 and the time saving jackpots 1 and 2 in the "contents of hit" column of FIG. 4, the "10R jackpot (probability variation)" having the largest number of rounds Big hit 4) ”has the highest degree of advantage. However, in other models, there are cases where there are only "4R jackpot" and "8R jackpot". Therefore, even if "8R jackpot!" Is displayed on the first-time gaming machine, it is difficult to tell whether or not it is the maximum advantage of the model.

Therefore, in this game machine, this 10R jackpot is referred to as "MAX BONUS", and the characters "MAX BONUS" are emitted during the 10R jackpot to recognize that this 10R jackpot is the maximum advantage in this model. At the same time, it gives the player a sense of premier (special feeling).

Subsequently, the function name 1070 consisting of the characters "Daikichi RUSH" is described in the lower right corner of the game board surface 1020. In the game machine, the probability change state (ST mode) is referred to as "Daikichi RUSH", and a light emitting means is provided so that the characters of the Daikichi RUSH emit light during the probability change state. It should be noted that the characters of Daikichi RUSH are not individually lit one by one, and it is sufficient that the lit state (or the specific color lit state) and the non-lit state (or the non-special color lit state) can be distinguished. In this respect, it differs from the logo accessory 1090, which indicates the model name. When controlling the characters of Daikichi RUSH to the lit state, the lit state may be set in all ST modes, and from the viewpoint of specially congratulating the player, ST75 mode or ST mode 100, which has a relatively high degree of advantage, Either one or the lighting state may be controlled only in the ST100 mode having the highest degree of advantage. Further, the lighting state may be set to a different emission color depending on the ST mode.

Further, in the game machine, the "probability change state" is displayed on the game board surface as a function name in this way, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, for a special function called "small hit rush". A predetermined name may be provided. In any case, the purpose and effect are the functions of the game machine (big hit game, small hit game, time saving state (time saving game), probability change state (probability change game), small hit rush, AT (assist time) game, RT. While showing the player the existence of (replay time) game, ART (assist replay time) game, chance mode (advantageous state that makes it easy to win AT game, etc.), and other privilege games that are advantageous to the player, the actual function When is ON (a state in which a privilege game is granted), the player depends on the light emitting state (lighting / non-lighting, specific color lighting / non-specific color lighting, blinking / lighting or extinguishing = the former function is ON). Can indicate that the function is ON.

Subsequently, the functional name 1070 "DANGER SOUND" is arranged in the lower portion 1013 of the game machine frame 1010 in the display mode of the three-dimensional structure. This is a function name displayed for the purpose of communicating the function of the speaker to the player in an easy-to-understand manner. Translated literally, it is a "dangerous sound", but of course there is no danger that the sound will affect the human body, and it is said that the deep bass that is often used for sound effects in so-called "horror objects" is easy to hear. In addition, in order to establish the image of the manufacturer and suppress the cost increase, the same frame is often used for several years. Therefore, the game machine frame used for horror products and the game machine frame used for romance drama products may be the same. Therefore, when displaying the function name on the game machine frame like "DANGER SOUND", it is displayed on the end of the game machine (for example, the lower end as shown in the figure) or the outer surface (upper surface or left and right outer surfaces) as much as possible. It is preferable to do so. As a result, even when "DANGER SOUND" is displayed on the model of the romance drama, for example, it is difficult for the player to see it, so that the feeling of strangeness is reduced. Similarly, the display color is less noticeable than the model name, and "DANGER SOUND" is a color similar to the color of the game machine frame.

(C) Performance display (big hit probability, ball output, presence / absence of setting function)
Next, the performance display will be described.
Performance display on game machines, especially bullet game machines, is "big hit probability (low probability, high probability)", "prize ball number", "count number", "probability change inrush rate & continuation rate", "setting "Presence / absence of function" is applicable. That is, it is information that serves as an index when the player selects a game machine.

As shown in FIG. 40, the performance display 1071 of "Setting 1 to Setting 6, 1/199 to 1/149" is displayed on the upper left outer surface of the game machine frame 1010 by a printed matter (cell sheet). Further, a performance display 1071 of "probability variation inrush rate & continuation rate, 85%" is also displayed on the upper right outer surface of the game machine frame by a printed matter (cell sheet). All of them are described in large characters (the size of the display area is 10 cm in length and 20 cm in width, and the size of the characters is the size described in the entire display area) so as to be conspicuous to the player. In addition, in order to enhance the appeal to the player, the font is described by the first font (POP body), and only the number part has a black border in red.

The purpose of displaying these performance displays 1071 on the game machine frame 1010 is to be a player who has not yet decided (is wondering) which model to play and has a specific performance (for example, a model having a high probability change continuation rate). Or, for players who want to hit a model with a jackpot probability higher than 1/200 (middle spec, Amadeji type, etc.), the performance of the model is displayed in a more conspicuous position. This is to increase the probability that

Further, on the upper part of the game machine board surface 1020, a setting machine mark (mark) 1081 "with setting" is attached and displayed as a sticker. This sticker can be used not only for the model concerned but also for the next model (meaning the model developed and sold next by the manufacturer) and later, which can reduce waste in terms of cost. Further, by using the mark for a long period of time, there is an advantage that the meaning of the mark (that it is a model with a setting) can be easily understood by the player. The font is the third font (Mincho font) on the assumption that it will be used in common by multiple models.

Further, as already described in FIG. 38, a sticker 1061 on which the model name is described is arranged at the lower part of the game board surface. As mentioned above, this sticker describes not only the model name but also the performance of the model in detail. Also, as already mentioned, the character font is the second font (Gothic font).

Therefore, the game machine needs to have a performance display that appeals to the player (standing player) who has selected the game machine, and a player (seat player) who has been determined to be the game machine. The performance display that can be confirmed accordingly is displayed, and it can be seen that the position, size, and font suitable for achieving each purpose are displayed.

(D) Warning display (warning display, fraud prevention measures completed display)
Next, the warning display will be described.
The warning display on the game machine is common in that it gives attention to the person who sees the display, but it can be roughly divided into two depending on the target person. These two are the case where the target person is a player and the case where the target person is a store clerk (a person involved in the game store). When targeting the latter clerk, examples of warning displays include warnings about how to install the game machine (assembly method, etc.) and where it is easy to get injured (easy to pinch your hands). Applicable.

Next, an example of a warning display for a player will be described with reference to FIG. 41. The warning display for the player can be further classified into several categories. The first is "warning display for things that affect the player (in other words," warning display ")", and the second is "warning display for things that affect the game machine (in other words," warning display "". ) ”. Furthermore, the third is "warning display for matters that affect the game (in other words," advice display ")".

On the upper part of the game board surface 1020, "Do not play continuously for a long time, take a proper break", "Be careful because the upper part of the table is protruding. Please be careful of the (blowing) wind. Be careful of (intense) sound and light. ”Warning display 1072 is displayed. In addition, a warning display 1072 is displayed near the upper plate of the game machine frame, stating "Be careful not to get your hand caught in the (jumping out) button". These correspond to the above-mentioned "warning display".

Although the warning for the minimum reduction of the expected risk is given, the notes are briefly described because the text is too long to be read in order to completely eliminate all the risks. In addition, regarding the warning display for the operation means, not all possible risks (pinching a hand, pointing, dropping an object placed on the button, dropping a cigarette with surprise) are not described, and at least In general, we consider the importance of things such as those with a high probability of occurrence and those with a low probability of occurrence that cause great damage if they occur, and only display the necessary warnings. In addition, each of the warning displays has only a display area of about 2 to 4 cm in length and 3 to 10 cm in width, the character font is the second font (Gothic font), and the character color is all black. is there.

Subsequently, a warning display 1073 composed of the characters "Equipped with fraud detection system!" Is displayed at the lower left of the game board surface 1020. This corresponds to the above-mentioned "warning display". Types of fraud against game machines include "radio wave goto", "magnet goto", "dotsuki goto", and "big ball goto", and in order to monitor and respond to them, radio wave sensors, magnet sensors, vibration sensors, etc. Measures such as thread trimming structure have been taken. Therefore, it indicates that fraud countermeasures have been taken in advance and enhances the crime prevention effect.

Since it is preferable that this "warning display" is a display that stands out to the player (more accurately, a person who tries to cheat), FIG. 41 has a display area of 15 cm in length × 4 cm in width at the lower left of the game board surface. .. In addition, the background color of the base is yellow, the character color is red, and the base portion is bordered with black, and the font is also a second font (POP body) so as to stand out.

Finally, on the upper left side of the game machine frame 1010, it is stated that "You can store the character by pressing the [Release button] when the character is moving", which is "advice display" (advice display). It corresponds to 1074). That is, even if the player does not know it, the player will not be injured, and the game machine will not malfunction, but the player will be able to select one option.

(E) Intellectual property license (copyright, patent, trademark, etc.)
Next, the intellectual property right license will be described.
Most of the recent game machines are made based on well-known copyrights (for example, comics, anime, dramas, movies, novels, athletes, entertainers, etc.). In this case, since there is an individual or corporation that manages the copyright, development starts after concluding a license agreement when using it, and in the middle of development, the product of the development process is sent to the copyright source called Approval. The work of getting confirmation will be repeated many times. The license agreement number and the intellectual property license (copyright license) indicate that the approval has been officially completed. In some cases, there is only a mark indicating the copyright source, numbers, alphabets, etc. In some cases, an identification number is attached by a combination of.

In addition to that, when using music, a license number indicating that is often displayed after concluding a contract with a corporation that comprehensively licenses the use of music.

Furthermore, if you want to use an intellectual property right (patent right, trademark right, etc.) that is not covered by the copyright owner separately, you need to make a license agreement with the right holder, so this knowledge depends on the number. Identification information (marks) similar to intellectual property licenses will increase.

Looking at FIG. 42, a sticker (license sticker) "JoyForJoy" Omoshiro "Iloilo. License 123456" is located at the lower right of the game board surface 1020, or more strictly, outside the game area (outside the outer rail) on the game board surface. 1062 is attached. This indicates that a company called "JFJ" has issued a license as the copyright source for the game machine, and the license number is "123456". In addition, "" Omoshiro "Iloilo." Indicates a corporate catch phrase of "JFJ".

Since this mark (license sticker) 1062 is issued by the copyright owner, the font of the part indicating the company name is displayed in the special font (4th font: original font) specified by the company, and the license number is displayed. The part shown is displayed in a general-purpose second font (Gothic font).

Subsequently, a sticker (appropriate certificate sticker) 1063 "(C mark on ◯) JFJ supervision" is affixed to the upper left of the game board surface 1020, or more strictly, outside the game area (outside the outer rail) on the game board surface. The above-mentioned license is a proof that the use of the copyright is comprehensively licensed, and this proper proof sticker is a proof that the above-mentioned approval work has been properly completed. Since this affirmation sticker is prepared by the developer, the font is displayed in a general-purpose second font (Gothic font).

Further, also in the liquid crystal display device 1030, at a predetermined timing (for example, “waiting for customer waiting (“demo start waiting effect” or “customer waiting effect (demo display)”), “big hit game (for example, during start INT, end)” "(In INT)", "During a specific advance notice production (for example, during a reach production)", etc.), "(C mark on ○) JFJ" is displayed as a proper certificate 1064. This indicates to the player that the rights processing related to the intellectual property right is properly performed in the game machine. As mentioned above, it is displayed by a sticker outside the game area, but since it may not be noticed due to the display position and display size, the display is performed at a predetermined timing as a reminder. .. The font is preferably the second font (Gothic font) or the fourth font (company original font), and at least a font such as the first font (POP font) that destroys the corporate image or gives an incorrect image is used. Not preferable.

(F) Other indications (catch copy, poetic justice)
Finally, other displays will be described.
Note that "other display" means that it does not belong to the above-mentioned (a) model name to (d) warning display, and does not mean that there is "other display" in the category to which the mark belongs.

As shown in FIG. 43A, a "catch copy" 1065 "It's a different human taste!" Is displayed on the upper part of the game machine frame 1010. This catch phrase 1065 does not show the model name, but shows the catch phrase of the company that developed the game machine. The company that developed the game machine is using it (continuously) over multiple models, and it is placed in a prominent position above the game machine frame on the premise that it is recognized by the player to some extent. However, the display size is smaller than the model name. The font is the fourth font (original font).

Subsequently, "Fujimaru-kun" is arranged as a resin molded figure (three-dimensional model) 1066 on the upper right of the game machine frame 1010. Although there is no textual information, the mark (figure) is positioned so that it can be easily seen from a distance, so it is positioned as the "face" of the game machine.

Subsequently, "Fujika-chan" is arranged as a movable accessory 1067 near the center of the game board surface. In the standby state (initial position, standby position), since the game ball overlaps with the rollable stage, the upper part can be seen from the eyes, and the hand is also lowered (invisible state). .. Then, when a predetermined effect is generated, the lower half of the face (lower half of the face) can be visually recognized by moving upward, and the hand is designed to pop out upward with a peace sign.

Subsequently, on the left side of the game board surface 1020, a compound word display 1068 composed of the characters "poetic justice" is printed. Since the concept of the game machine is that Fujimaru-kun disciplines evil, it means that four-character idioms that clearly show the concept are written on the game board. The display size is relatively large (compared to the copyright license sticker and performance display sticker), but it is smaller than the model name. The character font is the third font (Mincho font).

Here, an example will be shown in which the content substantially the same as the content indicated by each mark shown in FIG. 43A is displayed on the display means (liquid crystal display device) 1030 using FIG. 43B. The square frame in FIG. 43B represents the outer frame of the display means 1030. The display means 1030 displays a catch phrase display 1065b, a character A (boy character) 1066b, a character B (girl character) 1067b, and a compound word display 1068b, which is a display example during a customer waiting effect. The various marks displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame have a certain distance (separate from each other) from each other, but in the display means, they are displayed simultaneously and close to each other to form one image. ing. That is, the model is a "historical drama" with the concept of "poetic justice" (jukugo display 1068b), and boy characters (character A) and girl characters (character B) appear as the main characters (characters 1066b, 1067b). ), As a catch phrase, the image of "a model that is a bit different (a distinction from other models)" (catch copy display 1065b) is planted.

As described above, the content indicated by the mark in FIG. 43A and the display object displayed in the display means in FIG. 43B are related to each other, but they have commonalities and differences. There is. For example, the mark placed on the game board displays the four-character idiom "poetic justice," but the display on the display means adds information as "poetic justice historical drama." In addition, although "Fujimaru-kun's face" is displayed on the mark placed on the game machine frame, the character "Fujimaru-kun is deformed" is displayed on the display object in the display means.

When a mark is displayed on the game board or the frame of the game machine, there are obstacles such as the display size and the reproducibility of the original (character appearance and touch of the picture) that cannot be pursued for sophistication. In that case, the mark on the game board surface or the game machine frame should have the minimum required display size (and / or amount of information) and the minimum required original reproducibility to complement it. By displaying on the display means 1030, it is possible to convey to the player the original font, color, touch of the picture, accurate information, and the like of each mark.

(1-2-2: Arrangement of "identification information other than liquid crystal")
The above is the explanation of the types of various marks (identification information). As explained above, it has become clear that the optimum display method (suitable display position, suitable display size, suitable font, etc.) differs depending on the type of each mark. Next, the optimum display method based on the "display position" of the mark, not the optimum display method based on the "type" of the mark, will be described.

(B) The mark is in the frame First, the mark in the frame can be made to stand out (the most eye-catching) when viewed from a distance (viewed from a position where the entire game machine can be seen). .. However, in order to satisfy the requirement, it is necessary to have a certain size (display size) or more, and as a single requirement, it is preferable to have a display size of at least 10 cm in length × 10 cm in width. Further, as a compound requirement, it is preferable to have a display size at least equal to or larger than that of a mark arranged on a non-frame (that is, a game board surface or the like). This point will be described in detail later.

In addition, the mark in the frame can be fixed in the display position and / or the display method (sticker, printing, logo, and other display methods) can be standardized when the mark is used continuously across multiple models. Therefore, the imprinting effect on the player can be expected, and the cost reduction effect can be expected.

Further, when the mark on the frame is viewed from a close distance, it is relatively difficult to secure a flat area because the unevenness is larger than that of the game board surface. Therefore, since it is a position that is difficult (or invisible) to be seen (or invisible) by the seated player, such as the upper end portion (upper surface, upper outer side portion) and the left and right outer surfaces, which are flat areas, the player other than the seated player (for example, It is preferable to place a mark for a player who is selecting a game machine, a person involved in a game store, or the like).

(B-1) The mark is on the game board surface and in the game area First, the area inside the game area 3a on the game board surface (game board 3) (in a broad sense, the area inside the outer rail (outer rail) of the ball guide rail 5). In a narrow sense, a mark in the area inside the outer rail and the area where the game ball can roll) can make the mark stand out to the seated player. However, in order to satisfy the requirement, it is still necessary to have a certain size (display size) or more, and as a single requirement, it is preferable to have a display size of at least 10 cm in length × 10 cm in width. Further, as a compound requirement, it is preferable to have a display size at least equal to or larger than that of the mark arranged in the frame. This point will be described in detail later.

Further, the mark in the game area 3a can also serve not only as a mark but also as a directing means. However, in order to satisfy the requirement, a combination with a light emitting means or a combination with a display means such as a liquid crystal display device is required. In addition, if the role of the directing means is strengthened, the role as a mark may not be fully fulfilled, so a balance is required. This point will be described in detail later.

(B-2) The mark is on the game board surface and outside the game area First, the mark on the game board surface outside the game area (the area outside the outer rail) is intended for the seated player (or the game board surface). It is characterized by being visible only to people who have their faces close to each other. In the first place, since the area outside the game area (non-game area) on the game board surface is not so large, it is difficult to place a mark with a large display size. The advantages of arranging in the non-game area are that the player cannot touch it (because there is a glass door 6 (transparent glass)) and that the game ball is not in the rolling area, so it depends on the game ball. The point is that it does not rub. However, since the non-gaming area basically rarely illuminates the part intentionally, the mark in the non-gaming area rarely serves as the above-mentioned directing means.

(C-1) The mark is a non-movable body in the frame The mark that is a non-movable body in the frame is basically a non-detachable logo, sticker, printed matter, etc., so it is a movable body. It is assumed that the degree of unevenness is smaller than that of the above. However, if it is a movable body, it is necessary to provide a mechanism to move it around it, so the arrangement and size will be slightly restricted, but if it is a non-movable body, that is a concern. Since it is not necessary, the flat display size can be made larger than that of a movable body.

(C-2) The mark is an immovable body on the game board surface There are various possibilities for the mark as an immovable body on the game board surface. Since the front surface is covered with glass, there is no risk of being touched by the player, so the mounting strength does not need to be so high.

(D-1) The mark is a movable body on the frame The mark, which is a movable body on the frame, has a higher degree of unevenness (protruding upward, protruding toward you) compared to the non-detachable logo or sticker. Etc.) is assumed. However, in the case of a movable body, since it is necessary to provide a mechanism for moving the body around the movable body, the arrangement and size are slightly limited. Also, most of what is in the frame can be touched by the player, which is one of the differences from the mark on the game board. If the player can touch it, it may be touched (struck) intentionally or accidentally, so strength is required. Since the strength of a movable body tends to be weaker than that of a non-movable body, it is necessary to consider this point when arranging the body.

(D-2) The mark is a movable body on the game board surface.
The mark as a movable body on the surface of the game board is a mark that is expected to play a role as a directing means. That is, in the first timing (standby state), the role as a mark is emphasized, and in the second timing (effect state), the role as an effect means is emphasized. Note that caution is required depending on how the movable body moves (whether the mark moves as a group or the mark moves so as to be divided into two or more). Details of this point will be described later.

(E) The mark is above or below the position displayed on the display means.
The mark located above the display means on the game board surface may be close to the height of the player's line of sight, and is expected to play a role as a directing means or to convey a message such as a warning. It is a mark that is. In addition, the mark located below the display means on the game board surface is slightly off the line of sight of the player, so it is not suitable to place something that would be a problem if overlooked.

A flat area (continuous area) of about 5 to 10 cm in length × 10 to 15 cm in width can be secured between the display means and the outer rail above the display means, but the display means is below the display means. Since there are functional structures such as a starting port, an electric chew, and a big winning opening between the outer rails, it is difficult to secure a flat area. Therefore, when arranging large marks as a group, the upper part of the display means is preferable.

(F) The mark is larger or smaller than what is displayed on the display means.
A mark displayed on the surface of the game board and having a display size larger than the mark displayed by the display means is a mark having a higher display size than the marks displayed on the game machine. For example, the model name and the leading character mark correspond to this. In addition, various marks correspond to the marks displayed on the game board surface whose display size is smaller than the marks displayed by the display means. When displaying the same mark as the mark displayed on the game board (or a mark that is partially common or a mark that shows similar contents) on the display means, it is not always necessary to make it stand out for the purpose. However, it is a mark that needs to stand out at a predetermined timing. As a specific example, a warning display, a performance display, etc. correspond to this.

(G) It is behind the ball rolling surface of the game board.
FIGS. 44 (a) and 44 (b) show an example in which a mark (here, a movable body 4402 imitating a specific character) is located behind the rolling surface of the game ball on the game board. The movable body 4402 is located at a lower position on the lower front side of the display means 1030 by a pair of left and right movable body driving means a and b (not shown), for example, while maintaining a substantially horizontal state (FIG. 44 (a)). ) And the upper position (FIG. 44 (b)) on the front side of the middle portion in the vertical direction. In addition, the movable body 4402 has the lower position as the origin position, and the predetermined timing (for example, "waiting for customers", "big hit game", "during a specific notice production (for example, at the time of hit notification at the end of reach)")) It can be displaced to the upper position in. Further, when the movable body 4402 is displaced to the upper position during the symbol change, the changing decorative symbol is retracted to a position that does not overlap with the movable body 4402, such as the upper right or the upper left, and is displayed small (retracted display) (FIG. 44). (B)). The operation of the operating means by the player may be an opportunity for the movable body 4402 to be displaced.

Further, in the present embodiment, when the movable body 4402 is in the upper position, the entire face of the specific character written on the movable body is visible from the front side, but when the movable body 4402 is in the origin position (lower position), it is visible. Most of the face of the specific character is hidden behind the central display frame unit, and only a part of the upper side is visible from the front side.

As described above, the specific character represented by the movable body 4402 is in a completely visible state in which the entire main part (“face” in the above example) can be visually recognized, and at least a part of the specific character is invisible (or difficult to see) incompletely visible. It is possible to switch between the state and the state, and in the present embodiment, it is possible to temporarily switch from the incomplete visual state to the complete visual state during the reach effect.

(H) It is in front of the ball rolling surface of the game board.
As shown in FIG. 44, the appearance of the specific mark differs depending on whether it is in the first display mode (or the first position) or the second display mode (or the second position). (The visible area changes, the visible and the invisible are switched, etc.) The example is not limited to this, for example, even if the mark is located in front of the rolling surface of the game ball. May correspond to.

Specifically, it is known that when light is applied to the front side of the display means 1030 and / or the front side of the nail from a predetermined angle called a light guide plate (illumination panel), the predetermined mark becomes easily visible. .. By using this, it is possible to make the mark inconspicuous except when necessary.

(1-2-3: Light emission mode of various marks on the frame or game board)
Next, using FIG. 45A, an example will be shown in which various marks (various identification information) displayed on the game machine frame 1010 or the game board 1020 change the light emission mode to various colors.

(B) Symbols are stopped (during non-demo) ~ (f) Symbol fluctuations ~ Stopped (when symbols are stopped)
FIGS. 45A (a) and 45A (b) show a display example in which the symbol is stopped. In the example of FIG. 45A (a), the decorative symbol 1033 is stopped immediately after the power is turned on (after the initial setting period ends) or after the player finishes the game (a part of the lost symbol in the figure). (Stop at "634" (separate eyes) corresponding to) is shown. At this time, the model name logo 1090 is uniformly lit in a reddish color.

When this state continues for a predetermined period (for example, 60 seconds), the display state shifts to the display state shown in FIG. 45A (b), and a "demo effect (customer waiting effect (demo screen))" that simply shows the attractiveness of the game machine is performed. At this time, the model name logo 1090 emphasizes the function as a part of the production means rather than appealing the model name 1080, and each character which is a component 1081 of the model name 1080 has a different color (in accordance with the demonstration production). Here, each character of "Fujimaru-kun" is blinking in red, blue, green, pink).

When a new player starts the game and the game ball wins a prize at the start opening, the symbol starts to change and the display state shown in FIG. 45A (c) is displayed. At this time, the model name logo 1090 blinks again at a low speed in a reddish color (a light emission mode that switches between high brightness light emission and low brightness light emission at low speed). Due to the size (display size) of the model name logo 1090, it is easy to notice when the light emitting mode is changed rapidly. If it blinks at high speed or emits light in various colors, the player may misunderstand that "the expectation of winning in the fluctuation is high". Therefore, it is preferable that the light emission mode is inconspicuous, such as lighting, slow blinking, and extinguishing in the same system color, except when a specific notice is generated during fluctuation.

Subsequently, FIG. 45A (d) shows a display example when a specific notice (here, "Fujimaru-kun appearance notice") occurs during the symbol change. At this time, the entire base portion of the model name logo 1090 emits blue light, and the light emitting mode is such that the occurrence of the specific notice is appealed to the player. This specific notice includes, for example, a high expectation notice effect and a setting suggestion effect (for example, setting 6 confirmation suggestion).

FIG. 45A (e) shows a state in which a reach effect (for example, SP reach) is executed after the state of FIG. 45A (d). Here, the mobile turret is displayed as the ally side and the flying object (disk) is displayed as the enemy side (for example, the mobile turret 911 and the disk 913 in FIG. 85 (c) described later), and if the flying object can be shot down, it will be a big hit. It has become a flow. At this time, the model name logo 1090 has an image color on the ally side (a color that makes it easier for the player to distinguish between the enemy and the ally by the color of the character on the ally side, the color of the attached object, the color of the aura that springs up from the body, etc.). Assuming that it is red and the image color of the enemy side is blue, "Fujimaru (two letters)" and "Kun (two letters)" are emitted separately in red and blue, respectively, indicating the situation of equality. There is.

In the middle of the process until the result is obtained, a large proportion of red light (number of characters, light emitting area, etc.) may indicate a predominant situation. In this case, on the contrary, if the ratio of emitting blue light is large, it means that the ally side is inferior, and the former light emitting mode (light emitting pattern) may have a higher expectation of winning than the latter.

Then, as shown in FIG. 45A (f), when the flying object is shot down, it is stopped and displayed in a state where the symbols are aligned (big hit symbol). At this time, the model name logo 1090 has a light emitting mode in which each character emits light in various colors and represents a rainbow color as a whole.

In FIG. 45A, the light emitting mode of the so-called “non-big hit” model name logo 1090 while the symbol is stopped or the symbol is changing has been described. Next, using FIGS. 45B (a) to (f), “during big hit”. The light emitting mode of the above will be described.

(B) During big hit (start interval) to (f) During big hit (end interval 3)
FIG. 45B (a) shows an example of the display screen of the display means (liquid crystal display device) 1030 and the light emission pattern of the model name logo 1090 during the start INT (start interval) during the big hit game.

During the start INT, that is, during the opening period, as shown in Fig. 45B (a), the function name logo image 4611 consisting of characters such as "MAX BONUS" and the launch to notify that it should be launched aiming at the right side. The direction notification image 4612 is displayed on the display means 1030. This function name logo image 4611 contains the same characters of "MAX BONUS" as the mark 3911 representing the function name 1070 shown in FIG. 39, but all of them are composed of the second font (here, Gothic font). There is.

At this time, the illuminations on the front side of the game machine frame 1010 and the front side of the game board 1020 and the model name logo 1090 are all lit in a specific color (for example, blue). The launch direction notification image 4612 may start displaying from the middle of the start INT. In this case, after the display of the launch direction notification image 4612 is started, for example, the illuminations on the front side of the game machine frame 1010 and the front side of the game board 1020 may be made to emit light so as to flow in the right direction indicated by the launch direction notification image 4612.

During the jackpot round, as shown in FIG. 45B (b), the launch direction notification image 4612, the round number notification image (not shown) showing the ongoing round, and the acquired ball number notification indicating the number of acquired balls in the jackpot game. In addition to the image (not shown), the jackpot effect image 4613 such as a character is displayed on the display means 1030. At this time, the illuminations on the front side of the game frame 1010 and the front side of the game board 1020 emit light with a rainbow-colored gradation (rainbow light emission). At this time, the model name logo 1090 emits light by sequentially switching in colors different from those around it (for example, red and blue) so that "wisteria", "circle", "ku", and "n" flow. In addition to this, the game machine frame 1010, the game board 1020, and the model name logo 1090 may be integrally emitted by rainbow light, or the light may be emitted substantially uniformly in the same system color or turned off.

In addition, FIG. 45B (c) is described in Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236851 (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-236851), which is a model having a function of "probability change rush if V wins", so-called "1 type 2 type mixed type" model. The light emitting mode and the display mode at the moment when the V prize is successfully achieved in the game machine) are shown. Specifically, the "1 type 2 type mixed type" means that a specific area (V area) through which a game ball can pass is provided in the large winning opening, and when a big hit is won (the big hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device). In the case of (when it is done), the big hit game is performed as "per type", while when the small hit is won (when the small hit symbol is stopped and displayed on the special symbol display device), the big prize opening A small hit game is performed in which the game is opened for one round, and if the game ball passes through the V region (V prize) during this period, it becomes "per two types", and the condition device and the accessory continuous operation device are activated. It is a type of model in which the same hit game (game per V) as per type is performed. Here, three fighters are lined up in a V shape, and an image 4613a with the V shape superimposed is displayed, and the model name logo 1090 shows that the player is blessed by rainbow light emission. ..

Subsequently, FIG. 45B (d) shows the state of the end INT (end interval) period after the jackpot round is completed. Here, the acquired ball number display image 4614 showing the number of balls acquired in this big hit is shown, and the model name logo 1090 emits rainbow light.

Then, in FIG. 45B (e), the model name display 4615 representing the official name of the present model is displayed on the display means 1030 as in the demonstration effect. The model name display 4615 (second mark) corresponds to the model name logo 1090 (first mark). The official name of this pachinko machine is "Fujimaru-kun ~ Save Fujika-chan ~", and in the model name display 4615, the first component 4615a (Fujimaru-kun) and the second component 4615b (~ Save Fujika-chan ~) ), But the model name logo 1090 is displayed only for the first component.

In this way, the model name display image (second mark) 4615 displayed on the display means 1030 has new information (here, the second mark) on the model name logo 1090 (first mark) displayed on the game machine frame 1010. Since the chapter (subtitle) "-Save Fujika-chan") is added (image 4614a + image 4614b), the information to be included in the model name logo 1090 is kept to the minimum necessary, and display means as needed. It is possible to supplement the missing information on the 1030 side. In addition, "with setting", which is additional information indicating that the setting change function is installed, may also be displayed.

The model name display image 4615 is composed of the same first font (here, POP body) as the model name logo 1090 for the characters of "Fujimaru-kun" (image 4614a) common to the model name logo 1090. Further, the same first font as the model name logo 1090 is used for "-Save Fujika-chan-" (image 4614b) other than "Fujimaru-kun" in the model name display image 4615. However, for the subtitle, a font size smaller than that of the main title "Fujimaru-kun" is used.

Of the model name display image 4615, the part common to the model name logo 1090 (image 4614a) is displayed in the first font in common, and the part not common (here, subtitle: image 4614b) is displayed. It is preferable to display at least a part of the font in a font different from the model name logo 1090 (for example, Mincho font or semi-cursive script). The reason for doing this is, as already mentioned, the common part "Fujimaru-kun" is the part (main title part in the series) that is used across multiple models (new and old models), and the series model "Fujimaru-kun". However, "Fujimaru-kun 1 (previous model)", "Fujimaru-kun 2 (previous model)", and "Fujimaru-kun 3 (latest model)", which are sold at different times, are at the same time. It may be installed in. In that case, it is necessary to make the subtitle stand out in order to differentiate. Therefore, differentiation can be realized by using a font different from the common part (one or a plurality of fonts used, character size, character color, etc. are different). In addition, there is a merit when selling sequel models, remake models, etc. in the future.

Further, when the model name display image 4615 is displayed on the display means 1030, the model name logo 1090 on the front side of the game machine frame 1010 is substantially uniform in the same color as the display color of "Fujimaru-kun" in the model name display image 4615. It may emit light. In this case, it is desirable that the emission color of the model name logo 1090 is different from the illumination of the game machine frame 1010 and the game board 1020 located in the vicinity.

In this way, by displaying the model name display image 4615 including "Fujimaru-kun", which is the same as the model name logo 1090, on the display means 1030 during the end INT (big hit end interval), the game machine that is difficult to see by the player. Despite the fact that the model name logo 1090 located on the upper side of the frame 1010 is arranged, it is possible to effectively function the "Fujimaru-kun" mark used in the model name logo 1090 as a directing means. is there.

FIG. 45B (f) shows an example in which the game state (probability change state, time saving state, normal state, etc.) that shifts after the end of the big hit game is functionally named and displayed in the end interval period. Here, the "probability change state" is referred to as "Fujimaru time" to create a model-specific function name.

FIG. 46 is a diagram showing an example (waiting for customers) in which the “light emitting mode of the model name logo” changes according to the progress of the game. First, the "customer waiting period" will be described. When the player finishes the game and leaves the seat, (a) the demonstration starts until a predetermined time (15 seconds in the figure) elapses from the end of the symbol fluctuation for the last number of pending balls and the stop of the symbol. As a waiting effect period, the symbol stop display is continued. During this period, the so-called judgment is suspended because the game machine cannot accurately grasp whether the player has finished the game or is trying to take out money from the wallet or light a cigarette. Is.

(B) When the period before waiting for customers continues for a predetermined time, the period shifts to (b) waiting for customers. As shown in FIG. 46, the display means 1030 displays a lively effect display (in the figure, an effect display crossed by a fighter) and an operation means (effect button 13, cross key 75), and adjusts the volume and the amount of light when operated. A message is displayed to the effect that it can be done or the menu screen can be opened. If you operate the button to open the menu screen, you can make more detailed game settings.

(B) When the waiting period for customers continues for a predetermined time (30 seconds in the figure), the period shifts to (c) the demonstration production period. The demonstration production period is a period in which the demonstration production is performed in order to attract new players, assuming that the player is away from the seat after the periods (a) and (b) have passed. When this demo production period is subdivided, (c-1) demo movie period (model image production period), (c-2) model name display period, (c-3) other display period (company logo display, immersive prevention display) And warnings to prevent forgetting to take the prepaid card).

Then, after this (c) demonstration production period takes a predetermined time (90 seconds in the figure), the period shifts to the (b) customer waiting period again, and thereafter (b) → (c) → (b).・ ・ Is repeated. In addition, since the player is considered to be away from the seat at the time of the demonstration production, the transition is not made before waiting for the customer in (a). Further, in FIG. 46, the respective periods are set to 15 seconds, 30 seconds, and 90 seconds, but the period is not limited to this. For example, if the demo production is repeated frequently, the player playing on the adjacent platform is inconvenienced. If the mechanical designer decides, the customer waiting time may be longer than the demonstration production time, or at least approximately the same time or more.

Furthermore, the transition trigger of each state starts counting from the last symbol stop, and "shifts to (b) when 15 seconds have passed", "shifts to (c) when 45 seconds have passed", and "when 135 seconds have passed (b). ) May be used, or the counter may be reset and a state specification command may be sent each time the state is changed, or two or more counters may be used.

The counter reset conditions include "when the handle touch sensor is turned on", "when any of a plurality of operating means provided in the game machine frame is operated", and "when the game machine frame is provided". When a specific operating means is operated (when a valid operation is performed), "when a game ball is fired", or "a plurality of game ball detecting means provided on the game board surface is turned on". One or a plurality of conditions may be set, either "when the situation is reached" or "when the game ball detecting means provided at the special drawing start port is turned on (when the symbol variation starts)".

As explained above, even during the period of "the symbol is stopped and the non-big hit game is in progress", (a) (b) (c) or further subdivision (a) (b) (har 1) (har 2) It can be divided into a period called (Har 3). Therefore, it is possible to specify each as a first period, a second period, and a third period (which may be further subdivided). On the premise of this, looking at the light emission mode of the title logo (Fujimaru-kun) for each period, (Har 1) is also the most characteristic, and it emits colorfully individually according to the demo movie. The colors may be changed or the blinking cycle may be different during other periods, but basically the colors of "wisteria", "maru", "ku", and "n" should be emitted in almost the same color. There is.

This is because a player who sees the game machine from a distance sees that only a specific part (for example, "Maru-kun") of the model name logo 1090 is shining (or shining in a different color). This is to prevent the name of the game machine from being mistaken for "Maru-kun". Since the demo movie is originally performed to attract the player during the demo movie production, it is assumed that the player's line of sight is directed to the display means 1030, and the title logo 1080 is also used as the production means at this timing. It plays the role of.

In this way, the period in which the model name logo 1090 plays the role of indicating the model name ((a) (b) or (a) (b) (c-2) (c-3) in FIG. 46) is set as the first period. , The period in which the title logo 1080 plays a role as a directing means ((c) or (c-1) in FIG. 46) is set as the second period, and the light emitting mode is mainly individual light emitting or unified light emitting (unified light emitting) according to each period. It may be different whether or not the main body is (whole light emission).

(1-2-4: Various marks on the frame or game board are also displayed on the display means)
A specific example in which various marks (various identification information) are displayed on the display means 1030 is shown below. The various marks shown below are based on the premise that marks having the same or similar contents are displayed in places other than the display means 1030 (each part of the game machine frame 1010 or the game board 1020).

That is, the meaning (purpose, effect) of displaying various marks having the same or similar contents on the display means 1030 at a predetermined timing will be described even though the display means is always visible other than the display means 1030.

(A) Timing and specific display mode for displaying various marks on the display means (FIG. 47).
(A) Model name FIG. 47 (a) is an example in which the model name is displayed as an image on the display means 1030. Display timings include "demo production", "preliminary production", and "big hit". As shown in the figure, the display mode is the main title 4711 ("Fujimaru-kun"), the subtitle 4712 ("~ Save Fujika-chan ~"), and the mark indicating the presence or absence of the setting function (setting function display mark) 4713 ("" With 6 settings ") is displayed. Both the main title 4711 and the subtitle 4712 are displayed in substantially the same font as the model name logo 1090. The display size of the model name logo 1090 is larger.

(B) Function name FIG. 47 (b) is an example in which the function name is displayed as an image on the display means 1030. The display timing (depending on what function name is displayed) includes "when the symbol is stopped (in the case of a big hit)" and "during a big hit (start interval period)". As shown in the display mode, the mark (second mark) 4714 indicating that the big hit (for example, 10R probability variation big hit) with the highest degree of advantage among multiple types called "MAX BONUS" was won at the start of the big hit It is displayed in the second font (Gothic font). Although not shown, other function names (for example, "Fujimaru time entry confirmed!") May be displayed at the same timing. In either case, the font is preferably substantially the same as the mark (first mark) displayed on the game board surface 1020. As a result, it is easy for the player to grasp which function has been activated (synonymous with appearance, activation, start, etc.).

(C) Performance display FIG. 47 (c) is an example in which the performance display is displayed as an image on the display means 1030. The display timing includes "demo production", "design change (information notice, etc.)", and the like. As shown in the display mode, the performance display 4731 (“probability variation inrush rate 85%”) is largely displayed on the display means 1030. As for the display size, the performance display 4731 (second mark) displayed on the display means 1030 is larger than the performance display (first mark) displayed on the game board. However, this is an example when the performance display can be a product feature (a selling point when returned), and as another example, a mark for which a display obligation is imposed (for example, a real-time payout rate is displayed in the future). Since there is no intention to appeal the identification information indicating the value when it becomes necessary to do so, the minimum required display size may be used.

Also, based on the same idea, if the purpose of displaying the performance display 4731 (second mark) is to appeal to the player, the second mark should be a font (font, color, etc.) that stands out from the first mark. If the purpose is not to appeal to the player, the purpose is even if the marks have the same properties (here, "performance display"), such as making the second mark and the first mark almost the same font. Depending on the font, the fonts of the first mark and the second mark may be the same, or one of them may be conspicuous or different.

(D) Warning display FIG. 47 (d) is an example in which the warning display 4741 is displayed as an image on the display means 1030. Display timings include "demo production", "error occurrence (abnormality detection)", and "big hit (end interval period)". As shown in the display mode, a large caution (warning display) is displayed on the display screen of the display means 1030. The warning display on the game board 1020 is "Equipped with fraud detection system!". In this way, when writing on the game board 1020, if all the information is packed, the size of the characters becomes small, and it becomes difficult to convey the content to be conveyed. Therefore, while minimizing the amount of information on the game board 1020, it is possible to increase the amount of information, increase the display size, and make the display colors and fonts conspicuous when displaying on the display means 1030. desirable.

(E) Intellectual property-related display FIG. 47 (e) is an example in which the intellectual property-related display 4742 is displayed as an image on the display means 1030. Display timings include "demo production" and "big hit (end interval period, etc.)". As shown in the display mode, the notation "(C mark in ◯) JFJ" is displayed at the lower right of the display means 1030. The timing of displaying this intellectual property-related display (copyright license certificate, copyright license number, etc.) 4742 on the display means 1030 is the period during which the object indicated by the display becomes clear (work related to music). It is more preferable that the license number is displayed at least during the period when the corresponding music is played, and at least during the period when the model name is displayed for the copyright license that is the motif of the game machine).

(F) Other display FIG. 47 (f) is an example in which the other display 4743 not included in the above (a) to (e) is displayed as an image on the display means 1030. Therefore, the display timing depends on the displayed content. For example, the illustrated "Human taste" funny "!" Is a company catch phrase of the manufacturer that manufactured and sold the game machine, and the display timing is mainly "demo production", "big hit", etc. Be done. As shown in the display mode, the mark (second mark), which says "It's a different human taste, is" funny "!" Is composed of characters of various colors and is displayed large in the center.
When displaying the same mark (first mark) on the game machine frame 1010, that is, when arranging the mark as a molded product, it costs a considerable cost to change the color one by one. Therefore, the first mark is a mark consisting of one color or at most two colors, and the second mark is colorfully displayed on the display means 1030 to indicate the original color (the correct color scheme when used as a corporate catch phrase). ) Can be communicated to the player.

<Example in which the fonts of various marks displayed on the display means differ according to the progress of the game>
In FIGS. 48 (a) to (d), a mark (second mark) 4811 including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) is displayed on the display means 1030, and at least 2 In the case of having the above display timing, an example is shown in which at least one of the display size, display color, and font of the marks is different from each other at the display timing.

In FIG. 48 (a), the first model name display 4811 (second mark) is displayed during “demo production”. In detail, during the demo production, the original song of the model, "Soreike Fujimaru-kun," is played, and the chorus part of the song has the lyrics "Oh, Fu-jimaru-kun." According to the lyrics, "Fu-jimaru-kun ♪" is displayed on the display means 1030. This includes the meaning of conveying the lyrics and the meaning of conveying the model name of the model concerned. In this way, when communicating the model name (that is, displaying the one whose display intention overlaps with the first mark), if the notation font of the model name logo 1090 is displayed as it is, it is transmitted that the lyrics are conveyed. Absent. Therefore, when displaying the first mark on the display means according to the lyrics or other purposes, the font and size different from the first mark are different as the second mark according to those purposes. , It may be displayed in a different array or the like.

Further, in FIG. 48 (b), the second model name display 4812 (third mark) is displayed as a notice effect during “design change”. In detail, Fujimaru-kun's character display as a pseudo-continuous symbol (a symbol that makes it appear as if the fluctuation starts from the beginning again when the symbol stops, and that it is a well-known technique to have a pseudo-continuous symbol). A character name display indicating that this character is Fujimaru-kun is displayed. Here, these two (character display + character name display) are combined to form the second model name display 4812 (third mark). This third mark includes the meaning of conveying the character name and the meaning of conveying the model name of the model. In this way, when the model name is transmitted (that is, the one whose display intention overlaps with the first mark is displayed), if the notation font of the model name logo 1090 is displayed as it is, the character name is transmitted. Not transmitted. Therefore, in order to make it easy to understand that it is a character name, the third mark is displayed in the vicinity of the object (character display), the display size is adjusted to the object, and so on. It may be displayed in a font different from that of the first mark, a different size, a different arrangement, or the like.

When the model name is used as a notice effect, it is almost useless (it is not easy to use) if it is used without destroying the shape, arrangement, color scheme, etc. of the model name. For example, if it is used as a pseudo-continuous pattern, a shape close to a circle or a square is easier to look like a pattern, but if a horizontally long array is used as it is, it is difficult to look like a pattern.

In this way, when displaying a mark that is the same as or similar to the mark (first mark) displayed on the game machine frame 1010 or the game board 1020 on the display means 1030 at two or more timings, at least one timing. It is preferable to use the mark in a font different from that of the first mark.

FIGS. 48 (c) and 48 (d) show an example in which the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is also used as a jackpot name and has a functional name "Fujimaru-kun BONUS".

FIG. 48 (c) is an example used as a "next notice (high expectation notice)" during a symbol change. There are multiple patterns of variations in the "next notice", including those that suggest the development destination and the degree of expectation of winning, such as "next time, 〇〇 reach" and "next time, intense heat!" The degree is set to be different. The third model name display 4813 (4th mark), which is located at the top of the list and directly suggests a big hit, is "Next time, Fujimaru-kun BONUS". This 4th mark is displayed colorfully (so-called rainbow) because it is also one of the most happy moments for the player. In this way, when displaying something that overlaps with the model name, if the notation font of the model name logo 1090 is displayed as it is (for example, one black character is displayed), the player cannot feel that the player is blessed. .. Therefore, when granting benefits, or when granting benefits with a high degree of advantage among multiple benefits, the font and size different from the first mark are used as the fourth mark according to those purposes. It may be displayed in a different array or the like.

FIG. 48 (d) shows an example in which the "Fujimaru-kun BONUS" described in FIG. 48 (c) is displayed as the fourth model name display (fifth mark) when it is started from now on.

Here, the font is different from the first mark for the same purpose as in Fig. 48 (c), but not only that, but also the fourth mark despite being the same mark (Fujimaru-kun BONUS). The feature is that the font is different from that of the 5th mark.

The reason (intention, effect) is that the display size may be limited due to the symbol display, hold display, background display, and other object display when a notice occurs during the symbol change, but at the start of the big hit, those Since there is no display, the display size is almost unrestricted. In addition, what is commonly practiced in the industry is the awareness that "when a rainbow is displayed, it is as close to a big hit as possible", and when used as a notice effect (Fig. 48 (c)), the rainbow display is acceptable. , When used at the start of a big hit (Fig. 48 (d)), displaying it in rainbow has a different meaning (for example, telling that a big hit is lurking in the hold, or the highest setting for pachinko with a setting function. There is a risk that the player may misunderstand the display intention, such as (for example, telling that it is). Therefore, even if the same mark is displayed, depending on the display timing, the second mark may be displayed in a different font, a different size, a different arrangement, or the like as the first mark.

Although not shown, other examples of different fonts are shown below.
For example, when the same "Fujimaru-kun" mark as the model name logo 1090 is displayed as the look-ahead notice image on the display means 1030 during the notice production, this look-ahead notice image (second mark) is the same as the model name logo 1090. It is assumed that the characters of "Fujimaru-kun high probability zone" including "Fujimaru-kun" are arranged in a horizontal row. The characters "Fujimaru-kun" in this look-ahead preview image are composed of the same first font (here, POP body) as the model name logo 1090, and the size may be smaller than the model name logo 1090. The same first font as the model name logo 1090 is used for the characters in the "high probability zone" other than "Fujimaru-kun" in the look-ahead preview image.

In addition, among the look-ahead preview images, the "Fujimaru-kun high probability zone" bearing the same "Fujimaru-kun" as the model name logo 1090 is set to the same first font as the model name logo 1090, and the other "normal high probability zones". For "", the first production (here, "Fujimaru-kun high probability zone") and the second production (here, "pre-reading notice") for the same type of advance notice production (here, "look-ahead notice"), such as using other fonts. If there is a "normal high probability zone"), the font may be made similar for the notice bearing the same or similar name as the model name logo 1090.

For convenience of explanation, all the first marks are unified by "model name", but not limited to this, the "function name", "performance display", "warning display", and "intellectual property" that have already explained the first mark are used. It may be "property-related display" or "other display". In this case, the display timing and display size of the 2nd to 5th marks can be changed according to these, and at least the fonts of the 1st mark and the 2nd to 5th marks need to be different.

<Example of different fonts depending on the degree of expectation of winning>
FIGS. 49 (a) to (d) show the winning expectation when displaying the mark (second mark) including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) on the display means 1030. An example in which the font is changed according to the degree is shown.

In FIGS. 49 (a) and 49 (d), when the same type of advance notice effect (here, pseudo-continuous advance notice effect) is executed, for example, the degree of expectation of winning is relatively high (here, 50) according to the degree of expectation of winning. %) In the case, a font different from the model name logo 1090 (for example, the original emphasized font) is used for the font of the pseudo-continuous pattern 4911 (Fig. 49 (a)), and the winning expectation is relatively low (25% here). In this case, a predetermined font (for example, Mincho font) is used for the font of the pseudo-ream pattern 4911 (FIG. 49 (b)). It should be noted that one of them may use the same first font (for example, POP font) as the model name logo 1090.

Further, in FIGS. 49 (c) and 49 (d), when the specific advance notice effect (here, the next advance notice effect) is executed, for example, the probability change expectation is relatively high according to the probability change expectation for each advance notice effect (here). In the case of the notice production, a font different from the model name logo 1090 (for example, the original emphasized font) is used for the font of the next notice image 4911, and the probability change expectation is relatively low (25% here). In the case of, a predetermined font (for example, Mincho font) is used for the font of the next preview image 4912 (Fig. 49 (b)). It should be noted that one of them may use the same first font (for example, POP font) as the model name logo 1090.

In this way, when displaying a mark (second mark) including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) on the display means 1030, the font is changed according to the degree of expectation of winning. You may. In the example of FIG. 49, the first mark has been described as the model name as in FIG. 48, but this is not the case.

<Example of displaying the second mark according to the degree of advantage of the player>
Figures 50 (a-1) to (a-2) and (b-1) to (b-2) are marks (No. 1) including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark). An example is shown in which when the 2nd mark) is displayed on the display means 1030, whether or not the 2nd mark is displayed is divided according to the degree of advantage of the player.

FIG. 50 (a-1) shows a “Fujimaru-kun bonus” including the same “Fujimaru-kun” character as the model name logo 1090 at the start INT, for example, in the case of a 10R jackpot, which has a higher degree of advantage for the player than the 4R jackpot. Function name display image 5011 such as, etc. is displayed, and FIG. 50 (a-2) shows a "regular bonus" that does not include the same "Fujimaru-kun" character as the model name logo 1090 in the start INT, for example, in the case of one 4R jackpot. An example of displaying the function name display image 5012 such as "" is shown.

Further, FIG. 50 (B-1) shows "Fujimaru-kun" including the same "Fujimaru-kun" character as the model name logo 1090 at the start INT, for example, in the case of a probabilistic jackpot where the player has a higher degree of advantage than the non-probability jackpot. The function name display image 5011 such as "bonus" is displayed, and FIG. 50 (b-2) does not include the same "Fujimaru-kun" character as the model name logo 1090 in the start INT, for example, in the case of one non-probability change jackpot. An example of displaying a function name display image 5012 such as "regular bonus" is shown.

In this way, whether or not the mark (second mark) corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) is displayed on the display means 1030 may be different depending on the degree of advantage of the player. ..

<Example of displaying the second mark with information added to the first mark>
FIGS. 51 (a) to 51 (d) show the amount of information when displaying the mark (second mark) including "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) on the display means 1030. Shows an example configured to display the second mark with the addition of.

In FIG. 51 (a), among the second marks displayed on the display means 1030, the characters common to the first mark use the same font as the first mark, but the characters are not common to the first mark. An example is shown in which at least a part of the above is configured to use a font different from that of the first mark.

FIG. 51 (b) shows an example of the model name display image 5121 (second mark) displayed on the display means 1030 in the demonstration effect. In the model name display image 5121 shown in FIG. 51 (b), the characters of "P Fujimaru-kun" including "Fujimaru-kun" common to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) are the same as the model name logo 1090. The font (POP type here) is used, but for the other characters "-Save Fujika-chan-", a second font (Gothic type here) different from the model name logo 1090 is used. For only the character "Fujimaru-kun" that is common to the model name logo 1090, use the same first font (POP body here) as the model name logo 1090, and other "P" and "Save Fujika-chan". A font different from the model name logo 1090 may be used for all the characters of.

<5. Another Embodiment 5>
(5-1: Appearance of the game machine as seen from the front: Fig. 35)
FIG. 35 shows the appearance of the gaming machine when the gaming machine of the present invention is viewed from the front. In FIG. 35, the frame 1010 is the same as the front frame 2 which is openably and closably arranged on the front side of the outer frame 4 (hereinafter, simply abbreviated as “frame”), and the frame upper portion 1011, the frame middle portion 1012, and the frame lower portion 1013. It is composed of a visual window that makes the game area visible. The frame 1010 here is a rough depiction of the shape and size that can be visually recognized when the game machine is viewed from the front (front). Various shapes and sizes of the front frame 2 are used, and it is free to use any shape and size. The frame 1010 here has a frame upper portion 1011 made of a horizontal member located at the upper part, a frame middle portion 1012 made of a vertical member located on both the left and right sides, and a panel-shaped frame lower portion 1013 located at the lower side. It will be described as a rectangular frame shape that forms a rectangular viewing window as a whole.

Reference numeral 1020 is a game board described as the game board 3 in FIG. 2, and is mounted in the game board storage frame attached to the back surface of the front frame 2, or is provided in the outer frame 4 (shown in the figure). It is installed inside. That is, the game board is mounted on the game board storage frame (hereinafter, referred to as "main body frame") regardless of whether the front frame 2 side or the outer frame 4 side is attached. The game board 1020 mounted on the main body frame 1020 has a game area 1021 (game area 3a in FIG. 2) on which a game ball inside the guardrail flows down and a non-game area outside the guardrail when the game machine is viewed from the front. It has 1022 (four corners of the game board 3 in FIG. 2).

When viewed from the front, the game board 1020 is provided with a main liquid crystal display device 1031 (liquid crystal display device 36 in FIG. 2) in the center of the game area 1021 and a sub liquid crystal display device 1032 below the game area. .. Note that 1023 indicates a starting port (upper starting port 34 in FIG. 2), and 1024 indicates a large winning opening (large winning opening 50 in FIG. 2).

Regarding the relationship between the game board 1020 and the frame 1010, the frame 1010 is located on the front side of the game board 1020 when viewed in the front-rear direction. Therefore, a part of the game board surface is covered with the frame 1010. That is, there is a part of the game board surface that is covered with a part of the frame upper part 1011, the frame middle part 1012, and the frame lower part 1013 and cannot be seen from the front side. The main liquid crystal display device 1031 has a rectangular display surface, and is provided so that the entire display surface can be seen from the front side through a viewing window. In other words, the main liquid crystal display device 1031 is provided with a size, shape, and arrangement such that the display surface is not hidden by the frame 1010. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 located below the main liquid crystal display device 1031 in the game board surface is provided in a state where the lower part of the display surface is covered with the frame lower part 1013.

However, the main liquid crystal display device 1031 may be provided so that a part thereof is covered with a part of the frame 1010. Further, the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 can also be provided so that the display surface can be completely seen from the viewing window, that is, no part of the display surface is covered by the frame lower portion 1013. The liquid crystal display device 1030 including the main liquid crystal display device 1031 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 serves as an image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image.

The lower frame 1013 corresponds to the front operation panel 7 of FIG. 1, and is composed of an upper plate 1013a, a lower plate 1013b, and a base portion 1013c corresponding to the upper plate unit 8 when viewed from the front. The upper plate 1013a is a front view of the upper plate unit 8 of FIG. An effect button 13 is provided on the upper plate 1013a as the lower operation means 1041 of the operation means 1040, and an effect button is provided on the frame middle portion 1012 as the upper operation means 1042.

The base portion 1013c of the frame lower portion 1013 corresponds to the lower portion of the front operation panel 7 of FIG. 1, and is provided with a handle 1050 (launch operation handle 15) when viewed from the front.

FIG. 36A shows an example in which the model name “Fujimaru-kun” is added as identification information to the game board surface, to be exact, the game area 1021 of the game board, and FIG. 36B shows the model name “Fujimaru-kun” attached to the upper part 1011 of the front frame 1010. This is an example with "Fujimaru-kun" attached.
(5-2: Conventional problems)
Conventionally, in a ball game machine, characters, figures, symbols or three-dimensional shapes or combinations thereof or a combination of these and colors (mark of Article 2 of the Trademark Law) is formed in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device. The identification information is displayed. For example, there were some that placed the model name as a logo on the frame or board. It is also known that the model name logo makes various light emitting modes corresponding to the advance notice effect and the reach effect. Furthermore, there is also known one that makes the model name logo movable (or deformed / combined) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-175949).

When displaying the identification information whose constituent elements are characters, figures, symbols, etc. on the game machine, how to arrange the constituent elements of the identification information is basically free. In addition, in recent years, the displayable area of the gaming machine has increased when viewed from the front, and the degree of freedom in arranging the identification information has increased accordingly. As a result, there is a growing tendency for the display mode to emphasize the effect as a directing means, and the function as the original identification information (for example, the trademark function (self-other product identification function, the source display function derived from the right function, quality). Guarantee function, advertising function, etc.)) have been reduced or disappeared. In addition, depending on the mode of use, there is a risk of violating other laws such as the Unfair Competition Prevention Law.

Therefore, regarding the case where the identification information is displayed on a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device of the ball game machine, in the separate embodiment 5, by devising the "arrangement" of the elements constituting the identification information, another embodiment 6 Then, by devising the "lighting method" (such as the timing condition for lighting) of the elements constituting the identification information, and in the seventh embodiment, by devising the arrangement of the specific identification information and the non-specific identification information, and in the embodiment. In No. 8, this problem is solved by devising the display mode of the specific identification information.

(5-3: Regarding "arrangement" of elements constituting the identification information (separate embodiment 5), FIGS. 52 and 53)
(Problem to be solved by another embodiment 5)
The magnitude of the discriminating power exerted by the information differs depending on where the identification information is arranged in the game machine. In addition, the identification information exerts its original discriminating power by being shown in a display mode in which characters, figures, etc. are continuous, and how the characters, etc. constituting the identification information are arranged and / or Depending on the light emission mode (including color), the intended discriminating power may not be exhibited. On the contrary, depending on how the characters and the like constituting the identification information are arranged and / or how the light emitting mode is added, it may be mistaken as displaying another identification information different from the intended one.

The display form in which the identification information is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device is not very suitable as a place for arranging the identification information because the identification information cannot effectively exert its discriminating power unless it is displayed. Therefore, first, when the identification information is arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device, a display mode (separate embodiment 5) for making the "arrangement" of the constituent elements constituting the identification information appropriate will be described.

(5-4: Specific example of another embodiment 5)
FIGS. 52 (a) and 52 (b) exemplify a case where "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is arranged as identification information in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device (game board 1020 in this example). Of these, (a) is an example of a display mode in which the discriminating information is considered to be able to exert the intended discriminating power, and (b) is an example of a display mode in which the intended discriminating power is not considered to be exhibited.

In FIG. 52 (a), each character of "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is displayed side by side as a series. Each character of "Mr. Fujimaru" is in a position protruding forward from the rolling surface of the game ball on the game board when viewed in the front-back direction of the game machine. Each character, which is a component of "Mr. Fujimaru-kun," has the same character size and the same font, and is arranged at equal intervals. For this reason, "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is evaluated as one and orderly. Therefore, it is considered that FIG. 52 (a) is able to exert the discriminating power intended by the discriminating information "Mr. Fujimaru-kun". In this sense, FIG. 52 (a) shows "OK".

On the other hand, in FIG. 52 (b), "Fujimaru-kun" is separated into two character strings, "Fujimaru-kun" and "teacher", and arranged in two rows. Moreover, the character strings of "Fujimaru-kun" in the upper row are arranged diagonally upward to the right, and the character strings in the upper and lower rows are not parallel to each other. For this reason, the character string of "teacher" is in a state of being completely "independent" from other character strings. In addition, the character string of "teacher" is divided into individual "general" and "military" characters, and the character size of each is increased. Further, each character is in a position protruding forward from the game ball rolling surface of the game board when viewed in the front-rear direction. Therefore, the character string of "teacher" can be recognized as completely separate from the character string of "Fujimaru-kun".

Furthermore, the character string of "Fujimaru-kun" is displayed as a printed matter (cell sheet) on the game board surface, and the character string of "teacher" is provided on the center case, and a three-dimensional structure (logo) having a predetermined gap and distance from the game board surface. ) Is displayed. Therefore, the character string of "teacher" can be recognized as not a series of identification information from the character string of "Fujimaru-kun".

When the character string of "Fujimaru-kun" and the character string of "teacher" are separated into a plurality of character strings as shown in FIG. 52 (b) and have a display mode in which they can be recognized as separate character strings. The following problems can occur.
(I) The discriminating power of "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" as a whole is not functioning properly. For example, if this character string is identification information indicating the manufacturer, seller, etc. of the game machine, it means that the trademark function is not functioning normally (the intended discriminating power is not exhibited). obtain).
(Ii) If there is a right of another person (for example, a right stipulated by law or a right related to legally protected interests regarding intellectual property) with respect to "Fujimaru-kun" alone or "teacher" alone, that right can be infringed. The sexuality increases and the risk of sales etc. increases. Therefore, for example, even if oneself has a legitimate title regarding the use of "Mr. Fujimaru-kun", it is the right of another person to use the display mode as shown in FIG. 52 (b). It should be avoided as much as possible because it increases the risk of conflict with. In this sense, FIG. 52 (b) shows "NG".

From the above, the following can be said. (I) Even if the intended specific identification information is divided into two or more lines, it is difficult to evaluate the display of the intended specific identification information (original identification information). (Ii) Even if it is the intended specific identification information, if the components are divided into two or more lines and they are not parallel to each other, the display and evaluation of the intended original specific identification information It becomes difficult to be done. (Iii) Therefore, in order to be evaluated as displaying the intended specific identification information (original identification information), it is preferable to write the components of the identification information in one line. If the identification information is displayed on two or more lines, the character strings should be parallel to each other. In this way, in order to prevent deterioration of discriminating power and prevention of infringement of the rights of others, it is preferable to use a display mode that takes the above points into consideration.

FIG. 53 illustrates a case where "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun" is arranged as identification information in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device (in this example, the upper part of the frame 1011). Of these, FIG. 53 (a) is an example of a display mode in which the identification information is considered to be able to exert the intended discriminating power, and FIG. 53 (b) is a display mode in which the intended discriminating power is not considered to be exhibited. This is an example.

In FIG. 53 (a), each character of "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun" is displayed side by side in one line as a series. Each character, which is a component of "Mr. Fujimaru-kun," has the same character size and the same font, and is arranged at equal intervals. For this reason, "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun" is evaluated as a cohesive and orderly one. Therefore, it is considered that FIG. 53A shows the discriminating power intended by the discriminating information "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun". In this sense, FIG. 53 (a) shows "OK".

On the other hand, in Fig. 53 (b), "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun" is separated into five character groups, "a", "i", "u", "e", and "Ofujimaru-kun". Here is a visible example. The reason why they look like that is that they are not evenly spaced between the letters, with the longest spacing between the letters "a" and "i", between "i" and "u" and between "u" and "e". This is because the space between the characters "" and "Ofujimaru-kun" is the second longest, and the space between the characters that make up "Ofujimaru-kun" is the shortest. Only the letter "A" exists on the left side, and "I", "U", "E", and "Ofujimaru-kun" on the right side are recognized as a cohesive group. In other words, "A" is excluded from the recognition items as another thing, and "Iueo Fujimaru-kun" is read as a meaningful group.

When the display mode is such that the character strings are arranged discretely as shown in FIG. 53 (b), "Iueo Fujimaru-kun", which has relatively close character spacing, is organized in an orderly manner. It will be evaluated as a new one. Therefore, the evaluation of the display of "Iueo Fujimaru-kun" changes to an evaluation different from the discriminating power that the identification information of "Aiueo Fujimaru-kun" wanted to exert. In this case, the intended discriminating power cannot be exhibited, resulting in an inappropriate display mode. Therefore, it should be avoided to use the display mode as shown in FIG. 53 (b). In this sense, FIG. 53 (b) shows "NG".

The above is the case where the character spacing of the characters that make up the identification information is not equal, but if the character sizes of the characters that make up the identification information are not equal (for example, only "a" is twice as many characters as the other characters. If the fonts of the characters that make up the identification information are not unified (for example, only "A" is in POP format and the others are in Gothic font), or if the character colors are not unified (for example). For example, only "A" is red, and the others are blue), too, because the intended discriminating power cannot be exhibited, resulting in an inappropriate display mode.

From the above, the following can be said. (I) Even if it is the intended specific identification information, if the character spacing which is a component thereof is not equal, it is difficult to evaluate it as the display of the intended specific identification information (original identification information). (Ii) Even if the intended specific identification information is not equal in size of the characters that are the constituent elements, it is difficult to evaluate the display of the intended specific identification information. (Iii) Even if it is the intended specific identification information, if the fonts of the characters that are the constituent elements are not equal, it is difficult to evaluate it as the display of the intended specific identification information. (Iv) Therefore, in order to be evaluated as the display of the intended specific identification information (original identification information), the character spacing of the characters that are the constituent elements of the identification information is made uniform and unified. Unify the character size of specific identification information. Unify the font of characters with specific identification information. It is preferable to use a display mode that takes into consideration such points.

As described above, when identification information consisting of characters, figures, symbols, etc. is attached to a place other than the liquid crystal display device, for example, a game board or a frame, the arrangement of the components of the identification information is devised. , Misidentification of the identification information, that is, the intended identification information can be prevented from being evaluated as another identification information.

(5-3: Configuration example 1 of another embodiment 5)
The fifth embodiment described in FIGS. 52 and 53 can be configured as shown in (1) to (14) below. At that time, any of the following features (i) or (v) can be included.
(I) In a gaming machine in which the first identification information representing at least a part of the model name and the second identification information representing at least a part other than the model name are arranged at a position visible to the player.
The first identification information is arranged in a three-dimensional shape, and the second identification information is arranged in a planar shape.

As a result, at least the first identification information is decorated with the same system of "three-dimensional shape" even if there is a slight difference when any one or more of the character size, character spacing, and font is used as a judgment criterion. By having the common feature of being molded (molded and processed), it can be expected that the risk of reading the first identification information by dividing it into two or more identification information can be reduced. As a premise, it is divided into "model name" and "other than model name", but "model name (subtitle part)" is used as the first identification information and "model name (subtitle part)" is used as the second identification information. Can be expected to have the same effect.
(Ii) In the game machine, all of the first identification information is arranged in one row or one column, and the second identification information is arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns.
As a result, the second identification information can be arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns to increase the degree of freedom of arrangement, and the first identification information can be divided into two or more identification information to reduce the risk of being read. The effect can be expected.
(Iii) In the same gaming machine, the first identification information has substantially the same character spacing, and the second identification information has at least a part of the character spacing different. This can be expected to have the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in arranging the second identification information and reducing the risk of reading the first identification information separately into two or more identification information.
(Iv) In the same game machine, all the character sizes of the first identification information are substantially the same, and at least a part of the character sizes of the second identification information are different.
This can be expected to have the effect of increasing the degree of freedom in arranging the second identification information and reducing the risk of reading the first identification information separately into two or more identification information.
(V) In the same game machine, all the character fonts of the first identification information are substantially the same, and at least a part of the character fonts of the second identification information are different.
This can be expected to have the effect of increasing the degree of freedom of expression (diversity of display modes) of the second identification information and reducing the risk of reading the first identification information by dividing it into two or more identification information.
The effects common to the above (i) to (v) are "identification information that is highly important (in identifying the game machine)" and "identification information that has a low degree of freedom of expression (due to copyright, trademark, etc.)". , "Identification information with high visibility (from the player's point of view)", etc., have different display modes (character size, character spacing, character color) for other identification information while maintaining high discriminating power by the above configuration. Etc.), it is possible to keep the degree of freedom of arrangement and the degree of freedom of expression high.

Specifically, it can be configured as follows.
(1) A main body frame for holding a game board provided with a game area on the front surface, and
A front frame that is arranged to be openable and closable on the front side of the main body frame and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized.
An image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image,
With
In the game machine, the first identification information representing at least a part of the model name and the second identification information representing at least a part of the performance of the game machine are arranged at a position visible to the player.
The first identification information is information that is desired to stand out more than the second identification information.
The first identification information is arranged in the front frame and
The second identification information is arranged on the game board.
The first identification information is provided as a non-movable body (for example, a logo) in which its components are continuously displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
As a result, at least the first identification information is "displayed in succession (decoration, molding,) even if there is a slight difference when any one or more of the character size, character spacing, and font is used as a judgment criterion. By having the common feature of being "processed)", it can be expected that the risk of reading the one first identification information by dividing it into two or more identification information can be reduced.
(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged as a movable body (button, other gimmick) of the front frame.
As a result, even if there is a slight difference in at least the first identification information when any one or more of the character size, the character spacing, and the font is used as a judgment criterion, "the same base body (operation in the above example)" By having the common feature of being displayed (decoration, molding, processing, printing) on "means, etc.", it is possible to reduce the risk that the first identification information is divided into two or more identification information and read. The effect can be expected.
(3) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged as a flat object (for example, a printed matter) with respect to the front frame.
(4) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is three-dimensionally arranged (for example, as a three-dimensional structure) with respect to the front frame. In the configuration of (4), the second identification information can be arranged in a plane (the above-mentioned feature (i)).
(5) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged (arranged with irregularities) on a protruding portion of the front frame in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine.
(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein all of the components of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column. In the configuration of (6), the second identification information may be arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns (the above feature (ii)).
As an effect common to the above, at least the first identification information has common points (three-dimensional / plane, molding / printing, described in one row or one column described in the same base body). As a result, it is possible to contribute to the reduction of sales risk (for example, trademark risk) related to intellectual property rights.
(7) The first identification information is arranged in an aligned manner (the upper end line and the lower end line of the component row are substantially parallel), and the second identification information is arranged in a non-aligned manner (the upper end line and the lower end line of the component row are not parallel). ). The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above. In the configuration of (7), in relation to the above (6), all of the components of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column, and the second identification information has two or more rows or two. It can be configured to be arranged in rows or more (the above feature (ii)).
(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, wherein the first identification information has two or more lines and each line is arranged so as to be parallel to each other.
(9) The first identification information is characterized in that the intervals between its constituent elements (when the first identification information consists of a character string, the character intervals) are unified so as to be the same or substantially the same. The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8) above. In the configuration of (9), the second identification information may have a configuration in which the intervals between at least some of the constituent elements are different (the above-mentioned feature (iii)).
(10) The first identification information is characterized in that the size of its constituent elements (when the first identification information consists of a character string, its character size) is unified so as to be the same or substantially the same. The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (9) above. In the configuration of (10), the second identification information may have a configuration in which the sizes of at least some of the constituent elements are different (the above-mentioned feature (iv)).
(11) The first identification information has the same or almost the same attributes related to the shape, pattern, and color of its constituent elements (character size if it is a character string, and their colors and color schemes if it is not a character string). The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (10) above, which is unified so as to be. In the configuration of (11), the first identification information and the second identification information are composed of character strings, all the character fonts of the first identification information are substantially the same, and the second identification information is at least. Some of the character fonts can have different configurations (the above feature (v)).
(12) The second identification information is common identification information that is at least partially common to the first identification information, and the common identification information is displayed on the image display means, but is displayed on the game board surface (12). The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above, characterized in that it is not arranged).
(13) The second identification information is common identification information in which the arrangement of its components is common to at least a part of the first identification information, and the common identification information is displayed on the image display means. The game machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above, which is not displayed (arranged) on the game board surface.
(14) In the first identification information, at least a part of the arrangement of the constituent elements is arranged in the front frame as a movable body, and the first identification information is in the first specific period (during the customer waiting demonstration production period). (1) to the above, wherein the components of the above are in a united position, and in the second period (during the reach effect and the advance notice effect), the first identification information can be moved to a position where they are separated. The gaming machine according to any one of (13).

(5-4: Configuration Example 2 of Another Embodiment 5)
In the first configuration example of the fifth embodiment, it is assumed that the first identification information is arranged in the front frame, but the first identification information is arranged in the center case (center decoration body 48), that is, on the game board surface. It can also be placed. This configuration is described as follows.

(1) A main body frame for holding a game board provided with a game area on the front surface, and
The center case provided on the game board and
A front frame that is arranged to be openable and closable on the front side of the main body frame and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized.
An image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image,
With
In the game machine, the first identification information representing at least a part of the model name and the second identification information representing at least a part of the performance of the game machine are arranged at a position visible to the player.
The first identification information is information that is desired to stand out more than the second identification information.
The first identification information is arranged in the center case (game board surface).
The second identification information is arranged on the game board.
The first identification information is provided as a non-movable body (for example, a goro) in which its components are continuously displayed.
A game machine characterized by that.
(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged as a movable body of the center case.
(3) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged in a plane (for example, a model name as a printed matter) with respect to the center case.
(4) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is three-dimensionally arranged (for example, as a three-dimensional structure) with respect to the center case. In the configuration of (4), the second identification information can be arranged in a plane (the above-mentioned feature (i)).
(5) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the first identification information is arranged on a protruding portion of the center case in the front-rear direction of the gaming machine.
(6) The first identification information is characterized in that all of its components are arranged in one row or one column, and the second identification information is arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns (6). The gaming machine according to any one of 1) to (5).
(6) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (5) above, wherein all of the components of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column. In the configuration of (6), the second identification information may be arranged in two or more rows or two or more columns (the above feature (ii)).
(7) The first identification information is arranged in an aligned manner (the upper end line and the lower end line of the component row are substantially parallel), and the second identification information is arranged in a non-aligned manner (the upper end line and the lower end line of the component row are not parallel). ). The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above. In the configuration of (7), in relation to the above (6), all of the components of the first identification information are arranged in one row or one column, and the second identification information has two or more rows or two. It can be configured to be arranged in rows or more (the above feature (ii)).
(8) The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (6) above, wherein the first identification information has two or more lines and each line is arranged so as to be parallel to each other.
(9) The first identification information is characterized in that the intervals between its constituent elements (when the first identification information consists of a character string, the character intervals) are unified so as to be the same or substantially the same. The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (8) above. In the configuration of (9), the second identification information may have a configuration in which the intervals between at least some of the constituent elements are different (the above-mentioned feature (iii)).
(10) The first identification information is characterized in that the size of its constituent elements (when the first identification information consists of a character string, its character size) is unified so as to be the same or substantially the same. The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (9) above. In the configuration of (10), the second identification information may have a configuration in which the sizes of at least some of the constituent elements are different (the above-mentioned feature (iv)).
(11) The first identification information has the same or almost the same attributes related to the shape, pattern, and color of its constituent elements (character size if it is a character string, and their colors and color schemes if it is not a character string). The gaming machine according to any one of (6) to (10) above, which is unified so as to be. In the configuration of (11), the first identification information and the second identification information are composed of character strings, all the character fonts of the first identification information are substantially the same, and the second identification information is at least. Some of the character fonts can have different configurations (the above feature (v)).
(12) The second identification information is common identification information that is at least partially common to the first identification information, and the common identification information is displayed on the image display means, but is displayed on the game board surface (12). The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above, characterized in that it is not arranged).
(13) The second identification information is common identification information in which the arrangement of its components is common to at least a part of the first identification information, and the common identification information is displayed on the image display means. The game machine according to any one of (1) to (11) above, which is not displayed (arranged) on the game board surface.
(14) In the first identification information, at least a part of the arrangement of the constituent elements is arranged in the front frame as a movable body, and the first identification information is in the first specific period (during the customer waiting demonstration production period). (1) to the above, wherein the components of the above are in a united position, and in the second period (during the reach effect and the advance notice effect), the first identification information can be moved to a position where they are separated. The gaming machine according to any one of (13).

<6. Another Embodiment 6>
(6-1: “How to illuminate” the elements constituting the identification information (separate embodiment 6), FIG. 54)
Next, with respect to the identification information arranged at a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device, a display mode (separate embodiment 6) for making the “lighting method” of the constituent elements appropriate will be described.

(6-2: Problem to be solved by another embodiment 6)
First, there is a problem to be solved by the sixth embodiment, but as described in the explanation of the fifth embodiment, the identification information is shown in a display mode in which characters, figures, etc. are continuous. , The original discriminating power is exhibited, and the intended discriminating power may not be exhibited depending on the arrangement of characters and / or the light emitting mode (including color) constituting the identification information. On the contrary, depending on how the characters and the like constituting the identification information are arranged and / or how the light emitting mode is added, it may be mistaken as displaying another identification information different from the intended one.

In another embodiment 5, the solution to the problem related to the "arrangement" of the identification information has been described, but in the sixth embodiment, the specific solution to the problem related to the "lighting" of the identification information has been described. To go.

In FIGS. 54 (a), (b) and (c), when "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is arranged as identification information in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device, some of the elements constituting the identification information are shining. It is a figure which provides the explanation about what kind of environment or condition it is appropriate to make it shine in the display mode. Here, "shining" does not mean only the case of emitting light by itself, but may be a concept including the case of reflecting and shining. The same applies to the case where the expression "makes light" is used by the light emission control means.

Further, a part of the elements constituting the identification information (for example, the first component) is referred to as another element (for example, the second component) also constituting the identification information. Further, the components are further subdivided. When the expressions "the third component and below may be defined) and" the way of shining are different ", it refers only to the state where both are shining, for example, one is a red light emitting mode and the other is a white light emitting mode. It may include a state in which one is emitting light and the other is off.

Further, even when the first component and the second component in the above example emit light in the same system color (for example, white), one has higher brightness or illuminance than the other part. It may mean a state. Furthermore, when expressing the difference in the way the first component and the second component shine by terms indicating brightness such as brightness, illuminance, and brightness, the difference in the number of LEDs used to express the light emitting mode (difference in the number of LEDs used to express the light emitting mode). The first component is N, the second component is M, N <M or N> M), and the type of LED used is different (the first component is a full-color LED, the second component is a monochromatic LED). ) And so on.

As an example, when it is expressed that "the light emitting control means (or the effect controlling means) makes the first component a brighter light emitting mode than the second component", as a specific means thereof, (i) the first component. The number of LEDs located on the back side of the second component (LEDs include bullet-shaped LEDs, surface mount LEDs, chip-on-board, etc., but in this case, refers to the number of LED chips) is located on the back side of the second component. The number of LEDs is larger than the number of LEDs to be used, (ii) the first component is a monochromatic (white) LED, and the second component is a full-color (RGB) LED.

The brightness depends on the performance difference of the LED, but if the LED is almost the same (same price), the luminous efficiency of white light is "blue LED + yellow phosphor (= single color LED)"> "red LED + green". It is said that "LED + blue LED (= full color LED)"> "near ultraviolet LED + three-color phosphor (= composite LED)". When the price difference is corrected due to the change in the penetration rate of LEDs in the future, it may be possible to appropriately select whether to use a monochromatic LED or a full-color LED as a method of "making a bright light emitting mode".

FIG. 54A is an example of a display mode in which the identification information is considered to be able to exert the intended discriminating power, and has the same contents as those in FIG. 52A. That is, the identification information "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is displayed on the surface of the game board 1020 in a display mode in which the characters that are its constituent elements are continuous. However, in FIG. 54 (a), the identification information is displayed while waiting for customers (during the demo start waiting effect) or “customer waiting effect (demo display)”, especially during the customer waiting effect (demo display). Is dealing with. That is, the ball game machine shifts to the "demo display" period on condition that a certain time has passed since the symbol stopped. FIG. 54 (a) is different from FIG. 52 (a), which shows a display mode in a normal gaming state, in that the display after the transition to the “demo display in progress” period is dealt with. However, the period of "demo display" is the period during which the game is not performed, and it is considered that the evaluation of the display of the identification information is not much different from the case of the normal game state period. In consideration of the above points, FIG. 54 (a) shows "(during demonstration) OK".

Next, FIG. 54B is a display example in which the identification information does not exert the intended discriminating power, in other words, it may be recognized as another identification information. FIG. 54 (b) also deals with the display after the transition to the “demo display in progress” period, as in FIG. 54 (a). The point that the characters that are the constituent elements of the identification information "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" are displayed as the character string of "continuous" is also the same as in FIG. 54 (a). However, in the case of FIG. 54 (b), the character part of "teacher" in the character strings constituting "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" emits light with a different emission color from other character parts, and other characters. It shines brighter than the letters. In this respect, it differs from FIG. 54 (a).

There are various ways to make the "teacher" part shine brightly, but here, a character plate made of translucent synthetic resin (character plate of "Mr. Fujimaru-kun") is placed behind it, including the case of LED. ), And the brightness of the character part of "Teacher" is higher than the brightness of the character part of "Fujimaru-kun" and the light emission color is different, so that the "Teacher" part is shining brightly. The example of adopting the LED is as described above.

The period when the above teacher's character part is brighter and "shining" than Fujimaru-kun's character part is the period when the demo is being displayed, that is, the period when the design is stopped without playing the game (non-game period). Because there is, it is a relatively long time. In some cases, the period of "demo display" is a period during which the transition occurs many times in a day, that is, frequently.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 54 (b), when the character portion of "teacher" in the character string of the identification information "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is displayed in a display mode that shines brighter than the other character portions. , The character part of this "teacher" is emphasized and recognized as existing independently. In other words, there is a greater possibility that the indication of "teacher" will be judged and evaluated as "used as a trademark". Given that the possibility that others have rights to the "teacher" cannot be completely dispelled, the display mode shown in FIG. 54 (b) should be avoided. In this sense, FIG. 54 (b) shows "(during demonstration) NG".

Next, a display example of FIG. 54 (c) will be described. FIG. 54 (c) is also the same as FIG. 54 (b) in that the characters that are the constituent elements of the identification information "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" are displayed as a character string of "continuous". In addition, the point that the "teacher" part is shining in the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun teacher" is the same as in FIG. 54 (b). However, in the case of FIG. 54 (d), the identification information consisting of the character string in which the "teacher" part of "Fujimaru-kun" is shining may be displayed during the "demo display" period. It differs from FIG. 54 (b) in that it is displayed during the period of "preliminary production".

As a "notice production" during the reach production period, consider the case where the character string of "Fujimaru-kun" with the "teacher" part shining appears so as to cover the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1030. View. The purpose of making such a notice effect appear is to convey the "winning expectation" to the player, and the main role of the notice effect is to implicitly notify the magnitude of the winning expectation. Therefore, in the "notice production", rather than the meaning of "Mr. Fujimaru", (i) whether a character string with a shining part appeared, or whether a part of the character string shined, or , (Ii) What color was the shining part (whether it was blue, yellow, green, red, D pattern color, gold color, or rainbow color) is important. The former (i) "whether or not a character string having a shining part appears" is to see the shining "teacher" part as a mere means of light emission. In the latter (ii) "what color was the shining part", the part of the "teacher" that is emitting light is viewed as a color notification means, and blue, yellow, green, red, Expectations increase in the order of D pattern color, gold color, and rainbow color.

In this way, during the "notice production", even if the character string in which the "teacher" part of "Fujimaru-kun" is shining appears, the shining part indicates the degree of expectation of winning. It will be understood as, and attention will be paid to its existence and color, and attention will be paid to the content itself of "meaning a teacher", and the shining part will not be recognized. For this reason, it is considered that the discriminating power of the character string does not become a problem even in the form in which a character string or the like whose part is shining appears as a "notice effect". In this sense, FIG. 54 (c) shows "(notice production) OK".

From the above, the following can be said. (I) When only a part of the specific identification information is turned on or off for a long time (or frequently), the part that is turned on or off is emphasized, and the part is evaluated as the identification information of only the part. .. (Ii) During the demonstration (during the period of the customer waiting demonstration production), turning off only a part of the specific identification information or lighting it in a different light emitting mode is the case where it is turned on or off for a long time (or with high frequency) as described above. There is no big difference. Therefore, it is evaluated as identification information only for the relevant part, and the degree of evaluation as a trademark usage mode is increased. Therefore, during "during the demonstration (during the period of the customer waiting demonstration production)", it should be avoided to turn off only a part of the specific identification information or illuminate it in a different light emitting mode. (Iii) In order to be evaluated as displaying the intended specific identification information (original identification information) in "during the demonstration (during the period of the customer waiting demonstration production)", all the specific identification information must be in the same system. It is important to make it glow (or turn off) with color. (Iv) Under the condition that a specific effect occurs while the symbol is changing, as in the cut-in notice during the reach effect period, even if some of the components of the specific identification information are individually illuminated, the trademark is used for that part. The fear of being seen as a mode of use diminishes. Therefore, under the condition that a specific effect is generated while the symbol is changing, it is possible to individually illuminate and display a part of the constituent elements of the specific identification information. When the condition that the specific effect is generated disappears, that is, when the specific effect does not occur, it is the specific identification information (original) intended as a whole to make all the specific identification information illuminate (or turn off) with the same system color. It is necessary to be evaluated as the display of (identification information).

As described above, when identification information consisting of characters, figures, symbols, etc. is attached to a place other than the liquid crystal display device, for example, a game board or a frame, a display in which some of the elements constituting the identification information are shining. When it is set as an aspect, by devising a "lighting method" in the sense of under what conditions the light is lit, the misidentification of the identification information, that is, the intended identification information is evaluated as another identification information. Can be prevented.

(6-2: Configuration example of another embodiment 6)
Another embodiment 6 described in FIG. 54 can be configured to include the following features (i) or (ii).

(I) In a gaming machine in which the first identification information, which is composed of two or more characters and represents at least a part of the model name, and the other second identification information are arranged so as to be visible to the player.
The first identification information is
Visibility changes depending on the light emitting means,
At least during the first period during the non-game period, all of the first identification information is visible in the same system color.
The second identification information is
Visibility changes depending on the light emitting means,
At least in the first period during the non-game period, a part of the second identification information is visible in a system color different from that of the second identification information.

As a result, when the first identification information and the second identification information are configured so that their light emission modes can be changed, the second identification information mainly plays a role / effect as a "directing means" at least in the first period. On the other hand, it is expected that the first identification information can reduce the risk of being read by dividing the first identification information into two or more identification information by emphasizing the fact that the first identification information is only a "continuous" identification information. it can. In addition, although the light emitting mode of the first identification information and the second identification information in the first period is shown above, the light emitting mode of the first period and the second period may be separated for the first identification information. For example, with respect to the first identification information, which is the model name, the first period (for example, during symbol change) plays a role mainly as a "directing means" by setting individual light emission modes, and the second period (for example, the symbol is stopped). ) May play a role mainly as a "self-other product identification function" by adopting a unified light emission mode. Further, although the "model name" is used as the first identification information as a premise, the "model name (only the subject part)" may be used as the first identification information, or the "function name" may be used as the first identification information. Can be expected.

(Ii) In the same game machine
The first identification information can be visually recognized with the same system color during the reproduction of the first BGM.
At least a part of the second identification information is visible in a different system color during the reproduction of the first BGM.

As a result, when the first identification information is configured to be able to change its light emitting mode, it mainly plays a role and effect as a "directing means" in at least the second period, and at least in the first period. It can be expected that the risk that the one first identification information is read by dividing it into two or more identification information can be reduced. In the above, the light emitting modes of the first identification information and the second identification information during the first BGM reproduction (first period) are shown, but the first identification information is not the first BGM reproduction (first period) and the first BGM. The light emitting mode during reproduction (second period) may be divided. For example, with respect to the first identification information, which is the model name, the first period is mainly set to an individual light emission mode (for example, when the theme song is playing while the design is changing, the light emission mode is synchronized with the song). It plays a role as a "directing means", and mainly plays a role as a "self-other product identification function" by adopting a unified light emitting mode (light emitting mode not synchronized with the song) during the second period (for example, when the design is stopped). You may do so. Further, although the "model name" is used as the first identification information as a premise, the "model name (only the subject part)" may be used as the first identification information, or the "function name" may be used as the first identification information. Can be expected.

Specifically, in addition to the features of the configuration example 1 or the configuration example 2 of the above-mentioned separate embodiment 5, or as a single feature, it can be configured as follows.
(1) A main body frame for holding a game board provided with a game area on the front surface, and
A front frame that is arranged to be openable and closable on the front side of the main body frame and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized.
An image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image,
And to prepare
When the starting means detects a game ball, an acquisition means for acquiring predetermined game information and
A lottery means for performing a lottery as to whether or not to generate a winning game based on the game information acquired by the acquisition means, and
A symbol display means for performing a variable display operation of the game symbol and notifying the lottery result by the lottery means according to the stop display mode of the game symbol.
Based on the lottery result by the lottery means, a fluctuation pattern determination that selectively determines one of a plurality of types of fluctuation patterns including a reach fluctuation pattern for designating a reach effect that notifies the lottery result via a reach state. Means and
A symbol display control means for controlling the variation display operation of the game symbol in the symbol display means based on the variation pattern determined by the variation pattern determining means is provided.
A gaming machine configured to be able to execute and control the hit game after the game symbol is stopped and displayed on the symbol display means in a specific display mode.
It has identification information that is placed on the front frame or the game board surface (center case) and displayed visually.
It has an identification information light emitting means capable of illuminating all or a part of the components of the identification information.
The identification information light emitting means illuminates the components of the identification information in the same system color during the first period (during non-demo production) when the variable display operation of the game symbol is stopped.
A game machine characterized by that.
(2) The identification information includes a first identification information which is composed of two or more characters and represents at least a part of a model name, and another second identification information.
The visibility of the first identification information changes depending on the light emitting means, and all of the first identification information can be visually recognized in the same system color at least in the first period during the non-game period.
The visibility of the second identification information is changed by the light emitting means, and at least in the first period during the non-game period, a part of the second identification information can be visually recognized with a system color different from that of the second identification information. (Feature (i) above),
The gaming machine according to (1) above.
(3) On the condition that the variable display operation of the game symbol is not performed for a certain period of time or longer, the image display means is shifted from the first period during which the symbol is stopped to the second period of the customer waiting demo effect mode. It is equipped with a demo production mode transition means that displays the screen of
The identification information light emitting means individually illuminates the components of the identification information during the second period (during the customer waiting demo effect mode) when the symbol is stopped, or one or more of the components of the identification information. The gaming machine according to (2) above, wherein the game machines are individually illuminated.
(4) The identification information light emitting means of the identification information during a period other than the period during the reach effect (during the specific effect during the variation of the variable display operation of the game symbol) (for example, the period during the non-variable display operation). The gaming machine according to any one of (1) to (3) above, wherein the components are illuminated with the same system color.
(5) The identification information light emitting means individually illuminates one or more of the components of the identification information during the period of the reach effect (during the specific effect during the variation of the variation display operation of the game symbol). The gaming machine according to (4) above, characterized in that.
(6) The gaming machine according to (1) to (5) above, wherein the identification information light emitting means illuminates the components of the identification information with the same system color during the occurrence of the hit game.
(7) A sound effect means for reproducing sound effect (BGM) under a predetermined condition during the hit game.
The identification information light emitting means illuminates the game symbol according to the melody of the sound effect during reproduction of the sound effect (BGM), and after the end of the sound effect (BGM), the components of the identification information are the same. The gaming machine according to the above (1) to (6), wherein the game machine is illuminated with a system color.
In the configuration of (7), the first identification information is visible in the same system color during the first BGM reproduction, and at least a part of the second identification information is visible in a different system color during the first BGM reproduction. Can be configured as

<7. Examples of Different Embodiments 5 and 6>
FIGS. 55 to 56 show examples (a) to (g) of the above embodiments 5 and 6 in a list format. Enlarged figures of Examples (a) to (g) are shown in FIGS. 57 to 62 and 63. In these, "Fujimaru-kun" is treated as an example of the specific identification information (first specific identification information).

In Examples (a) to (g), three cases (a), (b) and (g) are classified into "○", "△" and "×" from the viewpoint of whether or not they play a role as identification information. c) is shown. In the case (a) of "○ column", it seems that "Fujimaru-kun" plays a role as identification information, and in the case (b) of "△ column", it is judged whether it plays a role of identification information. It is considered that the case (c) in the “x column” does not play a role as identification information.

(7-1: Interval (Example (a), FIG. 55, FIG. 57)
Example (a) (see FIG. 57) illustrates how the "spacing" of the characters in the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" should be set.

In the embodiment (a), (a) shows a case where the characters of the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are arranged at equal intervals (the size and font of each character are the same). Since the character spacing is the same, "Fujimaru-kun" in (a) is recognized as a continuous and cohesive character string. Therefore, (a) seems to play a role as identification information, and therefore belongs to the “○ column”.

FIG. 57B is an example in which the character spacing in the character string constituting "Fujimaru-kun" is widened between the "Fujimaru" and "Kun" parts. This is the same result as consciously dividing "Fujimaru" as the first display unit and "kun" or "ku" as the second display unit. It is no longer recognized as a cohesive character string called "Fujimaru-kun", and "Fujimaru" is barely evaluated as meaningful.

FIG. 57 (c) shows an example in which the character spacing in the character string constituting "Fujimaru-kun" is widened between the "Fuji" and "Maru-kun" parts. It is not recognized as a cohesive character string called "Fujimaru-kun". The result is the same as the meaningless division with "Wisteria" as the first display and "Maru-kun" as the second display.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (a), when the component (character string) of the specific identification information is divided into the first display unit and the second display unit, the size of the display area of the first display unit and the second display unit is large. It is necessary that the information (or the number of characters) be the same or almost the same. Further, even when the first display unit and the second display unit are separated, in order for both to be recognized as one cohesive character string, the character spacing of the first display unit and the character spacing of the second display unit are required. Must be approximately the same.

(7-2: How to divide when making two or more lines (Example (b), FIG. 55, FIG. 58)
Example (b) (see FIG. 58) exemplifies how to divide the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" into two or more lines.

In the embodiment (b), in (a), the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are divided into "Fujimaru" and "Kun" having the same number of characters in the middle, and are arranged in two upper and lower lines on the same game board surface. (The size and font of each character is the same). Therefore, although "Fujimaru-kun" in (a) is arranged on two lines, it is recognized as a cohesive character group as a whole. Therefore, (a) seems to play a role as identification information, and therefore belongs to the “○ column”.

In FIG. 58 (b), the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are divided into "Fujimaru" and "Kun", and "Fujimaru" is arranged in the front frame, while "Kun" is arranged on the game board surface. That is, the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are arranged across the front frame and the game board surface. For this reason, "Fujimaru" and "kun" are emphasized as different things, and they are not recognized as a cohesive character string "Fujimaru-kun".

In FIG. 58 (c), the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are divided into "Fujimaru-kun" and "N", and "Fujimaru-kun" is placed in the front frame and "N" is placed on the game board surface. This is also an example of arranging the character strings that make up "Fujimaru-kun" across the front frame and the game board surface, so "Fujimaru-kun" and "N" are emphasized as different things, and it is called "Fujimaru-kun". It is not recognized as a cohesive character string.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (b), when the component (character string) of the specific identification information is divided into the first display unit and the second display unit, they are arranged so as not to straddle the front frame and the game board surface ( It is necessary to place it in either one). If it is necessary to divide the constituent elements (character strings) of the fixed identification information into the first display unit and the second display unit and arrange them so as to straddle the front frame and the game board surface, the first display unit and the first display unit 2 It is necessary that the size (or the number of characters) of the display area of the display unit is the same or substantially the same.

(7-3: About the sense of distance when making two or more lines (Example (c), FIG. 55, FIG. 59)
Example (c) (see FIG. 59) exemplifies the sense of distance when the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are made into two or more lines.

In the embodiment (c), in (a), the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are divided into "Fujimaru" and "Kun" having the same number of characters, and are arranged in two upper and lower lines on the same game board surface (each). The font size and font are the same). Specifically, "Fujimaru" and "Kun" are arranged on the upper side of the same liquid crystal display device 1032. For this reason, the distance between "Fujimaru" and "Kun" is relatively short, and the visual sense of distance is also recognized as a cohesive two lines. Therefore, (a) seems to play a role as identification information, and therefore belongs to the “○ column”.

In FIG. 59 (b), the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are divided into "Fujimaru" and "Kun", "Fujimaru" is on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1032, and "Kun" is on the display surface of the liquid crystal display device 1032. It is placed inside. Since they are arranged in different materials, the sense of distance between "Fujimaru" and "Kun" is strengthened. Therefore, "Fujimaru" and "Kun" are emphasized as different things, and they are not recognized as a cohesive character string "Fujimaru-kun".

In FIG. 59 (c), the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are divided into "Fujimaru" and "Kun", "Fujimaru" is on the upper side of the liquid crystal display device 1032, and "kun" is on the lower side of the liquid crystal display device 1032. It is placed in. Since they are arranged on both sides of the liquid crystal display device 1032 apart from each other, the sense of distance between "Fujimaru" and "Kun" is very far. Therefore, it will not be recognized as a cohesive character string called "Fujimaru-kun".

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (c), when the component (character string) of the specific identification information is divided into the first display unit and the second display unit, the upper side and the lower side (or the liquid crystal display device) of the liquid crystal display device 1032 The left side and the right side of 1032) are not divided, and both are arranged on either side. In addition, in order to make it easier to recognize as a set, do not divide it into two-dimensional notation (for example, printing on a surface, attaching printed matter) and three-dimensional notation (structure), but use either one.

(7-4: Regarding the sense of parallelism when making two or more lines (Example (d), FIG. 56, FIG. 60)
Example (d) (see FIG. 60) exemplifies the sense of parallelism when the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are made into two or more lines.

In the example (d), in (a), the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are divided into "Fujimaru" and "Kun", and "Fujimaru" is arranged at an angle in the same game board surface, and "Kun" Is tilted in the same direction as the tilt of "Fujimaru" (the size and font of each character are the same). Therefore, the two character string parts "Fujimaru" and "Kun" are recognized as cohesive. Therefore, (a) seems to play a role as identification information, and therefore belongs to the “○ column”.

In FIG. 60 (b), the character strings constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are arranged in an arch shape (along the arc of the launch rail) on the game board surface. Therefore, the degree to which "Fujimaru" and "Kun" are recognized as different ones is weakened, and it is easy to be recognized as a cohesive character string "Fujimaru-kun".

In Fig. 60 (c), the character strings that make up "Fujimaru-kun" are divided into "Fujimaru" and "Kun", and "Fujimaru" is placed at an angle within the same game board, and "Kun" is the "Fujimaru". It is arranged in a direction different from the inclination. Specifically, "Fujimaru" is arranged in an arch shape (along the arc of the launch rail), and "Kun" is arranged in the lateral direction, that is, with a zero inclination angle. For this reason, the parallelism between "Fujimaru" and "Kun" is lost, and it is no longer recognized as a cohesive character string "Fujimaru-kun".

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (d), when the component (character string) of the specific identification information is divided into the first display unit and the second display unit, it is necessary to arrange them so as to be parallel to each other. That is, when it is desired to tilt the first display unit, the first display unit is tilted and the second display unit is tilted in the same direction as the tilt of the first display unit. Alternatively, the first display unit and the second display unit may be inclined in an arch shape, that is, along concentric circles.

(7-5: Character size (Example (e), FIG. 56, FIG. 61)
In FIG. 61A, the characters constituting "Fujimaru-kun" and the character spacing are the same for "Fujimaru-kun" arranged in the front frame to give a sense of unity.

In FIG. 61 (b), the character size is gradually reduced in the order of "wisteria", "maru", and "kun", and the character spacing is also changed from large to small in this order. Therefore, the sense of unity is weakened.

In FIG. 61 (c), the character size of "wisteria" is large, and the character size of "Maru-kun" is reduced to about half of the vertical size of "wisteria". If the character sizes are extremely irregular in this way, it will not be recognized as a cohesive character string called "Fujimaru-kun".

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (e), it is necessary to unify the size of each component (character) constituting the specific identification information. When changing the size of each component (character) constituting the specific identification information, the size is reduced or increased at equal intervals.

(7-6: Character font (Example (f), FIG. 56, FIG. 62)
In FIG. 62A, the font (font) and color of the characters constituting "Fujimaru-kun" are the same for "Fujimaru-kun" arranged in the front frame to give a sense of unity. What kind of font is used is free, and for example, the one shown in FIG. 79 can be adopted.

In FIG. 62B, "Fujimaru-kun" is displayed in two lines by using a bold font for "Fujimaru" and a fine font for "Kun". That is, unlike (a), the fonts and colors are not unified, but in order to give a sense of unity, a surrounding line (frame line) is provided around the entire two lines so that it can be seen as a group. ing. By providing the enclosure in this way, a sense of unity can be created.

In FIG. 62 (c), "Fujimaru-kun" is displayed on one line by using a fine font for "wisteria", a bold font for "round", and a fine font for "n". As in (a), the fonts and colors are not unified. In addition, there is no surrounding line (frame line) to give a sense of unity.

Therefore, as a conclusion of the embodiment (f), it is necessary to unify the fonts and colors of each component (character) constituting the specific identification information in order to give a sense of unity. When some of the fonts or colors of each component (character) constituting the specific identification information are different, it is understood that they are a group, and (i) a surrounding line (including a solid line or a boundary line due to unevenness of a structure). ), (Ii) have the same background color, (iii) have the same decoration (for example, each character has a silver-plated border).

(7-7: Light emission mode (Example (G), FIG. 56, FIG. 63)
Example (g) (see FIG. 63) exemplifies a light emitting mode when the character string constituting "Fujimaru-kun" is illuminated. The "light emitting mode" referred to here includes a form that emits light by itself and a form that is brightly illuminated by others.

FIG. 63A deals with the display during the "normal gaming state" period or the "demo display" period. The identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is displayed in the front frame as a continuous character string.

FIG. 63 (b) deals with the display during the period of "notice production in progress" (design change in progress). That is, FIG. 63 (b) explains the situation in which the character part of "Kun" in "Fujimaru-kun" shines brighter than the other character parts of "Fujimaru" during the period of "preliminary production". ing. The purpose of the notice production is to convey the "winning expectation" to the player, and when the character part of "kun" shines, attention will be paid to the shining itself and the color, "kun". I am not conscious of what is meant by. Therefore, there is no risk of being recognized as a trademark usage mode.

On the other hand, FIG. 63 (c) deals with the display after shifting to the period of "waiting", that is, "demo display" (design stop ≠ jackpot). The character part of "Kun" in "Fujimaru-kun" shines brighter than the other character parts of "Fujimaru". Since the period of this "demo display" is a non-gaming period, there is a risk that the use of the characters "kun" may be recognized as a trademark usage mode.

From the above, the following can be said. (I) At a predetermined timing, the display mode can be such that the entire specific identification information is emitted with the same system color. (Ii) The display mode may be such that the entire specific identification information is turned on (or turned off) at a predetermined timing. Here, the "predetermined timing" refers to a timing having a certain width, depending on whether the symbol is stopped (≠ big hit) or the symbol is changing. That is, it refers to a period that occupies at least half of the time (that is, a timing with a width) while the symbol is stopped (≠ big hit), and a period that occupies at least half of the time during the symbol change). (That is, timing with width). (Iii) Specifically, the entire specific identification information can be uniformly lit while the symbol is stopped, and at least a part of the specific identification information can be blinked (or lit in a different color) while the symbol is changing.

<8. Alternative Embodiments 7, 8>
(8-1: Conventional problems)
Conventionally, in some ball game machines, the model name is placed as a logo on the front frame or the game board surface. It is also known that the model name logo makes various light emitting modes corresponding to the advance notice effect and the reach effect. Furthermore, there is also known one that makes the model name logo movable (or deformed / combined) (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2018-175949).

When displaying identification information consisting of characters, figures, symbols, etc. on a game machine, where to place the identification information, whether to place two or more identification information, and how to display it. Is free. In addition, in recent years, the displayable area of the gaming machine has increased when viewed from the front, and the degree of freedom in the arrangement location and the number of arrangements of the identification information has increased accordingly. As a result, the function as the original identification information may be weakened depending on the arrangement location, the number of arrangements, or the display mode, and the information may be mistaken for different identification information.

Therefore, in another embodiment 7, the specific identification information arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device of the ball game machine is made conspicuous, and in the other embodiment 8, non-specific identification is made in addition to the specific identification information. This problem is solved by making the non-specific identification information less noticeable when it has information.

(8-2: Evaluation criteria)
First, I would like to touch on what can be the criteria for evaluation.

(Advantage of placement location)
As shown in FIG. 36 (A), when viewed from the side, the frame upper part 1011 bulges toward the front side with respect to the frame middle part 1012 and the frame lower part 1013, and the frame upper part front surface 1011a It is located so as to protrude forward from the front of the frame middle portion 1012 and the frame lower portion 1013. As a result, the game machine strongly insists on the existence of its own game machine to the player by projecting the frame upper part 1011 and bringing the frame upper front surface 1011a closer to the player side.

FIG. 36 (A) shows the height position A of the line of sight of the trader or the player when the trader or the player is standing near the game machine, and FIG. 36 (B) shows the trader or the trader or the player with respect to the game machine. The height position B of the line of sight of the player when the player is sitting is shown. When a trader purchases a game machine, it is common to select a game table while standing and sit down for a test shot with respect to the game machine installed in the test hitting room in the same manner as the hall. The same applies when a player plays with a game machine in a hall, and the player selects a game table while standing, sits down, and starts hitting. Since the situation in this area does not change between the trader and the player, the explanation below will focus on the case where the player sees the game machine.

When searching for a game machine in the hall, the player inspects and confirms the game machine while standing. At this time, the height position of the player's line of sight is the position A in FIG. 36 (A). This line-of-sight height position A is particularly close to the upper part 1011 of the frame 1010 of the game machine. Therefore, when the game machine is viewed in a "standing state", the degree of stimulation that stimulates the player's eyes is the highest because the frame 1010, which is easy to see even from a distance, especially the upper part 1011 of the frame, is easily noticeable. Become. In addition to this point, in the case of the frame upper part 1011 shown in FIG. 36A, the frame upper part front surface 1011a has a structure protruding toward the front side. In the case of a game machine having this structure, the front portion 1011a of the upper part of the frame protruding to the front side of the front portion is particularly easily noticeable. Therefore, the frame upper portion 1011 having a structure in which the frame upper front surface 1011a protrudes has a higher degree of stimulation than the frame upper portion 1011 having a structure in which the frame upper front surface 1011a does not protrude.

The next eye-catching part when viewed from the line-of-sight position A is the central part of the frame 1012, and the area of the game board 1020 which is the inner part surrounded by the frame 1010, the main liquid crystal display device 1031, and the sub liquid crystal display. It is presumed that it will face the display surface of device 1032.

Next, when the player sits down, the player's line of sight is at the height position B (FIG. 36 (B)) toward the game board 1020. At this time, the front surface 1011a of the upper part of the frame becomes invisible. The eye-catching part is in the middle of the front of the game machine, and the display area of the central part 1012 of the frame and the area of the game board 1020 which is the inner part surrounded by the frame 1010, that is, the game area 1021 and the non-game area 1022 are the eyes. Furthermore, the display on the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031 and the sub liquid crystal display device 1032 becomes easy to see, and the surfaces of the lower operation means 1041 and the upper operation means 1042, which are the operation means 1040, are visible. It is presumed that it will be easier to attach to.

On the other hand, there are cases where it is desired to arrange or display identification information consisting of characters, figures, and symbols so as to stand out on the game machine. This is not only when displaying the "model name, manufacturer name, etc." of the game machine, which seems to be closely related to the product identification display and the source display, but also when displaying the source display, etc. It also includes the case of displaying a possible "premium character, the name of the main character of the story, etc." and the case where the display mode can be seen as a design for decorating an article.

Whether or not the part of the game machine suitable as the "placement (placement or display place)" of such identification information is easily noticeable at the line-of-sight height position A in the standing position (player's eyes). When classified according to the degree of stimulation to stimulate, (1) frame 1010 (frame upper part 1011, frame middle part 1012, frame lower part 1013), (2) game board 1020 (game area 1021, non-game area 1022), (3) liquid crystal There are a display device 1030 (main liquid crystal display device 1031, sub liquid crystal display device 1032), (4) operation means 1040 (lower operation means (effect button) 1041, upper operation means 1042), and (1) (2) (3). In the order of (4), the "power of transmitting identification information (power equivalent to the index power of a trademark)" becomes stronger. That is, the transmission power of the identification information becomes stronger in the order of frame> game board> liquid crystal display device> operating means, and the "superiority" as the arrangement location becomes higher.

(Advantage of size)
Next, consider from the viewpoint of the "size" of the identification information, that is, the display size. The discriminating power or information transmission effect (self-appeal degree of the discriminating information) of the discriminating information becomes stronger as the discriminating information is displayed in a larger size. Therefore, with regard to "size", the larger the size, the higher the "superiority". For example, when the size is divided into three, "large", "medium", and "small", the discriminating power of the discriminating information becomes stronger as described above. That is, the degree of self-appeal of the identification information increases in the order of small <medium <large size, and the "superiority" when determining the display mode increases.

(Predominance of display period)
Next, consider from the viewpoint of the "display period" in which the identification information is displayed. Considering the degree of discriminating power of the discriminating information or the information transmission effect (self-appeal degree of the discriminating information) in terms of the length of the "display period", the longer the displayed period, the stronger the self-appeal degree of the discriminating information. Therefore, when determining the display mode with respect to the "display period", the longer the displayed period is, the more advantageous it is, that is, the higher the "superiority" is treated.

In the case of a game machine, the display mode of the identification information may be that the identification information is "always" displayed as a display period or that the identification information is "temporarily" displayed under specific conditions. Comparing the two, the degree of discriminating power is stronger when the identification information is displayed "always" than when it is displayed "temporarily".

The former case of "always" display includes a static display mode and a dynamic display mode as follows. (A) "Static display mode" in which the identification information is drawn in a plane or three-dimensional manner so that the identification information is constantly present, and (b) By being illuminated by a lamp containing the identification information or emitting light by itself. "Static display mode" in which the identification information is lit and the identification information is continuously brightly displayed (continuously lit), (c) The identification information is lit by a built-in lamp or by emitting light by itself, and the identification information is blinking or displayed. For example, "dynamic display mode" that is displayed intermittently.

Further, as a case where the identification information is displayed "temporarily" under the latter specific condition, the identification information may be displayed for a predetermined period under a predetermined condition on the screen of the image display device 1030. For example, (a) the identification information is displayed as a specific effect with extremely high expectation of winning during the reach effect on condition that the lottery is won during the reach effect period, or (b) the game is played for a certain period of time. When the identification information is displayed on the demo screen generated on the image display device 1030, or (c) during the opening period or ending period during the jackpot game, the identification information is displayed on the screen of the image display device 1030, provided that the information is not displayed. Information may be displayed.

Regarding the "display period" of the identification information, the degree of "temporary" display, that is, the higher the display frequency, the stronger the self-appeal degree of the identification information. In other words, the degree of self-appeal of the identification information is stronger when the degree of "temporary" display is higher than the case of low frequency, and the self-appeal degree of the identification information is the highest when it is displayed "always". Become stronger. Therefore, regarding the "display period" of the identification information, the superiority increases in the order of constant> temporary (high frequency)> temporary (low frequency).

In the case of the "temporary" display by the image display device 1030, the identification information is displayed as an image on the screen, so that the identification information does not necessarily have to maintain the same display mode during the displayed period. .. For example, when the identification information consists of a plurality of characters, it is possible to use a "static display mode" in which those characters are continuously displayed "temporarily" while maintaining a certain size, arrangement, and shape. Although it is a "temporary" display, it may be a "dynamic display mode" in which the size, shape, and the like change during the display.

In short, the self-appeal degree of the identification information is stronger when it is displayed "always" than when it is displayed "temporarily". Then, during the period in which the identification information is displayed, the greater the degree (display frequency) of the identification information being displayed, the stronger the self-appeal of the identification information, and the self of the identification information when it is displayed "always". The degree of appeal is the strongest.

(Summary of evaluation criteria)
To summarize the cases of the above arrangement location, size, and display period, if you want to make the game machine stand out by providing identification information, the superiority of the display mode, where and how to display the identification information is effective and advantageous. The following three evaluation criteria (judgment scales) 1 to 3 are considered (see the description at the bottom of FIG. 36 (A)).
(Evaluation criterion 1: Placement location)
Regarding the "placement location" of the identification information, the self-appeal degree of the identification information becomes stronger in the order of frame> game board> liquid crystal display device> operation means, and the superiority also becomes higher in this order. When determining the display mode for the "placement location", this order of superiority is followed.
(Evaluation standard 2: Size)
Regarding the "size" of the identification information, when the display size is divided into three, "large", "medium", and "small", the self-appeal degree of the identification information becomes stronger in the order of large>medium> small. Therefore, when determining the display mode for the "size" of the identification information, the order of superiority is followed.
(Evaluation standard 3: Display period)
Regarding the "display period" of the identification information, the self-appeal degree of the identification information becomes stronger as the degree of display increases, and the case where the identification information is displayed "always" is the strongest. Therefore, regarding the "display period" of the identification information, the degree of self-appeal increases in the order of constant> temporary (high frequency)> temporary (low frequency), and therefore, when determining the display mode, the order of this superiority Follow.

(8-3: Embodiment (separate embodiment 7), FIG. 64, FIG. 65) in which specific identification information arranged in a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device is conspicuous.
Regarding the identification information arranged at a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device, a display mode (separate embodiment 5) for making the arrangement place appropriate and conspicuous will be described. Here, specific identification information (those with low trademark risk) and non-specific identification information (those with high trademark risk or those with unknown trademark risk) are dealt with. Trademark risk refers to the degree of risk of being evaluated as a trademark use and infringing a trademark right. Both specific identification information and non-specific identification information are a type of identification mark, and there is only a difference in their trademark risk. Therefore, "specific identification information and non-specific identification information" can also be referred to as "first specific identification information and second specific identification information".

In the example of FIG. 64, the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is treated as the first specific identification information, and the subtitle "poetic justice" is treated as the second specific identification information in order to facilitate understanding. However, due to the difference in trademark risk, the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" can be treated as specific identification information, and the subtitle "Poetic Justice" can be treated as non-specific identification information.

In FIG. 64 (a), the model name "Fujimaru-kun", which is the first specific identification information, is placed in the upper part of the frame 1011 and the subtitle "Poetic justice", which is the second specific identification information, is placed on the game board surface. ing. The subtitle "Poetic Justice" is divided into "Poetic Justice" and "Poetic Justice" below the liquid crystal display device 1032. In the example of FIG. 64 (a), the model name "Mr. Fujimaru" is above the subtitle "Poetic justice", and the size of "Mr. Fujimaru" is larger than "Poetic justice". Because it is also large, "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is easily recognized as the model name.

On the other hand, in FIG. 64 (b), the arrangement relationship between the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information is reversed, and the subtitle "poetic justice", which is the second specific identification information, is placed in the upper part 1011 of the frame. The model name "Mr. Fujimaru", which is the first specific identification information, is arranged on the surface of the game board, to be exact, above the liquid crystal display device 1032. Also, since the size of "Mr. Fujimaru" is smaller than "Poetic justice", it is difficult to recognize "Mr. Fujimaru" as a model name.

Therefore, when arranging the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information, it is necessary to display the first specific identification information to be conspicuous above and larger than the second specific identification information. Further, when the identification information and the second specific identification information are arranged, it is necessary to display the first specific identification information to be conspicuous on the upper side and larger than the second specific identification information.

In FIG. 65 (a), the model name “Fujimaru-kun”, which is the first specific identification information, is placed on the upper part of the frame 1011 and the non-specific identification information “fate” is placed on the game ball rolling surface of the game board surface. ing. Then, by providing the second specific identification information "Flame Prison Demon Mystery" on the surface of the game board that is three-dimensional and bulges toward the front side, it is closer to the front side than the "fate" of the non-specific identification information. It is arranged. The frame surrounding the "Phantom of the Flame Demon God" indicates that it bulges toward you. And the character size is in the relationship of "Mr. Fujimaru"> "Mystery of the Flame Demon God"> "Fate", and "Mr. Fujimaru" is the largest size. Therefore, "Mr. Fujimaru" is easily recognized as the model name.

On the other hand, in FIG. 65 (b), the arrangement relationship between the first specific identification information, the second specific identification information, and the non-specific identification information is the same as in FIG. 65 (a), but the character size is "Mr. Fujimaru-kun". There is a relationship of "Fate"> "Flame Demon God's Phantom", and the size of "Flame Hell Demon God's Phantom" is smaller than "Fate". Further, the "fate" of the non-specific identification information is formed on a three-dimensionally raised surface on the front side as shown by enclosing it in a frame, and the second specific identification information is arranged on the front side. For this reason, if it is one of the identification information, it is difficult to have the second specific identification information "Phantom of the Flame Demon God" recognized as the identification information.

Therefore, in the case of arranging the first specific identification information, the second specific identification information, and the non-specific identification information, that is, in order to have both the first specific identification information and the second specific identification information recognized as identification information, It is necessary to make the second specific identification information larger than the non-specific identification information, or to arrange the second specific identification information in front of the non-specific identification information (for example, to make it three-dimensional).

(8-4: Embodiment in which non-specific identification information is not conspicuous (separate embodiment 8), FIG. 66)
A display mode (another embodiment 8) for making the non-specific identification information inconspicuous will be described with respect to the identification information arranged at a place other than the screen of the liquid crystal display device. Here, the model name "Mr. Fujimaru-kun" is treated as specific identification information (low trademark risk), and the manufacturer's logo (symbol) as non-specific identification information (high trademark risk or unknown trademark risk). Handles combinations of marks and characters, symbol marks only, characters only). The logo used here is a combination of the characters "dot mark" and "FUJI" shown in FIG. 66, but is abbreviated as "FUJI" for convenience of explanation.

In FIGS. 66 (a) and 66 (b), the model name "Fujimaru-kun", which is the identification information, is arranged on the game board surface above the crystal display device 1032, and the logo "FUJI" of the non-specific identification information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1032. The form to appear on the screen is illustrated. The family crest and the logo of the manufacturing company are often registered as trademarks or other registrations, and if they are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1032 for a long time, it seems that the registered trademark or the like is used. .. In particular, as shown in FIG. 66 (c), these non-specific identification information are always visible with a size of a certain size or more (for example, a diameter of 5 cm or more), or as shown in FIG. 66 (d). When the identification information is arranged in the front frame or is represented as a three-dimensional structure, it is likely to be seen as such.

Therefore, as shown in FIG. 66A, normally, the logo "FUJI" is displayed in a state where only a part of it can be seen. Then, if necessary, as shown in FIG. 66 (b) temporarily, the area where the logo "FUJI" appears on the screen increases, and finally the entire logo "FUJI" can be visually recognized. Make the configuration change as much as possible. If the display of the non-specific identification information is transient in this way, it is less likely that the logo is considered to be a trademark usage mode.

Therefore, when handling the specific identification information having a low trademark risk and the non-specific identification information having a high trademark risk, the non-specific identification information should not be conspicuous. For that purpose, (i) the non-specific identification information is not arranged in the front frame, (ii) the non-specific identification information is arranged on the game board surface in a flat display mode instead of a three-dimensional structure, and (iii) the game board surface. In the above, the non-specific identification information is arranged in a size smaller than a certain size, (iv) the non-specific identification information is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1032 instead of the display mode (arranged as a three-dimensional structure) that is always displayed, (v). It is necessary that the non-specific identification information is not arranged as a completed body, but is made visible as a completed body at the time of production.

(9: Configuration example of another embodiment 7 and 8)
The other embodiments 7 and 8 described in FIGS. 64, 65, and 66 can be specifically configured as follows.

(1) A main body frame for holding a game board provided with a game area on the front surface, and
A front frame that is arranged to be openable and closable on the front side of the main body frame and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized.
An image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image,
It is a game machine equipped with
It has specific identification information (first identification information) and non-specific identification information (second identification information) that are visually displayed on the game machine.
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information.
The non-specific identification information is arranged in the front frame and
The specific identification information is arranged in the front frame above the non-specific identification information.
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information.
A game machine characterized by that.
(2) The gaming machine according to (1) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(3) A main body frame for holding a game board provided with a game area on the front surface, and
A front frame that is arranged to be openable and closable on the front side of the main body frame and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized.
An image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image,
It is a game machine equipped with
It has specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visually displayed on the game machine.
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information.
The non-specific identification information is arranged on the game board surface,
The specific identification information is arranged in the front frame above the non-specific identification information.
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information.
A game machine characterized by that.
(4) The gaming machine according to (3) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(5) A main body frame for holding a game board provided with a game area on the front surface, and
A front frame that is arranged to be openable and closable on the front side of the main body frame and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized.
An image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image,
It is a game machine equipped with
It has specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visually displayed on the game machine.
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information.
The non-specific identification information is configured to be displayed on the image display device.
The specific identification information is arranged in the front frame above the non-specific identification information.
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information.
A game machine characterized by that.
(6) The gaming machine according to (5) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(7) A main body frame for holding a game board provided with a game area on the front surface, and
A front frame that is arranged to be openable and closable on the front side of the main body frame and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized.
An image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image,
An effect control means for generating an effect on the image display means,
It is a game machine equipped with
It has specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visually displayed on the game machine.
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information.
The non-specific identification information is displayed on the image display device,
The specific identification information is arranged in the front frame above the non-specific identification information.
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information.
The specific identification information is always visibly displayed, and the non-specific identification information is displayed at the time of the effect generated by the effect control means.
A game machine characterized by that.
(8) A main body frame for holding a game board having a game area on the front surface, and
The center case provided on the game board surface and
A front frame that is arranged to be openable and closable on the front side of the main body frame and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized.
An image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image,
It is a game machine equipped with
It has specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visually displayed on the game machine.
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information.
The non-specific identification information is arranged in the front frame and
The specific identification information is arranged in the center case above the non-specific identification information.
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information.
A game machine characterized by that.
(9) The gaming machine according to (8) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(10) A main body frame for holding a game board provided with a game area on the front surface, and
The center case provided on the game board surface and
A front frame that is arranged to be openable and closable on the front side of the main body frame and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized.
An image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image,
It is a game machine equipped with
It has specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visually displayed on the game machine.
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information.
The non-specific identification information is arranged on the game board surface,
The specific identification information is arranged in the center case above the non-specific identification information.
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information.
A game machine characterized by that.
(11) The gaming machine according to (9) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(12) A main body frame for holding a game board having a game area on the front surface, and
The center case provided on the game board surface and
A front frame that is arranged to be openable and closable on the front side of the main body frame and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized.
An image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image,
It is a game machine equipped with
It has specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visually displayed on the game machine.
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information.
The non-specific identification information is displayed on the image display means,
The specific identification information is arranged in the center case above the non-specific identification information.
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information.
A game machine characterized by that.
(13) The gaming machine according to (12) above, wherein the specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body, and the non-specific identification information is arranged as a movable body.
(14) A main body frame for holding a game board provided with a game area on the front surface, and
A front frame that is arranged to be openable and closable on the front side of the main body frame and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized.
An image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image,
An effect control means for generating an effect on the image display means,
It is a game machine equipped with
It has specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visually displayed on the game machine.
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information.
The non-specific identification information is displayed on the image display device,
The specific identification information is arranged in the center case above the non-specific identification information.
The specific identification information is arranged larger than the non-specific identification information.
The specific identification information is always visibly displayed, and the non-specific identification information is displayed at the time of the effect generated by the effect control means.
A game machine characterized by that.
(15) A main body frame for holding a game board provided with a game area on the front surface, and
A front frame that is arranged to be openable and closable on the front side of the main body frame and has a viewing window that allows the game area to be visually recognized.
An image display means having a display area capable of displaying a predetermined image,
It is a game machine equipped with
It has specific identification information and non-specific identification information that are visually displayed on the game machine.
The specific identification information is identification information that is more likely to be used as a trademark than the non-specific identification information.
The non-specific identification information is arranged in a place other than the front frame, and the non-specific identification information is arranged.
The specific identification information is displayed on the image display means above the non-specific identification information.
The non-specific identification information is arranged smaller than the specific identification information.
A game machine characterized by that.
(16) The gaming machine according to (15) above, wherein the non-specific identification information is arranged as a non-movable body.

<10. Example 1, FIGS. 67 to 70 of another embodiments 7 and 8>
The first embodiment (FIGS. 67 to 70) shows a case where the first identification information is arranged in the “front frame”.

In this example, the "model name (Fujimaru-kun)" of the gaming machine is treated as the most conspicuous identification information (first identification information). At the same time, it also handles identification information (manufacturing company name, etc.) other than the model name. Since it is assumed that the identification information that you want to display most prominently is the model name (Fujimaru-kun), make the "model name" stand out more than any other identification information (for example, "manufacturing company name"). Ingenuity. Therefore, in light of the evaluation criteria (evaluation scales) 1 to 3, the one with the highest degree of superiority is adopted for each of the "placement location", "size", and "display period" of the model name. Specifically, select "frame" for "placement location" of the model name, "large" for "size", and "always" for "display period".

As a result of this selection, in the examples of FIGS. 35 (B) and 36 (A), the characters "Fujimaru-kun" are three-dimensionally provided as the model name 1080 on the frame upper part 1011, to be exact, on the frame upper front surface 1011a. (Evaluation criteria 1: Placement "frame"). In addition, the size of the model name "Fujimaru-kun", which is the first identification information, is set to a size that is full or larger than the vertical width of the upper front surface 1011a of the frame, that is, the maximum size (evaluation). Criterion 2: Size "Large"). In addition, the characters "Fujimaru-kun" are provided as a physical structure by uneven notation (convex or concave), that is, so that they always exist on the front 1011a of the upper part of the frame (evaluation standard 3: display period "always". "). As a result, the characters "Fujimaru-kun" are provided in the most conspicuous display mode, and the fact that the model name of the game machine is "Fujimaru-kun" is maximized to the players.

FIG. 67 is a list of display modes when a game machine is provided with "model name" as the first identification information and information "other than the model name" as the second identification information. In the left column of FIG. 67, an example of the display mode of how to attach "Fujimaru-kun" of the "model name" which is the first identification information is shown. Further, in the right column of FIG. 67, various display modes of how to attach the identification information (second identification information) of "other than the model name" are summarized as a list.

The model name "Fujimaru-kun", which is the first identification information in the "left column" of FIG. 67, has the same display mode as that described in FIGS. 35 (B) to 36 (A), and thus the description thereof will be omitted. Also in the list of the "right side column" of FIG. 67, it is assumed that the first identification information has the same model name "Fujimaru-kun" as that shown in the left side column and has the same display mode. That is, it is the same "Fujimaru-kun" as shown in FIGS. 35 (B) and 36 (A), and is located on the front 1011a of the upper part of the frame 1010 (arrangement location: "frame") at the maximum size (large). S: "Large"), it is provided in a form that always appears (display period: "always").

Further, in this list (on the right side of FIG. 67), the "manufacturing company name" is handled as the identification information (second identification information) of "other than the model name". Regarding the method of displaying the "manufacturing company name" of the second identification information, there are differences in the arrangement location and the size of the first identification information, and these are combinations of the first identification information for "Fujimaru-kun". Characterized. Therefore, these differences are explained in the rows (horizontal group) of (a), (b), and (c) regarding where the "placement location" of the second identification information is located in the game machine, and the "large size" of the second identification information. The characteristics of the display mode are clarified by classifying by the combination with the columns (vertical group) of (α), (β), and (γ) as to how to make the information.

Specifically, the "placement location" for displaying the name of the manufacturer of the second identification information is divided into three lines: (a) frame, (b) game board surface, and (c) liquid crystal display device. In addition, regarding the "size" of the manufacturer name of the second identification information in the relative comparison of the first identification information and the second identification information, (α) "first identification information (model name)" ) <Second identification information (other than model name) ", (β)" First identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than model name) ", and (γ)" First identification information (model name) )> Second identification information (other than the model name) ”is divided into three columns. Further, the "display period" is set to either "normal" or "temporary", and is classified by the division numbers 1 to 6.

In the above list (on the right side of FIG. 67), display examples a, b, and c belong to the horizontal group (a) in which the second identification information (other than the model name) is provided in the central portion 1012 of the frame, and the display examples d and e , F belong to the horizontal group (b) in which the second identification information (other than the model name) is provided on the game board surface (game board 1020), and the display examples g, h, and i are the second identification information (other than the model name). Belongs to the horizontal group (c) displayed on the liquid crystal display device 1030. In addition, display examples a, d, and g belong to the vertical group of (α) “first identification information (model name) <second identification information (other than model name)”, and display examples b, e, and h are (β) “. It belongs to the vertical group of "first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than model name)", and display examples c, f, and i are (γ) "first identification information (model name)> second identification information. (Other than the model name) ”belongs to the vertical group.

Hereinafter, display examples a to i will be described individually.

(10-1: Display example a, FIG. 68)
FIG. 68 is an enlarged view of the display examples a, b, and c belonging to the group in the right column (a) row of FIG. 67.

In the display example a of FIG. 68 (row α column of FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, has the characters “Fujimaru-kun” projected or concave on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front surface 1011a). It is provided by providing it, and the name of the manufacturing company, which is the second identification information, is provided by projecting or denting the characters "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." on the surface of the central part 1012 of the frame. The size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is arranged in the maximum size (size: "large") with respect to the width (vertical width) of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front 1011a), and also. The characters of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." are provided in a size larger than that of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun". In this display example a, the second identification information "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." has a size slightly protruding from the width of the central part 1012 of the frame. However, the size of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." is based on the relationship of (α) first identification information (model name) <second identification information (other than model name). As long as it is kept, either a size that fits within the width of the frame upper portion 1011 or the frame middle portion 1012, or a size that protrudes from the width can be adopted.

In this display example a, the size of the identification information is in the relationship of "(α) first identification information (model name) <second identification information (other than the model name)" (column 67α in FIG.), and the model name "Fujimaru". The manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." is larger than "Kun". However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (the frame upper front surface 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place having the highest superiority). In other words, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is in a higher position than the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." Therefore, the self-appeal degree of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is larger than that of the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." provided in the central part of the frame 1012. In this sense, the display example a is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship. The first identification information can be arranged as a non-movable body, and the second fixed identification information can be arranged as a movable body.

(10-2: Display example b, FIG. 68)
In the display example b of FIG. 68 (row β column of FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, has the characters “Fujimaru-kun” projected on the surface of the “frame upper part 1011” (frame upper front surface 1011a). Alternatively, it is provided by denting, and the second identification information is provided by projecting or denting the characters "Fuji Shoji" on the surface of "frame middle portion 1012". Since the word "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." is omitted from the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd." and only "Fuji Shoji" is displayed, it is difficult to tell whether or not the name of the manufacturing company is displayed. It is closer to the trademark usage mode by the amount. However, it is the same as the case of the display example a in that the manufacturing company name is considered to be displayed. Therefore, in the following, for convenience of explanation, the display of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" will be described as representing the company name.

However, in the display example b, the size is in the relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than the model name)", and the size is the size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information. On the other hand, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is relatively the same. The display of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" maintains the relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than model name)". As long as it does not necessarily have to be within the width of the frame upper part 1011 or the frame middle part 1012, any of the sizes protruding from the width can be adopted.

In this display example b, there is a relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than the model name)", and the model name "Fujimaru-kun" and the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji". Is almost the same size. However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (the frame upper front 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest advantage), that is, from the manufacturing company name "Fujishoji". The first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is in a higher position. Therefore, the self-appeal degree of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is larger than that of the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji" provided in the central part 1012 of the frame. In this sense, the display example b is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-3: Display example c, FIG. 68)
In the display example c of FIG. 68 (row γ column of FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, has the characters “Fujimaru-kun” projected or concave on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front surface 1011a). It is provided by providing it, and the name of the manufacturing company, which is the second identification information, is provided by projecting or denting the characters "Fuji Shoji" on the surface of the central part 1012 of the frame. The size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is arranged in the maximum size (size: "large") with respect to the width (vertical width) of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front surface 1011a). In addition, the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is provided in a size smaller than that of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun". That is, the relationship is "(γ) first identification information (model name)> second identification information (other than the model name)". It differs from the display example b in that the display size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is smaller than that of the model name "Fujimaru-kun".

In this display example c, the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is within the width of the central part 1012 of the frame. However, the size of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is as long as the relationship of (γ) first identification information (model name)> second identification information (other than the model name) is maintained. , A size that fits within the width of the frame upper portion 1011 or the frame middle portion 1012, or a size that protrudes from the width can be adopted.

In this display example c, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (the frame upper front surface 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest advantage), that is, the manufacturing company name " The first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is higher than "Fuji Shoji". In addition, there is a relationship of 1st identification information (model name)> 2nd identification information (other than the model name), and the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is larger than the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji". Therefore, the self-appeal degree of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is larger than that of the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji" provided in the central part 1012 of the frame. In this sense, the display example c is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-4: Display example d, FIG. 69)
In the display example d of FIG. 69 (row α column of FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, has the characters “Fujimaru-kun” projected or concave on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front surface 1011a). The characters "Fuji Shoji" are provided on the game board surface (game area 1021) as the name of the manufacturing company, which is the second identification information, at a position below the liquid crystal display device. Has been done. As a method of providing the characters "Fuji Shoji" on the surface of the game board in this way, a method of providing the characters "Fuji Shoji" on the surface of the game board 1020 by projecting or denting the characters "Fuji Shoji", and providing "Fuji" on the surface of the game board 1020. A method of providing a stepless or stepped form by embedding the characters "Shoji", a normally transparent liquid crystal display sheet (electronic paper) is provided so as to completely cover the game board 1020, and the liquid crystal is provided as necessary. Any method may be used to display the characters "Fuji Shoji" on the display sheet.

The electronic paper is provided as a transmissive display device between the front frame 2 and the game board 3 so that the game area 3a of the game board can be seen through from the front side. There are various types of electronic paper, and any one of a microcapsule method, an electronic powder fluid method, a liquid crystal method, and an electrowetting method can be used. Since these methods are currently known, detailed description of these methods will be omitted.

The size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is arranged in the maximum size (size: "large") with respect to the width (vertical width) of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front 1011a), and also. The second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is provided in a size larger than that of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun". In addition, the characters "Fuji Shoji" do not have "Fuji", "Sho", and "Things" in a straight line, and are arranged so as to surround the main liquid crystal display device 1031. However, the size of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" has a relationship of "(α) first identification information (model name) <second identification information (other than model name)". As long as it is kept, it is not necessary to fit in the game board surface (game area 1021) and be visible from the front, and if the intended message is transmitted, that is, if the model name and manufacturer name can be read, one It can be provided with the portion hidden in the frame.

In this display example d, there is a relationship of "(α) first identification information (model name) <second identification information (other than the model name)", and the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji" is more than the model name "Fujimaru-kun". Is larger. However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (the frame upper front 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest advantage), that is, from the manufacturing company name "Fujishoji". Since the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is in a higher position, its self-appeal degree is larger than that of the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji" provided on the game board surface (game area 1021). In this sense, the display example d is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-5: Display example e, FIG. 69)
In the display example e (row β column of FIG. 67) of FIG. 69, the model name, which is the first identification information, has the characters "Fujimaru-kun" projected or concave on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front surface 1011a). The characters "Fuji Shoji" are provided on the game board surface (game area 1021) as the name of the manufacturing company, which is the second identification information. This point is the same as in the case of display example d.

However, in the display example e, the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji", which is the second identification information, is provided in the upper part of the game board surface (game area 1021), to be exact, above the main liquid crystal display device 1032. Different from Example d.

Further, in the display example e, the size is (β) in the relationship of (β) first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than the model name), and the size is relative to the size of “Fujimaru-kun” in the first identification information. The size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is relatively the same. In the case of this display example e as well, the display of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is (β) first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than the model name). As long as the relationship is maintained, it is not necessary to fit in the game board surface (game area 1021) and see the whole from the front, and if the intended message is transmitted, that is, the model name or manufacturer name If it is legible, it can be provided with a part hidden in the frame.

In this display example e, there is a relationship of (β) first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than the model name), and the model name "Fujimaru-kun" and the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji" are It is about the same size. Further, the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji", which is the second identification information, is provided above the game board surface (game area 1021). However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (the frame upper front 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest advantage), that is, from the manufacturing company name "Fujishoji". The first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is in a higher position. Therefore, the self-appeal degree of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is larger than that of the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji" provided in the game area 1021. In this sense, the display example e is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-6: Display example f, FIG. 69)
In the display example f of FIG. 69 (row γ column of FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, has the characters “Fujimaru-kun” projected or concave on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front surface 1011a). The characters "Fuji Shoji" are provided as the name of the manufacturing company, which is the second identification information, in the upper part of the game board surface (game area 1021), to be exact, above the main liquid crystal display device 1032. ing. This point is the same as in the case of display example e.

However, in the display example f, the size is in the relationship of "(γ) first identification information (model name)> second identification information (other than the model name)", and the size is the size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information. On the other hand, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is relatively small. Also in the case of this display example f, the display of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is "(γ) first identification information (model name)> second identification information (other than the model name). As long as the relationship of ")" is maintained, it is not necessary to fit in the game board surface (game area 1021) and see the whole from the front, and if the intended message is transmitted, that is, the model name or manufacturing company. If the name is readable, it can be provided with a part hidden in the frame.

In this display example f, the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji", which is the second identification information, is provided above the game board surface (game area 1021). However, there is a relationship of "(γ) 1st identification information (model name)> 2nd identification information (other than model name)", and the model name "Fujimaru-kun" is better than the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji". It has a big relationship. In addition, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (the frame upper front 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest superiority), that is, from the manufacturing company name "Fujimaru-kun". The first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is in a higher position. Therefore, the self-appeal degree of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is larger than that of the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji" provided in the game area 1021. In this sense, the display example f is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-7: Display example g, FIG. 70)
In the display example g of FIG. 70 (row α column of C in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, has the characters “Fujimaru-kun” projected or concave on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front surface 1011a). The characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1030, in this example, on the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031 as the name of the manufacturing company which is the second identification information. It has become so.

Here, it is assumed that the characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed on the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031 or the sub liquid crystal display device 1032. As an example, the expectation of winning is extremely high during the reach production. When the characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed as a high specific effect, or when the characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed on the demo screen that occurs on the image display device 1030 when the game is not being played, or when the big hit game There is a case where the characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed on the screen inside. In either case, the characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed "temporarily" on the screen of the liquid crystal display device.

This display example g belongs to the horizontal group (c) as the characters of "Fuji Shoji" are displayed "temporarily" together with the display examples h and i described later. In this horizontal group (c), the characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed "temporarily", and the characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed "always" in the horizontal group (a) ( B) is different from the ones (display examples a to f).

The first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is arranged in the maximum size (size: "large") with respect to the width (vertical width) of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front 1011a), and the second identification information. The information "Fuji Shoji" is provided in a size larger than that of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun". Then, the entire sequence of characters of "Fuji Shoji" fits in the liquid crystal screen and is displayed in a state where the entire character can be seen from the front.

However, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" fits within the LCD screen as long as the relationship of "(α) first identification information (model name) <second identification information (other than the model name)" is maintained. It is not necessary to display the whole image from the front, but if the intended message is transmitted, that is, if the manufacturer name is readable, it can be displayed with a part hidden in the frame. it can. Further, the size of the characters of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" does not always have to be the same size, and can be changed as needed, and the size of each character may be displayed differently.

In this display example g, there is a relationship of "(α) first identification information (model name) <second identification information (other than model name)", and the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji" is more than the model name "Fujimaru-kun". Is larger. However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (the frame upper front 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest advantage), that is, from the manufacturing company name "Fujishoji". The first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is in a higher position. In addition, the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is only temporarily displayed. Therefore, the self-appeal degree of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information is larger than that of "Fujimaru-kun" of the second identification information displayed on the liquid crystal screen. In this sense, the display example g is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-8: Display example h, FIG. 70)
In the display example h of FIG. 70 (row β column of C in FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, has the characters “Fujimaru-kun” projected or concave on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front surface 1011a). The characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1030, in this example, on the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031 as the name of the manufacturing company, which is the second identification information. To. This point is the same as in the case of display example g.

However, in the display example h, the size is in the relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than the model name)", and the size is the size of "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information. On the other hand, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is almost the same. Then, the entire sequence of characters of "Fuji Shoji" fits in the liquid crystal screen and is displayed in a state where the entire character can be seen from the front.

However, even in the case of this display example h, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" maintains the relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than the model name)". As long as it does not have to fit in the LCD screen and be displayed in a state where the whole can be seen from the front, if the intended message is transmitted, that is, if the manufacturer name can be read, part of it is hidden in the frame. It can be displayed in the state of being. In addition, the size of the characters of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" does not have to be the same size at all times, and it is possible to change it as needed, and the size of each character is displayed differently. May be good.

In this display example h, there is a relationship of "(β) first identification information (model name) ≒ second identification information (other than the model name)", and the model name "Fujimaru-kun" and the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji". Is almost the same size. Further, the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji", which is the second identification information, is displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1032. However, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (the frame upper front 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest advantage), that is, from the manufacturing company name "Fujishoji". The first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is in a higher position. Further, the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji", which is the second identification information, is temporarily displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1032, and is not always displayed. Therefore, the self-appeal degree of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is larger than that of the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji" provided in the main liquid crystal display device 1032. In this sense, the display example h is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-9: Display example i, FIG. 70)
In the display example i of FIG. 70 (row γ column of FIG. 67), the model name, which is the first identification information, has the characters “Fujimaru-kun” projected or concave on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (frame upper front surface 1011a). The characters "Fuji Shoji" are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 1030, in this example, on the screen of the main liquid crystal display device 1031 as the name of the manufacturing company, which is the second identification information. To. This point is the same as in the case of display examples g and h.

However, in the display example i, the size is (γ) in the relationship of (γ) first identification information (model name)> second identification information (other than the model name), and the size is relative to the size of “Fujimaru-kun” in the first identification information. The size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is relatively small. Then, the entire sequence of characters of "Fuji Shoji" fits in the liquid crystal screen and is displayed in a state where the entire character can be seen from the front.

Also in the case of this display example i, the size of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is the liquid crystal screen as long as the relationship of (γ) first identification information (model name)> second identification information (other than the model name) is maintained. It doesn't have to fit inside and be seen from the front, but if the intended message is conveyed, that is, if the manufacturer's name is legible, part of it is hidden in the frame. Can be displayed. In addition, the size of the characters of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" does not have to be the same size at all times, and it is possible to change it as needed, and the size of each character is displayed differently. May be good.

In this display example i, there is a relationship of (γ) first identification information (model name)> second identification information (other than the model name), and the manufacturing company name “Fuji Shoji”, which is the second identification information, is downward. It is designed to be displayed small on the main liquid crystal display device 1032. In other words, the model name "Fujimaru-kun" has a larger relationship than the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji". In addition, the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is located on the surface of the frame upper part 1011 (the frame upper front 1011a), which is the most conspicuous place (the place with the highest superiority), that is, from the manufacturing company name "Fujimaru-kun". The first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is in a higher position. Further, the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji", which is the second identification information, is temporarily displayed on the main liquid crystal display device 1032, and is not always displayed. Therefore, the self-appeal degree of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is larger than that of the manufacturing company name "Fuji Shoji" provided in the main liquid crystal display device 1032. In this sense, the display example i is an example in which the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are provided under an appropriate display relationship.

(10-10: Display period)
In the "display period" column of FIG. 67, in the above display examples a to i, the display period is "always" (cases of division numbers 1, 3 and 5) and "temporary" (cases of division numbers 1, 3 and 5). It shows that there is a case of division number 2, 4, 6).

When the location of the second identification information is a "frame" (horizontal group (a)), the fact that one of the display periods is "always" (category number 1) means that the first identification information and the second identification information Is always displayed without disappearing, which is the same as already explained. The other display period being "temporary" (category number 2) means that one or both of the first identification information and the second identification information may be temporarily displayed and displayed. are doing. For this purpose, for example, an LED, a liquid crystal display device, or the like is provided on the frame 1010 in a convex or concave shape or in a sheet shape to form a character display device, and the character display device provides first identification information and a second. There is a form in which one or both of the identification information is turned on as needed.

In the above display examples d to f, the division numbers 3 and 4 are divided into a case where the display period is "always" (case of division number 3) and a case where the display period is "temporary" (case of division number 4). It shows that there is. When the location of the second identification information is the "game board surface" (horizontal group (b)), the fact that one of the display periods is "always" (category number 3) means that the first identification information and the second identification The information is always displayed without disappearing, which is the same as the one already explained. The other display period being "temporary" (category number 4) means that one or both of the first identification information and the second identification information may be temporarily displayed and displayed. are doing. This can be configured, for example, for the second identification information as follows. The LED or liquid crystal display device is directly provided on the surface of the game board 1020 (game area 1021, non-game area 1022) in a convex or concave shape or in a sheet shape, or is floated from the game board surface with respect to the game board surface. There is a form in which a transparent liquid crystal sheet is provided in parallel, a character display device is configured by the transparent liquid crystal sheet, and the second identification information is lit and displayed as needed. The form in which the first identification information is temporarily displayed in the division number 4 may be specifically configured in the same manner as in the case of the division number 2.

In the above display examples g to i, the division numbers 5 and 6 are divided into a case where the display period is "always" (case of division number 5) and a case where the display period is "temporary" (case of division number 6). It shows that there is. When the location of the second identification information is the "liquid crystal display device" (horizontal group (c)), the fact that one of the display periods is "always" (category number 5) means that the first identification information and the second identification information The identification information is always displayed without disappearing, which is the same as that described above. The other display period being "temporary" (category number 6) means that one or both of the first identification information and the second identification information may be temporarily displayed and displayed. are doing. For example, in the liquid crystal display device 1030 (main liquid crystal display device 1031 or sub liquid crystal display device 1032), the image display of the second identification information is started from a predetermined timing and continuously displayed, or the image display of the second identification information is constant. There is a form in which the second identification information is displayed only during the above period, and a form in which the image of the second identification information is displayed across a plurality of liquid crystal display devices (not shown). The form in which the first identification information is temporarily displayed in the division number 6 may be specifically configured in the same manner as in the cases of the division numbers 2 and 3.

(10-11: Effect of another embodiment)
According to the above display examples a to i, the model name "Fujimaru-kun" of the first game information to be conspicuous is more conspicuous than the manufacturer name "Fuji Shoji" of the second game information (arrangement location, size, display period). ) Is displayed, so that the trader in the product distribution channel or the player in the hall can easily understand which part of the game machine the identification information is the model name and find the desired game table. it can.

(10-12: Summary)
In the above, the model name "Fujimaru-kun" has been used as an example as the first identification information. In this way, if there is identification information that you want to stand out most, such as the model name "Fujimaru-kun", treat it in the same way as the first identification information above, that is, evaluation criteria 1 to 3 (placement location, By displaying the information so that it has the highest "superiority" in light of the evaluation scale (size, display period), the message of the identification information is most effectively transmitted from the gaming machine to the player. Can be done. The place with the highest "superiority" is that the first identification information is displayed more prominently with respect to the second identification information.

Only when there is some kind of identification information displayed (for example, character notation) in the game machine, it exerts a specific discriminating power and should be compared as "second identification information". The "second identification information" exists, and "whether or not it stands out" is determined by the relative comparison between the second identification information and the first identification information, and the "most conspicuous place" is always. It is not fixed as a physically fixed part of the game machine.

Also, as long as it has a message to send, it is free to treat what as the first identification information, and the one that you want to stand out most is, for example, the manufacturer name "Fuji Shoji", which is the model name "Fujimaru-kun". When you want to give priority to appeal, the manufacturer name "Fuji Shoji" is the first identification information that you want to stand out most. Other identification information, such as the model name "Fujimaru-kun", will be treated as the second identification information. Therefore, in the case of the display examples a to i in FIG. 67, the display locations of the model name "Fujimaru-kun" and the manufacturer name "Fuji Shoji" are interchanged.

(10-13: Modification example)
In the above alternative embodiment, it is premised that the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" arranged in the frame 1010 and the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" arranged in the game board are displayed in a display mode that does not deform. It is said. However, both or one of the first identification information and the second identification information may be displayed in a changing display mode. For example, the size of the characters may change from small to large, the shape may change, or only some characters may change so that the arrangement is not uniform with the others.

<11. Example 2, FIGS. 71 to 74> of the other embodiments 7 and 8>
The second embodiment (FIGS. 71 to 74) shows a case where the first identification information is arranged on the “game board surface”.

(11-1: (a) When the second identification information is in the "front frame", FIGS. 71 and 72)
In FIG. 71 (a) (see FIG. 72), in the configuration in which the first identification information is arranged on the “game board surface”, the second identification information “Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd.” or “Fuji Shoji” is referred to as the “front frame”. This is an example of placement in. “A” has “Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd.” at the top of the frame, b has “Fuji Shoji” at the top of the frame, and c has “Fuji Shoji” at the center of the frame, and the character size is gradually decreasing in this order. .. The upper part of the frame is an inappropriate example because it has a higher advantage than the game board in terms of position. "Fuji Shoji" in c is provided in the center of the frame, and since it is below "Fujimaru-kun" and small in size, the degree of inappropriateness is reduced.

In short, when the first identification information (model name) is arranged on the game board surface and the second identification information (other than the model name) is arranged in the front frame, the first identification information is given to the second identification information (other than the model name). Make the (model name) larger and the first identification information (model name) higher.

(11-2: (b) When the second identification information is in the "game board", FIGS. 71 and 73)
FIG. 71 (b) (see FIG. 73) is an example in which the second identification information "Fuji Shoji" is arranged on the "game board surface" in the configuration in which the first identification information is arranged on the "game board surface". In each of a, b, and c, "Fuji Shoji" is provided on the game board under the liquid crystal display device 1032, and the character size is gradually reduced in the order of a, b, and c. In a, "Fujimaru-kun" is on the upper side of "Fuji Shoji", but the size is smaller than "Fuji Shoji", so it is an inappropriate example. Since the character size of "Fuji Shoji" is small in b, the degree of inadequacy is reduced. Since the character size of "Fuji Shoji" is very small for c, it is almost impossible to feel the improperness.

In short, when the first identification information (model name) and the second identification information (other than the model name) are arranged on the game board surface, the first identification information (model name) is compared with the second identification information (other than the model name). Make it larger so that the first identification information (model name) is on top. The first identification information can be arranged as a non-movable body, and the second identification information can be arranged as a movable body.

(11-3: (c) When the second identification information is displayed on the "liquid crystal display device", FIGS. 71 and 74)
In FIG. 71 (c) (see FIG. 74), the second identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is displayed on the liquid crystal display in the configuration in which the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" is arranged above the liquid crystal display device on the game board surface. This is an example of displaying on the device. The first identification information is on the upper side of the second identification information "Fuji Shoji", and the character size is smaller in the order of g, h, and i. Since "Fujimaru-kun" is above "Fujimaru-kun", it is considered to be recognized as a model name regardless of the size of the character size of "Fujimaru-kun".

In short, when the first identification information (model name) is arranged on the game board surface and the second identification information (other than the model name) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device, the first identification is made with respect to the second identification information (other than the model name). Make sure that the information (model name) is larger and the first identification information (model name) is on top. The first identification information may not be movable (deformed), and the second identification information may be movable (deformed). Further, the first identification information (model name) is always displayed, and the second identification information (other than the model name) can be displayed at the time of production.

<12. Inverse proportions of other embodiments 7 and 8, FIGS. 75-78>
(A), (b), and (c) shown in FIGS. 75 to 78 show the arrangement of the second identification information (Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd. or Fuji Shoji Co., Ltd.) in (a), (b), and (c) of FIGS. 71 to 74. The location of the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" was changed from "game board surface" to "liquid crystal display device screen" while keeping the same location (front frame, game board, liquid crystal display screen). Since the liquid crystal display screen has a low degree of superiority in the evaluation criterion 1, it is difficult to make "Fujimaru-kun" of the first identification information stand out as long as it is displayed here. However, for Case i where the first identification information "Fujimaru-kun" and the second identification information "Fujishoji" are displayed on the same liquid crystal display screen, the size should be "Fujimaru-kun">"Fujishoji". So, it is possible to make it stand out, albeit slightly.

(13. Other configuration examples)
As another configuration example for solving the above-mentioned problems of the other embodiments 1 to 8, the configuration and its effect will be described below.

(1) The contents substantially the same as the identification information arranged on the board surface are also displayed on the display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device).
(1-1)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which a "warning (warning) display" is placed at a position that can be seen by the player
The warning display is arranged above and / or below the display means, and
While the symbol is stopped, the display means is displayed with substantially the same content as the warning display.

As a result, while the warning display is always visibly displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and during demonstration production and big hits. By displaying the warning display on the display means (at the end of a big hit, etc.), it is possible to urge the player to give a stronger warning (warning). In addition, when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the design is not changing as much as possible so as not to reduce the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (when the detection sensor detects it), the warning display is displayed on the display means even if the design is changing. You may.

(1-2)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which the "function name display" is placed at a position that the player can see.
The function name display is arranged in the game area and
A display indicating that the function pointed to by the function name is effective is displayed on the display means.

As a result, "○○ mode (probability change, small hit rush, etc.)" is described on the game board surface and / or the game machine frame, so that the player can perform the function (probability change, small hit rush, etc.) on the game machine. It is possible to recognize the existence of, and the function is actually enabled (or this display) by displaying "○○ mode entry (probability change entry, small hit rush entry)" by the display means. It has the effect of making it recognizable (which will be effective thereafter).

(1-3)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which a "performance display" is placed at a position visible to the player
The performance display is a performance display indicating that it has a setting function, and also
The performance display is displayed on the display means at a predetermined timing.

As a result, while the performance display is always visibly displayed on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement. Further, by displaying the performance display on the display means at a predetermined timing (for example, during a demonstration effect, during a symbol change, during a big hit, etc.), the performance (performance display indicating that the player has a setting function) can be easily transmitted to the player. ..

When displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the performance display is more detailed than the performance display arranged other than the display means. For example, when only "with setting function" is displayed other than the display means, "with 6-step setting function" corresponds to the display means.

Furthermore, when "with setting function" is directly displayed in addition to the display means, the display means indirectly "increases the expectation of high setting when a specific notice appears" by displaying information. You may tell that it has a setting function. In both cases of direct or indirect display, when the player notices that the game machine has the performance only when the display of the display means is seen, the player is placed on the game board surface thereafter. It can be said that the effect of the above configuration is that it becomes a lead wire such as noticing the performance display or checking the model guide installed in the store or the booklet created and distributed by the game machine manufacturer.

(1-4)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which an "intellectual property-related display" is placed at a position visible to the player
The intellectual property-related display is a display related to the use of music and is also a display.
At least at the timing when the corresponding music is played, the intellectual property-related display is displayed on the display means.

As a result, while the intellectual property-related display is always visibly displayed on the game board surface or the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement. Furthermore, the rights processing is appropriate for the player by displaying the intellectual property-related display on the display means at the timing when the corresponding music is played (not only during playback but also immediately before and / or immediately after playback). It becomes easier to convey what is being done in.

In addition, when displaying on the display means, the performance display may be more detailed than the performance display arranged other than the display means. For example, if only "license number 123456" is displayed other than the display means, the display means may be "song name AIUEO, license number 123456", or other lyricist information or composer information may be displayed. May be good. This makes it easier for the player to know what the target indicated by the intellectual property-related display placed on the game board is.

If the content indicated by the intellectual property-related display is not a license for one song but a comprehensive license for two or more songs, the intellectual property-related display is displayed when all the songs are played. If it is displayed on the means, there is a risk that the information will be excessive (the player feels uncomfortable).

(2) The contents substantially the same as the identification information arranged on the board surface are displayed on the liquid crystal in substantially the same font.
(2-1)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which the "model name display" is placed at a position that the player can see
The model name display is arranged above the display means and
The display means displays substantially the same contents as the model name display in substantially the same font.

As a result, since the title logo and the font of the model name display displayed on the display means are the same, it is possible to unify the model name (especially the image recalled from the model name) (to convey a unified image). it can). If this is not done, the player will have a firm idea of what kind of image the model is, such as the title logo is a pop and fun image, and the model name display by the display means is decaying and is about to collapse. It may not be possible to grasp.

(2-2)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which the "function name display" is placed at a position that the player can see.
The function name display is arranged in the game area and
It is displayed in substantially the same font that the function pointed to by the function name is valid for the display means.

As a result, "○○ mode (probability change, small hit rush, etc.)" is described on the game board surface and / or the game machine frame, so that the player can perform the function (probability change, small hit rush, etc.) on the game machine. It is possible to recognize the existence of, and the function is actually enabled (or this) by displaying "○○ mode rush (probability change rush, small hit rush rush)" in the display means. It has the effect of making it possible to recognize that (it becomes effective after the display). In addition to this effect, it is possible to unify the function names (especially the image recalled from the function name) (it is possible to convey a unified image).

(2-3)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which an "intellectual property-related display" is placed at a position visible to the player
The intellectual property-related display is placed in the game area and
The intellectual property-related display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font.

As a result, while the intellectual property-related display is always visibly displayed on the game board surface or the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement. In addition, the intellectual property-related indication (for example, "license number 123456") is written on the game board and / or the game machine frame, so that the player can tell that the game machine has been properly processed. It is recognizable.

In addition, when displaying on the display means, the performance display may be more detailed than the performance display arranged other than the display means. For example, if only "license number 123456" is displayed other than the display means, the display means may be "song name AIUEO, license number 123456", or other lyricist information or composer information may be displayed. May be good. This makes it easier for the player to know what the target indicated by the intellectual property-related display placed on the game board is.

If the license is not for one song but for two or more songs, displaying the intellectual property-related display on the display means when playing all the songs will result in information overload (game). Since there is a risk that the person may feel uncomfortable), it may be displayed only at a predetermined timing (during a demonstration production or at the start of a big hit, for example).

Then, in performing these displays, the intellectual property-related display arranged in addition to the display means and the intellectual property-related display displayed on the display means are set to the same font, so that both are marked with the same type. It is easy to tell that it is a chapter and that the objects are the same.

(2-4)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which a "warning display (warning display)" is placed at a position that the player can see
The warning display is arranged in the game area and
The warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font.

As a result, while the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and during the demonstration production and big hits ( By displaying the warning display on the display means at the end of the big hit, etc.), it is possible to urge the player to give a stronger warning (warning).

In addition, when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the design is not changing as much as possible so as not to reduce the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (when the detection sensor detects it), the warning display is displayed on the display means even if the design is changing. You may.

Then, in performing these displays, by making the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means the same font, both are marks of the same type, and the target thereof. It is easy to tell that is the same thing.

(2-5)
Equipped with display means
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to the player.
The first warning content common to the first warning display and the second warning content common to the second warning display are displayed on the display means at substantially the same font as each warning display at different timings.

As a result, while the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and during the demonstration production and big hits ( By displaying the warning display on the display means at the end of the big hit, etc.), it is possible to urge the player to give a stronger warning (warning).

In addition, when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the design is not changing as much as possible so as not to reduce the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (when the detection sensor detects it), the warning display is displayed on the display means even if the design is changing. You may.

Then, in performing these displays, by making the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means the same font, both are marks of the same type, and the target thereof. It is easy to tell that is the same thing.

(2-6)
Equipped with display means
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to the player.
The first warning content common to the first warning display is displayed on the display means at a predetermined timing in substantially the same font as the first warning display.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the second warning content common to the second warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font as the second warning display.

As a result, while the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and during the demonstration production and big hits ( By displaying the warning display on the display means at the end of the big hit, etc.), it is possible to urge the player to give a stronger warning (warning).

In addition, when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the design is not changing as much as possible so as not to reduce the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (when the detection sensor detects it), the warning display is displayed on the display means even if the design is changing. You may.

Then, in performing these displays, by making the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means the same font, both are marks of the same type, and the target thereof. It is easy to tell that is the same thing.

(3) The contents substantially the same as the identification information arranged on the board surface are displayed on the liquid crystal in different fonts.
(3-1)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which an "intellectual property-related display" is placed at a position visible to the player
The intellectual property-related display is arranged above and / or below the display means, and
The display means displays substantially the same content as the intellectual property-related display in different fonts.

As a result, while the intellectual property-related display is always visible on the game board and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and during the demonstration production. By displaying the warning display on the display means during the big hit (at the end of the big hit, etc.), a clear manifestation of intention (indication that appropriate intellectual property hair processing has been performed) is given to the player. Can be done. In addition, by using a different font when displaying by the display means, while displaying in so-called standard characters when displaying on the game board etc., it can be highlighted by the display means or requested by the intellectual property right holder (in the designated font). It becomes possible to satisfy the display). On the contrary, the display by the display means may be displayed in standard characters.

(3-2)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which a "warning (warning) display" is placed at a position that can be seen by the player
The warning display is arranged above and / or below the display means, and
The warning content common to the warning display is displayed on the display means in a font different from the warning display.

As a result, the warning display (warning display) is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, but the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and further, a demonstration effect is produced. By displaying the warning display on the display means during the middle or big hit (at the end of the big hit, etc.), a clear manifestation of intention (indication that appropriate intellectual property hair processing has been performed) is given to the player. It can be carried out. In addition, by using a different font when displaying by the display means, while displaying in so-called standard characters when displaying on the game board etc., it can be highlighted by the display means or requested by the intellectual property right holder (in the designated font). It becomes possible to satisfy the display). On the contrary, it may be displayed in standard characters when displayed by the display means.

(3-3)
Equipped with display means
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to the player.
At least the warning content common to the first warning display is displayed on the display means in a font different from that of the first warning display.

As a result, while the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and during the demonstration production and big hits ( By displaying the warning display on the display means at the end of the big hit, etc.), it is possible to urge the player to give a stronger warning (warning).

In addition, when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the design is not changing as much as possible so as not to reduce the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (when the detection sensor detects it), the warning display is displayed on the display means even if the design is changing. You may.

Then, in performing these displays, the warning display arranged in addition to the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means are set to different fonts so that the display means emphasizes the display to the player. Is possible.

In addition, if all of the warning displays are displayed on the display means, the player may feel that the warning display is more than necessary, but in the above configuration, the necessary warning display is performed. , Does not give the player more discomfort than necessary.

(3-3)
Equipped with display means
In a gaming machine in which the "first warning display" and the "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to the player, at least the warning content common to the first warning display is a font different from the warning display. Is displayed on the display means.

As a result, while the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and during the demonstration production and big hits ( By displaying the warning display on the display means at the end of the big hit, etc.), it is possible to urge the player to give a stronger warning (warning).

In addition, when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the design is not changing as much as possible so as not to reduce the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (when the detection sensor detects it), the warning display is displayed on the display means even if the design is changing. You may.

Then, in performing these displays, the warning display arranged in addition to the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means are set to different fonts so that the display means emphasizes the display to the player. Is possible.

(3-4)
Equipped with display means
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to the player, the first warning content common to the first warning display and the second warning display are common. The content of the second warning is displayed on the display means at different timings from each warning display in substantially the same font.

As a result, while the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and during the demonstration production and big hits ( By displaying the warning display on the display means at the end of the big hit, etc.), it is possible to urge the player to give a stronger warning (warning).

Then, since the first warning content and the second warning content are displayed at different timings, the player can be notified at the timing corresponding to the warning content, so that more appropriate alerting can be performed. In addition, when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the design is not changing as much as possible so as not to reduce the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (when the detection sensor detects it), the warning display is displayed on the display means even if the design is changing. You may.

Then, in performing these displays, the warning display arranged in addition to the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means are set to different fonts so that the display means emphasizes the display to the player. Is possible.

(3-5)
Equipped with display means
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to the player.
The first warning content common to the first warning display is displayed on the display means at a predetermined timing in substantially the same font as the first warning display.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the second warning content common to the second warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same font as the second warning display.

As a result, while the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and during the demonstration production and big hits ( By displaying the warning display on the display means at the end of the big hit, etc.), it is possible to urge the player to give a stronger warning (warning).

Then, while the first warning content displays a warning display at a predetermined timing, the second warning content displays a warning if the predetermined conditions are not satisfied (unless fraudulent acts corresponding to the warning content are performed). Since it is not affected, it is possible to prevent the player from being unnecessarily uncomfortable by displaying a warning display more than necessary.

In addition, when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the design is not changing as much as possible so as not to reduce the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (when the detection sensor detects it), the warning display is displayed on the display means even if the design is changing. You may.

Then, in performing these displays, the warning display arranged in addition to the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means are set to different fonts so that the display means emphasizes the display to the player. Is possible.

(4) The contents substantially the same as the identification information arranged on the board surface are displayed on the liquid crystal in substantially the same arrangement.
(4-1)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which the "model name display" is placed at a position that the player can see
The model name display is arranged above the display means and
The display means displays substantially the same contents as the model name display in substantially the same arrangement.

As a result, since the arrangement of the model name display displayed on the title logo and the display means is the same, it is possible to unify the model names (especially the image recalled from the model name) (to convey a unified image). it can). If this is not done, the title logo will be written horizontally in one line, and the model name will be displayed vertically in two columns by the display means, so that the image of the copyright that is the basis of the model cannot be conveyed correctly, or incorrect recognition will be planted. There is a risk that it will end up.

(4-2)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which "Other display (company catch phrase, etc.)" is placed at a position visible to the player
The other display is arranged in the game area and
The display means is displayed with substantially the same contents as the other display (company catch phrase, etc.) in substantially the same arrangement.

As a result, since the arrangement of the company catch phrase displayed on the game board and / or the game machine frame and the company catch phrase displayed on the display means are the same, the company catch phrase (especially the image recalled from the model name) Can be unified (can convey a unified image). If this is not done, what kind of image does the company have, such as the company catch phrase on the board side (frame side) is a pop and fun image, and the display by the display means is decaying and is about to collapse at any moment? May not be accurately communicated to the player.

(4-3)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which an "intellectual property-related display" is placed at a position visible to the player
The intellectual property-related display is placed in the game area and
The intellectual property-related indications are displayed on the display means in substantially the same arrangement.

As a result, while the intellectual property-related display is always visibly displayed on the game board surface or the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement. In addition, the intellectual property-related indication (for example, "license number 123456") is written on the game board and / or the game machine frame, so that the player can tell that the game machine has been properly processed. It is recognizable.

In addition, when displaying on the display means, the performance display may be more detailed than the performance display arranged other than the display means. For example, if only "license number 123456" is displayed other than the display means, the display means may be "song name AIUEO, license number 123456", or other lyricist information or composer information may be displayed. May be good. This makes it easier for the player to know what the target indicated by the intellectual property-related display placed on the game board is.

If the license is not for one song but for two or more songs, displaying the intellectual property-related display on the display means when playing all the songs will result in information overload (game). Since there is a risk that the person may feel uncomfortable), it may be displayed only at a predetermined timing (during a demonstration production or at the start of a big hit, for example).

Then, in performing these displays, the intellectual property-related display arranged in addition to the display means and the intellectual property-related display displayed on the display means are arranged in the same arrangement, so that both are marked with the same type. It is easy to understand that it is a chapter and its objects indicate the same thing.

(2-4)
Equipped with display means
In a game machine in which a "warning display (warning display)" is placed at a position that the player can see
The warning display is arranged in the game area and
The warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same arrangement.

As a result, while the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and during the demonstration production and big hits ( By displaying the warning display on the display means at the end of the big hit, etc.), it is possible to urge the player to give a stronger warning (warning).

In addition, when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the design is not changing as much as possible so as not to reduce the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (when the detection sensor detects it), the warning display is displayed on the display means even if the design is changing. You may.

Then, in performing these displays, by arranging the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means in the same array, both are marks of the same type, and the target thereof. It is easy to tell that is the same thing.

(2-5)
Equipped with display means
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to the player.
The first warning content common to the first warning display and the second warning content common to the second warning display are displayed on the display means in substantially the same arrangement as each warning display at different timings.

As a result, while the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and during the demonstration production and big hits ( By displaying the warning display on the display means at the end of the big hit, etc.), it is possible to urge the player to give a stronger warning (warning).

In addition, when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the design is not changing as much as possible so as not to reduce the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (when the detection sensor detects it), the warning display is displayed on the display means even if the design is changing. You may.

Then, in performing these displays, by arranging the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means in the same array, both are marks of the same type, and the target thereof. It is easy to tell that is the same thing.

(2-6)
Equipped with display means
In a gaming machine in which a "first warning display" and a "second warning display" are arranged at positions visible to the player.
The first warning content common to the first warning display is displayed on the display means at a predetermined timing in substantially the same font as the first warning display.
When a predetermined condition is satisfied, the second warning content common to the second warning display is displayed on the display means in substantially the same arrangement as the second warning display.

As a result, while the warning display is always visible on the game board surface and the game machine frame, the minimum display size does not extremely hinder the degree of freedom of placement, and during the demonstration production and big hits ( By displaying the warning display on the display means at the end of the big hit, etc.), it is possible to urge the player to give a stronger warning (warning).

In addition, when displaying on the display means, it is preferable that the design is not changing as much as possible so as not to reduce the interest of the player. However, if the content indicated by the warning display (content that vibration, magnetism, radio waves, etc. are not used) occurs (when the detection sensor detects it), the warning display is displayed on the display means even if the design is changing. You may.

Then, in performing these displays, by arranging the warning display arranged other than the display means and the warning display displayed on the display means in the same array, both are marks of the same type, and the target thereof. It is easy to tell that is the same thing.

(5) Do not arrange the main marks separately.
(5-1)
In a gaming machine in which the first mark (model name) and the second mark (warning display) are placed at positions that can be seen by the player.
The first mark is displayed on one line without wrapping, and the second mark is displayed on two or more lines without wrapping.

This prevents the mark that has a fixed image such as the model name from being folded back at a strange place and spoiling the image, and is displayed by folding back if there is no fixed image such as a warning display. This makes it possible to increase the degree of freedom of placement.

(5-2)
In a gaming machine in which the first mark (model name as a structure) and the second mark (model name as a printed matter) are arranged at positions that can be visually recognized by the player.
The first mark was arranged in parallel in front view, and the second mark was arranged diagonally in front view.

As a result, even if the mark has the same content (model name in the above example), it is displayed while preventing an incorrect image from being given when the mark has a large display size and is arranged diagonally or in a zigzag pattern. It is possible to increase the degree of freedom of placement by displaying a mark with a small size diagonally.

(6) Do not let the main marks emit light separately.
(6-1)
In a gaming machine in which the first mark (model name) and the second mark (other than the model name) are placed at positions that can be seen by the player.
At least the first mark is configured so that the light emission mode can be changed.
At least in the first period (when the symbol is stopped and the demonstration effect is not occurring), the entire first mark is made to emit light in the same system color (in the second period, it may be emitted separately).

As a result, at the timing when the player is likely to be away from the seat (in other words, the timing when the player who is searching for the game machine sees) that the symbol is stopped, the model name is made into a unified light emitting mode. As a result, it does not appear that a part of the model name is missing (turns off, lights in different colors, blinks in different patterns), so that the risk of giving the player an incorrect impression or incorrect information can be reduced. On the other hand, for marks that are not model names, it is possible to enhance the effect of attracting players by prioritizing the effect as a light emitting means over the identification function as a mark.

(6-2)
In a gaming machine in which the first mark (model name) and the second mark (other than the model name) are placed at positions that can be seen by the player.
At least the first mark is configured so that the light emission mode can be changed.
At least the first period (during the symbol stopped in the low accuracy state) is the light emitting mode in the first system color, and the second period (during the symbol stopped in the high accuracy state) is the light emitting mode in the second system color. The entire mark is made to emit light with the same system color.

As a result, in the model name, a part of the model name is missing (off, with a different color) by making the light emission mode unified at least while the symbol is stopped in both the normal game and the probabilistic game. Since it does not appear to be lit or blinking in a different pattern, the risk of giving the player a false impression or false information can be reduced. Further, by making the light emitting mode different between the normal game and the probabilistic game, the player or the clerk can easily determine the game state.

(7) Make the main marks stand out.
(7-1)
In a gaming machine in which the first mark (main title of the model name) and the second mark (subtitle of the model name) are placed at a position visible to the player.
The first mark is a three-dimensional mark (logo accessory, etc.), and the second mark is a flat mark (printed matter, etc.).

As a result, of the two (or more) marks, at least the first mark is more prominent than the second mark, so that the player can make the second mark a special mark (above). In the example, the risk of misunderstanding that it is the subject of the model name) can be reduced.

(7-2)
In a gaming machine in which the first mark (model name) and the second mark (function name) are placed at positions that can be seen by the player.
The second mark can emit light as a whole, but cannot emit light individually to illuminate only one character.
The first mark is capable of overall light emission, and individual light emission that illuminates only one character is also possible. (The first mark may be separated by character, and the second mark may not be separated by character.)

As a result, of the two (or more) marks, at least the first mark is more prominent than the second mark, so that the player can make the second mark a special mark (above). In the example, the risk of misunderstanding that it is the subject of the model name) can be reduced.

(8) Make the caution mark inconspicuous.
(8-1)
The first mark (mark that is troublesome if it is judged to correspond to trademark use) and the second mark (mark that does not matter if it is judged to correspond to trademark use) are located at a position that can be seen by the player. In the placed game machine
The first mark is configured to be able to transition between an easy-to-see state (or a visible state) and a difficult-to-see state (or an invisible state), and the proportion of the difficult-to-see state is higher at least when the symbol is stopped. I made it.

As a result, of the two (or more) marks, at least the first mark is more prominent than the second mark, so that the player can make the second mark a special mark (above). In the example, the risk of misunderstanding that it is the subject of the model name) can be reduced.

(8-2)
The first mark (mark that is troublesome if it is judged to correspond to trademark use) and the second mark (mark that does not matter if it is judged to correspond to trademark use) are located at a position that can be seen by the player. In the placed game machine
The first mark is placed in a display size that is at least smaller than the second mark, and
At a predetermined timing, the display means is displayed in a size larger than the size arranged on the board surface.

As a result, of the two (or more) marks, at least the first mark is more prominent than the second mark, so that the player can make the second mark a special mark (above). In the example, the risk of misunderstanding that it is the subject of the model name) can be reduced.

In addition, the above-mentioned "(5-3: configuration example 1 of another embodiment 5)", "(5-4: configuration example 2 of another embodiment 5)", "(6-2: configuration of another embodiment 6)" Example) ”,“ (9: Configuration examples of the other embodiments 7 and 8) ”, and“ (13. Other configuration examples) ”have display means (image display means, light emitting means, etc.). For the thing, the information about the setting suggestion may be displayed as at least a part of the identification information (whether the first identification information or the second identification information) displayed on the display means.
When each character of "Fujimaru-kun" constituting the model name logo 1090 is lit or blinking in the same color or different colors, the component of interest among each character of "Fujimaru-kun" (for example, "Maru") , "Kun"), when a specific color is developed, for example, blue indicates setting 6 confirmation suggestion, red indicates high setting (setting 4 or more) confirmation suggestion, and green indicates setting 1 negative suggestion. As a result, the first identification information and / or the second identification information may also serve as a setting suggestion effect. It should be noted that the first identification information and / or the second identification information are written together in a certain time scale (specific game period: during symbol change, jackpot game, waiting for customers, etc.) at the same time. , Duplicate, overlapping, complex display), setting suggestion effect may appear.

<13. Another Embodiment 9, FIGS. 80 to 81>
(13-1: Background)

Conventionally, various game machines such as a bullet game machine, a rotating body type game machine, an arrange ball, and a sparrow ball game machine are widely known. Various game consoles are manufactured by multiple manufacturers, and the series model names that have been given to multiple models for many years, such as "Mr. XX", and typical scenes that suggest models are given and provided. It is juxtaposed on the island facility.

Among these game machines, those equipped with a so-called "setting function" capable of setting the expected value of the profit given to the player in a plurality of stages are known (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-26756). .. In the current hall, ball game machines equipped with this "setting function" and game machines not equipped with this "setting function" are mixed. Therefore, it is important for the player to know what the "model name" of the game machine is as a clue to determine whether or not the ball game machine is equipped with the "setting function" in the hall.

As a method of assigning the model name of the ball game machine to the game machine so that the player can see it, for example, as described in another embodiment above, for example, "Fujimaru-kun" is provided on the front frame 1010 (FIG. 35B, FIG. 69 to 72), "Fujimaru-kun", "○○ teacher" and the like are provided on the game board surface (FIG. 35C, FIG. 66 to FIG. 67, FIG. 73).

However, since there are many model names for each type of ball game machine, it may be difficult to determine whether or not the ball game machine is equipped with a "setting function" only from the model name. For this reason, when searching for a game console with the desired model name in the hall, including determining whether or not it is equipped with a "setting function", it takes time to find the desired game console in the hall. It was not uncommon to search around. In addition, even if the desired game console installation location is remembered once in the hall, once the game consoles are rearranged, it takes time to find the desired model name game console again.

Therefore, it is desired to provide a game machine in which it is easy to identify whether or not the game machine is equipped with a "setting function" when it is installed in a hall, and it is easy to find a desired game table. ing.

(13-2: Regarding the addition of setting machine information, FIGS. 80 to 81)
FIG. 80 illustrates an embodiment in which the setting machine information 1081 is added to the game machine. Here, the "setting machine information" is information for identifying whether or not the game machine is equipped with a setting function, and is a character, a figure, a symbol, a three-dimensional shape, a combination thereof, or a combination thereof and a color. Identification information consisting of a combination (mark of Article 2 of the Trademark Law).

In FIG. 80, "composite identification information" obtained by adding the setting machine information 1081 to the model name 1080 is handled. Specifically, as shown in an enlarged manner in FIG. 81 (a), this compound identification information is provided by the setting machine following the last character "n" in the character string constituting "Fujimaru-kun" of the model name 1080. The setting machine mark 1081a "." Is added as information, and the composite identification information "Fujimaru-kun." Is configured as a whole.

In FIG. 80, the composite identification information “Fujimaru-kun.” Is provided on the front surface 1011a of the foil upper part of the front frame 1010. However, it may be provided at another place on the front frame 1010, or may be provided on the surface of the game board.

With reference to FIG. 81 (a), the compound identification information "Fujimaru-kun." Includes the model name information and the setting machine information, but the setting machine information is the setting machine mark "." And the model name information. The size is smaller than that of "Fujimaru-kun", and it is only added at the end of the character string of "Fujimaru-kun", so the existence of "Fujimaru-kun" is selfish in terms of size and number of characters. The degree of appeal is getting stronger. Therefore, the player can recognize that "Fujimaru-kun" is the model name. In addition, those who know that "." Is a setting machine mark indicating that it is a game machine equipped with a setting function can set the setting function by adding the setting machine mark "." To the model name. It can be identified as a game machine equipped with.

In FIG. 81 (b), following the last character "n" in the character string constituting "Fujimaru-kun" of the model name 1080, six circle-shaped dots are arranged in an F shape as setting machine information 1081. This is an example in which the setting machine mark 1081b consisting of the logo (hereinafter abbreviated as "F") is added and configured as the composite identification information "Fujimaru-kun F" as a whole. The size of the logo "F" is the same as the character string of the model name "Fujimaru-kun", but it is composed of stylized F, that is, symbols instead of letters, and both are recognized as different components at first glance. can do. Because of this difference, the player can understand that "Fujimaru-kun" is the model name. In addition, those who know that the logo "F" is a setting machine mark indicating that it is a gaming machine equipped with a setting function must have the logo "F" of the setting machine mark 1081b added to the model name. Therefore, it can be identified as a game machine equipped with a setting function.

In the example shown in FIGS. 81 (a) and 81 (b), in the composite identification information "Fujimaru-kun F", the setting machine marks 1081a and 1081b are composed of white dots, but they are displayed in the same color as the model name 1080. May be good.

(Confirmation of setting suggestion effect: FIGS. 82 to 91)
Next, various setting suggestion effects will be described. We have already explained what the "setting suggestion effect" is, but in the following, we will explain it with more specific examples. As the effect means for executing the setting suggestion, any of the various effect means described in the above "<6. Effect means>" can be used, but here, the display means closely related to the present invention. The explanation will focus on the setting suggestion effect using the light emitting means.

In addition, the "first mark (for example, model name, figure or illustration of the main character)" provided on the game board surface and / or the game machine frame explained most recently, or the second mark displayed on the display means. It is quite possible that (the same or similar mark as the first mark or a completely different mark) may also be used for the setting suggestion effect. Therefore, in the following, while explaining the setting suggestion effect, the relationship between the setting suggestion effect and various marks will also be explained.

(Task)
Most of the timings when the setting suggestion effect is executed are during the game (during the symbol variation display game or the hit game), and when the setting suggestion effect appears, it can be confirmed (recognized) first. Naturally, it is a player who is playing a game on that platform. However, the following problems may occur if the setting suggestion effect is only displayed during the game.

(1) As the first problem, unlike slot machines, pachinko game machines (ball game machines) are controlled by the game machine side, rather than the progress of the game being performed at the player's own pace. Specifically, in the case of a slot machine, one game can be ended at the convenience of the player, in which the player hits the start lever at the convenience of the player to start the game, and then the player freely presses the stop button to end the game. it can. On the other hand, in the case of a bullet game machine, a fluctuation pattern is selected when a prize is won in the start port, and the fluctuation time related to the fluctuation pattern is determined as the execution time of one game, so that the game starts and ends. The player side cannot intervene for the period of, and it is entirely left to the game machine side. That is, in the case of a ball game machine, unlike a slot machine, the game cannot be ended due to the convenience of the player, and the time schedule related to the progress of the game is controlled by the game machine side. What this means is that most of the setting suggestion effects are controlled by the game machine side at both the start timing and the end timing of their appearance (execution). Therefore, for example, it is quite possible that the setting suggestion effect ends while the player is distracted by the effect of the next table and makes extra observations, or while playing with the mobile phone.

(2) As a second problem, a person who starts the game after the execution of the setting suggestion effect, for example, a predecessor who was playing at the time of executing the setting suggestion effect, finishes the game and then takes turns playing the game. The player (successor) who starts has no way of knowing the content of the setting suggestion effect issued by the predecessor.

(Solution)
As a solution to the above problem (problem), there is "extension (addition) of the appearance period of advantageous information" called setting suggestion effect (information about set value). This will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 82 to 85.

(A) to (C) of FIG. 82 are examples of effects during a certain symbol variation display game, and (D) to (F) are examples of effects during the next symbol variation display game (G). ) To (K) show an example of the effect of waiting after the end of the symbol variation display game (“demo start waiting effect”, “customer waiting effect (demo effect (demo screen))”). In FIG. 82, a background effect and a plurality of notice effects related to the effect mode actually appear, but the illustration is omitted for convenience of explanation. Further, for convenience of explanation, the "design variation display game" may be abbreviated as "symbol variation display" or "symbol variation".

With reference to FIG. 82, after the symbol variation display of this time (first time) is started (FIG. (A)), the specific character (Fujimaru-kun) 901 performs a halo effect (halo display) during the symbol variation display. ) 902 (Fig. (B): "Aureola effect 902 + specific character 901"). Here, this effect will be described as "setting 6 (highest setting) final effect" that belongs to the above "setting N final effect". After that, the symbol variation display game execution period (variation time) has elapsed, and the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at "357" indicating a lost symbol (FIG. (C)).

Subsequently, the operation holding ball is digested, and the next (second) symbol variation display is started (Fig. (D)). In this example, at the start of the next symbol variation display, the "halo effect 902" that appeared in the previous symbol variation and the small specific character 901a are displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. The specific character 901a is, for example, a reduced version of the specific character 901 that appeared in the previous symbol variation display game (so-called chibi character conversion, super deformation (registered trademark), etc.), and is used as the specific character 901. It is displayed as a related image (an effect display that appears in response to the appearance of a specific setting suggestion effect).

Such a halo effect 902 and the specific character 901a work as a "specific effect (execution confirmation effect)" capable of recognizing (confirming) the execution of the setting suggestion effect. Here, as shown in FIGS. (E) to (F), the halo effect 902 ends immediately, but the display of the specific character 901a on the upper right of the screen is displayed both during the subsequent symbol variation display and when the symbol variation is stopped. continuing. That is, when the setting suggestion effect is executed during the symbol variation display, the display mode is such that the execution of the setting suggestion effect can be recognized (confirmed) after the symbol variation display is completed. Further, when the setting suggestion effect is executed during the symbol variation display, the display mode is such that the execution of the setting suggestion effect can be recognized after the symbol variation display is completed and while the symbol variation is stopped.

After that, as shown in FIG. (F), the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed at the random number of "634", and the result of the symbol variation display game is "missing". In this example, in this (second) symbol variation display game, all the existing operation hold balls are digested and the operation hold balls become zero (FIGS. (A), (E) to (F). (Refer to the hold icon in the hold display area 76), it is assumed that the stand is vacant as it is.

(About the display of a specific character on the menu screen: FIGS. 82 (G) (H) (I))
With the decorative symbol "634" lost, the symbol remains stopped (while waiting for the demo to start), and the game console is left for a while (a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) elapses from the symbol stopped state). And / or when a predetermined time has elapsed in a state where the game ball is not fired (touch sensor non-detection state) while the symbol is stopped), as shown in Fig. (G), "Menu screen display →" The menu displayable notification effect 905 including the character display and the button image appears, and when the effect button 13 is operated, the notification that the menu screen (game setting screen) can be opened is started. When the player operates the effect button 13 in this state, a "menu screen" as shown in FIG. (H) is displayed, and various game environment settings can be selected. At this time, the specific character 901a is not. It becomes a display. That is, when a predetermined operation is performed by the operating means by the player under predetermined conditions (for example, during the period before the start of waiting for customers or during the effect of waiting for customers), the specific effect is not executed. (Hide, non-notification), and the execution of the setting suggestion effect becomes unrecognizable (unconfirmable). In short, when the execution of the setting suggestion effect is recognizable while the symbol fluctuation is stopped, the operating means When the predetermined operation is performed by, the execution of the setting suggestion effect is unrecognizable. This means that if the specific effect is displayed indiscriminately, the display becomes an obstacle. This is because it is considered that there are cases. Since the period during which the execution of the setting suggestion effect cannot be confirmed (the specific effect is temporarily not executed) and the game situation often differ depending on the game playability, it is appropriate. You just have to decide.

The "menu screen" shown in FIG. (H) can be set by various game environments (for example, volume setting, light amount setting, effect mode setting) by operating means (effect button 13 and cross key 75). Is shown as an example of the menu items displayed on the game setting screen that can be selected as the player's favorite setting. Here, as an example of the menu screen, an enemy character to appear in the current production mode is selected. An example is shown in which various items such as "character selection", "volume adjustment", "light intensity adjustment", "BGM selection", and "return (end of menu screen)" are displayed. By operating the direction keys 75, the cursor (arrow, index) 907 moves up and down, and the menu item that the player wants to set can be selected. With the cursor 905 pointing to the menu item, the game When a person presses the effect button 13, the menu item can be determined.

For example, when the item "character selection" in the menu screen shown in FIG. (H) is selected, the "character selection screen" as shown in FIG. (I) is displayed. On this character selection screen, a plurality of aliens 903 (characters unrelated to the setting suggestion effect) and an icon image 901b related to the specific character 901 or 901a (specific image related to the executed setting suggestion effect (specific effect). One)) is displayed, and the player who opens the menu screen can also know the execution of the setting suggestion effect, the type of the executed setting suggestion effect, the setting value information, and the like. Here, the specific character 901a, which was displayed small in the upper right corner of the screen, is displayed as an "icon", which is "a small picture for easy to specify and distinguish the target". By seeing this icon image 901b, the player can know the fact that the setting suggestion effect, which is the "setting 6 (highest setting) final effect", has appeared, that is, the set value of the game console is set. It can be known that the setting is the highest setting of 6.

Further, while the above menu screen is being displayed (here, the character selection screen), by moving the cursor 907 to the icon image 901b, specific game information related to the appearance status of the setting suggestion effect can be notified. May be good. As this "specific game information", for example, "numerical information (appearance number information)" such as how many times the setting suggestion effect has appeared, counting from today's power-on, and what the icon image means. Information on the setting suggestion effect such as whether to do it, that is, "set value information (suggestion information)" and the like may be configured to be identifiable. For example, a game can be played by displaying a balloon on the right side of the LCD screen, or by selecting and deciding an icon image by an operation means and displaying a separate screen (setting suggestion effect information screen) in the same way as a menu item selection decision. It is possible for a person to display the above-mentioned numerical information and suggestive information. In addition, the display and non-display of the icon image (continuation of display / end of display) may be selectable by operating the operation means in a predetermined procedure on the menu screen. Regarding the suggestion information to be displayed (notified), the suggestion content itself of "setting 6 is confirmed" suggested by the setting suggestion effect (here, setting 6 confirmed effect) may be displayed, but the information is ambiguous. For example, information such as easy selection (easy to appear) with setting 4 or higher, confirmation of setting 4 or higher, and the like may be displayed. Further, in the illustration, as an image (icon image 901b) related to the setting suggestion effect, only the specific character is iconified and displayed emphasized, but the alien character 903 may also be iconified and displayed.

Further, FIG. (I) shows an example in which only one icon image 901b as a specific effect is displayed on the liquid crystal screen, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the type of setting suggestion effect that has appeared is not limited to this. It is possible to configure so that "multiple types of specific effects (specific images)" can be displayed according to the above. In other words, "multiple setting suggestion effects that appeared in the past appear at the same time" (to be exact, specific effects related to the setting suggestion effects that appeared in the past appear at the same time), (The same applies to FIGS. 83 to 84 described later).

Such a display can be said to be a display mode that is useful when a player guesses a setting or selects a game table. However, since the display area is limited, when many display types are provided, a specific image (in a non-display state) that cannot be displayed on the screen by a display method such as scroll display using an operation means is used. A specific image) may be displayed, or a sub liquid crystal display device (for example, a liquid crystal display device for displaying a menu screen) may be provided and displayed on the sub liquid crystal display device (the display method is not particularly limited). Further, although the specific character 901b is displayed as an icon, the display mode thereof is not particularly limited, and for example, the same or similar character as the specific character 901a may be displayed. Further, in this example, the specific character is displayed in the character selection screen, but it may be configured to be displayed in another one or a plurality of other menu items. Further, the display of a plurality of types of specific images (specific effects) is not limited to the specific menu items (character selection screen) shown in FIG. (I), but is displayed in the symbol variation display or in the demo screen (FIGS. (E) to (). It is also possible during the period such as (K)). Also in this case, a plurality of types of specific effects can be displayed by using a scroll display, a sub liquid crystal display device, or the like (the same applies to FIGS. 83 to 85 described later).

Further, FIG. (G) shows an example in which the specific character 901a is continuously displayed even after the second symbol variation display is completed, but when the operation holding ball is zero, the symbol variation display is terminated. After that, the specific character 901a may be temporarily erased from the screen. As the erasing timing, for example, at the end of the symbol variation display, at a predetermined timing before the start of the customer waiting effect (during the demo start waiting effect) (for example, at the start of the menu displayable notification effect 905), the customer waiting effect starts. For example, after a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has elapsed from the previous state. In this case, the specific character 901a is the customer waiting effect shown in the above menu screen (FIG. (H)), when a specific menu item is selected and determined (FIG. (I)), or in FIGS. (J) (K) described later. It can be displayed (redisplayed) in the middle (during the demo screen).

(About the display of a specific character on the demo screen (during customer waiting production): Fig. 82 (G) (J) (K))
Returning to the explanation of FIG. 82 (G), when the symbol is left as it is in the symbol stop state (after the symbol variation display game ends), as described above, a predetermined condition (for example, "a predetermined time (for example, 180 seconds) from the symbol stop)" The "demo screen (demo movie)" is started on the assumption that "is elapsed" and / or "the symbol is stopped and the non-detection state by the touch sensor elapses for a predetermined time (for example, 60 seconds)". Figure (J) illustrates a part of the first half of the demo movie, and Figure (K) illustrates a part of the second half of the demo movie. During the demo screen period, Figures (J) to (K) A series of demo movies of is repeatedly played and displayed to effectively appeal the appeal of the game console. In Fig. (J), the name display of the game machine ("CR Fujimaru-kun Senki") and the effect of multiple fighters (characters for the demo screen) flying around in the sky are displayed, and the specific character 901a is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. Is displayed. Further, in FIG. (K), the name of the game machine is displayed in a large size in the center of the screen, and the specific character 901a is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen. That is, it is possible to recognize the execution of the setting suggestion effect during the execution of the customer waiting demo effect (demo effect).

Here, the characteristic point is that the character for the demo screen (for example, the production in which a plurality of fighters fly around in the sky) appears on the demo screen display while the display of the specific character 901a is continued even if the demo screen display is started. For example, the display of the fighter group shown in FIG. (J) is not disturbed as much as possible (specific image save display means). It is preferable that the specific effect appears on the demo screen in this way because the player who is selecting the game table is informed of useful information (advantageous information) when selecting the game table. Is.

In the previous example (FIGS. 82 (D) to (F)), "character display + halo display (specific character A)" is performed during the symbol variation display, and "character display only (specific effect A)" is displayed during the demo screen display. ) ”Was to be performed. However, it is not necessarily limited to this display mode. For example, when "specific character A" or "specific character B (character display + character display)" is displayed as a setting suggestion effect during the symbol variation display, the next symbol variation is started or the next symbol variation is being displayed. Individual specific effects (specific effect A for specific character A, specific effect B for specific character B) may be executed at predetermined timings of the above, and in each case, "common specific effect" may be executed. You may execute "effect" (common specific effect C for both specific character A and specific character B).

In the case of the above-mentioned "common specific effect", it is preferable that the content suggested by the setting suggestion effect is similar to a certain level or higher. For example, if there is a "setting suggestion effect A" that is likely to be setting 1 (minimum setting) and a "setting suggestion effect B" that is likely to be setting 6 (highest setting), either setting suggestion is made. If a common specific effect (specific character) is executed after the effect is executed, it is not known at all whether the set value is "high or low", that is, the fact that the setting suggestion effect has appeared is notified. However, it means that information that is not useful as a setting guessing factor can be notified. Then, there is no point in performing a specific effect (execution confirmation effect).

Therefore, for example, the setting suggestion effect of "setting 6 confirmed" (setting N confirmed effect) and the setting suggestion effect of "setting 4 or more confirmed" (specific range suggestion effect) are narrowed down to "fixed system setting suggestion effect", and then. A specific effect (execution confirmation effect) may be executed. Specifically, among the setting suggestion effects of the definite system, the setting suggestion effects in which the intermediate setting areas (setting values 3 and 4) and above are fixed may be narrowed down, and preferably, the setting suggestion effects in which the high setting range is fixed may be narrowed down. (For example, setting N or more is confirmed (N = 4, 5) or setting N is confirmed (N = 4, 5, 6)), and then a specific effect is executed. More preferably, a high setting range is determined. Of the setting suggestion effects to be performed, the setting suggestion effects in which the setting 5 or higher is confirmed are narrowed down, and then the specific effects are executed. Further, paying attention to the viewpoint of the machine discount, the set value exceeding 100% of the machine discount may be determined.

When narrowing down to a specific setting suggestion effect as described above, there are two effects. The first effect is the simplification of the displayed contents by aggregating information. If a specific image is displayed indiscriminately according to the type of setting suggestion effect executed and the appearance of many setting suggestion effects is individually shown, the display area will be insufficient, and the displayed object will be complicated and more understandable. It becomes difficult. However, by appropriately aggregating and displaying the information, not only the appearance is neat, but also the setting suggestion effects of the same level are aggregated, which has the effect of increasing the accuracy of the information.

The second effect is the ambiguity of the setting suggestion content by aggregating the information. This "ambiguity of setting suggestion content" seems to go against the first effect of the former (increasing the accuracy of information), but it is not so. It will be described in detail below.

For example, in the first setting suggestion effect, "a production in which setting 4 or more is confirmed" appears, in the second setting suggestion effect, "a production with a high possibility of setting 5" appears, and in the third setting suggestion effect, "setting 1 is set." It is assumed that "a production to deny (setting 2 or more confirmed production)" has appeared. In this case, as a specific effect that aggregates the appearances of the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect as the same level effect, the "icon (specific effect) indicating that an effect with a high possibility of setting 4 or higher has appeared" is displayed. It is displayed, and it is possible to know that it has appeared twice on the menu screen.

However, the third setting suggestion effect "" effect that denies setting 1 "is not aggregated because they are not at the same level. The first effect of "increasing the accuracy of information" is that the effect with a high possibility of setting 4 or higher "appears twice". As a matter of course, the credibility as a setting guessing factor increases when it appears twice rather than once.

The second effect, "ambiguous setting suggestion content," was "setting 4 or higher" as a specific effect, even though "setting 4 or higher was confirmed" was shown in the first setting suggestion effect. This is the part where the icon is displayed.

As a result, the player (predecessor) who actually confirmed the first setting suggestion effect can recognize that "setting 4 or more is confirmed", while the player (successor) who has not confirmed the first setting suggestion effect. Person) can make a difference in the amount of information, such as being able to grasp only that "there is a high possibility of setting 4 or higher". In other words, the player who was able to confirm the setting suggestion effect (first advantageous information) with a high setting estimation element (in the above case, the predecessor who confirmed the confirmation of setting 4 or more) was able to clearly confirm the set value. This allows you to carry the game to your advantage.

On the other hand, a player who does not (in the above case, although the confirmation of setting 4 or more has not been confirmed, there is a high possibility of setting 4 or more (second advantage, which is less valuable as game information than the first advantage information). The successor) who was able to confirm that the information) may be more anxious than the predecessor in the game. This means that a player who can confirm a setting suggestion effect with a high setting guessing element can have useful information that only he / she can know, and a player who does not can actually confirm the setting suggestion effect. The above has the meaning of "equalizing the provision of information" by giving some useful information without giving information of equal value. By such "ambiguity of setting suggestion contents", it is possible to provide a difference in the amount of information between the former and the latter so as not to give a feeling of inequality or dissatisfaction.

If the above-mentioned "setting 6 confirmed effect" that deterministically notifies the maximum setting 6 appears even once, the "icon indicating the setting 6 confirmed" is displayed as a specific effect, and other icons are displayed thereafter. You may choose not to (count but not display, or not count in the first place). This is because when the maximum setting 6 is confirmed, there is no point in making other specific effects appear.

Further, from the viewpoint of "ambiguity of the setting suggestion content" described above, for the "setting 6 confirmation effect", for example, "the possibility of setting 5 is high" or "the possibility of setting 5 is high" without displaying the "icon indicating the setting 6 confirmation". By displaying an icon indicating "setting 4 (or 5) or more confirmed", only the player who can actually confirm the setting 6 confirmed effect can know that it is setting 6 as a privilege. May be good.

Further, it is not necessary to execute the corresponding specific effect (execution confirmation effect) after executing all the setting suggestion effects. As described above, if an ambiguous setting suggestion or a setting suggestion effect that makes it easier to select a low setting is produced, the subsequent specific effect will have the opposite effect (decrease in motivation for playing). In addition, in a game machine in which the setting suggestion effect is executed at a plurality of timings, preparing a specific effect for all of them leads to a control burden, so after selection, one or two of them are selected. It can be said that it is preferable to execute a specific effect for the setting suggestion effect of.

Further, the start timing (specific effect start condition) of the specific effect (execution confirmation effect) can be appropriately determined according to the game characteristics and the like. Typically, it is during the symbol variation display game, the menu screen, the demo screen, or the like described with reference to FIG. 82. The meaning of this "design variation display game after the next time" includes displaying in the next game of the game in which the setting suggestion effect appears (at the start of the fluctuation, at a predetermined timing during the fluctuation, at the end of the fluctuation, etc.). It is a concept including displaying after a plurality of games without displaying in the next game and not appearing in the next game in which the setting suggestion effect appears.

In addition, the period during which the specific effect (execution confirmation effect) can be confirmed (specific effect end condition) can be appropriately determined. Typically, for example, one or more periods (A) to (K) below can be adopted. (Α) Until the next or multiple jackpot wins (start or end of jackpot) (a specific jackpot may be counted), (Β) The number of times the symbol variation display game is executed reaches a predetermined number of times N (1 ≦ N). (Γ-1) From a specific timing until a predetermined time elapses (RTC manages the end timing), (Δ) Until a specific time arrives (RTC manages the end timing), (Ε) Menu screen Until the number of times of display reaches the predetermined number of times M (1 ≦ M), (Ζ) Until the number of times of display of the demo screen (demo movie) reaches the predetermined number of times X (1 ≦ X), (Η) Demo screen (demo movie) The number of (Ι) out balls (normal out number and / or total state out number) reaches the predetermined number (for example, 1000 shots) until a predetermined time (for example, 30 minutes to 1 hour) elapses after is displayed. (The display end timing is managed by the number of hit balls), (Κ) until the power of the game machine is turned off, (Λ) until the set value is changed (including replacement of the same setting), and so on. The same applies to the production examples of FIGS. 83 to 85 described later).

As for the specific effect (execution confirmation effect), not only the image display effect is used, but also the light effect (LED is made to emit light with a specific light emission pattern) and the sound effect (outputs a specific sound effect, normal BGM). Instead, one or a plurality of effect means may be used among the movable body accessory (operated in a specific motion pattern), such as changing to a specific BGM). For example, when using a light effect, a specific LED (which may be a dedicated LED) may emit blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow colors, etc., depending on the type of setting suggestion effect that appears. This is possible (the same applies to the production example of FIG. 83 described later).

It is also conceivable to use the mark displayed on the game board surface and / or the game machine frame as a specific effect. In this case, the effect when displaying in the same display mode, the effect when displaying in different display modes, and the like are as described above.

In addition, regarding the above-mentioned specific effect (execution confirmation effect), the player can determine what kind of effect the setting suggestion effect that appeared in the past is, what kind of content the set value information (suggestion information) is, and so on. It is preferable that the production mode is easy to understand. For example, when a character-based setting suggestion effect including "specific character 901 (Fujimaru-kun)" shown in FIG. (B) appears as a setting suggestion effect, the specific effect corresponding to this is, for example, the specification. It is preferable to display a reduced or iconized character (one that is easily recognized if it is Fujimaru) (see Figures (D) to (G), (I) (J) (K), etc.). .. Further, it can be said that it is preferable to make the character information related to the displayed setting suggestion effect appear as a specific effect in terms of the effect mode that is easy for the player to understand. For example, if the appearing setting suggestion effect suggests "setting 4 or more is confirmed", the character information of "setting 4 or more is confirmed!" Can be displayed as the corresponding specific effect (described later). The same applies to the specific production shown in FIG. 83).

Of course, it does not necessarily have to be an easy-to-understand production mode, and characters that have some relationship with Fujimaru-kun (for example, ideological relevance, design relevance, etc.) (for example, lover character Fujika-chan, nemesis character) and Fujimaru Items related to Mr. Fujimaru may be displayed, and other characters (for example, fighters and disks) and items that have nothing to do with Mr. Fujimaru may be displayed (for the specific effect shown in FIG. 83 described later). The same applies).

Further, the display mode may be set according to the type of the setting suggestion effect or the suggestion content thereof (for example, the display mode having different colors and / or shapes) (the same applies to the specific effect of FIG. 83 described later). For example, an item image (blue magatama) attached in blue when a confirmation effect of setting 2 or more appears, a yellow magatama when a confirmation effect of setting 3 or more appears, and a green magatama when a confirmation effect of setting 4 or more appears. If a magatama or a setting 6 final effect appears, it is a rainbow-colored magatama (the same applies to other setting suggestion effects (even number setting suggestion effect, odd number setting suggestion effect, low setting suggestion effect, high setting suggestion effect, etc.).

Further, the setting suggestion effect that appears during the symbol variation display may belong to the change suggestion non-notice effect or the change suggestion effect. (The same applies to the setting suggestion effect of FIG. 83, which will be described later).

(Production example 2: Fig. 83)
FIG. 83 shows a case where the setting suggestion effect appears during a specific advance notice effect (for example, during the reach effect) as another effect example in which the setting suggestion effect appears during the symbol variation display.

In the effect example of FIG. 83, after the symbol variation display is started (FIG. (A)), the reach effect is started at a predetermined timing during the variation display (FIG. (B)). In the reach production here, as shown in Fig. (C), the mobile turret 911 appears as an ally character and the disk 913 appears as an enemy character, and the battle is fought between the mobile turret 911 and the disk 913. It is a production of. When the reach production is started, the mission "Shoot down the disk!" Is displayed, and if the disk 913 can be shot down by the attack of the mobile battery 911, it will be "Mission success" and the jackpot symbol (matching symbols) will be displayed. It will be displayed to inform you that the result of this game is a big hit. However, if the disk 913 cannot be shot down, a "mission failure" occurs, a lost symbol is displayed, and it is notified that the result of this game is lost.

The branching of the effect after FIG. (C) indicates that this reach effect scenario has a plurality of types of scenarios. In this example, two scenarios are typically shown: an effect scenario in which the effect on the figure (D1) side is developed, and an effect scenario in which the effect on the figure (E1) side is developed. Which scenario is executed is determined by a predetermined production lottery based on the fluctuation pattern information and the set value information.

In the production scenario on the side of the above figure (D1), "fighter 917 (normal support character)" appears as a reinforcement on the ally character side during the battle, and the fighter 917 supports and attacks with the mobile battery 911. It is the production content that is performed. In the production scenario on the other side of the figure (E1), "Specific character 919 (special support character)" appears as a reinforcement on the ally character side, and the specific character 919 (hereinafter referred to as "Fujimaru-kun 919") supports it. In the form, it is a production content in which an attack is performed by the mobile battery 911.

Here, the degree of expectation of winning the jackpot differs depending on the characters appearing in the reinforcements. In this example, "fighter 917 (normal character) <Fujimaru-kun 919 (specific character)", but in this example, both are games. The result is "missing" (see Figure (D2) or Figure (E2)). The fighter 917 may be selected in all settings 1 to 6, but Fujimaru-kun 919 is selected only in settings 4 or higher, that is, it is a setting suggestion effect of "setting 4 or higher confirmed". Therefore, in the production scenario on the side of Fig. (E1), although the result of this game was "missing", it turned out to be "setting 4 or higher" when Fujimaru-kun 919 appeared.

In the example of FIG. 83, as shown in FIG. (E2), the four sides of the liquid crystal display device 36 are specific images in response to the appearance of the setting suggestion effect (Fujimaru-kun 919) of “setting 4 or more confirmed”. It is displayed as if it was bordered by. In this example, the rainbow-colored effect image 920 is displayed in a frame shape as a specific image, and the four sides are highlighted. The rainbow-colored effect image 920 works as a specific effect (execution confirmation effect) in the same manner as the specific character 901 described with reference to FIGS. 82 (D) (G) to (K).

FIG. (E3) shows an example in which the effect image 920 is continuously displayed even after the current symbol variation display game is completed (for example, during the symbol variation display game after the next time (not shown)). Here, the display of the "menu screen display ⇒ + button image" shown in FIGS. (D3) or (E3) is an effect corresponding to the menu displayable notification effect 905 of FIG. 82 (G). As the display end condition of the effect image 920, for example, one or a plurality of the above (A) to (Λ) described in FIG. 82 can be adopted.

Therefore, even if the player misses the appearance of Fujimaru-kun 919 for some reason, it can be noticed by the effect image 920, and even if he quits due to time constraints, etc. , Subsequent players (successors) can quickly recognize this situation (a situation where it is found that the setting is 4 or higher). The above-mentioned specific image (effect image 920) is just an example, and the specific image (specific effect) can be confirmed (recognized) by the fact that the setting suggestion effect has appeared. Can be determined as appropriate.

In addition, instead of (or in addition to) the effect image 920, "Monochrome Fujimaru-kun 919b" may be displayed. Further, in this case, for example, when "Color Fujimaru-kun 919a" is displayed, the setting 6 is confirmed, and when "Monochrome Fujimaru-kun 919b" is displayed, the setting 4 or more may be confirmed. In this way, when a mark (characters, figures, symbols, etc.) created based on the same mark (illustration image of Fujimaru-kun) is displayed on the display means, if the colors, sizes, fonts, etc. are different from each other. By setting it, it is possible to make the setting suggestion degree different.

(Production example 3: Fig. 84)
FIG. 84 shows, as another example of the effect, a case where the setting suggestion effect appears during the big hit game. Here, an example in which the above-mentioned "V probability variation type" is adopted will be typically described. FIGS. 84 (B1) and 84 (C1) exemplify the V-winning effect (blessing effect) that appears when a V-winning is performed during a big hit.

FIG. (A1) shows the production during the round during the big hit. Here, the specific area (V winning area) in the big winning opening is opened at the 6th round, and the game ball wins in the V winning area. Explain as a thing.

When a V prize is won, normally, "V display (V image 931) only" (normal V prize effect (effect without setting suggestion effect)) shown in FIG. (B1) is displayed. When it is satisfied (for example, when the appearance lottery of the setting suggestion effect is won), for example, as "high setting (setting 4 or more) final effect", "V display (V image 931) + specific character (disk 932)" ) ”A special V-winning effect (V-winning effect with setting suggestion (effect accompanied by setting suggestion effect)) is displayed. When this "V display + specific character" appears, as shown in Fig. (C2), even after the jackpot ends and the next game starts, the specific character related to the setting suggestion effect is displayed in the upper right corner of the LCD screen. (Disc 932) is displayed in a reduced form (disc 932a in the figure). The display of this specific character may be displayed only in the next game (that is, the first rotation after the end of the big hit), or may be displayed until the next big hit. Alternatively, time management such as 3 minutes may be performed, or the number of hit balls may be managed such that the total number of out-balls is 300. In addition, as the display end condition, for example, the above (A) to (A) described in FIG. One or more conditions of Λ) can be adopted.

In this example, a V-probability type gaming machine has been described as an example, but the model is not particularly limited as long as it is a gaming machine capable of displaying a setting suggestion effect during a big hit. For example, it may be a so-called "1 type 2 type mixed type" in which the accessory continuous operation device operates when passing through a specific area during a small hit (when a V prize is won), or a special figure 1 and a special figure. It may be a so-called "simultaneous fluctuation type" in which 2 and 2 can be variablely displayed in parallel. Further, it may be a game machine such as the above-mentioned "ST type", "fall lottery type" or "general probability variation type" already described. Further, the setting suggestion effect that appears during the big hit game may belong to the non-variable setting suggestion non-notice effect, or may belong to the non-variable setting suggestion advance notice effect.

(Connected type setting suggestion production)
It should be noted that, as in the specific effects described with reference to FIGS. 82 to 84 (specific character 901a in FIG. 82, effect image 920 in FIG. 83, disk 932a in FIG. 84, etc.), a predetermined game period, for example, a certain setting suggestion effect When performing a specific effect (execution confirmation effect) related to the appearance of the image or a setting suggestion effect (“setting suggestion effect + setting suggestion effect” or “setting suggestion effect + specific effect (execution confirmation effect)”) that spans multiple rotations. It is possible not only to lengthen the period in which the setting suggestion effect appears, but also to give the player a feeling of expectation that the setting suggestion effect will continue after this. For example, "the second setting suggestion effect is executed on the condition that the first setting suggestion effect is executed", such as "the other setting suggestion effect is executed". It is a production mode of "appearing", and the first setting suggestion effect is "main" and the second setting suggestion effect (specific effect (execution confirmation effect)) is "subordinate". May be adopted. When such a "linked setting suggestion effect" is to appear, for example, (I) a first lottery for determining whether or not to display the first setting suggestion effect is executed, and the first lottery is won. In that case, that is, when the first setting suggestion effect appears, the second lottery for determining whether or not to display the second setting suggestion effect is executed. Then, when the second lottery is won, the second setting suggestion effect can be displayed. In addition, for example, (II) as an effect scenario for setting suggestion, "do not appear the setting suggestion effect", "appear only the first setting suggestion effect", "first setting suggestion effect + second setting suggestion effect". "Appear" and "Do not show setting suggestion effect" are provided, and one of these can be determined by lottery.

Further, when the "linked setting suggestion effect" is to appear, the set value information suggested by the second setting suggestion effect is more useful than the set value information (suggestion information) suggested by the first setting suggestion effect. It is preferable to establish a prohibition rule regarding suggestive information so that it becomes information. This is because the first setting suggestion effect that appears in advance suggests, for example, "setting 4 or more confirmed", and the second setting suggestion effect that appears later suggests "setting 2 or more confirmed". This is because, if it is, useless setting value information will be provided to the player. Of course, it is not necessary to provide the above-mentioned prohibition rule. This is because the accuracy of the information as the setting estimation element can be increased as the number of appearances of the setting suggestion effect increases. For example, when the first setting suggestion effect suggests "even number setting" and the second setting suggestion effect also suggests "even number setting" (when the same level setting suggestion effect appears), the linked setting It is possible to obtain the information that "the possibility of even number setting has increased" by the appearance of the suggestion effect once. Further, even if the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect are at least partially different from each other, the set value information corresponding to the later second setting suggestion effect can be notified. Good.

When distinguishing between the setting suggestion effect (the effect determined by referring to the set value) and the effect that does not correspond to the setting suggestion effect (the effect determined without referring to the set value), "setting suggestion effect and non-setting suggestion" In addition to giving a specific name such as "directing", it can be divided by number such as "first directing and second directing (which can be the first setting suggestion directing)", or "special directing or normal directing (which is special directing)". However, it may be divided according to terms such as ". In addition, alphabets, symbols, hiragana, katakana, kanji, Roman numerals, etc. may be used, and any code may be used as long as it is a code for distinguishing each of them.

Further, as described above, there may be a plurality of types of setting suggestion effects (it does not mean that there are always a plurality of setting suggestion effects in one game machine, but there are a plurality of setting suggestion effects as options that can be mounted on the game machine. Therefore, when multiple setting suggestion effects are installed in one game machine, one of them is set as the "first setting suggestion effect", and a different setting suggestion effect is set as the "second setting suggestion effect". , "Third setting suggestion effect", "Fourth setting suggestion effect" (hereinafter, continued) may be individually referred to. For example, when there are three setting suggestion effects, one of them is ". It may be individually referred to as "first setting suggestion effect", and the others may be collectively referred to as "second setting suggestion effect". Further, any one of them may be individually referred to as "second setting suggestion effect", and the others may be collectively referred to as "first setting suggestion effect".

In addition, the setting suggestion effects having at least one common point among the setting suggestion effects are divided into categories, and each category is divided into "first setting suggestion effect", "second setting suggestion effect", and "third setting suggestion effect" ( Hereinafter, it may be continued). Examples of categories include (1) those classified according to the effect means (for example, display means, movable object, LED, speaker, etc.) used for setting suggestion, and (2) timing at which setting suggestion is performed (for example, symbol stop). Time / symbol variation display / jackpot, symbol variation display are further subdivided (for example, before reach, during reach, after reach, etc.), (3) specificity of setting suggestion (for example, selection) Those that have different rates but can appear in all settings / those that are selected only in setting 4 or higher / those that are selected only in setting 6 etc.), (4) Production time of setting suggestion effect (for example, less than 5 seconds) / 5 seconds or more and less than 15 seconds / 15 seconds or more, etc.).

Further, although the setting suggestion effect and the specific effect have been described in the above example in which "display" is performed in an easy-to-understand manner, the present invention is not necessarily limited to this. The setting suggestion effect using at least one of the sound effect, the light effect, the movable body effect, and the image display effect is as described above, and the specific effect is also the same as that of at least one of them. It may be the one using the production. Examples of alternatives to the icon display (for example, the icon display character 901a shown in FIG. 82 (I)) are specific sound by a dedicated or dual-purpose speaker, or specific light emission by a dedicated or dual-purpose lamp (such as an effect LED). You may do it. Then, in both the setting suggestion effect and the specific effect, each effect means (liquid crystal display device 36, speaker 46, decorative lamp (LED) 45, movable body accessory 80, 90, other display means, etc.) is used alone or in combination ( It may be executed at the same time).

[Other specific examples of setting suggestion effects]
<Specific example of setting suggestion effect 1: Form of suggesting setting by the color of light emitting means (LED): FIGS. 85 to 87>
In a specific example 1 of this setting suggestion effect, an LED (light emitting means) arranged so as to be visible to the player is made to emit light in a color display mode (setting suggestion color) for setting suggestion, thereby executing the setting suggestion effect. That is. The setting suggestion effect by LED as in this example is also referred to as "LED setting suggestion effect". Here, the LED is a full-color LED (single LED) in which LEDs of the three primary colors of red, green, and blue are packaged, or a planar light source (hereinafter, planar) composed of an aggregate of these LEDs and a diffuser. (Referred to as LED), and if necessary, the default (no suggestion) is white, purple (even suggestion), blue (odd suggestion), yellow (setting 2 or more (setting 1 negative)), green (4 or more). It is assumed that the light will be emitted in colors such as (confirmed), red (5, 6 confirmed), and rainbow (6 confirmed). The types of colors that these LEDs develop are the same as the blue, green, red, D pattern, and rainbow colors used in the pending change notice, and the predetermined image during the jackpot game (for example, the ending effect (end). As the background color of the display image (image notifying the end of the big hit) related to INT), which is common to blue, black, green, gold, and the rainbow, and a specific character appearing during the symbol change (for example, As a color attached to a character such as an alien or a UFO related to a specific advance notice, a color common to copper, silver, gold, and a rainbow can be used. In addition, which color suggests what kind of setting value can be appropriately determined.

The LED (LED used for setting suggestion) according to this example may be either an effect LED already provided in the game machine or a dedicated LED (setting suggestion dedicated LED) provided for setting suggestion, and any place. It is up to you whether to use the LED of the above or to install the LED for setting suggestion in any place, and the LED already placed somewhere for the production is emitted in the light emitting mode for the setting suggestion (preliminary production and It can also be used for both purposes). First, the LED according to this example will be described in detail.

For example, at least a part (at least a part of the surrounding LED) of the decorative lamp 45 (hereinafter, also referred to as “surrounding LED 45”) in which a plurality of decorative LEDs are provided in the circumferential direction on the periphery of the front frame of the glass door 6 is set and suggested. Can be used for. However, instead of using the decorative lamp 45 provided on the outside of the glass door 6, the LED provided on the inside of the glass door 6 can also be used. For example, it is provided at a certain place of an LED (LED provided on the game board) for the number sector (reference numeral 85a shown in FIG. 85: hereinafter referred to as “number display unit 85a”) of the clock face unit 81 or the center decoration body 48. Such as LED.

In FIG. 85, a planar LED 83b is arranged on the back walls of the upper starting port 34 and the lower starting port 35 below the center decorative body 48 of the game board 3, and a setting suggestion effect is performed according to the light emitting mode of the planar LED 83b. Is shown. This configuration shows a configuration formed at a position where it is easy to confirm the setting suggestion effect in a state where the player is playing normally. Further, FIG. 86 shows a configuration in which a setting suggestion effect is performed using the number sector unit provided in the number display unit 85a. In the mode of using the number display unit 85a, there are a mode in which only the number sector portion of a specific portion is used (FIG. 86 (a)) and a mode in which the lighting portion fluctuates (FIG. 86 (b)).

Specifically, the former configuration shown in FIG. 86 (a) is a "light emitting part fixed type" in which the light emitting part is fixed regardless of the setting suggestion content (setting suggestion color). On the other hand, the latter configuration shown in FIG. 86 (b) is a "light emitting point variation type" in which the number of light emitting points increases as the expectation of high setting is relatively high setting suggestion content (setting suggestion color). is there. In other words, it is a type in which the usage area of the setting suggestion effect changes according to the setting suggestion content (setting suggestion color). Regarding FIG. 86 (a) or (b), when a specific setting suggestion effect (for example, setting 6 confirmation suggestion) is performed, the entire number sector is colored in rainbow colors, or the clock hand 82 is set to a predetermined time (for example, for example). It may indicate (6 o'clock) or apply effects (eg, glow, light, shadow, flare, gradient, etc.).

Further, FIG. 87 shows a configuration example in which a setting suggestion effect is performed using the surrounding LED 45. FIG. 87 (a) shows a configuration in which a part of the surrounding LED 45 is used to perform a setting suggestion effect, and FIG. 87 (b) shows a configuration in which the entire (whole area) of the surrounding LED 45 is used to perform a setting suggestion effect. It is a thing. FIG. 87 (a) shows four configuration examples, but the two configuration examples (a-1) and (a-2) on the left side of the front are one or the number of surrounding LEDs 45 of the setting suggestion effect. In the two configuration examples (a-3) and (a-4) on the right side of the front, where the area used is small, the area used for the surrounding LED 45 of the setting suggestion effect is the upper half and the lower half area. The one with a large LED usage area is shown.

The configuration shown in FIG. 87 (a) can be the “light emitting location variation type” shown in FIG. 86 (b). If the setting suggestion effect is once executed by the LED and then the setting suggestion effect is continuously performed for a long period of time (see "1-2. Duration of the LED setting suggestion effect" described later), the figure. As shown in 87 (c), after the setting suggestion effect is given, a part of the surrounding LED 45 can be used as the area for the setting suggestion effect, and the remaining area can be used for the advance notice effect (c). Setting suggestion priority type). For example, in the case of the default without setting suggestion, the entire surrounding LED 45 is made to function as the LED for the advance notice effect until some setting suggestion is made and the color changes to a color other than the default. However, after some setting suggestion is made and the color changes to a color other than the default, at least a part of the surrounding LED 45 is made to function as the setting suggestion effect LED. If it is not used as a warning effect, it may be controlled to emit light in a default color (for example, white or off) (if the default is off, it is turned off).

In addition, in FIG. 86 and FIG. 87, at least a part of "Fujimaru-kun" corresponding to the model name logo 1090 (first mark) according to the light emission of the number sector unit provided in the number display unit 85a and the surrounding LED 45. (Part or all of the component 1081) may be made to emit light. For example, regarding "Fujimaru-kun" of model name 1080 related to the model name logo 1090, "Fujimaru" is turned on in the case of FIG. 87 (a-1), and "wisteria" is turned on in the case of FIG. 87 (a-2). And "Maru" to emit light, in the case of Fig. 87 (A-2) (A-3), the upper half or lower half of the character string of "Fujimaru-kun" is emitted, in the case of Fig. 87 (B) Is to turn on the entire "Fujimaru-kun". In this case, the characters of the model name logo 1090 (character string of "Fujimaru-kun") correspond to the emission color of the surrounding LED 45 (setting suggestion color: here, white, purple, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow, etc.). , Each character) may be emitted with the same setting suggestion color, or may be emitted with a color different from the emission color of the surrounding LED 45. In any case, at least a part of "Fujimaru-kun" of the model name logo 1090 can be configured to be capable of emitting light in a predetermined light emitting mode according to the lighting and blinking state of the surrounding LED 45.

Further, contrary to the "setting suggestion priority type" in FIG. 87 (a), when the surrounding LED 45 is not used for the warning effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed, but when the surrounding LED 45 is used for the notice effect, the setting suggestion effect is performed. It may be configured as a "setting suggestion non-priority type" in which the light effect of the notice effect is displayed with priority over the setting suggestion effect (see FIG. 87 (d)).

In addition, when waiting for customers (especially during the demo screen), it is configured as a "setting suggestion priority type" that prioritizes the setting suggestion effect over the light effect related to the demo screen, so that even during the standby screen, the surroundings On the other hand, the setting suggestion effect may be configured to be noticeable, or conversely, it may be a "setting suggestion non-priority type" that gives priority to the light effect related to the demo screen. In the former case, even when waiting for customers, the pachinko hall side can appeal that it has introduced a high setting at an event or the like, so that the operating rate can be improved. However, on the other hand, if the player is notified to the surroundings, there may be a problem that the players compete for the high setting table. Therefore, which type should be adopted may be appropriately determined.

As for the configuration in which the setting suggestion effect is performed using the LED, any of the above-mentioned "light emitting location fixed type", "light emitting location variation type", "setting suggestion priority type", and "setting suggestion non-priority type" is adopted. It is free. Further, a configuration combining these, specifically, a configuration of "light emitting location fixed type" and "setting suggestion priority type", a configuration of "light emitting location fixed type" and "setting suggestion non-priority type", and "light emitting location variation type". It is also free to adopt any of the configurations of "setting suggestion priority type", "light emitting part variation type" and "setting suggestion non-priority type".

(Setting suggestion effect using LED provided on the movable body accessory: Fig. 85)
Further, the setting suggestion effect may be performed by using the LED provided on the movable body accessory. For example, the back LED of the first movable body 91 (flower center A1 or corolla A2) can be used. In addition, for example, when performing a pseudo-ream, a character plate (movable body accessory) such as "NEXT" provided at an appropriate position of the game machine is moved to deterministically notify that the next pseudo-ream will occur. Although it can be adopted, in the case of such a configuration, a setting suggestion effect using the light emitting mode of the LED used for a part of the character plate of this "NEXT" or the character may be displayed. For example, in a configuration in which the logo plate 85 (usually arranged so as to be hidden behind the center ornament 48) shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 85 falls and moves when a pseudo-ream is generated, this logo is used. Part or all of the characters (not shown) of "NEXT" displayed on the plate 85 are made to emit light in the setting suggestion colors (white, purple, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow).

(LEDs dedicated to setting suggestion: LEDs 83a, 84a, 84b, 84c in FIG. 85)
As described above, if the LED of the decorative lamp 45 or the LED of the notice effect is also used for the setting suggestion effect, it becomes difficult to distinguish it from the normal decoration effect and the color display mode in the notice effect. It can be said that it is preferable to provide an LED to perform a setting suggestion effect. Therefore, when the LED for setting suggestion is provided, there are the following forms.

For example, as shown in FIG. 85, a planar LED 83a may be arranged around the effect button 13 (exhilarating button 70), and the planar LED 83a may be used as a setting suggestion dedicated LED. The form in which the LED outside the effect button 13 is used is that when the button LED 13b inside the effect button 13 is used, the player decides whether the notification during the operation valid period (button valid period) or the setting suggestion effect is used. This is to prevent this because it may be confused. In addition, FIG. 85 shows an example in which LEDs 84a, 84b, and 84c are provided as setting suggestion-only LEDs in the game board. Like the above-mentioned planar LED 83b, the LEDs dedicated to the setting suggestion effect are provided in a place visible to the player.

The LED 84a is provided on the upper left portion of the center decoration body 48 of the game board, and the LED 84b is provided on the lower part of the center of the lower edge of the liquid crystal display device, that is, on the front mounting plate 48a of the center decoration body 48, and these are the surfaces described above. Similar to the shape LED83b, this is an example in which the player is formed at a position where it is easy to confirm the setting suggestion effect while the player is playing normally. However, the LED 84c is provided so as to be adjacent to the various function display units in the non-gaming area in the upper right corner of the game board, and is formed at a position where the player hardly sees during a normal game. That is, in the case of the LED 84c, it is formed at a position where it is easy to distinguish whether or not it is an effect LED as compared with other LEDs 84a and 84b arranged in the game area 3a. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the player from being confused as to whether the player is a light effect by the advance notice effect or the LED setting suggestion effect. In particular, when the LED for setting suggestion is formed in the non-gaming area, it is easy for the player to confirm the content of the setting suggestion effect without being confused with the light effect by the advance notice effect.

If the LED used for the advance notice effect such as the decorative lamp 45 is also used for the setting suggestion effect, it will be difficult to distinguish it from the normal decoration effect and the color display mode in the advance notice effect. It is preferable to provide a setting suggestion effect.

(1-1. Specific example of LED setting suggestion effect)
Next, a configuration example in the case of suggesting the setting by the above LED will be described while paying particular attention to the display mode including the occurrence time (execution trigger) and its duration.

In the setting suggestion by LED (LED setting suggestion effect), for example, the LED is changed from the default white to one of the setting suggestion colors "purple, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow". The timing (execution trigger) for changing to the suggested color is roughly divided into "big hit game", "design variation display game", and "waiting for customers (during demo start waiting production or demo screen: FIG. 82 (G)). (See (J)) ”and so on.

First, a specific example of the execution trigger of the LED setting suggestion effect will be described. When the execution opportunity arrives, the LED setting suggestion effect may be executed without fail, the LED setting suggestion effect may be executed when a predetermined execution lottery is won, and there are a plurality of execution opportunities. In that case, it can be appropriately determined whether or not to perform the execution lottery according to the execution opportunity.

(Execution opportunity related to big hit game)
The execution trigger during the jackpot game is, for example, at the end of the jackpot, specifically, at a predetermined timing during the end INT (ending effect period), but at a predetermined timing from the start to the end of the jackpot game. , LED setting suggestion effect can be displayed. For example, during the start INT (opening effect period), during a specific round number of round games (specific round in-effect period), during a specific round number of R-to-R INT (inter-round INT effect period), and end INT (ending). The LED setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined timing of at least one of the effect periods).

Further, when the LED setting suggestion effect is performed during the big hit game, for example, the following conditions (a1) to (a4) may be added.
(A1) When you win a specific jackpot. For example, if the jackpot with the highest advantage (16R long opening probability variation in the case of this embodiment) or the jackpot with the lowest advantage (for example, 4R long opening time reduction) is won, the LED setting suggestion effect is executed during the jackpot game. Can be made to.
(A2) When the number of big hit winnings (a specific big hit may be counted) reaches a predetermined number of times, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed.
(A3) When the number of consecutive villas of big hits (a specific big hit in the consecutive villas may be counted) reaches a predetermined number of times, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed.
In addition, after executing the setting suggestion effect in this big hit, every time the number of big hit winnings reaches a predetermined number in the above (b1) (for example, the execution opportunity comes in a cycle of two times), in the above (c1), the big hit It is configured so that the execution opportunity arrives every time the number of consecutive villas reaches a predetermined number (for example, the execution opportunity arrives every two consecutive villa cycles (two consecutive villas, four times, six times ...)). Can be done.

(A4) Further, when a specific effect is executed during the big hit game, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed. For example, when a predetermined image during the jackpot game (for example, a display image related to the ending effect (end INT) (an image notifying the end of the jackpot)) is displayed (the predetermined image may function as a setting suggestion effect). Good), perform LED setting suggestion effect. The LED setting suggestion effect in this case can be said to belong to the above-mentioned "linked setting suggestion effect" in that the execution of the predetermined image (specific effect) is a condition (here, the display effect of the predetermined image is "Main", the setting suggestion effect by the LED of this example has a "subordinate" relationship). However, even when the predetermined image (specific effect) and the LED setting suggestion effect are executed simultaneously or in duplicate, if the LED setting suggestion effect does not require the execution of the predetermined image, the said The specific effect and the setting suggestion effect by the LED are the effects executed independently, and do not belong to the above-mentioned "linked setting suggestion effect".

(Execution opportunity related to the symbol variation display game)
Further, as the execution trigger related to the symbol variation display game, for example, the following (b1) to (b4) can be set.
(B1) After the power of the game machine is turned on, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed every time the number of times the symbol variation display game is executed (number of symbol variation) reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, 300 times).
(B2) When the number of symbol fluctuations from the current jackpot reaches a predetermined number, that is, when the number of hits until the next jackpot reaches a predetermined number, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed.
(B3) When a specific advance notice effect is executed during the symbol variation display game, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed. Specific notice effects include high-expectation notice effects such as SP reach and three pseudo-reams, but the specific notice effects are not particularly limited and can be appropriately determined. Further, when a specific look-ahead notice (for example, a look-ahead notice of a specific winning expectation or higher (red hold or higher)) occurs, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed.
(B4) In addition, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed at an appropriate timing related to the symbol variation display game shown in Specific Examples 2 to 3 described later.

(Execution opportunity related to waiting for customers)
Further, as the execution trigger related to the waiting for customers (during the production waiting for the start of the demo or during the demo screen), for example, the following (c1) to (c3) can be set.
(C1) Execute the LED setting suggestion effect at a predetermined timing during the demo start waiting effect (for example, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the demo start waiting effect, when the demo start waiting effect ends (demo screen starts), etc.). Can be done. In this case, the condition may be that the number of display times during the demo start waiting effect reaches a predetermined number of times (for example, a plurality of times). By configuring the LED setting suggestion effect to be executable when the operation hold ball runs out, even if the operation hold ball is interrupted and the game cannot be started in the middle, the player can give a chance to execute the setting suggestion effect. The feeling of frustration can be alleviated.
(C2) The LED setting suggestion effect can be executed at a predetermined timing (for example, when the demo screen starts, when a predetermined time elapses from the start of the demo screen, etc.) in the demo screen (demo movie (demo display)). In this case, it may be a condition that the number of times the demo screen is displayed reaches a predetermined number of times.

(Other execution opportunities)
Other execution triggers include, for example, the following (d1) to (d4).
(D1) The LED setting suggestion effect can be executed when a predetermined time elapses from the power-on of the game machine or every time a predetermined time elapses (a form in which the timing of the execution trigger is managed by the RTC or the soft counter). ).
(D2) When a predetermined time has elapsed from a specific timing (for example, at the start / end of the big hit game, at the start / end of the specific game state, etc.), the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed. The specific timing can be set as appropriate.
(D2) When a specific time (for example, 11:00 am, 3:00 pm, 7:00 pm, etc.) arrives, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed (the timing of the execution trigger is managed by the time information of the RTC). Form).
(D3) When the number of out balls (for example, the number of outs in the normal state or the number of outs in all states) reaches a predetermined number (for example, 1000 shots), or every time the predetermined number is reached, the LED setting suggestion effect is executed. (A form in which the execution opportunity is managed by the number of hit balls).

It should be noted that a plurality of execution triggers (a1) to (d3) described above may be combined. In particular, when a predetermined time has passed since the power of the game machine in (d1) was turned on, and the execution trigger arrives only once in the game of the day, it is combined with other execution triggers. , It is preferable that the execution trigger of the LED setting suggestion effect arrives a plurality of times.

(1-2. Duration of LED setting suggestion effect)
When the above timing (execution trigger) is reached, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed, but when the LED setting suggestion effect is executed, the setting suggestion is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. It can be carried out.

Specifically, when a certain execution opportunity arrives, the setting suggestion effect of emitting the LED with the setting suggestion color is started, and thereafter, the setting suggestion color of the LED this time is continued until a predetermined end condition is satisfied. Here, the "predetermined end condition" means, for example, "when the next execution trigger arrives and the LED setting suggestion effect is executed again", and "the predetermined number of rotations (design) after the execution of the LED setting suggestion effect this time". "Until the end of the number of fluctuations)", "When a specific notice effect is executed (when SP reach occurs, when a pseudo-ream appears 3 times, etc.)", "Demo start waiting effect", "Demo screen", etc. There are various forms such as a predetermined timing while waiting for a customer or "until the power is turned off", and the end condition can be a predetermined timing during a symbol variation display game, a big hit game, or waiting for a customer.

One of the feature points of this example is that it appears only for the production time (it ends in a relatively short time), for example, "appears only during the period when the jackpot end screen is displayed". Unlike the setting suggestion effect, this LED setting suggestion effect makes it possible to continue to appear over a plurality of game periods (long time). For example, it is possible to continuously appear over a plurality of game periods, or to continue to appear during a customer waiting waiting effect to one or a plurality of game periods, and further over a jackpot game period. Taking advantage of the fact that the LED setting suggestion effect is continuously executed for such a long time, the configuration having the following features can be obtained.

(A-1) Configuration Example 1
For example, as an example of the end condition of the LED setting suggestion effect this time being "when the next execution trigger arrives and the LED setting suggestion effect is executed again", the case where the LED setting suggestion effect is executed at the end of the big hit is represented. For example, in one case, "LED" blue "lights up at the end of the first big hit →" green "lights up at the end of the second big hit →" rainbow "lights up at the end of the third big hit → After that, the display mode of the light emission pattern is "no change". In other words, the case where information less useful than the previous setting suggestion information is not notified, in other words, the case of "no downfall (if it changes, only promotion)". And. For example, white (no suggestion: default), purple (even suggestion), blue (odd suggestion), yellow (setting 2 or more confirmed), green (4 or more confirmed), red (setting 5 or more confirmed), rainbow (setting 6 confirmed) ), "White →" Purple⇔Blue (There is no advantageous or disadvantageous relationship between even setting suggestion and odd setting suggestion, and it is treated as the same suggestion color (suggestion content). The same applies hereinafter) ". The color change is unidirectional, such as “→ yellow → green → red → rainbow color”. For example, as shown in FIGS. 86 (a) and 86 (b), there is no decline in the setting suggestion color. If the "rainbow color" of setting 6 is confirmed in this LED setting suggestion effect, the setting suggestion effect is that the "rainbow color" is maintained thereafter and does not become red or green. In this way, by setting "only promotion when changing", it is possible to make a setting suggestion effect that makes it easy to understand and confirm the event. In addition, by setting the changing color to "promotion color only", the more the number of games is increased and the LED setting suggestion effect is executed (the more the setting suggestion promotion chance is encountered), that is, the more the hit, the more the set value. The accuracy of guessing about will increase.

However, not only in the case of promotion, the rainbow color of setting 6 was displayed at the first big hit, but in the second time it can be changed to a color suggesting a low rank such as blue, "There is a downfall (when it changes) Can be demoted) ”case can also exist. In this case, even if "rainbow color" appears this time, it may be a different setting suggestion color next time, but even if a useful setting suggestion color appears, only the player who made the setting suggestion appear is secret. It is possible to create a game period that can be confirmed in. For this reason, the chance that another player who plays later can confirm the setting suggestion information without any effort is reduced, and between the player who has struggled to make the setting suggestion color appear and the other player. It is possible to prevent the feeling of inequality. Regarding the configuration in which the setting suggestion effect is performed using the LED, it is appropriately determined whether the above-mentioned "no downfall (if it changes, only promotion)" or "with downfall (if it changes, there is demotion)". be able to.

A preferable configuration example in the above-mentioned "Specific example 1 of setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion is given by LED color)" is as follows. The corresponding elements in the present configuration example are shown in parentheses, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

(1) A launching means (launching operation handle 15, launching device 32) capable of launching a game ball toward the gaming area, and
A lottery means (S410 during the special symbol change start processing in FIG. 12) capable of executing a big hit lottery (lottery related to a big hit) and
A symbol display means (liquid crystal display device 36 or special symbol display devices 38a, 38b) capable of variable display of symbols, and
Light display device 45a including a lamp or LED (decorative lamp 45), liquid crystal display device 36, vibration exciter, wind pressure device, sound generator 46a, movable body accessories 80, 90, etc. )When,
An effect control means (effect control unit 24) capable of executing and controlling an effect by the effect means,
When the result of the big hit lottery is a predetermined result, a special game execution means (special electric accessory management process S095 in FIG. 9) for executing a special game (big hit game) advantageous to the player is provided.
In a gaming machine in which the probability that the result of the jackpot lottery will be a predetermined result differs depending on the set value that can be changed in a plurality of stages.
The effect control means
A setting suggestion effect execution means (effect control unit 24, FIG. 32, FIGS. 82 to 86, etc.) capable of executing the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value is provided.
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
The effect mode of the effect means is changed from the first effect mode (for example, first setting suggestion color: for example, white) to the second effect mode (second setting suggestion color: for example, purple, blue, yellow, green, red). At least the first setting suggestion effect and the second setting suggestion effect of changing the effect mode of the effect means from the second effect mode to the third effect mode (second setting suggestion color: for example, rainbow color) can be executed. And
When the effect mode of the effect means is changed to the second effect mode by the first setting suggestion effect, the second effect mode is continued until the second setting suggestion effect is executed (next setting suggestion effect). Continue the second setting suggestion color until the color change occurs due to),
A game machine characterized by that.

In the configuration example according to (1), in the above "(A-1) Configuration example 1" in which the setting is suggested by the color of the LED, the next setting suggestion effect is executed after the execution of the first setting suggestion effect. It corresponds to the configuration example in which the first setting suggestion effect is continued until it is done. In terms of expression, it is simply a "directing mode of the directing means", but in the case of an LED, the "LED directing mode of the directing means" is strongly conscious. If the "lottery means" is described in detail, it is "a lottery means that can execute a lottery related to a big hit when the starting means detects a game ball", and if the "design display means" is described in detail. , "A symbol display means capable of performing a variable display operation of a symbol and notifying a lottery result by the lottery means according to a stop display mode of the symbol". Further, the "special game execution means" is configured to be able to execute a winning game according to the winning type (winning type: for example, the winning type shown in FIG. 4).

(2) The effect control means is
A setting suggestion effect execution lottery means for drawing the execution of the setting suggestion effect suggesting the set value based on at least the current set value under a predetermined condition is provided.
The second effect mode includes a plurality of second effect modes (for example, purple, blue, yellow, green, red, rainbow) related to the set value.
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
When the lottery by the setting suggestion effect execution lottery means is won, any one of the plurality of second effect modes is executed.
The gaming machine according to (1) above.

In the configuration example related to this (2), there are emission colors (setting suggestion colors) such as purple, blue, yellow, green, red, and rainbow related to the set value as the setting suggestion effect, and a predetermined setting suggestion effect execution lottery is performed. This is a configuration example in which when a winner is won, the color changes to a color related to the current set value. In the lottery here, for example, the current setting value and a plurality of setting suggestion colors are associated with each other, and the selection rate of which setting suggestion color should be used may be determined.

(3) The production means
Includes a plurality of production means including a first production means and a second production means different from the first production means.
The setting suggestion effect execution means is
Among the plurality of effect means, at least the first effect means and the second effect means are configured to be able to execute the first setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting using an LED and a liquid crystal display device 36). Perform suggestion production),
The second effect mode by the first effect means (LED) is continued until the second setting suggestion effect is executed, and before the second setting suggestion effect is executed, the second effect means (liquid crystal). The second effect mode by the display device 36) is terminated.
The gaming machine according to the above (1) or (2).

<Specific example of setting suggestion effect 2: Form in which the completed form of the accessory differs depending on the set value: FIGS. 88 to 89>
Next, a specific example 2 of the setting suggestion effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 to 89. In this example, the setting suggestion is made by changing (differentiating) the completed form (completed form as an effect) of the accessory according to the set value.

The execution trigger of the setting suggestion effect (trigger for completion of the character) according to this example is a predetermined timing during the specific advance notice effect, and for example, the occurrence or possibility of a specific event having a high degree of interest to the player. It is time to give notice, suggestion, and final notice. In particular,
(A) When a high expectation notice occurs (for example, when SP reach develops, when pseudo-ream occurs 3 times),
(B) When a premium production (correct production) occurs while the design is changing
(C) At the time of winning notification during symbol change (at the time of the above promotion effect or revival effect),
(D) At the time of notification of winning a high-advantageous jackpot such as a probability variation jackpot,
(E) There is a time of holding continuous notification during a big hit game (when executing a holding continuous notification effect).

The "holding continuous notification effect" in (e) above means that if there is an operating holding ball related to a big hit winning (a winning holding ball in the hold) among the operation holding balls that existed at least at the start of the big hit game, during the hit effect, for example , Opening effect, production during a specific number of rounds, interval effect between rounds after a specific number of rounds, or at a predetermined timing during the ending effect, there is a winning pending ball in the existing pending ball. This is an effect mode for notifying that, and in the case of the present embodiment, which operation-holding ball is the holding-holding winning ball (for example, the third operation-holding ball is the holding-holding winning holding ball). Is also notified. By receiving the above-mentioned hold addition command (look-ahead determination information), it is possible to determine whether or not there is a hold ball in hold, or which action hold ball is a hold ball in hold. It can be grasped on the production control unit 24 side. In addition, the operation hold ball that is the target of the hold continuous notification effect is not only the operation hold ball that existed before the start of the big hit game, but also the operation that occurred after the start of the big hit game and before the execution timing of the hold continuous notification effect. It can target reserved balls.

Regarding the completed form of the character, there are cases where it is a "form on notice production" related to "winning expectation" such as big hit winning notification, winning notification, hold continuous notification, etc., and "setting value" related "set value". There are cases where it is a form of setting suggestion production, but here, the completed form as the production differs (changes) according to the set value, and the winning expectation and notice content due to the difference in the completed form The same "form of setting suggestion production" is dealt with. For example, if there are a triangle (△) and a star (☆) in the completed form of the character, both are notifications with 100% expectation of winning (the expectation of winning and the content of the notice are the same), but the setting suggestion. In that respect, a triangle (△) is a “low setting suggestion”, and a star shape (☆) is a “high setting suggestion” (the completed form differs depending on the set value). Is. Further, the completed form here means a form taken when the movable body accessory moves to a predetermined final position or in the process of moving.

(Δ1) As the accessory handled in this example, for example, a plurality of movable object accessories such as the first movable body 91 and the second movable body 92 of the flower-shaped accessory (second movable body accessory) 90. There is a "combined character" (for example, a flower type 90) that works together to form one design (flower type) by the decorations given to them. Using such a combined accessory, the degree of perfection of the design formed by a plurality of movable accessories at the combined position is different depending on the (δ1-1) set value, or (δ1-2) set value. Different unique crafts (significant unique crafts) are formed according to the above. An example is shown in FIG. 88.

(Setting suggestion effect using a united accessory: Fig. 88)
FIG. 88 shows a united accessory that appears so as to cover the front surface of the liquid crystal. The illustrated movable body accessory includes a combined decorative body 501 (see FIG. (E)) capable of forming a unique craft by the first decorative frame 501a and the second decorative frame 501b, and a substantially central portion of the liquid crystal screen (combined). A gimmick-type united accessory (the design shown in the accessory 511, 513, 515, 517 is formed depending on the method of coalescence) that can be moved (final position) to the substantially central part of the formwork 501). , These depend on the settings. It is a united accessory that can be configured with different overall shapes. Note that the accessory 511, 513, 515, and 517 show a state in which a plurality of movable bodies are united, although the process of combining the accessory is omitted.

FIG. 88 (A) shows the default completed form A (default form). In this default form, only the first decorative frame 501a appears, and the decorative body 501 has an unfinished shape. Further, as a gimmick-type combined accessory, a circular accessory 511 appears.
FIG. 88B shows the completed form B that appears when setting 2 or more is suggested to be confirmed. In this completed form B, the decorative body 501 is the same as the above-mentioned default form, but the diagonal cross-shaped accessory 513 appears as a gimmick-type combined accessory. The reason why the decorative body 501 is an unfinished form is that the completed form B shown in FIG. (B) is more likely to be selected in the low setting range (settings 1 to 3) than in the high setting range (settings 4 to 6). That is, the appearance of the completed form B (a form with a low degree of perfection) has the meaning of "the expectation of a high setting is low".

When a high setting range is suggested, the first decorative frame 501a and the second decorative frame 501b are vertically combined to form the decorative body 501, and the completed form including the decorative body 501 is formed.
FIG. 88 (C) shows the completed form C that appears when it is suggested that the setting 4 or more, which is the high setting range, is confirmed as the completed form including the decorative body 501. In the completed form C, a cross-shaped accessory 515 appears as a gimmick-type combined accessory.

Then, when suggesting that the setting 6 of the highest setting is confirmed, as shown in FIG. 88 (D), the decorative body 501 and the gimmick-based combined accessory are star-shaped polygons (the illustrated example is a star-shaped octagon). An accessory 517 with a square shape) has appeared, and a flashy production with a strong liveliness has come to appear. Further, at least in the gimmick-type combined type accessories 511 to 517, a planar LED is formed inside the gimmick-type united accessory, and when the movable body is produced, the central portion is beautifully rainbow-colored. In addition, when the completed forms A to C appear, the gimmick-based combined type accessory 511, 513, 517 may be configured to be light-colored with a color corresponding to the content of the setting suggestion. For example, the completed form A (default form) in FIG. (A) is white, the completed form B is yellow, the completed form C is red, and the completed form D is rainbow-colored. ..

(Setting suggestion effect using a separate accessory: Fig. 89)
It should be noted that the plurality of movable body accessories are not combined to form a significant unique craft, but each of the plurality of movable body accessories is formed as a significant unique craft. Depending on how the object appears, the setting suggestion may be made by using a "separate type accessory" that reminds us of different ideas. For example, as shown in FIG. 89, in the default case, only one humanoid gimmick character 521 (Fujimaru-kun character) appears, and when setting 3 or more is suggested, FIG. As shown, humanoid gimmick characters 521 and 523 (Fujimaru-kun and Fujika-chan) appear, and at this stage, it reminds us of friendships. Then, when suggesting that the setting is 5 or more, as shown in Fig. (C), from the humanoid gimmick characters 521 and 523 (Fujimaru-kun and Fujika-chan) and the "heart-shaped character + logo plate". It is a group of movable body characters that make a story-like effect that the background character 525 appears and reminds us of a relationship like a couple (lover). Further, it does not have to be the movable body accessory group that produces a story-like effect as described above, and the movable body accessory group that has some relation to each other, for example, the accessory A is a tank and the accessory B is a battle. You may simply adopt a group of movable characters that belong to the same category (weapon), such as a machine or character C that imitates a warship, that is, a "weapon-like character".

Further, there are the following (δ2) to (δ5) forms in which the completed form (final form) of the accessory is changed according to the set value.

(Δ2) "The number of operating accessories or the combination of accessories differs depending on the set value."
In this embodiment, the number of accessories or the combination of accessories that reach the final position is different depending on the set value (the number of accessories or the combination of accessories that form the completed form is different). That is, a plurality of types of bonuses are prepared in advance, and among the plurality of types of bonuses, how many movable bonuses have reached the final position, or a combination of the plurality of types of bonuses. The combination of these makes a difference in the completed form of the accessory depending on whether the accessory is completed when it reaches the final position. This includes, for example, the following forms (A) and (B). Here, three types of accessories A to C are prepared and described as a combined type accessory in which the decorations applied to each form a significant unique craft, and the accessories A to C are the above-mentioned separate type accessories. It may be. Unless otherwise specified in the present specification, the combined type accessory and the separated type accessory will be referred to as "combined type accessory" without particular distinction.

(A: The number of operating accessories differs depending on the set value)
For example, it is a form that suggests that the set value is relatively high as the number of operating accessories is relatively large. Specifically, "Character A only" or "Character B only" (default: no setting suggestion), "Character A + character B" (setting 2 or more confirmed), "Character A + character B + character" C ”(setting 4 or more confirmed) and the like. For example, it corresponds to the configuration example of FIG. 89 described above.

(B: The combination of accessories (one or more combinations) differs depending on the set value)
For example, by default, "only the character A" moves (one significant design is incomplete), and there is no suggestion for setting. Then, depending on the number of movable accessories that have reached the final position, or the combination thereof, for example, "role B only" = even number setting suggestion, "role C only" = odd number setting suggestion, "role A + role""ObjectB" = setting 2 or more confirmed, "Character A + character C" = setting 4 or more confirmed, "Character B + character C" = setting 5 or more confirmed, "Character A + character B + character C" = setting 6 Confirm, etc. In this case, when "character A + character B + character C" (one significant design is completed), "setting 6 is confirmed" is notified.

(Δ3) "The movement of the accessory differs depending on the set value"
In this embodiment, the movement of the accessory moving to the final position is changed according to the set value. That is, if the default movement of the accessory is, for example, a "falling motion", it is added with other motions, such as vibration or reciprocating motion. Specifically, in the case of the default, the movement of the accessory is "only falling", and there is no setting suggestion due to this, but when vibration or reciprocating motion is added, some setting suggestion is made. For example, "fall + reciprocating motion small" (even setting suggestion), "fall + reciprocating motion in progress" (odd setting suggestion), "fall + reciprocating motion large" (setting 2 or more confirmed), "fall + vibration" (setting 4) (Confirmed above), "Drop + vibration + small reciprocating motion" (setting 5 or more confirmed), "fall + vibration + large reciprocating motion" (setting 6 confirmed), etc. Further, as for "vibration", the anti-player stimulus source means may be used instead of the vibration of the movable body accessory itself provided on the game board 3. For example, vibration by a vibration device provided on the launch operation handle 15 (giving vibration to the operating hand) or wind pressure by a wind pressure device provided on the launch operation handle 15 or a game machine at an appropriate position (giving a player wind pressure). ) May be.

In the case of the above-mentioned "combined accessory", it can be configured as follows. For example, the higher the set value, the longer it takes for one or all of the movable body accessories to prepare for the movement from the original position A to the first position B (the start position to wait to start the movement). Configure to. As a result, the arrival at the first position B (start position) is delayed, and the time when the second position C (final position) is reached is different, so that the "setting" related to the set value is made. It can be a form of suggestive production. In the case of a united accessory, at least one of the movable accessories can be set to a different motion according to the set value, and the setting can be suggested by guiding the completed form with the different motion patterns. ..

(Δ4) "The movement ratio of the accessory is different"
In this embodiment, the ratio (operation ratio) at which the accessory operates (operates) differs depending on the set value. Specifically, when the accessory A operates at a certain timing, conventionally, the accessory A operates or does not operate according to the winning expectation, but in the case of this embodiment, it depends on the set value. By making the operation ratio (operation probability) different, the setting is suggested. Specifically, with respect to the operation probability of the accessory A operating, the higher the set value, the higher or lower the operation probability can be. For example, in the former case, "5% for setting 1, 8% for setting 2, 10% for setting 3, 12% for setting 4, 15% for setting 5, 18% for setting 6", and in the latter case On the contrary, "setting 1 is 18%, setting 2 is 15%, setting 3 is 12%, setting 4 is 10%, setting 5 is 8%, and setting 6 is 5%". Further, as a modification, when the above-mentioned "combined accessory" is used, the ratio of forming the completed form can be made different according to the set value. For example, the higher the set value, the higher or lower the probability of completion.

(Δ5) "The effect that accompanies the character is different."
In this embodiment, assuming that the movement of the accessory is, for example, a "falling motion", the effect of estimating the set value (effect effect) is accompanied by the falling motion. This form can be configured as follows, depending on the type of effect effect.

For example, in the case of effect production by light production, "fall + white" (no suggestion: default), "fall + purple" (even number setting suggestion), "fall + blue" (odd number setting suggestion), "fall + yellow" "(Setting 2 or more confirmed)," Fall + Green "(Setting 4 or more confirmed)," Fall + Red "(Setting 5 or more confirmed)," Fall + Rainbow color "(Setting 6 confirmed), etc. For the light effect, an LED provided on the accessory may be used, or an effect LED such as a decorative lamp 45 may be used.

In the case of effect production by sound production, "fall + no sound effect" (no suggestion: default), "fall + first sound effect" (even setting suggestion), "fall + second sound effect" (odd) Setting suggestion), "fall + 3rd sound effect" (setting 2 or more confirmed), "fall + 4th sound effect" (setting 4 or more confirmed), "fall + 5th sound effect" (setting 5 or more confirmed), " "Fall + 6th sound effect" (setting 6 confirmed), etc. The first to sixth sound effects are different sound effects, but the effect time width may be the same or different, and can be appropriately determined. In addition, at least the sixth sound effect with the setting 6 confirmed is a flashy sound effect such as a relatively longer production time width or a relatively louder volume than other sound effects in the sense of a blessing effect. Is preferable.

Further, an effect effect by displaying an image (for example, a character or item image) may be adopted. For example, "fall + no background" (no suggestion: default), "fall + tank A" (even number setting suggestion), "fall + tank B" (odd number setting suggestion), "fall + tank C" (setting 2 or more confirmed) ), "Fall + tank D" (setting 4 or more confirmed), "fall + tank E" (setting 5 or more confirmed), "fall + tank F" (setting 6 confirmed), etc.

In this form (δ5), the operation of the accessory itself is the same regardless of the set value, but it can function as a setting suggestion effect by accompanying a different effect mode (effect effect) according to the set value. it can. This effect effect can also be applied to the above-mentioned (δ1) to (δ4). For example, in the case of the embodiment of "(A) of (δ2)" above, "character A + character B + character C" has been described as suggesting "setting 4 or more is confirmed", but the effect effect of this example is produced. When is applied, "Character A + Character B + Character C + Green" is "Set 4 or more confirmed", "Character A + Character B + Character C + Red" is "Setting 5 or more confirmed", "Character" As for "A + accessory B + accessory C + rainbow color", a plurality of types of setting suggestion contents can be determined by attaching an effect effect even if the number of operating accessories is the same, as in "setting 6 confirmed". Therefore, it is possible to increase the variation of the setting suggestion content.

<Specific example of setting suggestion effect 3: Form of setting suggestion effect through operation of operating means: FIG. 90>
Specific example 3 of the setting suggestion effect is a form in which the setting suggestion effect is executed through the operation of the operation means such as the effect button 13 and the direction key 75.

For example, with reference to FIG. 90, here, first, during a predetermined advance notice effect (here, during SP reach), a state in which a button operation accepting button operation period (button operation instruction is in progress) has been entered (during button operation instruction). FIG. 90 (A). In order to notify that the button validity period has been entered, the button LED 13b is switched from, for example, white to a yellow lighting color as a pre-operation effect, and the button notice effect (operation instruction effect) is started on the liquid crystal display device 36, and "press! 155, a timer image 156 indicating the remaining time of the button operation valid period, and a button image 157 imitating the effect button 13 are displayed.

Then, when the effect button 13 is operated during the button validity period, the setting suggestion effect shown in FIGS. (B) and (C) appears as a post-operation effect. As an example, FIG. (B) is a setting suggestion effect suggesting "setting 4 or more confirmed" by the appearance of a disk image suggesting "setting 4 or more confirmed" and a message of "first type close encounter". , FIG. (C) shows a setting suggestion effect suggesting "setting 5 or more confirmed" by the appearance of an alien image and a message of "third type close encounter". The setting suggestion effect may be irrelevant to the content of the advance notice effect, or may be related to the content of the advance notice effect (see, for example, FIG. 83). Further, in FIG. (D) or (E), the surrounding LED 45 is used after the setting suggestion effect (FIGS. (B) or (C)) is being executed or executed (including after the symbol variation is completed) during the symbol variation. The state in which the LED setting suggestion effect appears in the color related to the setting suggestion effect (setting suggestion content) executed during the symbol variation is illustrated.

In this example, the setting suggestion effect is performed through the operation of the operating means, but there are various triggers for the execution. As described above, the input of the operation means is valid for the input during the predetermined operation valid reception period (button valid period). Therefore, the target of this example is a configuration that enables the setting suggestion effect to be executed when the button operation is performed during the button validity period. The button validity period (the period during which the execution of the setting suggestion effect is permitted based on the operation of the operation means) includes the following periods.

(Ζ1) The period of waiting for customers. Specifically, the valid period for switching to the menu screen (game setting screen). When the menu screen (for example, FIG. 82 (H)) is displayed, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed. In this case, the LED setting suggestion effect may be enabled to be executed when the player switches to the menu screen, or the LED setting suggestion effect may be enabled to be executed when the menu item is selected. Good.

(Ζ2) A predetermined period during the symbol change (during the symbol change display game). Specifically, a predetermined period during a specific advance notice effect (for example, a notice effect including a player participation type effect). For example, the production example shown in FIG. 90 corresponds to the above.

(Ζ3) A predetermined period during a specific symbol variation display game. The specific symbol variation display game is, for example, a game having a predetermined number of rotations from the time the power is turned on, a game within a predetermined number of rotations, a game having a predetermined number of rotations after the end of a big hit game (after the end of a specific big hit game), and the like. is there.

(Ζ4) A predetermined period during the jackpot game. For example, a predetermined period during at least one of the opening effect, the effect during a specific number of rounds, the inter-round interval effect after a specific number of rounds, and the ending effect. The big hit game of (ζ 4) may be only a big hit game by a specific big hit, or may be a big hit game when the number of consecutive villas reaches a predetermined number of times. Further, it may be the first big hit big hit game after the power is turned on, or may be the big hit game when the big hit won after the power is turned on is the predetermined number of big hits.

(Ζ5) The period during which all or part of the first setting suggestion effect is being executed. Specifically, when the operating means is operated during all or a part of the period during which the first setting suggestion effect is being executed, the second setting suggestion effect can be configured to be executable. For example, when the button valid period arrives during the execution of the end interval screen change (FIGS. 52 and 53) and the effect button 13 is pressed during the effective period, the LED setting suggestion effect can be executed.

In any of the embodiments described in (ζ 6) Specific Examples 1 to 3 above, the setting suggestion effect can be executed based on a predetermined operation of the operating means.

Further, in (ζ 7), in the above-mentioned “Specific example 2 of the setting suggestion effect”, when the player operates the operating means within the button valid period or when the button valid period has elapsed, this is used as an execution trigger to serve as an accessory. Can be operated. However, in this case, if the button validity period elapses without the player operating the operating means, that is, if the player does not participate in the button operation effect related to the accessory operation, the accessory operates, but The operation mode can be configured to perform "default operation" without setting suggestion. That is, when the player does not actively operate the button, the operation of the accessory is controlled so that only the operation mode for notifying "no setting suggestion" is performed in the sense of a penalty. By creating a situation in which "setting suggestion information cannot be obtained without button operation" in this way, the player will actively perform button operation. As a result, the button operation effect (player participation type effect) can be given great significance, and the variation of the effect can be enriched.

As described above, regarding the execution of all the setting suggestion effects described in the present specification, the setting suggestion effect may be executed (appeared) whenever the execution opportunity arrives, or when the execution opportunity arrives. In addition, it may be decided whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect based on a predetermined execution condition. As the latter form, for example, (I) a predetermined execution lottery is performed, and based on the lottery result, it is determined whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect, and (II) the operation result of one or a plurality of operating means. A form in which it is determined whether or not to display the setting suggestion effect based on (III), a form in which the setting suggestion effect is executed when at least the first execution condition and the second execution condition are satisfied. This is a form having a plurality of conditions as conditions for executing the target setting suggestion effect. For example, when a predetermined execution lottery is won and the operation means is operated, or when a specific effect is executed and the predetermined execution lottery or the operation means is operated.

It may be a configuration in which one or a plurality of all the embodiments described above (including all the configurations and modifications described in each embodiment) are combined, and the contents described in each embodiment are limited to individual embodiments. It is not limited.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, a ball game machine that uses a game ball as a game medium has been described, but the present invention is not limited to the ball game machine. For example, it may be an arrange ball machine or a sparrow ball game machine, and as other game media, a game machine using a game medal (rotary body type game machine) or a game medium using an electromagnetic recording means is used. It may be a managed game machine to be managed.

The present invention is useful for gaming machines.

1 game machine,
2 Front frame (door),
3, 3a game board, game area,
19 Game ball payout device,
20 Main control unit (main control board),
24 Production control unit (Production control board, LCD control board)
28 Launch control board,
29 Payout control board,
34, 34a Upper start port, upper start port sensor 35, 35a Lower start port, lower start port sensor,
37, 37a Normal symbol start port, normal symbol start port sensor,
38a, 38b special symbol display device,
39a Ordinary symbol display device,
50, 52a Large winning opening, large winning opening sensor 41, 41c Ordinary variable winning device, ordinary electric accessory solenoid,
52, 52c Special variable winning device, large winning opening solenoid,
36, 45, 46 Liquid crystal display, decorative lamp, speaker,
49 out mouth,
94 setting key switch,
95 setting change switch,
96 Setting change completion switch,
97 Setting indicator,
98 RAM clear switch,
201, 202, 203 Main control CPU, main control ROM, main control RAM,
241 and 242, 243 effect control CPU, effect control ROM, effect control RAM.

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine equipped with a display means and a warning display is arranged at a position visible to the player
The warning display is arranged above and / or below the display means, and the display means is displayed with substantially the same content as the warning display while the symbol is stopped.
A game machine characterized by that. In a gaming machine equipped with a display means and having a function name display arranged at a position visible to the player.
The function name display is arranged in the game area, and the display means is displayed to indicate that the function pointed to by the function name is effective.
A game machine characterized by that.